User Guide
EasyPower
Power System Analysis Software

  Revision 9.5
Copyright © 2013 EasyPower LLC 
 EasyPower User's Manual

Version 9.5

EasyPower is a proprietary computer program of EasyPower LLC. Copyright © 1991-2012 EasyPowerLLC.

All rights reserved. This manual is provided to EasyPower LLC customers exclusively for their use in the
operation of EasyPower, as discussed in the EasyPower License Agreement. Any other use or copying without
written permission from EasyPower is strictly prohibited. The information in this document is subject to
change without notice. EasyPower LLC assumes no liability for omissions or any errors that may appear in this
document.

EasyPower, Integrated Action Graphics (IAG), Integrated Performance Views (IPV), SmartGrid,
SmartDuty, and SmartBreaker are trademarks of EasyPower LLC. AutoCAD is a trademark of Autodesk
Inc. Microsoft Windows and SmartDrive are trademarks of Microsoft Inc., PKZIP is a trademark of PKWARE,
Inc. Other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Contents Contents  1

Contents
Introduction to EasyPower .................................................................................. 22
What is EasyPower? ..............................................................................................22
EasyPower Documentation Purpose ......................................................................22
Documentation Conventions ..................................................................................23
System Requirements.............................................................................................25
The following are the recommended hardware requirements for EasyPower: ......25
Installing EasyPower .............................................................................................26
Beginning An EasyPower Session .........................................................................26
The First Time You Run EasyPower ...............................................................26
Using Authorization Codes ....................................................................................27
PC Optimization for EasyPower ...........................................................................27
Memory ............................................................................................................27
Large, High-resolution Monitors .....................................................................28
High-speed Graphics Support ..........................................................................28
Uninstalling EasyPower .........................................................................................29
Checking for Updates ............................................................................................29

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line ........................................................ 32

Overview ................................................................................................................32
The Session Window .............................................................................................32
Ribbons ............................................................................................................33
Quick Access Toolbar ......................................................................................33
Menu bar ..........................................................................................................34
Toolbar .............................................................................................................34
Right Mouse Context Menus ...........................................................................35
Status Bar .........................................................................................................35
Equipment Palette ............................................................................................36
EasyPower Focus ...................................................................................................36
Database Edit Focus.........................................................................................37
Analysis Focus .................................................................................................37
Choosing a Focus .............................................................................................37
Preparing to Start Your One-line ...........................................................................38
Turn Grid Display On/Off ...............................................................................38
Place Buses on the One-line ..................................................................................40
Adjust Bus Sizes and Locations.......................................................................41
Enter Bus kV Data ...........................................................................................41
Add Equipment to the One-line .............................................................................43
Add Transformer ..............................................................................................43
Contents Contents  2

Add Cables .......................................................................................................44

Add Motors ......................................................................................................45
Add Utility .......................................................................................................46
Add Feeder Breakers........................................................................................47
Add Tie Breaker...............................................................................................48
Save Your Work ....................................................................................................50
Enter Equipment Data ............................................................................................50
Enter Motor Data .............................................................................................51
Enter Cable Data ..............................................................................................52
Enter Transformer Data ...................................................................................53
Enter Utility Data .............................................................................................54
Turn Grid Display Off .....................................................................................54
View Entire One-line .......................................................................................55
Run a Power Flow Analysis...................................................................................56
Enter Power Flow Focus ..................................................................................56
Solve Base Case Power Flow ..........................................................................57
Adjust One-line For Results Readability .........................................................57
Interpret Results ...............................................................................................58
Run a Short Circuit Analysis .................................................................................59
Enter Short Circuit Focus and Fault a Bus.......................................................59
Adjust One-line For Results Readability .........................................................60
Interpret Results ...............................................................................................61
Look at a Remote Voltage and Current ...........................................................61
Look at Interrupting Results ............................................................................62
What Now? ............................................................................................................64
Open the "BIGGER" Sample One-line ............................................................64
Try Your Own Power System ..........................................................................64

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams ............................................................... 66

Starting a New One-line.........................................................................................66
Save and Save As .............................................................................................66
Open and Close ................................................................................................66
Equipment Palette Button Meanings ...............................................................67
Standard Toolbar..............................................................................................67
Database Edit Status Bar..................................................................................67
Setting File Properties ............................................................................................68
Password Access ..............................................................................................69
Zooming In and Out ...............................................................................................70
Using Mouse Spin wheel to Zoom In and Out ................................................70
Zoom Slider bar ...............................................................................................70
Customizing the Toolbar.................................................................................70
Choosing a Specific Zoom Factor....................................................................71
Seeing Your Entire One-line ............................................................................71
Zooming In on a Portion of the System ...........................................................72
Zooming In and Out 1.5x .................................................................................72
Getting Back to the Previous Zoom Scale .......................................................72
Contents Contents  3

Moving Around On the One-line ...........................................................................72

Alternative Methods of Scrolling.....................................................................73
The Snap Grid ........................................................................................................73
SmartGrid™ .....................................................................................................74
Turning the Grid On and Off ...........................................................................75
Turning Snap to Grid On/Off ...........................................................................75
Adding Items to the One-line .................................................................................75
Buses ................................................................................................................76
Setting Bus kV .................................................................................................76
Changing Bus Area and Zone ..........................................................................77
Equipment With One Connection ....................................................................77
Equipment With Two or Three Connections ...................................................78
Lines Between Buses .......................................................................................79
Feeder Breakers and Switches .........................................................................80
Bus Tie Breakers and Switches........................................................................81
Connecting an MCC to an MCC......................................................................82
Auto-Insertion of Buses ...................................................................................83
Notes ................................................................................................................84
Setting Default Equipment Values.........................................................................84
Item Selection ........................................................................................................85
Selecting With the Mouse ................................................................................85
Deselecting an Item from a Group ...................................................................85
Selecting By an Item's ID Name ......................................................................85
Query................................................................................................................86
Getting an Item's Database Dialog Box ...........................................................88
Copying an Item's Database Information.........................................................88
Entering Item Data Using Tables ...........................................................................89
Database Dialog Toolbar .................................................................................89
Moving Around in the Table............................................................................89
Resetting Changes Made to the Current Item ..................................................90
Deleting an Item Using Its Database Dialog Box ............................................90
Adding a New Item ..........................................................................................90
Duplicating the Current Item ...........................................................................90
Copying Another Item's Database Information ...............................................91
Connecting an Item Using Its Database Dialog Box .......................................91
Activating/Deactivating an Item Using Its Database Dialog Box ...................91
Notes (Free Text) on One-line ...............................................................................91
Adding a Note ..................................................................................................91
Editing the Contents of a Note .........................................................................92
Dragging and Resizing a Note .........................................................................92
Deleting a Note ................................................................................................93
Adding a Note With a Leader ..........................................................................93
Changing Note Properties ................................................................................93
Selecting Many Notes At Once........................................................................94
Text Size and TrueType ...................................................................................94
Note Properties.......................................................................................................96
Contents Contents  4

Text Settings ....................................................................................................96

Leader Properties .............................................................................................97
Note Fonts ........................................................................................................99
Inserting Box in One-line...............................................................................100
Inserting Picture in One-line ..........................................................................101
Moving and Copying Groups of Items ................................................................101
Group Move ...................................................................................................101
Group Copy....................................................................................................102
Copying Subsystems ......................................................................................102
Grouping One-line Items .....................................................................................103
Ways to Change ID Names ..................................................................................104
Change ID Name............................................................................................104
Database Report (Browser) ..................................................................................106
Viewing the Browser/Report .........................................................................106
Browser Search Engine ..................................................................................107
Copying the Spreadsheet Data .......................................................................108
Modifying the Database using the Browser ...................................................109
Database Report Configurations ....................................................................109
Other Functions with Database Reports ........................................................111
Global Motor and Load Editing ...........................................................................111
Global Scaling Factor Changing ....................................................................113
Steps to Global Changing ..............................................................................113
Schedules .............................................................................................................114
Merge Data with Excel File ...........................................................................115
Printing Schedules .........................................................................................116
Showing SC kA and Arc Flash Hazard in Panel Schedules ..........................117
Export Schedules ...........................................................................................118
Schedule Templates .......................................................................................118
Drawings ..............................................................................................................129
Creating a New Drawing ...............................................................................130
Editing Drawing .............................................................................................130
EasyControl Commands ................................................................................131
Drawing Properties ........................................................................................132
Drawing Defaults ...........................................................................................135
Drawing Title Block Template ............................................................................137
Prerequisites ...................................................................................................137
Title Block File Format ..................................................................................138
Coordinates ....................................................................................................139
Hex Colors .....................................................................................................146
Variables that can be used in the <Label> sub-tag of a <Text> tag. .............146
Sample Title Block Features and Instructions ...............................................147
Named Views .......................................................................................................148
EasyControl Commands ................................................................................149
Inserting LV Switchgear ......................................................................................150
Elevation View.....................................................................................................151
MCC Elevation ..............................................................................................151
Contents Contents  5

Switchgear Elevation .....................................................................................153

Panelboard Elevation .....................................................................................155
Printing Elevations .........................................................................................157

Chapter 3 Analysis Overview .......................................................................... 160

Preparing for Analysis .........................................................................................160
Full Connectivity ...........................................................................................160
Required Database Fields ..............................................................................160
Recalculating Per-unit Data ...........................................................................160
Editing Allowed During Analysis........................................................................160
Editing the One-line Appearance ...................................................................160
Opening and Closing Breakers or Switches...................................................161
Editing Item Data ...........................................................................................162
Viewing Item Database Data ...............................................................................163
Controlling the Analysis ......................................................................................164
The "Analysis Options Control" Dialog Box.................................................164
Excluding Items From Analysis.....................................................................164
Starting the Analysis ............................................................................................164
Analysis Results ...................................................................................................165
Results on the One-line ..................................................................................165
One-line Unit Settings....................................................................................165
Text Results ...................................................................................................165
Window Manipulation ...................................................................................166
Clearing Results From Text and One-line Windows .....................................167
Saving Text Reports as htm files ...................................................................167
Exporting Text Report to Word/Excel ...........................................................167

Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI .............................. 170

Overview ..............................................................................................................170
Setting Short Circuit Method ...............................................................................170
Short Circuit Ribbon ......................................................................................171
Short Circuit Status Bar .................................................................................172
Faulting a Bus ................................................................................................172
Viewing Remote Voltages and Currents........................................................173
Changing the ANSI Standard Time Interval ..................................................175
SmartDuty™ ........................................................................................................175
Voltage Sensitivity Studies ..................................................................................177
Line End Fault......................................................................................................177
Line End Fault Procedure ..............................................................................177
Short Circuit Options ...........................................................................................178
Short Circuit Control......................................................................................178
Short Circuit One-line Output........................................................................180
Short Circuit Text Output ..............................................................................183
Arc-Flash Hazards Analysis ................................................................................187
Calculation and Theory ........................................................................................187
ANSI Standard Short Circuit Calculations ....................................................187
Contents Contents  6

Methodology ..................................................................................................188
Proper Application of ANSI Standards..........................................................189
DC Short Circuit ..................................................................................................190
Thyristor Short Circuit Modeling Limitations ...............................................190
DC Bus Fault..................................................................................................190
AC Output Bus Fault .....................................................................................191

Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis....................................................................... 194

Overview ..............................................................................................................194
Power Flow Commands .................................................................................195
Power Flow Status Bar...................................................................................195
Solving A Power Flow ...................................................................................196
Changing Equipment Parameters ...................................................................196
Impact Motor Starting ..........................................................................................197
Example of Impact Motor Starting ................................................................198
Motor Starting with Starting Capacitors ........................................................199
Swing Sources......................................................................................................200
Power Flow Options ............................................................................................201
Power Flow Control .......................................................................................201
Power Flow One-line Output ...............................................................................204
Power Flow Text Output......................................................................................206
Temporary Dialog Boxes .....................................................................................207
Temporary Generator Data ............................................................................208
Temporary Utility Data ..................................................................................209
Temporary Filter Data....................................................................................210
Temporary Two-Winding Transformer Data.................................................210
Temporary Three-Winding Transformer Data...............................................211
Temporary Motor Control Center Data .........................................................212
Temporary Panel Schedule Data ....................................................................214
Temporary Motor Data ..................................................................................215
Temporary Load Data ....................................................................................216
Temporary Capacitor Data .............................................................................217
Temporary Shunt Data ...................................................................................218
Considerations for Multiple Generators on a Bus................................................218
Watt & Var Sharing .......................................................................................219
Generator Switching ......................................................................................219
Considerations for Opening and Closing Breakers..............................................219
Troubleshooting Power Flows That Fail to Solve ...............................................220
Calculation and Theory ........................................................................................221
Impact Motor Starting ....................................................................................222

Chapter 6 Scenario Manager ......................................................................... 224

Overview ..............................................................................................................224
Scenario Manager Commands .......................................................................224
Scenario Manager Functionality ..........................................................................225
Scenario Interface (example) .........................................................................226
Contents Contents  7

Opening a New Scenario .....................................................................................226

Opening an Existing Scenario........................................................................227
Storing Scenarios ...........................................................................................229
Deleting Scenarios .........................................................................................229
File Save versus Store Scenario ...........................................................................230
Analysis Changes in Scenarios ............................................................................231
Scenario Colors ..............................................................................................231
Scenario Comparison Report ...............................................................................232
Creating Scenario Comparison Report ..........................................................233
Working with the Scenario Comparison Report ............................................234
Adding Results Group....................................................................................240
Adding Scenario Group .................................................................................243

Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library ............................................................. 246

Creating New .......................................................................................................246
New Manufacturer and Type .........................................................................246
New Style .......................................................................................................247
Field Edit Dialog Box ....................................................................................248
New Library ...................................................................................................248
Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data ...........................................................250
Time-Current Points.......................................................................................250
Time-current Points of Multi-Segment TCC .................................................253
TCC Based on Formulas ................................................................................254
Adjustable Range for Settings .......................................................................255
Trip Devices .........................................................................................................256
Relays.............................................................................................................256
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) ........................................................257
Solid State Trips.............................................................................................258
Non-Solid State Trips ....................................................................................258
High Voltage Fuses ........................................................................................259
Low Voltage Fuses ........................................................................................260
Motor Overload Relays ..................................................................................261
Customizing .........................................................................................................261
Selecting.........................................................................................................262
Cut, Copy, and Paste ......................................................................................263
Inserting Rows and Columns .........................................................................265
Moving Rows and Columns...........................................................................265
Undo and Redo ..............................................................................................266

Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting ...................................................................... 268

Properties .............................................................................................................268
Page Setup......................................................................................................269
Print Preview..................................................................................................270
Printing to a File.............................................................................................271
Printing to Acrobat Distiller...........................................................................271
Printing a One-Line..............................................................................................272
Contents Contents  8

Title Block ...........................................................................................................273

Configuring Title Block .................................................................................274
One-line Title Block Template Format ................................................................276
Title Block File Format ..................................................................................276
Settings...........................................................................................................277
Rectangles ......................................................................................................278
Lines...............................................................................................................278
Text ................................................................................................................279
Image..............................................................................................................281
Printing Text Reports ...........................................................................................282
Free-format Reports .......................................................................................283
Printing MCCs and Panel Schedules ...................................................................283
Printing Arc Flash Hazard Labels ........................................................................284

Chapter 9 Working With EasyPower Files ...................................................... 286

Overview ..............................................................................................................286
Database Files ......................................................................................................286
Compressing Database Files ................................................................................286
Temporary Files ...................................................................................................287
Temporary Files .............................................................................................287

Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower ............................................................... 290

Options .................................................................................................................290
General ...........................................................................................................290
Clipboard........................................................................................................295
Text Visibility ................................................................................................297
Colors .............................................................................................................298
Changing Grid Parameters .............................................................................302
Text Fonts, Styles, and Sizes .........................................................................303
Setting System Info ........................................................................................304
Equipment ......................................................................................................306
File Locations.................................................................................................307
Viewing Toolbars.................................................................................................308
Customizing Toolbars ..........................................................................................309
Toolbar Options .............................................................................................311
Report Options .....................................................................................................311
Subsystems ...........................................................................................................313
Creating New Subsystem Template ...............................................................313
Setting File Properties of Subsystem Templates ...........................................314
Inserting Subsystem .......................................................................................314
Customizing Subsystems Toolbar..................................................................317

Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs ....................................... 321

Overview ..............................................................................................................321
Sending to a Word Processor ...............................................................................321
Using ALT-Print Screen ................................................................................321
Contents Contents  9

Copying EasyPower Graphics to Other Applications ....................................322

Copying Text Reports to Other Applications ................................................323
Databases .............................................................................................................323
Exporting Database Text Files .......................................................................324
Sending to a CAD System ...................................................................................324
How To Write a DXF File .............................................................................324
Using AutoCAD® to Read the File ...............................................................325
Layer Names ..................................................................................................325
SCADA Importing and Exporting .......................................................................326
File Structure ..................................................................................................326
Sample File ....................................................................................................330
Saving an ASCII File .....................................................................................330
Reading an ASCII File ...................................................................................331

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference ....................................................... 333

Overview ..............................................................................................................333
Comments tab in Equipment Data .................................................................333
AFD Data .............................................................................................................334
Specifications .................................................................................................334
Notes on AFD ................................................................................................335
ATS Data .............................................................................................................341
Specifications .................................................................................................342
Stability ..........................................................................................................343
Arc Flash Hazard ...........................................................................................344
Battery Data .........................................................................................................344
Specifications .................................................................................................344
Bus Data ...............................................................................................................345
Specifications .................................................................................................346
Switchgear/Panelboard/Switchboard .............................................................348
Arc Flash Hazard ...........................................................................................350
Busway Data ........................................................................................................354
Connection Information .................................................................................354
Busway Specifications ...................................................................................355
Impedances ....................................................................................................355
Harmonics ......................................................................................................356
Cable Data............................................................................................................356
Connection Information .................................................................................357
Cable Specifications 1....................................................................................357
Cable Specifications 2....................................................................................361
Ground Wire ..................................................................................................364
Neutral Wire...................................................................................................366
Harmonics ......................................................................................................366
DC Cables ............................................................................................................366
DC Resistance Specification ..........................................................................366
Capacitor Data .....................................................................................................367
Connection Information .................................................................................367
Contents Contents  10

Capacitor Specifications ................................................................................368

Harmonics ......................................................................................................368
Current Limiting Reactor Data ............................................................................369
Connection Information .................................................................................369
C. L. Reactor Specifications ..........................................................................370
Harmonics ......................................................................................................370
Current Transformer Data ....................................................................................371
Connection Information .................................................................................371
Specifications .................................................................................................372
Filter Data ............................................................................................................373
Connection Information .................................................................................374
Specifications .................................................................................................374
Harmonics ......................................................................................................374
Fused Switch Data ...............................................................................................377
Connection Information .................................................................................377
Specifications .................................................................................................378
Short Circuit ...................................................................................................380
Switch ............................................................................................................381
Stability ..........................................................................................................382
Mtr O/L (Motor Overload)............................................................................383
Harmonics ......................................................................................................384
DC Fused Switch ...........................................................................................385
Generator Data .....................................................................................................385
Connection Information .................................................................................386
Generator Specifications ................................................................................386
DC Generator Specifications .........................................................................388
Power Flow ....................................................................................................389
DC Generator Power Flow.............................................................................390
Generator Impedance .....................................................................................391
Generator TCC ...............................................................................................392
Harmonics ......................................................................................................394
Stability 1 .......................................................................................................395
Generator Model: ...........................................................................................395
Exciter Model: ...............................................................................................396
Governor Model:............................................................................................396
Stability 2 .......................................................................................................397
High Voltage Breaker Data ..................................................................................398
Connection Information .................................................................................398
High Voltage Breaker Specifications.............................................................399
Short Circuit ...................................................................................................400
Harmonics ......................................................................................................401
Inverter Data ........................................................................................................401
Specifications .................................................................................................402
Power Flow ....................................................................................................403
Notes on Inverter Model ................................................................................405
Load Data .............................................................................................................409
Contents Contents  11

Connection Information .................................................................................409

Specifications .................................................................................................409
DC Load Specifications .................................................................................411
Harmonics ......................................................................................................411
Low Voltage Breaker Data ..................................................................................414
Connection Information .................................................................................414
Low Voltage Breaker Specifications .............................................................415
Short Circuit ...................................................................................................418
Phase Trip ......................................................................................................419
Gnd Trip .........................................................................................................424
ZSI..................................................................................................................426
Fuse ................................................................................................................427
Motor Overload (Mtr O/L).............................................................................428
Harmonics ......................................................................................................429
DC LV Breaker ..............................................................................................430
Meter Data ...........................................................................................................431
Connection Information .................................................................................431
Load Equipment .............................................................................................432
Association.....................................................................................................432
Motor Data ...........................................................................................................433
Connection Information .................................................................................433
Model .............................................................................................................433
Motor Specifications ......................................................................................434
Motor kVA Calculations ................................................................................435
DC Motor Specifications ...............................................................................436
Short Circuit ...................................................................................................437
TCC ................................................................................................................439
Power Flow ....................................................................................................441
DC Motor Power Flow...................................................................................445
Harmonics ......................................................................................................446
Stability ..........................................................................................................446
Motor Control Center Data ..................................................................................451
Connection Information .................................................................................451
Specifications .................................................................................................451
Incoming ........................................................................................................453
Description .....................................................................................................454
Summary ........................................................................................................458
Power Flow ....................................................................................................461
Short Circuit ...................................................................................................463
Harmonics ......................................................................................................464
Arc Flash Hazard ...........................................................................................465
Panel Schedule Data ............................................................................................466
Connection Information .................................................................................466
Specifications .................................................................................................466
Incoming ........................................................................................................467
Description .....................................................................................................468
Contents Contents  12

Summary ........................................................................................................471
Power Flow ....................................................................................................473
Harmonics ......................................................................................................474
Arc Flash Hazard ...........................................................................................475
Photovoltaic Data .................................................................................................475
Specifications .................................................................................................475
Notes on Data Specification...........................................................................476
Notes on Power Flow Modeling ....................................................................479
Short Circuit Modeling ..................................................................................481
Rectifier Data .......................................................................................................482
Connection Information .................................................................................482
Specifications .................................................................................................483
Power Flow ....................................................................................................483
Modeling Notes..............................................................................................484
Power Flow Modeling....................................................................................487
Relay Data............................................................................................................489
Connection Information .................................................................................489
Specifications .................................................................................................489
Settings...........................................................................................................492
Shunt Reactor Data ..............................................................................................497
Connection Information .................................................................................497
Shunt Specifications.......................................................................................497
Harmonics ......................................................................................................498
Switch Data ..........................................................................................................498
Connection Information .................................................................................498
Switch Specifications .....................................................................................499
Short Circuit ...................................................................................................500
Harmonics ......................................................................................................500
Three-Winding Transformer Data .......................................................................501
Connection Information .................................................................................501
Transformer Specifications ............................................................................502
Winding Information .....................................................................................502
Impedance ......................................................................................................503
Load Tap Changer (LTC) ..............................................................................505
TCC ................................................................................................................506
Harmonics ......................................................................................................508
Transmission Line Data .......................................................................................508
Connection Information .................................................................................509
Transmission Line Specifications ..................................................................509
Impedances ....................................................................................................510
Harmonics ......................................................................................................510
Two-Winding Transformer Data .........................................................................511
Connection Information .................................................................................511
Transformer Specifications ............................................................................512
Winding Information .....................................................................................512
Impedance ......................................................................................................513
Contents Contents  13

Load Tap Changer (LTC) Data ......................................................................515

TCC Data .......................................................................................................516
Harmonics ......................................................................................................517
UPS Data ..............................................................................................................518
Specifications .................................................................................................518
Power Flow ....................................................................................................519
Utility Data...........................................................................................................520
Connection Information .................................................................................521
Utility Specifications .....................................................................................521
DC Utility Specifications ...............................................................................522
Power Flow ....................................................................................................523
DC Utility Power Flow ..................................................................................524
Harmonics ......................................................................................................525
Stability ..........................................................................................................527
Zigzag Transformer Data .....................................................................................528
Connection Information .................................................................................528
Specifications .................................................................................................529
Harmonics ......................................................................................................529

Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum ........................................................... 532

Overview ..............................................................................................................532
Harmonics Ribbon ...............................................................................................532
Harmonics Toolbar ..............................................................................................532
Harmonics Status Bar ..........................................................................................533
Harmonic Load Data ............................................................................................533
Analysis Results ...................................................................................................534
Frequency Scan ..............................................................................................535
Plotting Results ..............................................................................................537
Current Flow ..................................................................................................540
Summation .....................................................................................................541
Harmonics Options ..............................................................................................545
Harmonics Control .........................................................................................545
Harmonics One-line Output ...........................................................................546
Harmonics Text Output..................................................................................548
Plot Output .....................................................................................................549
DC Effects in Harmonics .....................................................................................551

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector............................................... 554

Overview ..............................................................................................................554
Coordination Focus ........................................................................................554
Coordination Ribbon ......................................................................................554
TCC Ribbon ...................................................................................................554
TCC Status Bar ..............................................................................................555
Short Circuit Analysis in Coordination Focus .....................................................555
Coordination Options ...........................................................................................556
General ...........................................................................................................557
Contents Contents  14

TCC Curve Styles ..........................................................................................558

Auto Coordination .........................................................................................559
Short Circuit Options ...........................................................................................559
TCC Options ........................................................................................................560
Short Circuit Control......................................................................................560
TCC One-line .................................................................................................562
Arc Flash Hazard Analysis in Coordination Focus........................................562
Insert SC Tick Mark.......................................................................................562
Formatting SC Tick Marks ............................................................................563
Arcing Current Tick Mark .............................................................................564
LV Breaker Series Coordination Tick Mark ..................................................564
Plotting a TCC Curve from a One-Line ...............................................................565
Plotting Motor Starting Curve on TCC................................................................567
Plotting Individual Motor Curve....................................................................567
Plotting Grouped Motor Curve ......................................................................569
Plotting Items in MCC and Panels .......................................................................571
Editing TCC Curves .............................................................................................572
Dragging TCC Curves ...................................................................................572
Dragging Pickup and FLA Tick Marks .........................................................575
Curve Insertion...............................................................................................576
Add Item Existing in One-line .......................................................................576
Deleting Curves .............................................................................................577
Deleting Devices from One-line of TCC Plot................................................577
Inserting Shifted Curves ................................................................................577
Shifting Curves by Modifying .......................................................................578
Show Original Curve .....................................................................................579
Changing Overlapping Curve Position ..........................................................579
Insert Difference Calculator .................................................................................580
Temporary Data Dialog Boxes ............................................................................581
Temporary Data Dialog Boxes and TCC Plots ..............................................582
TCC Clipping .................................................................................................583
Saving Temporary Data .................................................................................584
Save and Store......................................................................................................584
Open and Delete TCC ..........................................................................................585
Formatting Appearance........................................................................................586
Title Block .....................................................................................................586
Insert a One-Line Diagram ............................................................................587
Zoom and Pan ................................................................................................588
Inserting Notes ...............................................................................................588
Format Plot Area ............................................................................................589
Scale ...............................................................................................................591
Default............................................................................................................594
Copy to Metafile ..................................................................................................594
Reports .................................................................................................................594
TCC Coordination Report ..............................................................................594
Print ......................................................................................................................597
Contents Contents  15

Zone Selective Interlock (ZSI).............................................................................598

TCC Plots for ZSI Breakers ...........................................................................600
Maintenance Mode Trip.......................................................................................601
Global TCC Changes versus TCC Dependent Changes ......................................601
Global Changes ..............................................................................................602
TCC Dependant Changes ...............................................................................602
Global and TCC Dependent Issues ................................................................602

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis........................................................................ 606

Calculating Arc Flash Hazards / Currents ...........................................................606
Fault Interface ................................................................................................607
Unbalanced Fault Types ................................................................................608
Arc Fault Currents..........................................................................................608
Arc Flash Hazard Options ....................................................................................608
Advanced Arc Flash Options .........................................................................612
Specifying Arc Flash Hazard Data for Equipment ..............................................614
Specifying Equipment Type ..........................................................................615
Specifying Arcing Time .................................................................................616
Arc Flash Report ..................................................................................................617
Spreadsheet Column Headings ......................................................................619
Opening Arc Flash Hazard Report in Excel® ...............................................621
Arc Flash Hazard Labels......................................................................................622
Getting Started Printing Arc Flash Labels .....................................................622
Why use EasyPower label printing and design? ............................................623
How to Print Arc Flash Labels.......................................................................623
Label Print Preview Window .........................................................................625
Print Labels Toolbar ......................................................................................627
How to Print Landscape Oriented Labels ......................................................628
How to Print to Custom Label Stock .............................................................631
Customizing Label Designs ...........................................................................633
How to Create a Custom Label Template ......................................................634
Label Variables ..............................................................................................635
Label Designer Window ................................................................................638
Example of Changing Text on a Label Template ..........................................645
How to Insert a Variable from the Arc Flash Hazard Report ........................645
How to Control when Text is Visible ............................................................647
Example of Displaying Different Text based off a Condition .......................649
Scenario Comparison Report ...............................................................................652
Creating Scenario Comparison Report ..........................................................652
Default Data in Library ........................................................................................654
Arc Flash Hazard ...........................................................................................654
User Clearing Times ......................................................................................655
Defining PPE Levels ............................................................................................656
Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits .......................................................657
Creating Work Permits ..................................................................................658
Work Task Dialog ..........................................................................................659
Contents Contents  16

Work Permit Files ..........................................................................................660

Editing Work Permits ....................................................................................660
Linking Work Permits to EasyPower One-lines ............................................661
Library............................................................................................................661
Troubleshooting with Arc Flash Hazard Results .................................................663
Determination of System Grounding ...................................................................665
Maintenance Mode Trip.......................................................................................666

Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference .......................................................... 668

Setting Short Circuit Method ...............................................................................668
Short Circuit Focus ..............................................................................................669
Short Circuit Status Bar .................................................................................670
Faulting a Bus ................................................................................................670
Changing the IEC Standard Time Interval.....................................................671
Displaying Fault Currents By Current Type ..................................................672
SmartDuty™ ........................................................................................................673
Short Circuit Control............................................................................................675
Short Circuit One-line Output..............................................................................676
Short Circuit Text Output ....................................................................................678

Chapter 17 Auto-Design .................................................................................. 682

Introduction ..........................................................................................................682
Items that can be sized ...................................................................................682
Types of Circuits ............................................................................................682
Performing Auto Design ......................................................................................685
Pre-Requisites for Auto Design .....................................................................685
Sizing Equipment on One-line .......................................................................686
Sizing Individual Circuits in MCC and Panel Data .......................................686
Sizing MCC and Panel ...................................................................................687
Lock Auto-Sizing ...........................................................................................688
Auto-Design Options ...........................................................................................688
General ...........................................................................................................689
Lines...............................................................................................................690
Protective Device ...........................................................................................692
Voltage Drops ................................................................................................693
Bus .................................................................................................................694
Design Library .....................................................................................................695
Motors ............................................................................................................696
Feeders ...........................................................................................................697
Protective Equipment .....................................................................................698
Bus Equipment ...............................................................................................699
Transformers ..................................................................................................699
Editing Design Library ..................................................................................700
Series Coordination of Breakers ..........................................................................705
Pre-requisites for Series Coordination ...........................................................706
Performing Series Coordination ....................................................................706
Contents Contents  17

Adding Coordination Data to Breaker Library ..............................................707

Customizing the Design Template for Series Coordination ..........................708

Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination ........................................................................ 710

Introduction ..........................................................................................................710
Phase Coordination vs. Ground Coordination ...............................................710
Protective devices that can be Auto Coordinated ................................................710
Relays.............................................................................................................710
SSTs and Molded Case Circuit Breakers .......................................................711
Fuses ..............................................................................................................711
Auto Coordination Process ..................................................................................712
Tips on Auto Coordination: ...........................................................................713
Lock Auto Coordination ................................................................................713
Auto Coordination Options ..................................................................................714
General ...........................................................................................................715
Transformer....................................................................................................718
Line ................................................................................................................719
Load ...............................................................................................................721
Capacitor ........................................................................................................722
Motor..............................................................................................................723
Fuse ................................................................................................................724
Relay ..............................................................................................................725
Relay Minimum Time Gaps...........................................................................726

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability .......................................................................... 732

Introduction ..........................................................................................................732
Dynamic Stability Focus ................................................................................732
Dynamic Stability Ribbon..............................................................................733
Steps to Running Dynamic Stability Simulations ................................................734
Entering Dynamic Stability Data .........................................................................735
Stability Data Parameters .....................................................................................735
Generator Models...........................................................................................736
Excitation System Models .............................................................................738
Governor Models ...........................................................................................744
PSS Models ....................................................................................................746
Motor Models.................................................................................................748
ATS Model.....................................................................................................751
Contactor Model ............................................................................................752
Menu and Commands ..........................................................................................753
Simulations Commands .................................................................................753
Plotting User Selected Values – Define Plot .......................................................754
Creating a Simulation Script ................................................................................758
Dynamic Stability Options...................................................................................761
Control ...........................................................................................................761
Double-Click Control.....................................................................................763
Plot Output .....................................................................................................766
Contents Contents  18

Arc Flash ........................................................................................................766

Arc Flash Calculations in Dynamic Stability.......................................................767
Formatting Plots ...................................................................................................768
Format Title ...................................................................................................769
Format Plot Area ............................................................................................769
Format X or Y Axes .......................................................................................770
Format Legend ...............................................................................................771
Spreadsheet Results .............................................................................................772
Viewing ..........................................................................................................772
Copy to Clipboard ..........................................................................................772
Format Plot Data ............................................................................................772
Power Flow Results in One-line ..........................................................................772
Printing.................................................................................................................773
Messaging ............................................................................................................773
Exciter Max Limit Messages .........................................................................775
Exciter Min Limit Messages ..........................................................................775
Exciter Gate Limit Messages .........................................................................776
Governor Max Limit Messages .....................................................................776
Governor Min Limit Messages ......................................................................776
Governor Runtime Load Limit Messages ......................................................777
Governor Initialization Load Limit Messages ...............................................778
Slew Run Messages .......................................................................................778
Slip Estimate Messages..................................................................................779
Data Error Messages ......................................................................................780
Delay Table Message .....................................................................................782
Initialized Message ........................................................................................783
Load Transition Messages .............................................................................783
Sync Motor Field Tripped Message ...............................................................783
Sync Motor Field Tripped on Reverse Power Message.................................783
Sync Motor Field Applied Message ..............................................................783
Solution Messages .........................................................................................784
Refactor Messages .........................................................................................784
Isolated Sub-System Message........................................................................785
Induction Motor Power Flow Messages ........................................................785
Protective Device Pickup Messages ..............................................................786
Protective Device Reset Messages.................................................................786
Protective Device Trip Messages...................................................................787
Relay Time Delay Satisfied Message ............................................................787
Relay Travel Back Message...........................................................................788
Relay Unable to Trip Breaker Message .........................................................788
Relay Instantaneous Reset Message ..............................................................788
ATS Transferred Messages ............................................................................788
Contactor Dropped Out Message ...................................................................789
Exceeded Result Storage Message.................................................................789
No PF Source Messages.................................................................................789
DStates Not Settled Messages .......................................................................789
Contents Contents  19

DStates Settled Messages ..............................................................................790

Faulted Message.............................................................................................790
Fault Removed Message ................................................................................790
ATS Transferred Message .............................................................................790
Contactor Dropped Out Message ...................................................................791
Results Saved Message ..................................................................................791
Device Opened Message ................................................................................791
Device Closed Message .................................................................................791
Simulation Run To Message ..........................................................................792
Simulation Run For Message .........................................................................792
Simulation Reset Message .............................................................................792
Run Script Message .......................................................................................792
Run Script Warning Message ........................................................................792
Control Setting Changed Messages ...............................................................793
Motor Load Messages ....................................................................................793
Simulation Auto-Stop Message .....................................................................793
Complex Operations Error Messages ............................................................794
Numerical Instability Message ......................................................................794
Stepping Message ..........................................................................................794
Simulation Complete Message ......................................................................795
DS Focus Entry Error Messages ....................................................................795
DS Focus Entry Model Error Message ..........................................................795
Attempting Close / Open Message ................................................................795
Exciter / Governor Stepping Messages ..........................................................796
Completing Script Message ...........................................................................796
Reset Encountered Errors Message ...............................................................796
Completing Script Message ...........................................................................796
Power Flow Scaling Message ........................................................................796
Time Step Change Message ...........................................................................797
Bus / Device / ATS Not Defined Message ....................................................797
Generator AVR Undefined Messages ............................................................797
Generator AVR Action Messages..................................................................798
Dynamic Stability Library ...................................................................................798
Plugins..................................................................................................................799
DC Modeling in Dynamic Stability .....................................................................799
Inverter and Photovoltaic Iteration Methods .................................................800

Glossary of Terms .................................................................................................. i

Index ................................................................................................................... xii

 21
Introduction to EasyPower What is EasyPower?  22

Introduction to EasyPower
What is EasyPower?
EasyPower® is a computer aided engineering tool for the analysis and design of industrial,
utility, and commercial electrical power systems. EasyPower® is unique in that it
completely integrates the short circuit, power flow, protective device coordination and
database functions under control of the interactive graphical one-line diagram. EasyPower®
lets you work like you normally do -- directly from the one-line. We also maintain the most
interactive and user friendly interface ever developed for power system analysis software.

EasyPower® uses the latest network analysis techniques developed by world leaders in
sparsity solution algorithms and innovative computer techniques. EasyPower® prides itself
in its ingenuity of software development with a wide variety of algorithms that are not
available in other programs. This gives EasyPower a tremendous advantage over other
programs in execution time, modeling capabilities, and accuracy.

EasyPower Documentation Purpose

This book is to be used as a ‘Reference Guide’ and a ‘User Manual’ for all EasyPower®
users. Information is included that would be good for users to know when initially beginning
to use EasyPower® as well as knowledge that will be applicable for even the most
experienced of users. It is recommended as the best option that this book be read in its
entirety. ‘Your First EasyPower Oneline’ and ‘Making Oneline Diagrams’ provide users
with an overview of the majority of the CAD development options that are available. If you
plan on using EasyPower® for Studies and in depth analysis it would also interest you to
read ‘Analysis Overview’ and work through the ‘EasyPower Tutorials’. If you decide not
to read these chapters completely, familiarizing yourself with the Table of Contents will aid
you in referencing what topics are covered.

Note: Be sure to read "Your First Oneline" and go through the brief tutorial there. These
basics of how EasyPower® works will provide your foundation of the software, and simplify
your use of EasyPower®.
 Introduction to EasyPower Documentation Conventions  23

To further enhance your abilities with the EasyPower® software we recommend becoming
familiar with this book and never hesitating to reference it. Our Technical Support staff is
also very knowledgeable and willing to discuss your questions on device libraries, technical
details on particular analysis operations and standards.

Documentation Conventions
 Command names, Menu bar names, keyboard keys, and Toolbar buttons are Boldface
Helvetica.

 Things you type are indicated with Courier.

 Boldface Times is used for dialog box field names when described in the text.

 New terms being introduced are indicated with italics. If the meaning is not clear from the
context, see the Glossary of Terms. Italics are also used for dialog box field names when
referred to in the text.
 Introduction to EasyPower System Requirements  25

System Requirements

The following are the minimum hardware requirements for EasyPower:

 Operating System: Windows XP SP3 / 2003 Server / Vista/ Windows 7

 CPU: Equivalent of 2.5 GHz Pentium IV

 RAM: Equivalent of 500 MB DDR2 RAM

 1024 x 768 or higher resolution monitor and video adapter

 500 MB of free hard disk space for EasyPower program directory

 CD/DVD drive

 Microsoft Mouse or other compatible pointing device with spin wheel.

The following are the recommended hardware requirements for EasyPower:

 CPU: Equivalent of 2.5 GHz Pentium D or better

 RAM: Equivalent of 1GB DDR2 RAM or larger

 1024 x 768 or higher resolution monitor and video adapter or larger

 1GB of free hard disk space for EasyPower program and files or larger

 Ergonomic keyboard and pointing device with spin/click wheel.

 Introduction to EasyPower Installing EasyPower  26

Installing EasyPower
1. Make sure your computer has enough speed and memory as described in System
Requirements above.

2. Start Microsoft Windows on your computer.

3. Insert the EasyPower program CD in a CD drive. The CD will auto-start. For Vista operating
system you will need to browse the CD to Setup folder and run setup.exe program.

4. Follow the installation dialog.

5. Click on the Install button.

6. Install the hardware key to the printer port or the USB port on the computer before running
EasyPower.

Beginning An EasyPower Session

Select the EasyPower icon to open a new session. A splash screen will appear, with
options to choose, once in EasyPower you may disable this splash screen in the options for
quicker load time. Choose Start Program button. You can click on the window's
Maximize button to completely maximize visibility within the session.

Note: If you are new to the Microsoft Operating Systems, it is highly recommended that you
run the appropriate Tutorial before using EasyPower®. This documentation assumes that
you are familiar with the basic Windows operations like using menus, choosing from dialog
boxes, manipulating window sizes/locations, etc.

The First Time You Run EasyPower

If this is your first time using EasyPower, we highly recommend that you read Chapter 1,
Your First EasyPower One-line and go through the brief tutorial there. This will give you
the basics of how EasyPower works, and will make the rest of the chapters much more
understandable.
Introduction to EasyPower Using Authorization Codes  27

Using Authorization Codes

It is possible to change your program options by using an authcode. For example, suppose
you faxed in a purchase order for adding the SmartDuty option to EasyPower. You will
receive a fax back which gives you a code that you can input to EasyPower to enable the
feature rather than waiting for a new program to be shipped to you.

To enter a new authorization code, choose Tools Auth Code from the Menu bar. You
will get the following dialog box:

Type in your code as instructed. For example, here is a typical authorization code:

SW22 8DPE JJF2 YT4B N7S9

As you type, the blanks are optional. Make sure not to enter any additional spaces or
characters after the authorization code, then click on the OK button for the new features to be
enabled.

You only need to enter a new authorization code once, but you should keep the information
in your files in case you ever need to re-install the program.

PC Optimization for EasyPower

EasyPower runs on many computers with a wide variety of hardware and system
configurations. Some configurations may allow EasyPower to work more efficiently than
others. The following discussion will help you get the most out of EasyPower.

Memory

To run a complex analysis program like EasyPower effectively and still allow your computer
the memory it needs to run efficiently, you should consider upgrading if you have 500
megabytes of RAM or less.
Introduction to EasyPower PC Optimization for EasyPower  28

On older hard disk drives a symptom of insufficient memory is that your hard disk will
"chatter" a lot. This means Windows is being forced to use the hard disk instead of memory
for basic operations. Inexpensive memory is available from many online stores and is much
less expensive than a new hard disk.

Large, High-resolution Monitors

The larger the computer's display screen, the more of your one-line you will be able to see at
one time. Although EasyPower is very fast and efficient, you will work more effectively if
scrolling is minimized and your one-line is fully visualized.

High-speed Graphics Support

EasyPower's one-line graphics are very fast compared to other programs. However, the
faster your computer's graphics are, the faster EasyPower can display things. Many
computers come with built-in Local Bus graphics, which are generally faster than other forms
of graphic support. If your existing computer does not have high-speed graphics support,
you can purchase a high-performance graphics card as an add-on.
 Introduction to EasyPower Uninstalling EasyPower  29

Uninstalling EasyPower
1. Access your computer’s Control Panel from the start menu.

2. Double-click on the Add/Remove Programs icon.

3. Click on EasyPower 9.5.

4. Click on the Add/Remove button and uninstall.

Checking for Updates

You can automatically check if any updates for EasyPower program or the standard library
are available on the web. These items along with manuals and EasyPower utilities may be
accessed at http://www.EasyPower.com/Updates. Please have your serial number ready for
verification of current maintenance; you will then be redirected to our update center.

For expired EasyPower maintenance please contact our office at Sales@EasyPower.com. For
Network licenses, obtain update information from EasyPower LLC, by emailing us at
techsupport@easypower.com.
Introduction to EasyPower Checking for Updates  31
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Overview  32

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower

One-line
Overview
In this tutorial, you will create a small but complete one-line diagram and database from
scratch. You will then perform a basic power flow and short circuit analysis on the system.

The Session Window

After you start EasyPower, the session window should look something like the following
figure. Click on the session window's Maximize button on the upper-right to make it fill
the screen. To make the one-line window fill the EasyPower session, click on its Maximize
button also.

EasyPower Session

Following are brief descriptions of the session window elements.

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line The Session Window  33

Ribbons

The Ribbons let you tell EasyPower what you want to do next. Ribbon buttons that are not
appropriate at a given time are grayed out and made unavailable. Some buttons have the
down arrow symbol indicating further options.

Ribbons are new to EasyPower 9.0. Previous versions supported menu bar and toolbars. You
can display menu bars and toolbars in place of the ribbons by choosing Style. The Style drop
down menu is in the upper right part of the screen in the ribbon interface.

Change Style

Quick Access Toolbar

Quick Access Toolbar

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line The Session Window  34

The quick access toolbar is located at the top left part of the EasyPower window when the
style is ribbons. By default this toolbar has the common command New (create new one-
line), Open, Save, Print and Undo.

Menu bar

The Menu bar lets you tell EasyPower what you want to do next. Menu bar is displayed only
when the Style selected is Toolbar. Menu options that are not appropriate at a given time are
grayed out and made unavailable.

Menu bar

Toolbar

There is an optional Toolbar underneath the Menu bar that provides a number of buttons you
can push (click on). These buttons are shortcuts to often-used commands. All of the
Toolbars are user-definable. That is, by using the Customize feature you can decide which
buttons you would like on the Toolbars and even where individual buttons are placed.

Toolbar

For more information on what each Toolbar button does, see "Standard Toolbar", "Power
Flow Toolbar“, "Coordination Toolbar”, and "Dynamic Stability Toolbar” in their respective
chapters. You can also hold the cursor on a particular button for about a second and the "tool
tip" giving the name of that button will pop up. The tool tip also gives a brief help
description.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line The Session Window  35

Right Mouse Context Menus

In addition to Ribbons and Toolbars, EasyPower offers you the speed of clicking the right
mouse button anywhere on the screen and having an extensive context menu popup. Each
focus has a separate menu, and though some commands are grayed out, they become active
when appropriate.

Right Mouse Button Context Menus

Status Bar

There is an optional Status bar at the bottom of the session window that provides information
about settings you have chosen.

Status bar

For more information, see "Database Edit Status Bar" in chapter 2, "Short Circuit Status Bar"
in chapter 4, "Power Flow Status Bar" in chapter 5, “TCC Status Bar ” in chapter 14, or
“Dynamic Stability Status Bar” in chapter 19.
 Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line EasyPower Focus  36

Equipment Palette

Equipment Palette

In the Ribbon Style, the Equipment Palette allows you to add equipment and notes to the
one-line. This is similar to the Equipment Palette toolbar. You can also insert items through
the Insert ribbon.

While you are editing the database, the Equipment Palette provides the necessary equipment
types to create a power system one-line diagram.

You can hide or show the Equipment Palette using the right mouse context menu.

EasyPower Focus
During an EasyPower session, all capabilities are only a few mouse clicks away. With any
powerful tool however, it is most efficient to concentrate on one thing at a time. EasyPower
calls this your focus. There are six types of focuses in EasyPower:

 Database Editing

 Short Circuit Analysis

 Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line EasyPower Focus  37

 Power Flow Analysis

 Harmonics

 Protective Device Coordination

 Dynamic Stability

Each focus has its own Ribbon, Menu bar and Toolbar, showing only the commands that are
appropriate for that focus. This feature keeps the user interface for each focus simple. For
example, you don't have to wade through a bunch of Short Circuit menus when all you really
want to do is Power Flow. Also, as major new analysis capabilities are added to EasyPower
in the future, they can each have their own focus. This helps avoid the problem plaguing
many programs today – a cluttered, complicated user interface.

Database Edit Focus

You can edit the database by changing ID names, equipment data, impedances, etc. You can
also change the positions of one-line equipment and the lines that connect them. No analysis
results are shown on the one-line in the Database Edit focus.

Analysis Focus

Each analysis focus provides the tools necessary for that type of study. In an analysis focus,
you can change the one-line (equipment positions, etc.) but not the equipment data. Some
analysis focuses allow temporary changes of equipment data for performing what-if cases.
The different types of analysis include Short Circuit, Power Flow, Harmonics, Coordination,
and Dynamic Stability.

Choosing a Focus

You can choose a focus by clicking one of the five focus buttons to the far right of the Home
Ribbon, as shown below. The current focus will be shown as highlighted.

Focus Buttons
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Preparing to Start Your One-line  38

Switching to one analysis focus from another is almost instantaneous once you have been
"in" that focus. However, when you go back to the Database focus, EasyPower must prepare
for analysis from scratch since database changes you make affect the analysis.

Preparing to Start Your One-line

By default, EasyPower has a grid that helps you line up your one-line graphics. For this
tutorial, we will keep that grid visible. While inserting or moving items on the one-line, the
items snap to the grid points. Leaving the Snap to grid feature on helps to avoid jogs in the
lines and makes the drawing look better.

Turn Grid Display On/Off

Choose Tools Options Grid. (In these instructions, a phrase like "choose Tools
Options Grid means to first click on the Tools ribbon, then click on the Options button
and then, in this particular case, select the Grid tab.)

This will bring up the following dialog box. Click on the Display grid points box as shown,
and then click on the OK button. You can toggle the checkbox to see the effect on the one-
line window.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Preparing to Start Your One-line  39

Options: Grid dialog box

Grid Points

The Options button on the ribbon also has a pull-down arrow symbol which provides short
cut to Show Grid command.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Place Buses on the One-line  40

Show Grid

Place Buses on the One-line

The central equipment type of every one-line is the bus. A bus defines the connection point
for all types of equipment. Each piece of equipment must be connected to a bus in order to
analyze the system.

Click on the button in the equipment palette or in the Insert ribbon. The mouse cursor
will turn into a bus symbol. Place five buses in the drawing as shown by clicking with the
left mouse button.

Note: The default bus "Base kV" is blank. This was done to force the user to enter a base
kV. To speed up one-line creation, advanced users can format default equipment data. To do
this, use the ribbon option Tools Equipment, click on the Bus icon and to choose a
default base kV. The menu command for this is Format  Equipment Defaults.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Place Buses on the One-line  41

Inserting Bus

Adjust Bus Sizes and Locations

Click on the button from the Toolbox or press the ESC key on the keyboard – the mouse
cursor will turn back into an arrow, indicating that you are no longer adding buses.

Move and size the buses approximately as shown below. You move buses or ID names by
dragging them with the left mouse button. When you bring the cursor arrow close to a bus
the four-headed arrow will appear. Click the left mouse button and drag to move the bus.
If you take the cursor arrow close to the either end of the bus, a double-headed arrow ↔ will
appear. You can now change the size of a bus by dragging either end of it with the left or
right mouse button. You can even shrink it to a single dot or “node” so that it will take up
less room.

Moving and Sizing Bus

Enter Bus kV Data

Enter bus data by double-clicking on each of the buses in turn. The Bus Data dialog box will
appear each time and that bus' kV can be entered. Use 13.8 kV for the top bus, and 0.48 kV
for others.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Place Buses on the One-line  42

Bus Data

(If you had a large number of buses to set the kV for, you would want to use Copy and
Paste, which are described and used later in this tutorial.)
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Add Equipment to the One-line  43

Add Equipment to the One-line

Add Transformer

Click on the button -- the mouse cursor will turn into a two winding transformer symbol.

Place the transformer by positioning the transformer cursor's top leader on the top bus and
clicking. The transformer will automatically attach to the bus, and the top half of the symbol
will turn black. If you miss (the transformer doesn't connect and stays all red), just drag the
symbol into position after you get back to the arrow cursor.

Click on the button or press the ESC key on the keyboard – the mouse cursor will turn
back into an arrow, indicating that you are no longer adding transformers. Using the left
mouse button, drag the transformer's remaining leader to the middle bus. After it connects,
drag the transformer symbol up, centered between the two buses.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Add Equipment to the One-line  44

Transformer Connected at Both Ends

Add Cables

Click on the palette button -- the mouse cursor will turn into a crosshair. Put the
crosshair on the middle bus and press the left mouse button down (but don't release it yet).
This sets one end of the line. Now drag the crosshair to the left bottom bus and release the
mouse button. This places the cable. If you miss (no cable is added), just try again.

Adding Cable

Do the same thing for the other two cables as shown. Note that the middle cable doesn't have
a jog because you moved the dynamic rubber band line straight down rather than diagonally.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Add Equipment to the One-line  45

Cables Added

Add Motors

Click on the palette button -- the mouse cursor will turn into a motor symbol.

Place the first motor by positioning the motor cursor's leader on the bottom left bus and
clicking. The motor will automatically attach to the bus, and the symbol will turn black. If
you miss (the motor doesn't connect and turns red), just drag the symbol into position after
you get back to the arrow cursor.

Continue by placing the other motors as shown.

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Add Equipment to the One-line  46

Adding Motors

Add Utility

Click on the palette button -- the mouse cursor will turn into a utility symbol.

Place the utility on the top bus with the same procedure used for motors.

If you scroll up slightly (by clicking on the button on the upper right) you can drag the
utility symbol a little higher so the utility data text has more room.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Add Equipment to the One-line  47

Adding Utility

Add Feeder Breakers

Click on the palette button -- the mouse cursor will turn into a low voltage breaker
symbol.

Position the breaker cursor directly over a feeder line (cable, transformer, etc.) and click the
left mouse button. The breaker will be inserted into the line.

If you miss (the breaker doesn't insert into the line and stays all red), get back to the arrow
cursor by clicking on the palette button or pressing the ESC key on the keyboard. Then
select the red breaker by clicking on it, and delete it by clicking on the button.

Continue by placing the breakers shown here.

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Add Equipment to the One-line  48

LV Breakers Added

You can move the breaker in vertical or horizontal directions in the one-line by dragging it
with the mouse.

Add Tie Breaker

Adding a tie breaker is similar to adding a transformer.

Click on the palette button if needed (it should already be down from the previous step).

Place the breaker by positioning the breaker cursor's top leader on the right end of the bottom
middle bus and clicking (see picture). The breaker will automatically attach to the bus. If
you miss (the breaker doesn't connect and stays all red), just drag the symbol into position
after you get back to the arrow cursor.

Take the cursor over the breaker and click the right mouse button. Edit options will appear
as shown in the figure above. From the edit options, choose Rotate 90°. The breaker
orientation will change from vertical to horizontal. At the same time the connection type of
the breaker will change from feeder breaker to bus tie breaker. Using the left mouse button,
drag the tie breaker's remaining leader to the bottom right bus. After it connects, drag the tie
breaker's symbol to be centered between the two buses. Once the tie breaker is connected to
buses on both sides, the Rotate command will only change the orientation in the one line
diagram, and remain as a tie breaker.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Add Equipment to the One-line  49

You can also add a vertical tie breaker between two buses if one bus is above the other. In
such a case the orientation of the breaker need not be changed.

Double click on the tie breaker to open the LV Breaker Data dialog. Set the breaker to
Open in the top right corner of the dialog and press OK. This will make it a normally open
tie breaker.

Adding Tie Breaker

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Save Your Work  50

Tie Breaker Added

Save Your Work

As with any computer program, it is a good idea to save your work "early and often."

To save the one-line in EasyPower, choose button on the top left of the EasyPower
window, then choose Save. Or you can choose from the Quick Access toolbar. Menu
command for this is File  Save. (If you are using the Demo Version, Save is disabled.) If
you have not already given the file a name, you will be asked for one at this time. Filenames
can be up to 256 characters including blank spaces.

Enter Equipment Data

When a database dialog box is up, you will see bus names in the Connection Information
fields. Don't be disturbed if those names don't match the ones in these tutorial pictures. You
may have added the items in a different order than we did, and the automatic name
assignments would be different.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Enter Equipment Data  51

Enter Motor Data

Double click on one of the motors, and fill out the dialog box as shown here. Do not change
the To Bus field, because that would change the one-line connections.

Fill out the X/R field last by choosing the Short Circuit tab and then clicking on the
Calculate button. After you have the data entered, click on the OK button. If you click OK
and have not filled out all of the necessary fields, you will receive a message asking if you
want to save what you have entered. This message can be turned off in the Tools Options
General dialog.

Entering Motor Data

Rather than entering data separately for each motor, use the Copy and Paste toolbar buttons.
First select the motor that already has data by clicking on it with the left mouse button (the
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Enter Equipment Data  52

motor will turn green). Then click on the button. The motor's data will be copied to the
EasyPower clipboard.

Select all of the other motors on the one-line. This can be done with the rubber rectangle or
by holding down the Shift key as you select by clicking. Don't worry if you have non-motor
items selected too; they will be ignored.

Click on the Paste button. The motor horsepower, type, etc. will be pasted into each
selected motor.

Enter Cable Data

Double click on one of the cables and fill out the dialog box as shown here. Do not change
the To Bus or From Bus fields, because that would change the one-line connections. Fill out
the Impedance fields last by clicking on the Calculate button. After you have the data
entered, click on the OK button.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Enter Equipment Data  53

Entering Cable Data

Use the Copy and Paste toolbar buttons to copy that cable's data to the other two, just like
you did for the motors.

Enter Transformer Data

Double click on the transformer and fill out the dialog box as shown here. Do not change the
To Bus or From Bus fields, because that would change the one-line connections.

Choose the Impedance tab and enter 6 in each Z field, then fill out the X/R field last by
clicking click on Calculate there as well. Click on OK.

Entering Transformer Data

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Enter Equipment Data  54

Enter Utility Data

Double click on the utility and fill out the dialog box as shown here. Do not change the To
Bus or Controlled Bus fields, because that would change the one-line connections.

Entering Utility Data

Turn Grid Display Off

Now that the one-line is basically done, you can turn off the grid. This makes the analysis
numbers easier to see. Note that the snap to grid is still on, even if the grid dots are no
longer being displayed.

Choose Tools Options and click on the Grid tab (like you did at the beginning of the
tutorial) and uncheck the Display grid points box by clicking on it.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Enter Equipment Data  55

View Entire One-line

In the Home ribbon, choose Zoom Out Full button to see all the database data on your
screen (menu command: View  Zoom  Out Full). Your session window will now look
something like this:
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Power Flow Analysis  56

Viewing Entire One Line

Run a Power Flow Analysis

Enter Power Flow Focus

Enter the Power Flow focus by clicking on the Power Flow button. If one or more items
are unconnected or have incomplete data, you will be notified at this time. Items with
incomplete data are highlighted in red. An error message dialog box appears. To see their
ID names, click on the Yes button. An error report will appear as shown below, listing the
equipment with incomplete data.

Error Message – Incomplete Data

Error Report – Incomplete Data

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Power Flow Analysis  57

Solve Base Case Power Flow

Click on the Solve button to see all the flows.

Oops. You can see that we underestimated the amount of space to leave for analysis results.
This is a common mistake made by engineers just starting to make EasyPower one-lines.
Fortunately, EasyPower's dynamic graphics make it easy to remedy. (And with practice, you
will get the equipment spacing right the first time.)

Adjust One-line For Results Readability

Drag the buses, equipment, and ID names as needed to let all analysis numbers be seen. Note
that the center cable now has a "jog" in it, whereas before it was a straight line. To force a
jog in a currently straight line, drag it so that it goes beyond one of the buses it is connected

After adjusting the one-line, you can save the updated arrangement with the Save command
even though you are still in the Power Flow focus.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Power Flow Analysis  58

Better Readability in One Line

Interpret Results

The power flow solution is initially displayed in megawatts and megavars. This can be
changed to kilowatts and kilovars if desired by choosing PF Options  One-line Output in
the Power Flow ribbon (menu command: Tools Power Flow Options  One-Line
Output) from the menu and then the tab. Flow direction is indicated by the arrow. MVAR
flow is indicated by the value placed in parenthesis ( ). The numbers beneath the motors
show the actual loading of each motor.

Voltage is shown on the right-hand side of each bus at a forty-five degree angle. The default
voltage unit is per-unit, but kV can be shown instead if desired. The number after the "@" is
the voltage angle (excluding 30 phase shift) in degrees. This is the voltage angle in
comparison to the voltage angle at the swing bus (usually 0).

Notice that the flow into each branch is different than the flow out of each branch. This is
due to the line losses associated with each conductor and transformer.

There are many other Power Flow display controls available. You can use the Toolbar to
change which values and warning conditions are displayed.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Short Circuit Analysis  59

If the Power Flow toolbar has Voltage Violation selected (i.e. the button is "lit"), most of
the buses will be highlighted in red since their voltages are outside the warning threshold
range as determined in Power Flow Options Control.

If your results don't match these numbers, re-check the database dialog boxes for each item,
comparing them to the dialog boxes shown in this tutorial. (To do this, you must first get
back to the Database Edit focus by clicking on the Database Edit button.)

Run a Short Circuit Analysis

Enter Short Circuit Focus and Fault a Bus

Enter the Short Circuit focus by clicking on the button in the ribbon or choosing
Analysis Short Circuit from the Menu bar.

Fault the lower right-hand bus by double-clicking on it. You should see the following
results.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Short Circuit Analysis  60

Running Short Circuit Analysis

Oops! We need to make another minor change to the one-line to accommodate the results.

Adjust One-line For Results Readability

Drag each motor down enough that the numbers will fit between it and the bus.

Readable Text After Adjusting One Line

After adjusting the one-line, you can save the updated arrangement with the File Save
command even though you are still in the Short Circuit focus.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Short Circuit Analysis  61

Interpret Results

Note that the faulted bus is highlighted in blue. The default result units are symmetrical kilo-
amps. (This can be changed by choosing Tools Short Circuit Options One-Line
Output.) The faulted bus current is 19.695 kA, which is shown on the right-hand side of the
bus at a forty five degree angle. The contribution from the transformer is 17.272 kA, and the
motor contribution is 1.250 kA.

If your results don't match these numbers, re-check the database dialog boxes for each item,
comparing them to the dialog boxes shown in this tutorial. (You must first get back to the
Database Edit focus by clicking on the button.)

Look at a Remote Voltage and Current

EasyPower gives you the ability to view remote voltages and currents (on multiple buses
other than the one experiencing the fault).

While the lower right-hand bus is still faulted (highlighted in blue), select the lower left-hand
bus by clicking on it once (it will turn green). Choose Remote V/I button on the Short
Circuit ribbon (menu command: View Remote Bus V&I) to see the remote voltage and
current for that bus. To view the voltage and currents for all remote buses, just click on the
button without selecting any bus.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Short Circuit Analysis  62

Looking at Remote Voltage and Current

As you can see, 0.860 kA from each of the motors flow to the fault on the right-hand bus.
For remote buses, the voltage is shown at a forty five degree angle. In this case, the value is
0.358 per-unit, or about 36 percent of nominal. The voltage can be displayed in kV if desired
by choosing SC Options  One-Line Output (menu command: Tools Short Circuit
Options One-Line Output).

Look at Interrupting Results

Choose View Interrupting from the Menu bar or button from the Short Circuit
ribbon button to see the interrupting results. In addition to the half cycle results, the
interrupting (5-cycle) results will also appear. To see only the interrupting results you can
click on button and turn the display off for momentary currents.
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line Run a Short Circuit Analysis  63

Viewing Interrupting Results

Notice that the motor contributions decay as the bus voltage is depressed and the time
constants of the motors increase. This provides a clear indication of the currents necessary
for setting relays.

Motor Contribution to Short Circuit Current

Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line What Now?  64

What Now?
Congratulations! You just entered and analyzed a power system with EasyPower. You
should be able to apply what you learned to your real-world systems by building on the
knowledge you gained through this tutorial.

The steps you did here are very much like the steps you will do in making your own one-
lines. For an example of a larger completed one-line, open the "bigger" database in the
SAMPLES directory as described below.

Open the "BIGGER" Sample One-line

Choosing  Open will bring up a dialog box that looks something like the following.

Opening File “bigger.dez”

Double-click on the database called "bigger.dez".

Experiment with zooming in, doing analysis, changing the database, etc. Chapter 2 discusses
many concepts and actions not covered in this tutorial.

Try Your Own Power System

You can now start entering one of your own power systems. For information on specific
database dialog boxes, see the Database Technical Reference (Chapter 12).
Chapter 1 Your First EasyPower One-line What Now?  65
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Starting a New One-line  66

Chapter 2
Making One-line Diagrams
Starting a New One-line
Choose button on the quick access toolbar on the top left side of the EasyPower
window. EasyPower generates a clear page and places you in the Database Edit focus so you
can start creating your new one-line. In the menu style interface, new one-lines are created by
choosing File  New  One-Line. By default, EasyPower names the file “Oneline1” (or 2,
3, etc.), which you can easily change clicking on button on the quick access toolbar
(menu style: File Save or File Save As). These commands can also be executed from
the button on the top left corner of the window. From there, creating and editing a one-
line diagram is a simple matter of choosing the desired power system equipment from the
equipment palette, and placing it on the drawing. If you place the item's leader on a bus,
EasyPower automatically connects the equipment or you can drag the item to the bus with
the arrow cursor.

Save and Save As

As with all work involving computers, you will want to regularly save your work so as not to
risk having to repeat work because of a power outage or other unfortunate occurrence. If you
have started a one-line using the New command, the first time you choose Save, the Save As
dialog box will come up allowing you to choose which directory you would like to place it in
and the default name will be highlighted allowing you to easily rename the file. The
filename may be up to 256 characters long including blank spaces. Once you have done an
initial Save, anytime after that choosing Save will make any change a permanent part of the
file and the Save dialog box will not appear. If you should want to record the file under
another name, use Save As, and the Save As dialog box will appear so that you might choose
a new name and a directory to store it in.

Open and Close

To open a file that has already been created you choose button on the quick access
toolbar (menu style: File Open). This will bring up the standard Microsoft Windows
Open dialog which allows you to search through drives and directories to find the file you
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Starting a New One-line  67

want. Then you open it by either double clicking on it or highlighting it and then clicking on
OK.

If you are working on a Network and someone else has already opened the file you want to
use or the file properties are set as "read-only", you will receive the following message and
only be allowed to open it as "read-only."

Then if you make any changes you will have to use button Save As and store the file
under another name or in a different location.

To close a file you either click on in the upper right hand corner of the document (or on
the icon if minimized) or choose button Close.

Equipment Palette Button Meanings

Equipment Palette Button Meanings

Standard Toolbar

Standard Toolbar Button Meanings

Database Edit Status Bar

 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Setting File Properties  68

Database Edit Status Bar

The Database Edit Status Bar indicates the following settings:

Clipboard: The item that has been copied to the clipboard. In the picture above, the item in
the clipboard is “Bus”.

Base MVA: The Base MVA value as set from the dialog box accessed by choosing Tools
Options System. See page 282.

Frequency: The Frequency value as set from the dialog box accessed by choosing Tools
Options System.

Zoom Factor: How much the one-line is currently zoomed. See "Zooming In and Out" on
page 70-42 for more information. There are various zoom commands and also a slider bar to
control the one-line zoom.

Setting File Properties

If you choose button  Properties (File Properties from the Menu bar), you will get
the File Properties dialog box which allows you to set project information.

File Properties Dialog Box

 Location: Path of the saved one-line file.

 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Setting File Properties  69

 Project Name: Type text you choose to identify the project. This text is printed in the
header for each page of printed reports. The field is optional, so you can leave it blank if you
want.

 Project Code: Type text you choose to further identify the project. This text is "silent", i.e.
it is not printed anywhere. The field is optional, so you can leave it blank if you want.

 Import Load File: Gives the name of the last SCADA file imported into this one line
database. If no SCADA import has been used, then 'NONE' will be written in this dialog box
field. See "SCADA Importing and Exporting" on page 39 for more information.

 Device Library: This shows the path of the default device library as set in the dialog box
accessed by choosing Tools Options File Locations. By choosing "Specified" and
using the "Browse" button you can assign a particular device library to this particular one-
line database. The path of the specified library will be stored in the one-line file.

Password Access

If you should desire to control access to a certain file, you can give it a password. Choose
File Properties and click the Password tab in the File Properties dialog box to get the New
Password dialog box.

New Password Dialog

The first time you open the New Password dialog box, the Old Password field will be grayed
out. Type the password you desire in the New Password field. As you type, an asterisk will
appear for each letter. Then type the same password in the Confirm Password field and click
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Zooming In and Out  70

OK. These are changes to the file. So when you close the file and EasyPower asks if you
want to save changes, click on Yes. The next time you try to open the file the Database
Access Rights dialog box will open. You can open the desired file as a read-only file without
entering the password. You cannot save read-only files.

Database Access Rights Dialog

Zooming In and Out

Most systems are too large to allow detailed on-screen viewing of the entire one-line all at
one time. EasyPower lets you choose exactly how much of your one-line to show at any
given time with its powerful and flexible Zoom capability. You can zoom out to 0.1% and
zoom in to 500%.

Using Mouse Spin wheel to Zoom In and Out

A convenient way to zoom in and out is to use the spin wheel of the Microsoft Mouse.
Spinning the wheel upward will zoom in and spinning down will zoom out. Move the cursor
to the area you wish to zoom in before spinning the wheel. This will keep the area that you
desire to see, at the center of the screen.

Zoom Slider bar

The bottom right part of the EasyPower window has a slider bar for controlling the zoom
percentage.

Customizing the Toolbar

1. Click on the pull down arrow at the very right side of the Toolbar.

2. Choose Add or Remove Buttons  DB Edit.

 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Zooming In and Out  71

Customizing Toolbar

3. Check the desired toolbar buttons on the right.

Choosing a Specific Zoom Factor

If you choose the Zoom Zoom Custom… command from the ribbon, you will get a
dialog box that lets you set a specific zoom factor. You can either choose from "200%",
"100%", "75%", "50%", or you can choose "Custom" and enter a specific number.

Zoom Dialog Box

Seeing Your Entire One-line

If you choose from the ribbon (View  Zoom Out Full command from the menu), the
view will be zoomed out just far enough to show your entire one-line diagram. Another way
to do this is to use the Zoom box described in “Using Toolbar Zoom Button” or the mouse
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Moving Around On the One-line  72

spin wheel to "zoom out" until the box shows "Out Full." Releasing the mouse button with
that label displayed is the same as choosing the View Zoom Out Full command from the
menu.

Zooming In on a Portion of the System

While a zoomed-out view may show the overall one-line, there is usually not enough detail
available to do much editing. The easiest way to zoom in on an area of interest is to choose
Zoom pull down menu on the ribbon and or View Zoom Area from the Menu bar. A
rubber band box cursor for indicating which area of the one-line to zoom in on will appear.

Zooming In and Out 1.5x

To zoom out 1.5x, just choose (View Zoom Out 1.5X from the Menu bar). When you
want to zoom back in choose (View Zoom In 1.5x from the Menu bar).

Getting Back to the Previous Zoom Scale

Whenever you change to a new zoom scale, EasyPower keeps the previous zoom scale in
memory. Click on the Zoom pull down menu and choose button (View Zoom
Restore from the Menu bar) to return to the previous zoom scale.

Moving Around On the One-line

A zoomed-up view of the system's one-line is a viewport into the entire system. You can
move that viewport around in a number of ways. Many of them use a Scroll bar.

Using the Scroll bar

 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams The Snap Grid  73

 The Scroll arrows are the buttons at each end of a Scroll bar. Clicking on a Scroll arrow once
will cause the viewport to move one unit in that direction. Holding down the mouse button
will cause the viewport to move until you release it. Pressing one of the keyboard's arrow
keys has the same effect as clicking on the corresponding Scroll arrows.

 Somewhere between the two Scroll arrows, you will see a square "button" called the Thumb.
This shows you where your viewport is relative to the entire one-line. To rapidly move a
large distance on the one-line, drag the Thumb to the section you want to view.

 If you click in the space between the Thumb and a Scroll arrow, the one-line's viewport will
scroll approximately one screen full in that direction. There will be a small overlap to help
you keep your bearings. Pressing the Page Up or Page Down keys on the keyboard has the
same effect as clicking between the vertical scrollbar's Thumb and Scroll arrow.

Alternative Methods of Scrolling

Here are some other ways to scroll around the one-line.

 To scroll to the upper-left corner of the one-line, press the Home keyboard key.

 To scroll to the lower-right corner of the one-line, press the End keyboard key.

 To scroll directly to one of the edges of the available drawing space, hold the Ctrl key down
while you press one of the arrow keys on the keyboard.

 Auto-Scrolling works for any operation that requires a press-slide-release of the left mouse
button. The view will automatically scroll if you "bump" the edge of the window with the
cursor.

The Snap Grid

During the creation or modification of an EasyPower one-line, you may find it helpful to use
the built-in snap grid. The grid is similar to graph paper except that instead of showing the
grid with intersecting lines, EasyPower marks the imaginary line intersections with small
dots on the screen. These dots are called gridpoints.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams The Snap Grid  74

Snap Grid with Visibility Turned On

When you are dragging items on your one-line, the dynamic image snaps to those gridpoints.
This helps you line things up with each other, creating a more readable, consistent, and
attractive one-line. Turning the snap grid on will only affect future operations. It does not
disturb one-line items you have already positioned unless you drag them.

SmartGrid™

You may already be familiar with grids, since they are implemented in all major CAD
systems. However, EasyPower takes the grid one step farther with a concept we call
SmartGrid. Since EasyPower "knows" that its database items represent a power system one-
line, it can intelligently snap between gridpoints if appropriate.

For example, in the following one-line section we want to drag the line connecting the right
leg of the transformer so that it becomes a single line segment rather than two line segments
connected by a "jog". Ordinarily this would require you to turn off the grid before dragging.
But with SmartGrid, EasyPower automatically senses that you might want to stop where the
line's segments straighten out, and makes that location one of the places for dynamic graphics
to snap to.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  75

Example Where SmartGrid™ is Helpful

Turning the Grid On and Off

There are two ways to turn the grid on and off. One option is to go to the Tools ribbon, click
on the drop down menu of Options, then select Show Grid.

Show or hide Grid

Turning Snap to Grid On/Off

The snap to grid feature can be turned on or off by going to the Tools ribbon, clicking on the
drop down menu of Options, and then select Snap to Grid. The other is to press Function
Key F2. Both of these toggle the status of grid snapping only; they don't affect whether or
not the grid is actually displayed with dots on the screen. The status bar at the bottom shows
the text “SNAP” when the snap feature is on.

Adding Items to the One-line

Editing such as selection and dragging are done with the arrow cursor. When you click on
one of the items of the Equipment Palette, the cursor will turn into that item. For example,
when you click on the Equipment Palette button, the cursor will change to motor
symbol. Every time you click the left mouse button, EasyPower will put a motor on the one-
line. After you are finished adding motors, click on the palette button or press the Esc
key on the keyboard to get back the normal cursor.

Any time a new item is created, it is given a unique ID name composed of the item type
followed by a number. For example, if you add a Bus, the ID name might be "BUS-12".
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  76

You can change the ID name at any time as described in the section “Equipment With Two
or Three Connections”.

Buses

The central equipment type of every one-line is the bus. A bus defines the connection point
for two or more pieces of equipment. Equipment items which are not yet connected to a bus
are highlighted in red.

To add a bus to the one-line, click on the equipment palette button. The cursor will
change to the shape of a bus as you move off the palette. Click the left mouse button where
you want the bus to be positioned in the drawing area. You can continue adding buses in this
way until you press the Esc key or click on another palette button.

Buses can be lengthened or shortened by dragging one end with the right mouse button.
Though there is a default size when a bus is placed on the one-line, the bus can be shrunk
down all the way to a single dot or “node”.

Shrinking buses to nodes

Setting Bus kV

When you add a bus to the one-line, you must provide the kV of that bus before you can
attach anything to it. You can either set a default kV ahead of time (before adding the bus to
the one-line) by choosing Tools  Equipment  Bus, and specifying the base kV, or you
can set it afterwards by double clicking on the bus to bring up its data base dialog box.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  77

EasyPower also allows you to set the kV of more than one bus at a time by using Copy and
Paste as described in "Copying an Item's Database Information" on pages 88 and 91.

Changing Bus Area and Zone

Area numbers are used to uniquely define different areas of the electrical system. These
areas can then be used for creating specific text reports from analysis operations that
represent subsets of the system. For example, typical paper plant areas may be the power
house (Area 1), caustic plant (Area 2), pulp mill (Area 3), and paper machine (Area 4). Area
numbers are positive integers between 1 and 999.

Zones are simply sub-areas. This allows even more specific reporting. You may wish to
define the pulp mill as Area 3 and the digester electrical equipment as Zone 2. Specific
reports can then be generated for this combination without including the entire pulp mill or
the other digesters. Zone numbers are positive integers between 1 and 999.

To change the Area or Zone of a bus, you can double-click on the bus to bring up its database
dialog box, then change the number there. Alternatively, you may select many buses and
choose from the ribbon, Change  Bus Area-Zone. This brings up a dialog box that lets
you specify an area and zone to be assigned to each of the selected buses.

Change Bus Area/Zone Dialog Box

 New Area: Area number to assign to selected buses. Specify zero to leave the Area
unchanged.

 New Zone: Zone number to assign to selected buses. Specify zero to leave the Zone
unchanged.

Equipment With One Connection

Motors, loads, generators, utilities, capacitors, and shunts are placed on the one-line by
choosing the appropriate palette button and clicking the left mouse button when the cursor
symbol's leader is on top of the desired bus. The symbol will snap to the bus. If there is not
a bus under the symbol's leader, the item is highlighted red indicating it is unconnected. You
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  78

can connect it later by dragging the symbol as described in the section "Equipment With Two
or Three Connections".

If you try to connect a piece of equipment to a bus whose base kV has not been specified, a
message box “Set Bus Base kV” pops up. The new equipment will be connected only after
you specify the base kV and press the OK button. If you press the Cancel button, the
equipment will not be attached.

Set Bus Base kV message

Equipment With Two or Three Connections

Transformers and current limiting reactors are placed on the one-line by choosing the
appropriate palette button and clicking the left mouse button when the cursor symbol's leader
is on top of the desired bus. The symbol will snap to the bus with the remaining leaders
turning red to indicate a disconnected state. If there is no bus under any of the symbol's
leaders, the entire item will show up red since it is completely unconnected.

You can continue adding items by clicking until you click on the Palette button or press
the Esc key. Once you get back to the arrow cursor, you can drag each item to its secondary
bus for connection. Drag the symbol so that the unconnected leader is on top of a bus,
release the left mouse button, and the symbol will attach to the bus.

Adding a Two-Winding Transformer

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  79

Lines Between Buses

When cables, transmission lines, and busways are chosen from the palette, the cursor
becomes a crosshair. Put the crosshair on the desired bus and press the left mouse button
down (but don't release it yet). This sets one end of the line. Now drag the crosshair to the
other bus and release the mouse button to set the other end of the line. Until you choose
another item or go back to the arrow cursor, you can set as many lines as you wish.

Adding a Cable

Long cables, transmission lines, and busway can be shown as short lines hanging from a bus
with the opposite bus labeled on the one-line. This is useful when a line stretches across the
one-line and it would take extra work to make room for it. Condensed lines are created by
unchecking the “Show Entire Line” checkbox in the line database dialog boxes. You can
resize a condensed line on the one-line.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  80

Condensed Line

Feeder Breakers and Switches

A feeder breaker goes between a bus and a piece of equipment. When you choose a voltage
breaker or switch from the equipment palette, the mouse cursor will turn into the shape of the
chosen item, just like it does for adding other types of equipment. To insert a breaker or
switch into a line (e.g. a cable, or the line between a transformer and its bus), click the mouse
while the cursor is on top of that line near a bus. If you miss, the breaker will be red, and you
will not be able to drag it to the line. It will snap to the bus as a tie breaker, so you will have
to delete it and try again.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  81

Adding a Feeder Breaker

Breaker names and/or data can be displayed on the one-line. Choose Tools Options
Text Visibility.

Breaker Data Checked in Text Visibility

Bus Tie Breakers and Switches

A bus tie breaker or switch goes between two buses rather than between a bus and a piece of
equipment.

Click on the palette button.

Place the breaker by positioning the breaker cursor's top leader on the right end of the bottom
middle bus and clicking (see picture). The breaker will automatically attach to the bus. If
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  82

you miss (the breaker doesn't connect and stays all red), just drag the symbol into position
after you get back to the arrow cursor.

Take the cursor over the breaker and click the right mouse button. Edit options will appear
as shown in the figure above. From the edit options, choose Rotate 90°. The breaker
orientation will change from vertical to horizontal. At the same time the connection type of
the breaker will change from feeder breaker to bus tie breaker. Using the left mouse button,
drag the tie breaker's remaining leader to the bottom right bus. After it connects, drag the tie
breaker's symbol to be centered between the two buses. Once the tie breaker is connected to
buses on both sides, the Rotate command will only change the orientation in the one line
diagram, and remain as a tie breaker.

Adding a Tie Breaker

Only one tie breaker per bus is allowed. However, you can model ring buses or breaker and
a half schemes by using a breaker inserted into a short section of busway instead of a tie
breaker.

Connecting an MCC to an MCC

There may be instances when you would want to connect an MCC to an MCC, a Panel
Schedule to a Panel Schedule, or a Panel Schedule to an MCC. MCC and Panel items are
modeled as buses. Therefore you can connect them with cables, busways or transformers.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Adding Items to the One-line  83

Connecting an MCC to another MCC

MCC-2 can be specified as a “Sub MCC” that feeds off MCC-1. In the Description tab of the
upstream MCC dialog, set the Load Type as Sub-MCC. Then select the cable or transformer
that feeds the sub-MCC in the column Sub-Line. Then select the ID Name of the sub-MCC
in the Sub-MCC column. You can then specify the protective device and settings through the
Data... button.

Auto-Insertion of Buses

You can directly add equipment to another without inserting a bus first. EasyPower creates a
bus between the two equipment you are attempting to interconnect together.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Setting Default Equipment Values  84

Auto-insertion of buses

Notes

EasyPower Notes are used to annotate your one-line with arbitrary text information. For
details on how to enter and edit notes, see "Notes (Free Text) on One-line" on page 91.

Setting Default Equipment Values

You can set default values for various equipment ahead of inserting new items. This will save
time for common items. To set default equipment values choose in the ribbon, Tools 
Equipment, and then choose the desired equipment (Format  Equipment Defaults in the
menu and the desired equipment). The equipment data dialog box will appear. You may enter
whatever values you need as default data. You may edit the data of any particular device if it
needs to be different from the default setting, by double clicking on the equipment in the one-
line and making changes in the equipment data dialog box.

Setting default equipment values

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Item Selection  85

Item Selection
Many EasyPower operations require you to select one or more items in the database first.
For example, choosing Delete button (Edit Delete from the Menu bar), will delete those
one-line items which you selected before issuing the command. By default, the color
indicating a selected state is green, but this can be changed in Tools Options Color.

Choosing [Ctrl]+[A] on the keyboard or by choosing in the ribbon Find-Select  Select All
(Edit Select All from the Menu bar) will select all items in an active one-line or an entire
text report.

Selecting With the Mouse

The simplest way to select an item is to move the arrow cursor over the item and click the
left mouse button. To select all the items in a region, press-slide-&release with the left
mouse button. A rubber band rectangle will show the region as you move the mouse.

Making a new selection automatically unselects any previous items. You can make
additional selections without unselecting anything, by holding down the Shift key or the Ctrl
key while you are selecting more items.

Deselecting an Item from a Group

If you accidentally select an item while selecting a group of items, you can deselect the item
by simply holding down the [Shift] key and clicking on the item with the left mouse button.

Selecting By an Item's ID Name

Choose on the ribbon (Edit Find from the Menu bar), and a dialog box will appear
asking for the type and ID name of the item you want to select.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Item Selection  86

Find Item Dialog Box

In this example, we are selecting a Bus with the ID name of “BUS-4”. First, select the Item
Type, by clicking on the desired equipment. Only those equipment present in the one-line
will be displayed. After you select “Bus”, the combo box labeled “ID Name of Item to Find”
will contain the ID names of all the available buses in the one-line. Select the desired ID
name from the combo box.

When you press OK, the item with a matching ID name will be selected. If necessary,
EasyPower will automatically scroll so that the selected item is visible in the window. To
select the item without automatically unselecting everything else first, check the Additive
Select box.

Query

Choosing Find-Select pull down menu from the ribbon and then Query (Edit Query
from the Menu bar) will bring up a dialog box so you can select multiple items which match
certain criteria.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Item Selection  87

Query Dialog Box

This dialog gives you the following choices.

 Item Types to Consider: Only item types you have checked here will be considered for
selection.

 Region to Consider: To control the scope of items that EasyPower considers for selection,
choose "Entire One-line," "Current Window," or "Inside Box." If "Inside Box," is chosen, a
box cursor appears after clicking OK. Use that cursor to indicate the box with a press-slide-
release of the left mouse button.

 Output: Choose "Item Selection" to have the items highlighted on the one-line, or "Text" to
have those items listed on a Query text report.

 ID Name Contains: To select only items with certain characters in their names, type those
characters here. If this field is left blank, the ID names will not be considered for selection
purposes. In this field, there are some special characters that can be used. For Note items,
the actual note text is considered.

Note: Entering the Database Edit focus will clear any existing analysis results.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Item Selection  88

Getting an Item's Database Dialog Box

To open the dialog for any equipment, double-click on the item (select the item and then
choose Edit Selected Item from the Menu bar). The appropriate database edit dialog box
will come up with your chosen piece of equipment as the current item. When you are
finished, close the dialog box with the OK button, and you will return to the one-line. If you
have not filled out all of the necessary fields, you will receive a message asking if you want
to save what you have entered. This message can be turned off in the dialog accessed by
choosing Tools Options General.

If you want to specify the information for multiple items of the same type, the fastest way is
to use Copy and Paste as described in "Copying an Item's Database Information" on pages
88 and 91.

Example Database Dialog Box

Copying an Item's Database Information

First select the item you want to copy from, then choose button in the ribbon (Edit
Copy from the Menu bar). This will take the selected item's data and place it on the
EasyPower clipboard. Then select the items you want to copy the information to. Recall that
you can select more than one by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key down when you select
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Entering Item Data Using Tables  89

additional items. Finally, choose or Edit Paste from the Menu bar. This will take the
data stored on the EasyPower clipboard and apply it to the currently selected items while
leaving the ID name and bus connection information undisturbed. Note that the data is still
on the EasyPower clipboard, so you can repeat the select-paste operations for as many items
as desired.

Entering Item Data Using Tables

An EasyPower database can be edited according to separate equipment tables. For example,
you can edit all buses from the same database edit dialog box. When the dialog box for a
particular equipment table comes up, you are presented with one database item at a time.
Database edit dialog boxes have their own Toolbars to help you move around in the table,
add, copy, and delete items, and so forth. When you are finished editing a database table,
click on the OK button to close the dialog box.

Database Dialog Toolbar

Database Dialog Box Toolbar

Moving Around in the Table

When a Table dialog box is opened, it will show the item you were editing the last time that
dialog box was open. At the left end of the dialog box's toolbar, there are four movement
buttons: , , , and . These buttons let you move to other items in the Table which
are listed according to the alphabetical order of their ID names.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Entering Item Data Using Tables  90

Any changes you make to an item's data in the dialog box will be made permanent when you
do one of the following:

 Move to a different item in the table.

 Close the table by choosing OK.

Note that if you close the table with Cancel, the changes you made to the current item will be
discarded. However, changes made to other items while the dialog box was in use are
retained.

Resetting Changes Made to the Current Item

Clicking on the Toolbar's button will restore the current item's database fields to what
they were when you opened it and before you started making changes. Once you choose OK
or move to a different item, those changes are made permanent and cannot be reset.

Deleting an Item Using Its Database Dialog Box

Use the dialog's toolbar button to delete the current item.

Adding a New Item

To add a new item, click on the dialog's Toolbar button. A new item will be presented
with default values already filled in except for certain dialog box fields that you must fill in
before doing an analysis. Note that any time a new item is created, it will be given a unique
ID name composed of the item type followed by a number. For example, if you add a Cable,
the default ID name might be "C-24". You can change this name any time you want by
typing a new one in the ID Name field of the dialog box.

Duplicating the Current Item

To make an exact copy of the current item, click on the dialog's Toolbar button. The new
item will be an exact copy. Then you can type in a new unique ID name and change the
connect (e.g. "From" and "To" buses) unless you want it to be connected to the same buses as
the one it was copied from.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Notes (Free Text) on One-line  91

Copying Another Item's Database Information

Bring up the database edit dialog box on the item you want to copy data from. Click on the
dialog's Toolbar button to take the current item's data and places it on the EasyPower
clipboard. Bring up the database edit dialog box for the destination item or click on the
dialog's Toolbar button to create a new item. (The destination item's type must match the
source item's type.) Finally, click on the dialog's Toolbar button. This will take the data
stored on the EasyPower clipboard and apply it to the current item.

Connecting an Item Using Its Database Dialog Box

To specify connectivity between an item and the buses it is attached to, type the bus names in
the item's database edit dialog box or choose it from the drop down list. Note that it is easier
to establish connections using the dynamic one-line diagram as described in "Adding Items
to the One-line" on page 75. You must establish bus connections before you will be allowed
to OK the dialog box.

Activating/Deactivating an Item Using Its Database Dialog Box

Each database edit dialog box for a piece of equipment comes with a Status On/Off radio
button field. Make the appropriate item current, then click On or Off as desired to activate
or deactivate that item. Inactive items remain in the database, but are ignored for any
analysis operation.

Notes (Free Text) on One-line

EasyPower Notes are used to annotate your one-line with arbitrary text information. They
are very flexible in their font, size, style, border, and colors, rivaling the capabilities of most
CAD systems. Notes can optionally include leaders that point to specific locations on the
one-line.

Adding a Note

To add a Note to your one-line diagram, choose in the Equipment Palette toolbox (Insert
Note from the Menu bar). The rubber band box cursor will appear. Indicate a Note
outline box on the one-line with a press-slide-release of the left mouse button. Don't worry
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Notes (Free Text) on One-line  92

too much about getting the box "just right" when you first indicate it; the size, shape, and
location are very easy to change later.

Inside the Note outline, you will see a flashing insertion cursor similar to that of a word
processor. You may type up to 325 characters, and there is no need to press the Enter key at
the end of a line; the program automatically "wraps" to the next line when needed. However,
if you want to force a new line somewhere, use Ctrl-Enter to insert a carriage return. When
you click outside the Note, the outline disappears and your Note is done.

Editing the Contents of a Note

To edit the text in a Note, first select the note by clicking somewhere inside the Note text.
You will see the outline box, but not the flashing insertion cursor. Click again near where
you want to change the text, and you will see the flashing insertion cursor like you had when
the Note was first created. You can also click on an unselected note with the right mouse
button and choose Edit from the menu.

Make your changes using the Windows editing keys, which includes Left, Right, Up, Down
(Arrow keys), Home, End, and Delete. While editing a Note, use Ctrl-X for Cut, Ctrl-C
for Copy, and Ctrl-V for Paste. Or you can use the editing menu that comes up when you
click the right mouse button.

Dragging and Resizing a Note

Just like any other one-line item, you drag a Note with a press-slide-release of the left mouse
button. During the dragging procedure, the Note's position is represented by a simple box.

To select a Note for resizing, click anywhere in the text and you will see the outline box.
You can drag the eight handles (small squares at the box corners and sides) to change the size
and shape of the Note's outline box. The words in your Note will be automatically
reformatted to fill the new space. If you make the outline box too small you will not be able
to see all of the Note.

Please see "Text Size and TrueType" on page 94 for an important discussion of how
TrueType affects the right-hand side of text.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Notes (Free Text) on One-line  93

Deleting a Note

To delete a Note, select it by either clicking on it once or by including it with the items
selected using a rubber rectangle. Delete it using from the ribbon (Edit Delete
from the Menu bar) or the Delete keyboard key.

If you clicked on the Note twice and have the flashing insertion cursor, the Delete key will
erase the character to the right of the cursor. If your intent is to delete the entire Note, click
outside the outline box, then click on the Note just once to select it. Now, you will be able to
use the Delete key, or right mouse click between the outline box and the dashed box, and
choose Delete from the menu.

Adding a Note With a Leader

To add a Note which specifically points to something on your one-line, choose button or
Edit Add Note With Leader from the Menu bar. Your first point (mouse button down)
will set the terminator at the target location, and the second point (mouse button up) will set
the initial location of the Note outline box. You can drag and resize the Note's outline box
later as described in "Dragging and Resizing a Note".

When the Note is selected, you will see an additional handle at the leader's terminator. Use
press-slide-release of the mouse to drag this handle and change the target location.

Changing Note Properties

Note properties are the various visual parameters that apply to an EasyPower Note. For
example, the font, size, and color are some of the properties you can set. A Note's properties
apply to all of the characters in that Note.

Double-click on the Note to bring up the Note Properties dialog box. If the flashing insertion
cursor is already showing, double-click on the outline box or right click on the outline box
and choose the Properties command from the context menu. Alternatively, you can select
the Note and choose the Format Note… command from the Menu bar.

If you choose Format Note… with multiple Notes selected, the changes you make will be
applied to all of them. Any properties that are the same among all of the selected Notes will
be filled into the appropriate dialog box field as defaults. Those properties that are different
will show a blank field. If you leave such dialog fields alone, those properties will be left
unchanged in the selected Notes. If you change any of the blank fields, those properties will
be applied to all of the selected Notes.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Notes (Free Text) on One-line  94

If you choose Format Note… when there are no notes selected, you will set the default
properties for Notes that are not yet created. (Notice the dialog box is now titled Default
Note Properties.) These default settings are saved on the computer.

For information on specific settings, see "Note Properties".

Selecting Many Notes At Once

To select many Notes in one operation, click from the ribbon the drop down for Find-Select
and choose Query (Edit Query from the Menu bar). You can optionally search for Notes
that contain specific text, and you can restrict the region of the one-line to view. See "" on
page 86 for more information.

Text Size and TrueType

EasyPower supports Windows TrueType fonts for its text display. This makes it possible for
EasyPower to display text many times faster than traditional CAD programs, since those
programs display text stroke-by-stroke. In comparison, EasyPower can blast out an entire
TrueType character in one operation.

The big advantage of using TrueType is speed. However, there is one characteristic of
Windows TrueType that you should be aware of. When EasyPower is ready to display text,
it tells Windows that it needs a screen font of a certain size. Windows responds by scaling
the chosen font in order to satisfy the size requirements.

However, since TrueType font size rounds to the nearest point, the on-screen text might be a
slightly different actual size relative to surrounding lines and symbols. (A point, used to
measure font height in the printing industry, is approximately 0.014 inches.) Height-wise,
this difference is unnoticeable. In the width, however, the slight difference accumulates over
the entire text string. This can make the text wider or narrower for different zoom factors,
especially for long text like "This motor is on-line during day shift only."

Long text string viewed at 100%

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Notes (Free Text) on One-line  95

EasyPower positions text with the upper-left corner. So while that corner will remain fixed
relative to lines and symbols, the end location of a text string is less predictable.

Same text string viewed at 30% -- notice overlap

You can minimize the impact of this TrueType characteristic by keeping the right-hand side
of text away from lines and symbols. In other words, don't nestle text up to symbols on the
right. Also, shorter lines of text will be less affected than longer lines.

Shorter lines of text, not nestled up to symbol, viewed at 100%

 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Note Properties  96

Same text string viewed at 30% -- overlap gone

Note Properties

Appearance tab of Note Properties Dialog Box

If you choose Format Note… from the Menu bar when there are no Notes selected, you
set the default properties for notes that are not yet created. (Notice the dialog box is now
titled Default Note Properties). These default settings are saved with the database file.

Text Settings

 Text Color: The color of the text inside the box. The dialog box field shows you the name
of the color, along with a rectangle giving a sample of that color.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Note Properties  97

 Background Color: The color inside the outline box. For example, you might want to flag
a "warning" note with a red background. Be careful not to set the Text Color to be the same
as the Background Color, or the text will be invisible.

 Note Margin: The amount of space, in inches, to reserve around the Note text. This setting
makes the most sense when the Note has a border.

Border Settings

 Style: You can choose to have your Note text surrounded by nothing (None), a Box, or a
Rounded Box.

 Color: If you do choose to have a border, this is the color it will be. If this particular note
has a leader, the leader will also be this color.

 Weight: How bold to make the border line. You can choose from five weights, which are
shown in the drop down menu for this field.

Visibility

Visible in Which Focus: Which EasyPower focus the Note should be visible in. For
existing Notes, your choices are "All", "Database Edit", "Short Circuit", and "Power Flow".
You can check as many as desired, or check "All" to have it visible in each focus. For Notes
not yet created, your choices are "Each Focus" or "Current Focus Only".

Note visibility can be changed later by selecting the Note and then choosing Tools Note
Properties, even if the Note is invisible. (You will be asked if you want the operation to
apply to any invisible Notes that are selected.)

Leader Properties

The "Leader Properties" dialog box comes up if you click on the Leader tab in the Note
Properties dialog box. If your Note Properties dialog box is for default notes (see
"Changing Note Properties" on page 93) you will be setting properties for Leaders not yet
created, and the Include Leader field will not be visible.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Note Properties  98

Leader tab of Note Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box gives you the following choices:

 Include Leader: This box is checked if you want a leader on your Note so that it can refer
to something specific on the one-line. If you check this box on a Note that was originally
added without a leader, the target point will be set to an arbitrary location and you will want
to drag into position later. See "Adding a Note With a Leader" on page 93 for details.

 Start Location: Though the leader will start from the side, you can choose where on the
side, at the "Top", "Center", or "Bottom" of the text. If the choice is "Top", the leader is
aligned with the first line of text. If the choice is "Bottom", the leader is aligned with the last
line of text.

 Start Side: You can choose "From Left" which forces the leader to start at the left side of
the text, "From Right" which forces the leader to start on the right side of the text, or "Auto"
which determines automatically whether to go left or right depending on the location of the
target point.

 Start Length: The length of the horizontal line segment which starts the leader, expressed in
inches.

 Angle of Leader Line: After the initial horizontal segment, you can have the main leader
line be constrained to a certain angle. This makes it possible to have a consistent appearance
from one Note to the next.

 Terminator Style: How you want the leader to end. The choices are shown graphically in
the drop down menu.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Note Properties  99

 Terminator Size Factor: Each leader terminator style has a default size. You can modify
that size by applying a size factor other than 1.0. For example, if you want an arrowhead to
be twice as big as the default, you would enter "2.0" in this field. This factor is applied to
both the length and width of the terminator; thus the shape is preserved.

 Terminator Width Factor: Each leader terminator style has a default shape. You can
modify that shape by applying a width factor other than 1.0. For example, if you want an
arrowhead to be twice as wide as the default shape would be, you would enter "2.0" in this
field.

Note Fonts

EasyPower offers a large number of Fonts with the ability to vary sizes and styles so you can
customize your notes just the way you like them. The dialog accessed by choosing Tools
Note Fonts looks very similar to the dialog box accessed by choosing Tools Options
Fonts.

Font tab of Note Properties Dialog Box

Here you choose the Font, Style and Size of the text in the selected note. If no notes are
selected these will be the default settings for any notes created later.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Note Properties  100

Inserting Box in One-line

You can insert a box in the one-line by choosing the button from the Equipment Palette
toolbox (Insert  Box from the menu). The first click of the mouse defines the top left
corner of the box. While holding the mouse button down, drag the mouse to define the
bottom right corner of the box. You can edit the box size by clicking on it to select it and
dragging the sides or corner.

To format the box properties, double click on the box edge. The Box Properties dialog will
appear, in which you can set the Style, Color and Weight of the edges of the box. You can
also insert a box using the Insert  Note command. However, you cannot type any text
inside the box you create with Insert  Box command.

Box Properties dialog

Style: You can select from the following:

 Box: Single line, sharp corners.
 Rounded Box: Single line, rounded corners.
 Double Box: Double line, sharp corners.

Color: You can select the desired color from the palette.

Weight: You can select the desired thickness of the box.

 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Moving and Copying Groups of Items  101

Styles: (a) Box; (b) Rounded Box; (c) Double Box

Inserting Picture in One-line

To insert a picture in one-line, select the button from the Equipment Palette toolbox
(from the menu, Insert  Picture), and select the file that has the picture. The picture file
format can be .bmp, .gif, .tif, .jpg, .png, .wmf, .ico, or .emf. Double clicking on an inserted
picture allows you to specify it as On Top, On Bottom or Set As Background. You can also
insert pictures to TCC plots.

Picture Properties

Moving and Copying Groups of Items

EasyPower has the ability to move and copy large groups of items on the one-line by
dragging that group dynamically on the screen.

Group Move

You move groups of items by dragging them with the left mouse button.

1. Select items to move.

2. When you bring the cursor arrow close to the selected items, a four-headed

arrow will appear. Click the left mouse button and drag to move the items. As long as the
four-headed arrow appears, you can drag the items anywhere you like.

3. After you move the items to the desired location, click anywhere in the one line where the
four-headed arrow does not appear. The items will be deselected.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Moving and Copying Groups of Items  102

All connectivity is retained during a move. The results are identical to what you would see if
you could somehow manually move each of the buses and items the exact same direction and
distance.

Group Copy

1. Select items to copy.

2. Choose button from the ribbon (Edit Copy from the Menu bar), which is
available only from the Database focus. Alternatively, you could press the keys [Ctrl]+[C]
from the keyboard.

3. Choose button (Edit Paste from the Menu bar), also available only from the Database
focus. Alternatively, you could press the keys [Ctrl]+[V] from the keyboard.

4. Set the copy's position by clicking anywhere outside the group's bounding rectangle or
pressing the Enter key

Any connections to other items in the same selection group are retained in the copied items.
Connections to items outside the group end up as "unconnected".

Copying Subsystems

Often, Group Copying is used to create new subsystems in your one-line by starting with one
that already exists. You might want the names of the new subsystems to mirror the names in
the original one, with some minor change. For example, suppose you have names of
"T5/9927", "T5/9928", "T5/9929", etc. and you want their respective copies to have the
names "T6/9927", "T6/9928", "T6/9929", etc. for the first copy, "T7/9927", "T7/9928",
"T7/9929", etc. for the second copy, and so forth. One way to accomplish that is:

1. Choose "Alphabetic" for the variable text type in the dialog box accessed by choosing Tools
Options Clipboard, and then choose some unique character like "%" for the prefix.

2. Select the system you want, and use Copy and then Paste to produce the subsystem. After
the copy is done, you will have names like "T5/9927%A", "T5/9928%A", "T5/9929%A",
etc., "T5/9927%B", "T5/9928%B", "T5/9929%B", etc.

3. Select the items in the first subsystem and choose Change button from the ribbon, and
then choose ID Name (Edit Change ID Name from the Menu bar). Use "T5/" for the
Replace these characters field and "T6/" for the With these characters field.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Grouping One-line Items  103

4. Select the items in the second subsystem and repeat, except use "T7/" for the With these
characters field.

5. Select all of the subsystems together and use "%*>" for the Replace these characters field,
and nothing (no characters) for the With these characters field. This will delete the "%A",
"%B", etc. characters from the names, leaving only names like "T6/9927", "T6/9928",
"T6/9929", etc. for the first copy, "T7/9927", "T7/9928", "T7/9929", for the second copy, and
so forth.

Grouping One-line Items

Items in the one-line can be grouped to form a single graphical object. After items are
grouped they can be selected with a single click, moved, copied and pasted all at once. To
group items, first select the items. Right mouse click on the one-line space. Select
Grouping  Group from the context menu.

Grouping one-line items

 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Ways to Change ID Names  104

Ways to Change ID Names

ID names can be up to 16 characters long. There are three ways of modifying ID names in
the database.

1. To change a single name with that item's database edit dialog box, double-click on the item
and type a new ID name in its ID Name field.

2. Specify names used by Group Copy in the dialog box accessed by choosing Tools
Options Clipboard, see "Moving and Copying Groups of Items" on page 101.

3. To change ID names of multiple items already in the database, first select the items you want
to modify. Then, use the dialog box accessed by choosing Change button from the
ribbon, and then choosing ID Name (Edit Change ID Name from the Menu bar).

Change ID Name

Choosing Change button from the ribbon, and then choosing ID Name (Edit
Change ID Name from the Menu bar) will bring up the following dialog box:

Change ID Name Dialog Box

This dialog gives you the following choices.

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Ways to Change ID Names  105

Change ID For These Types Only: No matter what item types are in the current selection,
only item types you have checked here will be modified.

Replacement Type: If you choose "Generate unique name", each selected item will receive
an automatically-generated unique name that is based on the item type and the next number
in sequence. For example, if the last transformer you added had the name "TX-15", the first
changed transformer will get the name "TX-16". The new name is not based on the item's
current name. If you choose "Character replacement", the ID names are modified according
to the information in the Replace these characters...With these characters" dialog fields.

Replace these characters: Type the characters that you want to replace with different
characters. For example, if you have a group of items with ID names of T5/99NL-1,
T5/99NL-2, T5/99NL-3, etc. and you want to change them to T5/97MP-1, T5/97MP-2,
T5/97MP-3, etc.; you would type "99NL-" as the characters to replace.

In this field, there are special characters you can use. (Do not use <,>,?,*, or \ in the With
these characters field, since they have no special meaning there.)

Beginning of name (<): Ignores a match unless it starts at the beginning of a name. For
example, if an item's name is "T5/99T5-3" and you want to replace only the "T5" at the
beginning, you would use "<T5" as the string to replace.

End of name (>): Ignores a match unless it is found at the end of a name. For example, if
an item's name is "T5/9AB5/AB" and you want to replace only the occurrence of "AB" at the
end, you would use "AB>" as the string to replace.

Wildcard, one character (?): Matches any one character, no matter what it is. For example,
if an item's name is "T5/949-3" and you want to replace the slash and the next three
characters (whatever they are) with the letter "G", you would use "/???" as the string to
replace, giving "T5G-3".

Wildcard, one or more characters (*): Matches any number of characters, no matter what
they are. For example, if an item's name is "T5/949-3" and you want to replace everything
from the "/" through the "-" with the letter "G", you would use "/*-" as the string to replace,
giving "T5G3".

Next character is literal (\): Lets you deal with the other special characters without them
being interpreted as having special meanings. For example, if an item's name is "<T5/949-3"
and you want to get rid of the "<", you would use "\<" as the string to replace. Without the
backslash, that "<" character would be interpreted as Beginning of Name. For a literal
backslash, use two in a row: "\\".
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Database Report (Browser)  106

With these characters: Type the new characters you want. Each occurrence of the
character string which is in the Replace these characters field is replaced by the characters
given here.

Name conflict handling: It is possible that, after doing the character replacement you
requested, the resulting name will be one that already exists in the database. If that happens,
it is called a name conflict. This dialog box field enables you to tell EasyPower what to do if
that happens. If you choose "Generate unique name", a new name will be chosen as
described above for the Replacement Type field. If you choose "Don't change", EasyPower
will leave that item's name alone. Any time a name conflict occurs, the affected items will be
listed in an error report.

After the operation is done, a dialog box comes up telling you how many names were
changed.

Database Report (Browser)

EasyPower gives users access to the database by means of a spreadsheet report. This
provides users with the ability to:

1. View the database information in a clear and concise format;

2. Easily verify the data entered for your power system;

3. Modify database values without returning to the one-line;

4. Copy the spreadsheet cells and paste the database information into an external spreadsheet
program;

5. Configure which database fields (columns) show or print. Multiple configurations can be
saved.

Viewing the Browser/Report

The following figure gives an example of an EasyPower database report:

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Database Report (Browser)  107

Database Report Browser

This spreadsheet report (or database browser) is accessed by clicking on EasyPower

button and choosing Database (File Database from the menu bar).

You will get a report showing the data of the all the items in the one-line. You must be in
Database Edit focus to access this report. The equipment types are divided into separate tabs.
The first tab provides a tally of all the equipment items currently in the system. The other
tabs separate the database items by equipment type. In the above example, the Motors tab is
selected.

Typically, all equipment items in the database are listed in the database report. However, the
items in the report can be filtered. This is accomplished by selecting only the desired items
on the one-line before choosing EasyPower button Database. Only the selected one-
line items will show in the report. Hence, the EasyPower one-line query function can be used
to select which equipment items display in the database report.

To view the Database Report, choose EasyPower button  Database  Database

Report. This is an HTML report with all equipment tables appearing in the same window.

Browser Search Engine

Pressing the (Find) button will bring up the following dialog box:
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Database Report (Browser)  108

Find Dialog Box in the Database Browser

Using this dialog box, text in the spreadsheet can be searched. This Find dialog only
searches text in the same column as the currently selected spreadsheet cell. Using this
feature, individual equipment items can be found if at least part of the ID Name is known.

Copying the Spreadsheet Data

This EasyPower database browser is compatible with other standard spreadsheets. One has
the ability to copy (using or Ctrl-C) multiple cells from this EasyPower database
spreadsheet and paste into programs such as Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel. From
these external programs, the EasyPower database information can be converted to other
database formats. (EasyPower also allows you to export its entire database to a comma
delimited format using the EasyPower button Export one-line dialog box.)
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Database Report (Browser)  109

Modifying the Database using the Browser

Database Report Browser with Open Motor Data Dialog

The EasyPower spreadsheet report is a true browse of the database. Double-clicking on a

row in the spreadsheet will bring up an appropriate database dialog box. In the figure above,
the row for motor “M-14” was double-clicked. This activated the Motor Data dialog box for
motor “M-14”. From this dialog box, the database information can be modified. When OK
is pressed, the changes will be reflected in the report.

Database Report Configurations

You can configure database reports to display just the desired columns. This helps you to
keep your reports concise. You can add multiple configurations.

To configure the database reports, click on Report Config button. You will get the
Database Report Configurations dialog.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Database Report (Browser)  110

Database Report Configurations dialog

Choose Add button to add a new configuration. You will get the Report Configuration
dialog.

Report Configuration dialog

For every equipment you wish to configure the report, check or uncheck the column heading
checkboxes. First select the equipment on the Equipment panel of the dialog. Then make
you choices in Columns panel.

Choose Save As… button, type the name for the new configuration and choose OK.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Global Motor and Load Editing  111

Save Configuration dialog

Select the desired configuration.

You can add, delete or edit configurations.

Other Functions with Database Reports

Printing reports: Select Print button from the ribbon.

Export to Excel: Select Open With Excel button from the ribbon.

Export to Word: Word has a limit of 63 columns. Therefore for equipment with more than 63
columns, you will need to use the Report Config to limit the number of columns in the report.

Global Motor and Load Editing

You can modify the scaling factor for motors and loads by selecting the desired items on the
one-line and clicking on Change button and choosing Scaling Factor from the list.
This will bring up a dialog box as shown below.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Global Motor and Load Editing  112

Change Scaling Factor Dialog Box

The dialog box contains the following fields:

Specified Values: When checked, this allows changes to the non-SCADA Scaling factor
fields in motors and loads and to the Connected field in motors. The Connected field is
always classified as a Specified Value.

SCADA Values: When checked, this allows changes to the SCADA Scaling factor fields in
motors and loads.

Load Data - Constant kVA: Changes the Constant kVA scaling factor to this value in the
selected loads.

Load Data - Constant I: Changes the Constant I scaling factor to this value in the selected
loads.

Load Data - Constant Z: Changes Constant Z scaling factor to this value in the selected
loads.

Motor Data - Scaling factor: Changes the Scaling factor field to this value in the selected
motors.

Motor Data - Connected: Changes the Connected field to this value in the selected motors.

MCC Data - Scaling factor: Changes the Scaling factor field to this value in the selected
MCCs.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Global Motor and Load Editing  113

Panel Data - Scaling factor: Changes the Scaling factor field to this value in the selected
Panel Schedules.

In the Power Flow focus, a similar dialog box is used except the title is Temporarily
Change Scaling factor and the Connected field is omitted. This dialog can be accessed by
clicking on the Change Scaling Factor button in the ribbon.

Global Scaling Factor Changing

The scaling factor of motors and loads can be globally scaled by selecting the items on the
one-line and then choosing Change Scaling Factor button from the ribbon. This allows the
user to quickly modify the amount of running motors in motor groups so the load flow
analysis can closely resemble different real-life conditions.

This feature is available in either the Database Edit focus or in the Power Flow focus. Global
factor changes made in the Power Flow focus are only temporary and will not be saved with
the database. However, global scaling factor changes made in the Database Edit focus will
be saved with the database.

Steps to Global Changing

1. Select the items to scale. Only the motors and loads selected will be considered. All other
selected items will be ignored.

2. While in Database Edit focus, click on Change button and choose Scaling Factor
from the list. The Change Scaling Factor dialog box will appear. While in PowerFlow
focus, click on the Change Scaling Factor button in the ribbon.

3. Select the desired scaling percentages from the given combo boxes. By default the scaling
fields come up as 100%. The user must select a percent value between 0% and 200% in one
or more of the scaling fields to get a change in the corresponding field(s) of the selected
item(s). Any fields left at 100% will mean that the corresponding fields in the selected item
dialog boxes will not be changed.

4. Press the OK button. A message will tell the user the number of items being changed and
then ask the user for confirmation.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  114

Schedules
You can insert schedules of panels, MCC and buses in the one line. To insert a schedule,
select the panel, MCC or bus. Then right-click to choose Schedules from the context menu.
Continue on to choose Insert Schedule. The schedule spreadsheet will be inserted on the
one-line. You can drag the schedule to place it in the desired location. To insert schedules for
multiple items at once, select multiple items with the mouse holding the [Shift] key down.
Right-click on a blank area in the one-line and choose Schedules  Insert Schedule.

Inserting MCC Schedule in the one-line

You can change the drawing scale of schedules via the dialog Options  Equipment
dialog. Change the Scale under Schedule Defaults in the Options dialog.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  115

Schedule Default Scale in Options dialog

To delete the schedules from the one-line, select the schedule and press the [Delete] key in
the keyboard.

Merge Data with Excel File

You can export the schedules of MCC, panels, and buses to Excel files. Select the desired
equipment or group of equipments first. Then right click and choose Schedules  Merge
Data with Excel File. Each equipment schedule will be placed in separate sheets within the
same file. The path of the file can be specified using Merge Options… command. Once the
file has been created you can add more schedules to it. Each sheet for the file will be named
with the ID Name of the bus, MCC or panel. Merging the schedule data twice will overwrite
the previous data. You can format the sheets or cells in the Excel files. The format will
remain the same even if the data is updated.

Excel Merge Options for schedules

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  116

Printing Schedules

To print schedules, right click on the bus, MCC or panel and choose Schedules  Print
Schedules…. The Print Schedules dialog will appear. In this dialog you can specify the
items for which you want to print the schedules, by checking the checkboxes.

Print Schedules dialog

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  117

Printout of a panel schedule

Showing SC kA and Arc Flash Hazard in Panel Schedules

You can display the short circuit currents and arc flash hazard results in panel schedules.

To show the short circuit kA in the schedule for any panel, go to Short Circuit focus and
choose from the ribbon, Fault Bus(es)  Advanced…  Fault and Store Sym kA. This
will store the short circuit result to the panel database. For the SC value to appear, your panel
schedule template must have the variable specified. For details see the section on schedule
templates below.

To show the arc flash hazard in the schedule for any panel, go to Short Circuit focus and
choose from the ribbon, Fault Bus(es)  Advanced…  Fault and Store Arc Flash. This
will store the arc flash hazard results to the panel database. For the arc flash value to appear,
your panel schedule template must have the variable specified. For details see the section on
schedule templates below.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  118

Export Schedules

You can export schedules to .dxf files or to XML files. AutoCAD can read dxf files and
Excel can read XML files. Right click on the MCC, panel or bus and choose Schedules 
Export Schedules… You can specify the path for the export file, the name and the type of
file. If you have multiple schedules, you can export them to the same file or to separate files
by choosing the dialog options.

Export Schedules dialog

Schedule Templates

The schedules can be customized through templates. The schedule templates are text files
with xml language that can be edited with Notepad. The file name extensions for schedule
templates are as follows:

MCC: *.ezmcc

Panel: *.ezpnl

Panelboard: *.ezpbd

Switchgear, switchboard: *.ezswg

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  119

For Windows XP, the default schedules are in the data folder C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\ESA\EasyPower\9.0\Schedules. For Windows 7 and Vista, the
templates are in the folder C:\ProgramData\ESA\EasyPower\9.0\Schedules.

For any computer, you can choose the default schedule through the Options dialog. In the
Options dialog, go to File Locations tab and choose the desired Default Template.

Options dialog – Default Templates

You can also choose templates that may be file specific. To do this, click on the EasyPower
button  Properties. Then check the “Specified” checkbox and choose the template
file.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  120

File Properties – Schedule Template

Schedule Layout

Before you create a new schedule template it is important to plan the layout, specifically the
number of columns and the width of each column. It is recommended that you make a copy
of one of the templates and modify, rather than starting from scratch. Pay close attention to
syntax such as < > / “ %. If one character of syntax is missing, the schedule template may not
function correctly. It is a good idea to save backup copies so you can go back if you have
trouble identifying why the template is not working.

After the opening properties section in the template file, the number of columns is the first
thing defined. In this document all the samples are from the default panelboard schedule.

Example:
<Column width =".9"/>
<Column width ="2.4"/>
<Column width ="0.6"/>
<Column width ="0.6"/>
<Column width =".9"/>
<Column width =".9"/>
<Column width =".9"/>
<Column width =".9"/>
<Column width ="0.4"/>
<Column width ="0.4"/>
<Column width ="0.6"/>
<Column width ="0.6"/>
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  121

<Column width ="0.6"/>

<Column width ="0.6"/>
<Column width ="0.6"/>

In this example, a total of 15 columns will be created because there are 15 lines. It may be
helpful to imagine setting up a spreadsheet and setting the column width. For simplicity, you
may want to make all the columns the same width. It is also important to remember that you
can merge 2 or more columns together to create a larger text block.

Schedule Data

After a section for settings the schedule formatting begins. Example:

<tr valign = "Top" >
<th rowspan = "2" colspan = "3">Type : %SwitchType%</th>
<th rowspan = "2" colspan = "3">Name : %Name% </th>
<th rowspan = "2" colspan = "9">Manufacturer : %Manufacturer%</th>
</tr>
<tr>
</tr>

Notice that the tag <tr> begins a new row in the schedule and </tr> ends that row. Within the
first row, observe that rowspan and colspan attributes are used to create larger boxes for text
in the schedule. Note that if you use the rowspan attribute you must create empty rows below
to merge with according to the number in quotes after the rowspan attribute. In the example
above, one empty row is created with <tr> </tr> at the end. You may also observe some
words inside the percent (%) symbol. These are variables that reference data from the
EasyPower database that the template is being used with. A full list of variables for each
template is at the end of this section.

The grid is the main part of the template where most of the data will be. The key to the grid
is the use of <nextrow/> toward the bottom. This command will go through all the equipment
data for that template and generate as many rows as necessary and populate them with the
available data.
<grid>
<tr align = "Center" valign = "Center">
<td >%FeederID%</td>
<td >%Description%</td>
<td >%Type%</td>
<td >%DeviceRating%</td>
<td >%BrkrMfg%</td>
<td >%BrkrStyle%</td>
<td >%TripMfg%</td>
<td >%TripStyle%</td>
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  122

<td >%TripSensor%</td>
<td >%TripPlug%</td>
<td >%CondRating%</td>
<td >%ConnVA%</td>
<td >%DemandVA%</td>
<td >%CodeVA%</td>
<td >%DesignVA%</td>
<nextrow />
</tr>
</grid>

Schedule Variables

Below is a list of all variables available for each type of schedule template. All variables are
used in the default schedules provided with EasyPower. Check the default schedule if you
need to see how each variable is used.

Panel Variables

%Connected_A_Watts% → Connected A (Watts)

%Connected_A_Vars%
%Connected_A_VA%
%Connected_A_PF%
%Connected_A_I%
%Connected_B_Watts%
%Connected_B_Vars%
%Connected_B_VA%
%Connected_B_PF%
%Connected_B_I%
%Connected_C_Watts%
%Connected_C_Vars%
%Connected_C_VA%
%Connected_C_PF%
%Connected_C_I%
%Connected_Total_Watts%
%Connected_Total_Vars%
%Connected_Total_VA%
%Connected_Total_PF%
%Connected_Total_I%
%Demand_A_Watts%
%Demand_A_Vars%
%Demand_A_VA%
→ Connected A (Vars)
→ Connected A (VA)
→ Connected A (PF)
→ Connected A (I)
→ Connected B (Watts)
→ Connected B (Vars)
→ Connected B (VA)
→ Connected B (PF)
→ Connected B (I)
→ Connected C (Watts)
→ Connected C (Vars)
→ Connected C (VA)
→ Connected C (PF)
→ Connected C (I)
→ Connected Total (Watts)
→ Connected Total (Vars)
→ Connected Total (VA)
→ Connected Total (PF)
→ Connected Total (I)
→ Demand A (Watts)
→ Demand A (Vars)
→ Demand A (VA)
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  123

%Demand_A_PF% → Demand A (PF)

%Demand_A_I% → Demand A (I)
%Demand_B_Watts% → Demand B (Watts)
%Demand_B_Vars% → Demand B (Vars)
%Demand_B_VA% → Demand B (VA)
%Demand_B_PF% → Demand B (PF)
%Demand_B_I% → Demand B (I)
%Demand_C_Watts% → Demand C (Watts)
%Demand_C_Vars% → Demand C (Vars)
%Demand_C_VA% → Demand C (VA)
%Demand_C_PF% → Demand C (PF)
%Demand_C_I% → Demand C (I)
%Demand_Total_Watts% → Demand Total (Watts)
%Demand_Total_Vars% → Demand Total (Vars)
%Demand_Total_VA% → Demand Total (VA)
%Demand_Total_PF% → Demand Total (PF)
%Demand_Total_I% → Demand Total (I)
%Code_Factor_VA% → Code Factor (VA)
%Code_Factor_kVA% → Code Factor (kVA)
%Code_Factor_I% → Code Factor (I)
%Design_VA% → Design (VA)
%Design_kVA% → Design (kVA)
%Design_I% → Design (I)
%EasyPower_Version% → EasyPower Version
%Name% → ID Name
%Location% → Location, Specifications tab
%Panel_Rating_kA% → Panel Rating (kA); Specifications tab
OBSOLETE %Aic% → Panel Rating (kA); Specifications tab
%Current_Date_Time% → Current Date/Time;
%Panel_Description% → Descriptions; Specifications tab
%Manufacturer% → Mfr; Specifications tab
%Type% → Type; Specifications tab
%Mounting% → Mounting; Specifications tab
%Enclosure% → Enclosure; Specifications tab
%Fed_By% → Fed By; Specifications tab
%Header_Comment% → Header Comment; Specifications tab
%Service% → Service; Specifications tab
%ProjectName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
OBSOLETE %fileName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
%FileName% → EasyPower File Name; File Properties
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  124

%Voltage% → Panel Voltage

%Amps% → Main Bus Rating (A); Specifications tab
%Main% ` → Incoming Main (A); Incoming Tab
%VAUnits% → Panel Load Units; Description Tab

Short Circuit
%sc_sym_a% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Sym kA
%sc_sym_ka% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Sym kA
%afh_incident_energy% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_boundary% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_ppe% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash

Grid
%row% → Row number
%Library_Load% → Library Load
%Description% → Load Description
%Load_Location% → Load Location
%BreakerAmps%/%Poles% → Breaker Amps/Poles (must be used like this)
%CodeFactor% → Code Factor Name (eg Dwelling Ltg, etc)
%CB_Fuse_Poles% → CB/Fuse Poles
%PhaseATotal% → Phase A Total, invalidated when inapplicable
%PhaseBTotal% → Phase B Total, invalidated when inapplicable
%PhaseCTotal% → Phase C Total, invalidated when inapplicable

Code Factors
%cfRow% → Code Factor Row Number; Summary tab
%cfName% → Code Factor Name (eg Dwelling Ltg, etc)
%cfPhase1% → Aph (VA)
%cfPhase2% → Bph (VA)
%cfPhase3% → Cph (VA)
%cfPhaseRowTotal% → Phase Row Total (VA)
%cfPhaseTotal% → (Calculated) Phase Total
%TotalConnVA% → Total Connected Load (VA)
%TotalConnAmps% → Total Connected Load (Amps)
%TotalDemandVA% → Total Demand Load (VA)
%TotalDemandAmps% → Total Demand Load (Amps)
%TotalCodeVA% → Total Code Factor Load (VA)
%TotalCodeAmps% → Total Code Factor Load (Amps)
%TotalDesignVA% → Total Design Load (VA)
%TotalDesignAmps% → Total Design Load (Amps)
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  125

Panelboard Variables

%SwitchType% → Type; Specifications tab

%Name% → ID Name
%ProjectName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
OBSOLETE %fileName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
%FileName% → EasyPower File Name; File Properties
%Voltage% → Bus Voltage
%BusRating% → Bus Rating (A)
%SCCR% → SCCR (kA)
%SwgUnits% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab
OBSOLETE %Units% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab

Short Circuit
%sc_sym_ka% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Sym kA
%afh_incident_energy% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_boundary% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_ppe% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash

Code Factors
%cfRow% → Code Factor Row Number
%cfName% → Code Factor Name (eg Dwelling Ltg, etc)
%cfPhase1% → Aph (VA)
%cfPhase2% → Bph (VA)
%cfPhase3% → Cph (VA)
%cfPhaseRowTotal% → Phase Row Total (VA)
%cfPhaseTotal% → (Calculated) Phase Total
%TotalConnVA% → Total Connected Load (VA)
%TotalConnAmps% → Total Connected Load (Amps)
%TotalDemandVA% → Total Demand Load (VA)
%TotalDemandAmps% → Total Demand Load (Amps)
%TotalCodeVA% → Total Code Factor Load (VA)
%TotalCodeAmps% → Total Code Factor Load (Amps)
%TotalDesignVA% → Total Design Load (VA)
%TotalDesignAmps% → Total Design Load (Amps)

Grid
%FeederID% → Feeder ID
%Type% → Feeder Type
%DeviceRating% → Device Rating
%BrkrMfg% → Breaker Manufacturer
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  126

%BrkrStyle% → Breaker Style

%TripMfg% → Trip Manufacturer
%TripStyle% → Trip Style
%TripSensor% → Trip Sensor
%TripPlug% → Trip Plug
%CondRating% → Cond Rating (A)
%ConnVA% → Connected kVA/Amps
%DemandVA% → Demand kVA/Amps
%CodeVA% → Code kVA/Amps
%DesignVA% → Design kVA/Amps

MCC Variables
%Name% → ID Name
%ProjectName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
OBSOLETE %fileName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
%FileName% → EasyPower File Name; File Properties
%Voltage% → MCC Voltage
%Amps% → Main Bus Rating (A); Specifications tab
%Aic% → Bus SC Rating (kA); Specifications tab
%Main% → Incoming Main (A); Incoming Tab
%SwgUnits% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab
OBSOLETE %Units% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab

Short Circuit
%sc_sym_ka% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Sym kA
%afh_incident_energy% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_boundary% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_ppe% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
Grid
%SectionSpace% → Section Space; Description tab
%EquipmentName% → Equipment Name; Description tab
%MotorkV% → Motor kV; Description tab
%HPkW% → Motor HP; Description tab
%NEMACode% → NEMA Code; Description tab
%StatickV% → Static kV; Description tab
%StatickW% → Static kW; Description tab
%StatickVAR% → Static kVAR; Description tab
%TripA% → Trip (Amps); Description tab
%IntkA% → Int kA; Description tab
%CondType% → Conductor Type; Description tab
%CondNoPh% → Conductor No/Ph; Description tab
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  127

%CondSize% → Conductor Size; Description tab

Switchgear Variables

%SwitchType% → Type; Specifications tab

%Name% → ID Name
%ProjectName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
OBSOLETE %fileName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
%FileName% → EasyPower File Name; File Properties
%Voltage% → Bus Voltage
%BusRating% → Bus Rating (A)
%SCCR% → SCCR (kA)
%SwgUnits% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab
OBSOLETE %Units% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab

Short Circuit
%sc_sym_ka% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Sym kA
%afh_incident_energy% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_boundary% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_ppe% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash

Code Factors
%cfRow% → Code Factor Row Number
%cfName% → Code Factor Name (eg Dwelling Ltg, etc)
%cfPhase1% → Aph (VA)
%cfPhase2% → Bph (VA)
%cfPhase3% → Cph (VA)
%cfPhaseRowTotal% → Phase Row Total (VA)
%cfPhaseTotal% → (Calculated) Phase Total
%TotalConnVA% → Total Connected Load (VA)
%TotalConnAmps% → Total Connected Load (Amps)
%TotalDemandVA% → Total Demand Load (VA)
%TotalDemandAmps% → Total Demand Load (Amps)
%TotalCodeVA% → Total Code Factor Load (VA)
%TotalCodeAmps% → Total Code Factor Load (Amps)
%TotalDesignVA% → Total Design Load (VA)
%TotalDesignAmps% → Total Design Load (Amps)

Grid
%FeederID% → Feeder ID
%Type% → Feeder Type
%DeviceRating% → Device Rating
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Schedules  128

%BrkrMfg% → Breaker Manufacturer

%BrkrStyle% → Breaker Style
%TripMfg% → Trip Manufacturer
%TripStyle% → Trip Style
%TripSensor% → Trip Sensor
%TripPlug% → Trip Plug
%CondRating% → Cond Rating (A)
%ConnVA% → Connected kVA/Amps
%DemandVA% → Demand kVA/Amps
%CodeVA% → Code kVA/Amps
%DesignVA% → Design kVA/Amps

Switchboard Variables

%SwitchType% → Type; Specifications tab

%Name% → ID Name
%ProjectName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
OBSOLETE %fileName% → EasyPower Project Name; File Properties
%FileName% → EasyPower File Name; File Properties
%Voltage% → Bus Voltage
%BusRating% → Bus Rating (A)
%SCCR% → SCCR (kA)
%SwgUnits% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab
OBSOLETE %Units% → Units (kVA/Amps); Summary tab

Short Circuit
%sc_sym_ka% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Sym kA
%afh_incident_energy% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_boundary% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash
%afh_ppe% → (Calculated) Fault and Store Arc Flash

Code Factors
%cfRow% → Code Factor Row Number
%cfName% → Code Factor Name (eg Dwelling Ltg, etc)
%cfPhase1% → Aph (VA)
%cfPhase2% → Bph (VA)
%cfPhase3% → Cph (VA)
%cfPhaseRowTotal% → Phase Row Total (VA)
%cfPhaseTotal% → (Calculated) Phase Total
%TotalConnVA% → Total Connected Load (VA)
%TotalConnAmps% → Total Connected Load (Amps)
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  129

%TotalDemandVA% → Total Demand Load (VA)

%TotalDemandAmps%
%TotalCodeVA%
%TotalCodeAmps%
%TotalDesignVA%
%TotalDesignAmps%
→ Total Demand Load (Amps)
→ Total Code Factor Load (VA)
→ Total Code Factor Load (Amps)
→ Total Design Load (VA)
→ Total Design Load (Amps)

Grid
%FeederID% → Feeder ID
%Type% → Feeder Type
%DeviceRating% → Device Rating
%BrkrMfg% → Breaker Manufacturer
%BrkrStyle% → Breaker Style
%TripMfg% → Trip Manufacturer
%TripStyle% → Trip Style
%TripSensor% → Trip Sensor
%TripPlug% → Trip Plug
%CondRating% → Cond Rating (A)
%ConnVA% → Connected kVA/Amps
%DemandVA% → Demand kVA/Amps
%CodeVA% → Code kVA/Amps
%DesignVA% → Design kVA/Amps

Drawings
You can create multiple drawings from the same one-line file. The Drawing feature allows
you choose a selected part of the system or the entire system and put them into a separate
drawing for the purpose of printing to a specific format or for the purpose of viewing. You
can rearrange the positions of the equipment in the drawing and format the pages. This
allows you to have multiple views of the same one-line.

The drawing can be managed through the EasyControl toolbox. If you take the cursor over
the EasyControl button, the toolbox will expand displaying the various command buttons
and the list of drawings that have been created. Make sure Drawing is highlighted at the
bottom of the EasyControl toolbox.
 Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  130

Creating a New Drawing

 To create a new drawing, first select the items from the Main One-line that you would like to
include in your drawing.

 Then click on the New Drawing button. A new drawing will be created. You can type in
a name for the drawing.

Example of a drawing view

Editing Drawing

Delete Items: You can delete any item from the drawing by selecting the item and choosing
the [Delete] button on the keyboard.

Edit equipment data: You can edit equipment data by double clicking on the equipment and
changing data through the dialog. The data changed is global – it will affect the Main One-
line and all the drawings.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  131

You can set defaults for drawings so that when you create drawings, the default format will
be used. To set the default for drawings go to Tools ribbon and choose Drawings
button. You can customize through the Drawing Defaults dialog.

Insert Existing Item: This command allows you to insert in the drawing any item that is
connected to the selected item but not yet in the drawing. Right click on any item in the
drawing and choose Insert Existing Item command from the context menu. If there are
connected items not yet shown in the drawing they will be listed. Check the desired
checkboxes to insert the items. If the item is several equipments away, you can insert one
item after another until you get the desired item.

EasyControl toolbox

EasyControl Commands

New Drawing : Creates a new drawing. First select items from the one-line that you
want to include in the drawing. Then click on the New Drawing button.

Delete Drawing : Deletes the selected drawing.

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  132

Move Up : Moves the selected drawing up the list.

Move Down : Moves the selected drawing down the list.

Drawing Properties : Displays the Drawing Properties dialog to customize the drawing.

Drawing Properties

The Drawing Properties dialog allows you to customize the drawings. Each drawing can be
customized different from each other as per your needs.

Page

Drawing Properties – Page dialog

Paper Size: Choose the desired paper size for printouts. You can add new paper sizes if
required.

Add… button: Allows you to create your own custom page size. In the Custom Page Size
dialog, specify the page Width and Height and the Unit. Then enter the Page Size Name and
click on the Add/Modify button. If you need to modify an existing custom page size, first
select the Page size name. Then make the changes and click on Add/Modify button. You can
also delete page sizes that have been defined by choosing the Page Size name first and then
clicking on Delete button. The Cancel button closes the dialog without making any changes.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  133

Custom Page Size dialog

Show Page Border: Show or hide the border in the page.

Orientation: Choose Portrait or Landscape.

Margins: Specify margins for the page border.

Schedule Scaling: Schedules for panels, MCC and buses can be shown in the drawings. The
scale of the schedules can be based on one of the following:

Global: Uses the scale defined in Schedule Default Scale settings in Options  Equipment
dialog.

Specified: Uses the scale specified in this dialog for the selected drawing.

Title Block
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  134

Drawing Properties – Title Block

Show Title Block: Check this box to show title block in the drawing.

Default: Uses the default title block format specified in the global options – Tools 
Drawing Defaults.

Specified: Uses the title bock template specified in this dialog. Click on the icon to
browse for the title block template. By default they are stored in the Templates subfolder in
the program data folder.

Property-Value spreadsheet: You can enter the text that will appear in the title block for
various fields. The fields are defined in the title block templates.

Grid

Drawing Properties – Grid dialog

Grid Spacing: Distance of grid points horizontal (x) and vertical (y) directions.

Applies to text dragging: When Snap to grid feature is ‘on’, dragging text on the drawing
will make the text snap to grid. When Snap to grid feature is ‘off’, the text can be placed
anywhere.

Display grid points: Show or hide grid points.

Snap to Grid: While dragging items or text, the obects get positioned at discrete grid points,
if the snap to grid feature is ‘on’.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  135

Grid Color: Choose any color from the palette.

Notes

Add any text in notes regarding the drawing.

Drawing Defaults

Drawing Defaults allow you to set the page size and the title blocks for new drawings. Got
to Tools ribbon and choose Drawings button.

Page

Drawing Defaults – Page

Paper Size: Choose the desired paper size for printouts. You can add new paper sizes if
required.

Add… button: Allows you to create your own custom page size. In the Custom Page Size
dialog, specify the page Width and Height and the Unit. Then enter the Page Size Name and
click on the Add/Modify button. If you need to modify an existing custom page size, first
select the Page size name. Then make the changes and click on Add/Modify button. You can
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawings  136

also delete page sizes that have been defined by choosing the Page Size name first and then
clicking on Delete button. The Cancel button closes the dialog without making any changes.

Custom Page Size dialog

Show Page Border: Show or hide the border in the page.

Orientation: Choose Portrait or Landscape.

Margins: Specify margins for the page border.

Schedule Defaults: Schedules for panels, MCC and buses can be shown in the drawings. The
spacing between the schedules is specified via Minimum horizontal gap and Minimum
vertical gap.

Title Block

Drawing Defaults – Title Block

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  137

Show Title Block: Check this box to show title block in the drawing.

Template File: Uses the title bock template specified in this dialog. The choice <Default>
uses the format that is coded in the program. Click on the icon to browse for a title block
template. By default they are stored in the Templates subfolder in the program data folder.
Templates can be customized.

Property-Value spreadsheet: You can enter the text that will appear in the title block for
various fields. The fields are defined in the title block templates.

Drawing Title Block Template

Prerequisites

Precautions

It is recommended that you understand XML before creating or editing templates. It is

important to note that XML has a unique syntax, and if punctuation is missing (a “<” for
example) then EasyPower will not be able to read the title block. Make sure you have a
backup copy of your title block to revert back.

Editing XML

Use notepad to edit the drawing title block. Drawing title block files have the file extension
.eztbkd. The easiest way to modify them is to right click on the file in Windows and select
“Open With” and choose Notepad. This allows you to edit the file as a text document and
save it. WARNING: If you are using Notepad, do not use the option File > Save As. This
will not encode the document correctly. Make a copy of the file first in Windows and then
open it with Notepad.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  138

Title Block File Format

The Basics

The one-line title block template file is in the XML format. XML works with a tree structure
using labels called “tags.” Each section is begun by a tag and must be ended by a closing tag
that starts with a forward slash “/.” See example below:

<Main tag>
<tag>
<sub tag> </sub tag>
</tag>
</Main tag>

The main tag for a title block file is shown below:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>

<TitleBlock>

>>> Title block item definitions go here

</TitleBlock>

Within the main tag, there are five tags that are used in drawing title blocks. These tags are
<Settings>, <Rect>, <Line>, <Text> and <Image>. Within each of these five tags there are
various sub-tags available to input data and settings such as positions, sizes, colors, etc. Sub-
tags for each tag are explained in detail in their own sections below.

Items can be defined in any order and attributes can be in any order. Order matters only with
text fields that have prompts. The order in which the text with prompts is listed in the XML
file will be the same order that the prompts appear in the drawing properties dialogue box
title block tab.

Comments

Title block files can quickly become long, and it is recommended that you place comments
throughout the title block file to label different sections. Most of the templates have
comments to help find different sections.

Comment Syntax Example:

<!--comment-->
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  139

Coordinates

All the coordinates in Title Block templates are in inches with the origin (0,0) being in the
top left corner. The X coordinate increases left to right while the Y coordinate increases top
to bottom. There are no limits to how large a title block you can create. It can even be as
large as the physical page you are printing on. Even if the title block is the size of the page, it
may be 90 percent blank space for equipment in the drawing to go.

X
(0,0)

Helpful Hints for Using Coordinates

Drawing title blocks will automatically be aligned in the bottom right corner of the page
inside the margins. It will be the X and Y coordinates are relative to where the upper left
hand corner of the title block is, not to the page itself.

Remember the page margins when creating a title block. They are all set to 0.5 inches by
default, but can be changed in the drawing properties dialogue box. If you want a title block
to run the length of the bottom of the page, then you must take the width of the page and
subtract the left and right margins. For example, on a page that is 17 inches wide with 0.5
inch margin on both sides, the title block should be 16 inches wide if you want it to span the
whole distance.

NOTE: If you want the title block located somewhere else on the page besides the lower
right hand corner, then you will have to first draw a rectangle the size of the drawing (page
dimensions minus the margins). This rectangle will overlap the page boarder, or if you want
it invisible, set the line thickness to 0. Once the size of the title block has been established as
the entire page, use the coordinates to place items where you choose.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  140

Settings

The Settings section allows you to specify certain settings for the title block and can have the
following options.

Scale [Optional] Scaling for title block [Default = 0]

Note: This is a future option that is not yet supported. It can be ignored for now.

BorderWidth [Optional] Width of print border rectangle lines [Default = 1].

The standard range for boarder thickness is from 1 to 5.

Sample:

<Settings>
<Scale>0</Scale>
<BorderWidth>1</BorderWidth>
</Settings>

Rectangles

Rectangles are simply boxes and can have the following attributes.

left [Required] Left coordinate of rectangle in inches

top [Required] Top coordinate of rectangle in inches

right [Required] Right coordinate of rectangle in inches

bottom [Required] Bottom coordinate of rectangle in inches

LineWidth [Optional] Width of the line around the rectangle [Default = 2]

Color [Optional] RGB value of color of the rectangle line [Default = #FF000000]. See
section “Hex Colors” for more detail about setting color values.

Sample:

<Rect>
<left>0</left>
<top>0</top>
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  141

<right>7.25</right>
<bottom>0.75</bottom>
<LineWidth>2</LineWidth>
<Color>#FF000000</Color>
</Rect>

The above code will result in a rectangle that is 7.25 inches wide and 0.75 inches high that is
located in the lower right hand corner of the drawing.

Lines

Lines can have the following attributes. To draw a straight horizontal line, Y1 and Y2 should
be the same, and X1 and X2 will set the beginning and ending points of the line. Similarly, to
draw a vertical line, X1 and X2 will be the same and Y1 and Y2 will set the beginning and
ending points of the line. To draw a diagonal line, specify the starting and ending X and Y
coordinates.

X1 [Required] Starting X value in inches

Y1 [Required] Starting Y value in inches

X2 [Required] Ending X value in inches

Y2 [Required] Ending Y value in inches

LineWidth [Optional] Width of the line [Default = 2]

LineStyle [Optional] Style of the line [Default = 0]

0 = Solid
1 = Dash
2 = Dot
3 = Dash Dot
4 = Dash Dot Dot
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  142

Color [Optional] RGB value of color of the line [Default = #FF000000]. See section “Hex
Colors” for more detail about setting color values.

Example: Drawing a Vertical Line

<Line>
<X1>3</X1>
<Y1>0</Y1>
<X2>3</X2>
<Y2>0.75</Y2>
<LineWidth>2</LineWidth>
<LineStyle>0</LineStyle >
<Color>#FF000000</Color>
</Line>

By adding this code to the previous code for drawing a rectangle, a partitioning line is
created in the title block.

Text

Text can have the following attributes.

X [Required] Horizontal position of text in inches

Y [Required] Vertical position of text in inches

Alignment [Optional] Alignment of text. This field determines how X and Y are
interpreted. It is specified as a combination of one of the horizontal alignment values with
one of the vertical alignment values.

VAlign [Default = top]

<VAlign>top</VAlign> Text is aligned above the Y coordinate

<VAlign>baseline</VAlign> Text is centered vertically with the Y coordinate

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  143

<VAlign>bottom</VAlign> Text is aligned below the Y coordinate

HAlign [Default = left]

<HAlign>left</HAlign> The text starts at the X coordinate

<HAlign>center</HAlign> Text is centered over the X coordinate

<HAlign>right</HAlign> The text ends at the X coordinate

Label [Required] Text to display. This is static text unless the Prompt attribute is defined
in which case this value is the default text. Although this field is required, when used in
conjunction with a prompt you may leave it blank (Example: <Label></Label>) in order to
leave the title block field blank until text is specified through the drawing properties dialogue
box title block tab. SEE ALSO: Section on variables below.

Example: <Label>TITLE</Label>

Prompt [Optional] Prompt for label. Makes this text item a variable and specified by
the user in the drawing properties dialog box title block tab.

Example: <Prompt>Title</Prompt>

FontName [Optional] Font face name [Default = Arial]

Name [Required] Field Name. This is a name that EasyPower uses to store the data
for that particular field. The name field is also important because it allows changing to a
different title block and retaining the data that was entered of fields that have the same name.

FontSize [Optional] Font point size [Default = 10].

Hint: To get a perfect fit you may use a decimal value such as 10.6 to fit a space.

Escapement [Optional] Font escapement specified in 1/10 of an angle. So for 90 degree

text you would specify 900. [Default = 0]

Example: To set text vertically at 90 degrees add

<Escapement>900</Escapement>

Note: Escapement is not yet supported, but will be in the near future.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  144

Bold [Optional] Bold font [Default = 0]

0 = normal
1 = bold

Example: To make text bold, add:

<Bold>1</Bold>

Color [Optional] RGB value of color of the line [Default = #FF000000]. See section “Hex
Colors” for more detail about setting color values.

Example: (Note: Optional tags are shown for demonstration purposes)

<Text>
<X>3</X>
<Y>.75</Y>
<VAlign>top</VAlign>
<HAlign>left</HAlign>
<Label>TITLE</Label>
<Prompt>Title</Prompt>
<FontName>Arial</FontName>
<Name>Title prompt</Name>
<FontSize>12</FontSize>
<Escapement>0</Escapement>
<Bold>0</Bold>
<Italic>0</Italic>
<Color>#FF000000</Color>
</Text>

By adding the above example to our previous examples, we come up with this:

Image

Images are pictures and can have the following attributes. Images will automatically be
resized to fit the given rectangle while preserving the original aspect ratio of the image.

left [Required] Left coordinate of rectangle in inches

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  145

top [Required] Top coordinate of rectangle in inches

right [Required] Right coordinate of rectangle in inches

bottom [Required] Bottom coordinate of rectangle in inches

ImageFile [Required] Name and path of the graphics file. Supported files types are
BMP, JPG, GIF, TIFF, PNG, ICO, WMF, EMF. If the file name is given without the path,
then EasyPower will look for the file in the same folder that the title block file is located.
You may also give the full path if known. If file is not found, then image is left blank and can
be found by going to the drawing properties dialogue box title block tab and browsing for the
file.

Note: If no value is given (Example: <ImageFile></ImageFile>), then the file can be selected
later though the drawing properties dialogue box title block tab.

Prompt [Optional] Allows user to set or change image from drawing properties
dialogue box title block tab.

Name [Required] Field name. This is a name that EasyPower uses to store the data for that
particular field. The name field is also important because it allows changing to a different
title block and retaining the data that was entered of fields that have the same name.

Example:

<Image>
<left>0.1</left>
<top>0.1</top>
<right>2.9</right>
<bottom>0.65</bottom>
<ImageFile>TCC logo.jpg</ImageFile>
<Prompt>Logo image</Prompt>
<Name>EasyPower Logo</Name>
</Image>

By adding the above example to our previous examples, we come up with this:
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  146

Hex Colors

Rectangles, lines, and text all use a color coding system known as “Hexadecimal.” A
hexadecimal value begins with “#” and is followed by 8 characters.

The first two characters represent a transparency value. This feature is not supported yet, so
all color codes should start with FF. Characters 3-8 represent values for colors. Characters 3
and 4 are the red value, characters 5 and 6 are the green value, and characters 7 and 8 are the
blue value. Each value can range from 00-FF. Below is a chart of some standard colors:

Color Hexidecimal Color Hexidecimal Color Hexidecimal Color Hexidecimal

Black #FF000000 Red #FFFF0000 Green #FF008000 Blue #FF0000FF
Charcoal #FF404040 Magenta #FFFF00FF Lime #FF00FF00 Navy Blue #FF000080
Grey #FF808080 Purple #FF800080 Teal #FF008080 Aqua #FF00FFFF
Silver #FFC0C0C0 Orange #FFFF6600 Dark Green #FF003300 Brown #FF663300
White #FFFFFFFF Yellow #FFFFFF00 Olive #FF666600 Tan #FFFFCA7A

Variables that can be used in the <Label> sub-tag of a <Text> tag.

There are four drawing fields that are automatically a part of every drawing. They appear
first in the drawing properties dialogue box title block tab and can be referenced with a
variable to use the data from those fields in the title block. Each variable begins and ends
with “%”. NOTE: The label tag will accept either text or one of the prescribed variables, but
not a combination of both.

Example: Adding drawing name variable to examples above

<Text>
<X>3</X>
<Y>0</Y>
<VAlign>bottom</VAlign>
<HAlign>left</HAlign>
<Color>#FF000000</Color>
<Name>DrawingName</Name>
<Label>%DrawingName%</Label>
<FontName>Arial</FontName>
<FontSize>14</FontSize>
<Escapement>0</Escapement>
<Bold>0</Bold>
<Italic>0</Italic>
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Drawing Title Block Template  147

</Text>

Drawing Field Variable

Drawing Name %DrawingName%
Drawing Number %DrawingNo%
Sheet Number %SheetNo%
Revision %Revision%

File Name Variable

There is one other variable that can be used to reference the file name. When this is used, the
file name will be added exactly as it is saved, without the file extensions. The variable is
%FileName%.

Example: Using file name variable in addition to previous examples

<Text>
<X>7.25</X>
<Y>0.75</Y>
<VAlign>top</VAlign>
<HAlign>right</HAlign>
<Color>#FF000000</Color>
<Name>Filename</Name>
<Label>%FileName%</Label>
<FontName>Arial</FontName>
<FontSize>8</FontSize>
<Escapement>0</Escapement>
<Bold>0</Bold>
<Italic>0</Italic>
</Text>

Sample Title Block Features and Instructions

There are number of title block templates available for drawing. These templates are
completely functional and can be used as is or customized using the above methods. There
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Named Views  148

are some important features to note. All title block data can be entered through the drawing
properties title block tab.

Page size: Because drawing title blocks do not currently have the ability to scale, many are
specific to a certain page size. A landscape orientation is assumed on all title block templates.
There are 4 title blocks that will work with any size paper and appear in the lower right hand
corner. These include the file “Simple” and 3 files that start with “Universal.”

Grid: Many of the templates have a grid boarder around them. The grid is divided by inches.
It is numbered from left to right and is lettered from top to bottom. The purpose of the grid is
to easily refer to a piece of equipment or a section of the drawing. For example, you may
note “The breaker in H-5 is missing data.”

Sheet Notes: This is a section of the title block that allows you to make special notes about
things in the drawing, list tasks to be done, or record additional data. It is helpful when
making a note to include the grid coordinates (G-6 for example) of the item(s) that are
referenced.

Legend: A few of the templates have a legend. The legend is simply an image that has been
inserted into the title block. The image of the legend “EZP Drawing legend.jpg” should be
located in your title blocks folder. The legend can easily be deleted if you don’t want it or
added to any of the other templates.

Revisions: To help track revisions, most title blocks contain a section for recording at least 4
different revisions.

Logo Images: Most templates come with two or three logo images. The templates come with
EasyPower images, but you can replace any or all of them with your own company logos.

Named Views
Named Views is a feature that allows you to go directly to a certain part of the one-line. You
can store different parts of the one-line as separate named views. When you store a named
view, the current window and the zoom level will be stored in the view. A Named View is in
essence a snapshot of a portion of the Main One-line. Named Views serve a purpose similar
to Drawings feature. However, there are some differences. Named views have graphics based
on the Main One-line. In Drawings, you can delete items without deleting from the Main
One-line, whereas this is not possible in Named Views. A Named View is in essence a
snapshot of a portion of the Main One-line.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Named Views  149

To create a Named View, go to EasyControl toolbox and choose Named Views at the
bottom. In the one-line, pan your drawing and adjust the zoom level to show the desired
window. In the EasyControl choose (New Named View) button. Enter a name for the
view.

EasyControl – Named Views

EasyControl Commands

New Named View : Creates a new NamedView.

Delete Named View : Deletes the selected NamedView.

Move Up : Moves the selected NamedView up the list.

Move Down : Moves the selected NamedView down the list.

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Inserting LV Switchgear  150

Inserting LV Switchgear
You can insert an LV switchgear in the one-line with multiple circuit breakers and feeders at
once using a wizard. In the Equipment Palette choose the LV Switchgear button. The
cursor will turn into a switchgear symbol. Click on the one-line to place the switchgear. The
Insert LV Switchgear dialog will appear. This allows you to specify the type of bus,
protective devices, feeders, and loads and the number of feeders. This wizard allows a quick
creation of switchgears.

Insert LV Switchgear dialog

Equipment Type: Choose the type of bus from switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard.

Base kV: Set the Base kV for the bus.

Disconnect Type: Choose the disconnect device (protective device) type from the
following list: LVPCB, ICCB, MCCB, Fused LVPCB, Fused ICCB, Fused MCCB,
Fused Switch and Non-Fused Switch.

Include Main Breaker: Checking this item will insert a Main Breaker or fuse for the
switchgear.

Number of Feeders: Number of feeders fed by the switchgear.

Default Line Type: Choose from <None>, cables, busways or transmission lines. To avoid
inserting feeders, leave the selection as <None>.

Default Load Type: Choose from <None>, motors, loads, MCCs and panels. This combo
box is available only if the Default Line Type is other than <None>.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  151

Note: Although the LV switchgear is inserted through a single Equipment Palette button,
once the items are inserted in the one-line, they can be edited as separate entities, i.e. buses,
breakers and lines.

LV Switchgear with 5 feeders created from wizard

Elevation View
You can create the elevation view for MCC and buses (switchgear, switchboard and panel
board) and print the view. The size and location of buckets, breakers or cubicles can be
defined using the fields Column Number and Space.

In order to create the elevation view you must first define the Column Number and
Starter/Row Space in the dialog for the bus or the MCC. The Equipment Elevation tab will
show the elevation view.

MCC Elevation

In the Description tab of the MCC dialog you can specify the location and size of each
bucket (space). The Equipment Elevation tab of the MCC dialog will show the elevation
drawing. You can print this view from the dialog.

Column Number: This is the ordinal number of the column in which the starter (bucket) is
located. The columns are arranged in increasing order starting from 1 and ending in the
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  152

highest column number. See the following picture of Equipment Elevation and the
corresponding Description tab.

Starter Space: Height of the space in terms of the column width.

If there are multiple items in the same column, they will appear in order they are entered in
the Description spreadsheet.

MCC Elevation view

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  153

Specifying Column Number and Starter Space in Description tab

You can show text from the fields: Equipment Name, Section Name, Description, HP,
Protective Device Amps and Comments.

You can specify the height for the top and bottom horizontal wireways and the column
(vertical) wireway via the Property pane on the right side.

To show the Main Breakers in the elevation view, enter a new row in the Description tab,
enter the Load Type as “Load” and enter the description.

You can change the column number and space size by selecting the bucket first in the
Elevation and changing the parameters in Property pane on the right side.

To print the elevation view, click on the Print button on the MCC toolbar.

Switchgear Elevation

If you have defined the Bus Type as “Switchgear”, you can view the elevation for the
switchgear. In the Switchgear tab of Bus Data dialog, you can specify whether the elevation
layout will be Column Based or Row Based. For Columns, the breakers in one unit will be
vertically stacked. For Row Based, you can have single breakers throughout the row (2X), or
breakers on the left (1X-Left) or right (1X-Right).
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  154

For Column Based elevation, we need to specify the Column Number and Row Space for
each row of data. This will create the Elevation view.

Column Based

Column Number: This is the ordinal number of the column in which the cubicle (for
breakers) is located. The columns are arranged in increasing order starting from 1 and ending
in the highest column number. See the following picture of Equipment Elevation and the
corresponding Switchgear tab.

Row Space: Height of the space in terms of the column width.

Row based

Column Space: You can specify the size and side of the breaker spare in the panelboard. The
breakers will appear in order, the first row showing at the top.

Column Number and Row Space in Switchgear tab of Bus data dialog

You can show the text for Equipment Name, Section Space, Description and Device Rating
by setting the values in the Property pane on the right side of the elevation.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  155

Switchgear Elevation

You can specify the height for the top and bottom horizontal wireways and the vertical
wireway via the Property pane on the right side.

You can change the column number and space size by selecting the cubicle first in the
Elevation and changing the parameters in Property pane on the right side.

Inserting rows in the Switchgear spreadsheet: You can right click on the spreadsheet and
Insert Row or Append Row.

To print the elevation view, click on the Print button on the Bus Data dialog toolbar.

Switchboard elevation can be viewed in the same way for bus type “Switchboard”.

Panelboard Elevation

If you have defined the Bus Type as “Panelboard”, you can view the elevation for the
panelboard. The dialog and elevation are similar to that of switchgear. You can specify
whether the elevation layout will be Column Based or Row Based. For Columns, the
breakers in one unit will be vertically stacked. For Rows, you can have single breakers
throughout the row, or breakers on the left or right.

Column Space: You can specify the size and side of the breaker spare in the panelboard. The
breakers will appear in order, the first row showing at the top.

See the following picture of Equipment Elevation and the corresponding Panelboard tab.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  156

Defining Column Space in Panelboard tab

Panelboard elevation view

You can show the text for Equipment Name, Section Space, Description and Device Rating
by setting the values in the Property pane on the right side of the elevation.
Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  157

You can specify the height for the top and bottom horizontal wireways and the vertical
wireway via the Property pane on the right side.

You can change the space size by selecting the cubicle first in the Elevation and changing the
parameters in Property pane on the right side.

To print the elevation view, click on the Print button on the Bus Data dialog toolbar.

Printing Elevations

You can also print elevation views by clicking on EasyPower button and choosing Print
 Print Elevations. In the Print Elevations dialog, check the items you want to print.

Print Elevations dialog

Chapter 2 Making One-line Diagrams Elevation View  159
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Preparing for Analysis  160

Chapter 3 Analysis Overview

Preparing for Analysis
Full Connectivity

Until all items are fully connected, you are not allowed to choose an analysis focus -- If you
try, unconnected items are displayed in red and an error report is generated.

Required Database Fields

Certain database information is required before an analysis can be run. For example, if you
did not give the impedances of a cable, it is not possible to do a meaningful Short Circuit
analysis. If you try to choose an analysis focus without specifying all required database
fields, you will get an error report listing the ID name and type of each incomplete item.

Recalculating Per-unit Data

EasyPower automatically keeps appropriate per-unit equivalencies of your equipment

parameters updated. However if you open a very old database, you might want to force all of
the per-unit data to be recalculated. This is done from the Database Edit focus by choosing
Tools Re-calc Per-Unit (Shortcut F9) from the Menu bar. The updated per-unit values
will then be saved with the database at the next Save operation.

Editing Allowed During Analysis

Editing the One-line Appearance

You can freely change the one-line appearance by clicking and dragging, as described in
"Dragging Items, Lines, and Text" on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. When you
choose the Save command, these visual changes will be made permanent, just as if you had
done them from Database Edit focus.
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Editing Allowed During Analysis  161

Opening and Closing Breakers or Switches

SmartBreaker™ is the world's first fully functional breaker model. SmartBreaker allows
you to double-click on a breaker to open or close it while doing analysis operations. This lets
you perform hundreds of contingency studies in minutes. SmartBreaker uses Expert System
technology to update network sparse vectors to the new system configuration without the
numerical inaccuracy problems associated with low impedance ties.

To open or close a breaker with SmartBreaker, double-click on it with the mouse while you
are in an analysis focus. The breaker will instantly change states. If the breaker is open, an
"OPEN" text label will be displayed. If the breaker is closed, no label is displayed.
SmartBreaker also applies to switches and fused switches.

When you double-click on a breaker while you are in the Coordination focus, the temporary
data dialog box will appear. To open or close a breaker in the Coordination focus, right click
on the breaker and choose from the context menu Open Switch or Close Switch.

Opening and Closing Breakers

Note: The ability to open and close breakers or switches during analysis is only available if
you have purchased the SmartBreaker™ option to EasyPower.

In the Toolbar interface style, SmartBreaker also allows you to select multiple breakers and
switches you want to open or close. Once they are selected, choose Edit Open Switch or
Edit Close Switch from the Menu bar. Selected items that are not breakers or switches
are ignored.
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Editing Allowed During Analysis  162

To open a breaker or switch permanently, enter the Database Edit focus and choose
"Normally Open" from its database dialog box.

AFD, Inverter, Rectifier Specialty Switching

In Power Flow and Short Circuit, the AFD, Inverter and Rectifier equipment items have
specialized checks that are used to make these devices respond appropriately when switching
actions occur that would affect them.

NOTE:

THIS SPECIALTY SWITCHING HAS NOT BEEN IMPLEMENTED IN HARMONICS

YET.

To accomplish the specialty switching response of the AFD, Inverter and Rectifier, an island
check is performed after any type of switching in a system with an AFD, Inverter or
Rectifier. If any Islands are formed that involve the input or output of an AFD, Inverter or
Rectifier, additional switching is performed to match the condition. This process is repeated
in a loop until all switching actions have completed.

The specialty response of these equipment items should be as follows:

If the input is islanded, then the output is turned off.

If the output has a switch and it is opened, the output is turned off, and the input is zeroed.

If the input has a switch and it is opened, the output is turned off.

Editing Item Data

While in the Power Flow focus, you are allowed to make temporary changes to certain
items: Motors, Loads, Generators, Utilities, Transformers, Capacitors, and Shunts. While in
the Coordination focus, you can make temporary changes to the protective devices like fuses,
breakers and relays. Simply double-click on one of these items to bring up its temporary
dialog. The changes are in effect during the analysis session only; when you return to
Database Edit focus, the original database values will still be intact. However, if you choose
Save while in Power Flow analysis, you will be given the option to save any temporary
changes you have made and they will become permanent. No temporary changes are
allowed while in Short Circuit focus.
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Viewing Item Database Data  163

Viewing Item Database Data

Viewing the database dialog box of an item is possible while in an analysis focus. Double-
clicking on any item while holding down the Shift key will bring up the database dialog for
that item. This database dialog is for viewing purposes only and is not editable in an analysis
focus.

All Power Flow temporary dialog boxes contain a DB Info button that allows you to view the
database data. This will bring up the same database dialog as the Shift+Double Click
procedure described above. The same characteristics and purposes also apply. Below is a
typical DB Info dialog box:

Typical DB Info Dialog Box

Though the data is grayed out and cannot be edited, the arrow buttons in the dialog box
toolbar are usable and will allow you to scroll through and view other items of that
equipment type. The Help button is available to explain the database fields. The tabs (i.e.
Power Flow above) are available to view different information categories. Pressing OK or
Cancel will close the dialog box.
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Controlling the Analysis  164

Controlling the Analysis

The "Analysis Options Control" Dialog Box

In each Analysis focus you can significantly control testing and output. Depending on the
focus you are in, you can choose one of the following options buttons from ribbon: SC
Options, PF Options, Harm Options, and DS Options. Then choose the Control tab.
These dialog boxes give you options on how the analysis will be run. For example, the
Control tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box allows you to change Fault Type,
Equipment Duty Threshold, etc.

Excluding Items From Analysis

There are three ways to exclude items from a particular analysis session.

Deactivate items by choosing Deactivate button from the ribbon (or Edit Deactivate
from the Menu bar). Inactive items are ignored for the purposes of analysis. Note that
inactive breakers act as if they don't exist, i.e. they do not create an open connection unless
they are tie breakers between two buses. To cause an open connection between a bus and
something else, leave the breaker active and open it as described in "Opening and Closing
Breakers or Switches" on page 161.

Use Areas and/or Zones. An Area and Zone are associated with each bus in the database.
If you assign Areas and/or Zones to different subsystems represented in the database, the
analysis can be restricted to only operate on a certain Zone and Area combination through the
Control tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box. For Short Circuit analysis, the Area
and Zone apply only to "Fault All." For Power Flow analysis, the Area and Zone apply only
to text reports.

Specify a Bus kV Range. The dialog box accessed by choosing SC Options Control lets
you specify a kV range. Buses that are outside this kV range are excluded from the Short
Circuit analysis.

Starting the Analysis

Each analysis focus has a menu showing choices for starting the analysis. The Short Circuit
menu is called Fault and the Power Flow menu is called Solve. There are corresponding
buttons on both the Short Circuit and Power Flow toolbars.
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Analysis Results  165

In some cases, once an analysis has been run, you can add to the results with a follow-up
analysis. For example, after faulting a single bus in Short Circuit, you can select one or more
additional buses and then choose Remote V/I button from the ribbon (or View
Remote V&I from the Menu bar). The voltages and currents for these remote buses will
appear on the one-line.

Analysis Results
Results on the One-line

When an analysis is finished, certain results are displayed on the one-line. Commands from
the View menu control which results are displayed. There are corresponding buttons on both
the Short Circuit and Power Flow toolbars.

Some of the viewing choices are additive, i.e. they can show up in addition to other choices.
Others are mutually exclusive, i.e. choosing one type of result to see will "unselect" the other
choice. You can easily see this on the toolbar by observing which button groups behave like
radio buttons (push one in and the current one pops out). Many of the toolbar viewing
buttons behave in a "press-on-press-off" fashion, i.e. clicking on it reverses its on/off state.
In the menus, check marks next to a menu item reflect that item's on/off state.

Depending on what you have chosen to be displayed, you might want to move equipment
and/or lines around a bit to allow the numbers to fit better. These graphic one-line changes
will be saved with the database the next time you choose Save.

One-line Unit Settings

The One-Line Output tab of Power Flow Options and Short Circuit Options dialogs give
you control over display choices for the one-line. For example, Short Circuit lets you choose
between "kV" and "Per-Unit" for the Voltage Unit. The most important one-line unit settings
are shown in the Status Bar.

Text Results

In addition to results shown on the one-line, you can choose to have detailed results sent to
text reports. The Text Output tab of Power Flow Options or Short Circuit Options
dialogs allows you to specify which text reports are created and what will appear in them.
For example, the Short Circuit focus lets you choose which combination of five result types
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Analysis Results  166

to generate (Momentary, Interrupting, etc.). You can also make other choices such as the
Equipment Duty Reporting Level.

Depending on what type of analysis you performed and your choice of settings in the dialogs
opened by choosing Power Flow Options – Control or Short Circuit Options – Control,
you may have more than one text result window to choose from. Also, sometimes selecting
both high and low voltage buses for analysis can cause multiple text reports to be generated.

By default, newly created text windows are minimized, i.e. they are represented by icons at
the bottom of the session window. You can restore such a window by double-clicking on it,
or by choosing it from the Window menu.

Window Manipulation

Use Microsoft Windows operations to manipulate text and one-line windows. The
EasyPower Window menu has additional commands that make this process easier.

Window New Window opens a new window for the file which is currently "active"
allowing you to view different areas of the same one-line or text report.

Window Tile Vertically will size and position all windows vertically so that they are
completely visible.

Window Tile Horizontally will size and position all windows horizontally so that they
are completely visible.

Window Cascade will arrange all windows in a neat pile, each one offset from the
previous one slightly. Choosing a numbered window will automatically bring that window to
the "front of the pile."

Window Arrange for Arc Flash will show the one-line and the arc fash hazard report
tiled horizontally.

Window Arrange for Auto Coordination F8 will display the TCC, one-line and the auto
coordination report.

Of course, you can also manipulate the windows using the regular window controls or a
window's system menu, like Minimize, Maximize, Restore, Close etc.

The active window is usually the last one you clicked the mouse in and will have a
highlighted caption, which is the bar at the top which contains that window's title. Activating
a window will automatically bring it to the "front" if it is overlapped by another window.
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Analysis Results  167

Also, restoring a minimized window will make it the active window. Which window is
active becomes important when clearing results and/or printing.

Clearing Results From Text and One-line Windows

Each analysis focus has commands to remove results from the text report windows.
Choosing Clear button from the ribbon (or View Clear from the Menu bar) will only
clear the results from the active window. While choosing Clear All from the drop down
arrow below Clear button will clear the results from all windows associated with that file and
the current focus.

When you return to Database Edit focus, all analysis results are automatically cleared from
the one-line and the text windows.

Note: By default, the text reports are cumulative. In other words, new text analysis
results are added to the end of the current reports unless a Clear or Clear All is
done first. You can change this in the Tools Options General dialog.

Saving Text Reports as htm files

When a text report is the active window, you can send that information to htm file by
choosing Save button from the Quick Access Toolbar (or File Save from the Menu
bar). Each text report saved will be given a ".htm" extension.

Exporting Text Report to Word/Excel

Right mouse click on the report and select Export to Microsoft Excel or Export to
Microsoft Word. If you have Excel or Word installed on your computer, the report will
automatically be exported.
Chapter 3 Analysis Overview Analysis Results  169
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Overview  170

Chapter 4
Short Circuit Procedures and
Reference - ANSI
Overview
The EasyPower short circuit analysis is designed for the analysis of three-phase and
unbalanced faults in industrial, commercial, and utility power systems. EasyPower can be
used to calculate ANSI or IEC Standard fault currents for comparison with circuit breaker
and fuse interrupting duties. It can also be used to calculate currents for protective device
coordination, analyzing trouble spots using the symmetrical component output, and for
calculating remote bus fault voltages for the setting of voltage controlled relays.

Program results have been verified with independent programs from Oregon State
University, numerous test and IEEE cases, and programs from the General Electric
Company. In addition, EasyPower LLC. has used various versions of this program since
1981 for its own consulting business.

This chapter describes how to use EasyPower's short circuit analysis features. It is intended
to provide a procedural overview which will help you to quickly become productive. It is not
intended to provide a tutorial on short circuit study procedures. You must be in the Short
Circuit focus to do the operations described here.

This chapter describes procedures for ANSI Short Circuit. The IEC-60909 Short Circuit
features are slightly different and are described in Chapter 16.

Setting Short Circuit Method

To select the short circuit calculation method, choose from the menu, Tools  Options 
System, and select the desired standard from the combo box for SC Calculation Method.
You can also select the units and symbols appropriate for the selected standard.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Setting Short Circuit Method  171

Setting Short Circuit Method

Short Circuit Ribbon

Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Setting Short Circuit Method  172

Short Circuit ribbon buttons

Short Circuit Status Bar

Short Circuit Status Bar

The Short Circuit Status Bar indicates the following settings:

Grid Snap Status: Shows "SNAP" if grid snapping is on. See "The Snap Grid" on page 73
for more information.

Fault Type: The Fault Type as set from Control tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog
box. This dialog box is opened by choosing Short Circuit Options from the ribbon.

Calc Method: Selected method of calculation – ANSI or IEC.

Voltage Unit: The Voltage Unit choice from the One-line Output tab of the Short Circuit
Options dialog box.

Fault Unit: The Fault Unit choice from the One-line Output tab of the Short Circuit
Options dialog box.

Driving Point kV: The Driving Point kV PU value as set from the Control tab of the Short
Circuit Options dialog box.

Faulting a Bus

There are many ways to fault a bus. The easiest way is to double-click on the desired bus. A
fault will be placed on the bus using the options chosen on the ribbon and in the Control,
One-Line Output, and Text Output tabs of the Short Circuit Options dialog box. This
dialog box is opened by choosing Short Circuit Options from the Menu bar.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Setting Short Circuit Method  173

Faulting a Bus

The results are immediately placed directly on the one-line. In this example, the faulted bus
current is 16.952 kA, which is shown on the right-hand side of the bus at a forty five degree
angle. The contribution from the transformer above (not shown) is 14.616 kA, and the motor
contribution is 1.201 kA.

If text results are also desired, choose the appropriate result window in the Text Output tab
of the Short Circuit Options dialog box.

Another way to initiate a fault is to first select a bus (the bus will highlight) and then click on
the Fault Bus(es) button in the ribbon. You can select more than one bus to fault if desired.
It is OK if non-bus items are also selected; EasyPower will ignore them.

To fault all the buses (batch fault) choose Fault Bus(es) button in the ribbon without
selecting any bus, or right click and choose Fault Bus from the context menu..

Viewing Remote Voltages and Currents

For protective device coordination or relay setting studies, it is necessary to know voltage
and current in parts of the system that are remote from the fault. This is especially true when
you are studying backup relaying, voltage sensitive devices, or generator relaying.
EasyPower lets you easily study these parameters by clicking on the Toolbar.

To see a remote voltage and current after you perform a fault, first select the buses you wish
to view. Then choose Remote V&I button from the ribbon or click on Short Circuit
Options One-line Output (tab) and check the check Show All Remote V & I. To
view remote bus voltages and currents for all buses, simply click on button without
selecting any bus.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Setting Short Circuit Method  174

Option to show remote V & I

Showing Remote Voltage and Current

Voltages for each bus, and the currents for each branch connecting to the bus will be
displayed. In this example, 0.872 kA from each of the motors flow to the fault on BUS-4.
For remote buses, the voltage is shown at a forty five degree angle. In this case, the value is
0.319 per-unit, or about 32 percent of nominal.

This operation can be done any number of times in succession for one or more selected
buses. When a new fault is performed, the old results are automatically cleared.

Note: Remote voltages and currents are only available after a fault operation on
a single bus.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI SmartDuty™  175

Changing the ANSI Standard Time Interval

ANSI standards list three distinct time intervals for short circuits. These are momentary (1/2
cycle), interrupting (5 cycles) and 30 cycle. EasyPower allows you the ability to display
each of these by choosing the buttons from the ribbon (View Momentary,
View Interrupting or View 30 Cycle from the Menu bar). You can quickly view all
three intervals in succession for a particular fault by click one button after another.

You can also view short circuit all of the three time intervals by selecting the three buttons.

Short circuit results at various time intervals

SmartDuty™
SmartDuty is the world's first Expert System for the verification of breaker, switch, and fuse
duties. SmartDuty applies the appropriate ANSI-standard short circuit calculation to each
device, then compares the calculated currents with the rated duties. Underrated devices and
devices within a user-defined threshold are highlighted on the one-line showing the
percentage overduty next to each device. Devices within tolerance are not highlighted.

SmartDuty calculates the maximum current through the line side and load side of each device
for comparison. This eliminates the costly and time consuming problem of standard bus
faults not properly accounting for branch contributions.

To use SmartDuty, choose on the ribbon or View Equipment Duty from the Menu
bar. Apply either a single fault or Fault All Buses and the results will appear next to each
underrated device.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI SmartDuty™  176

SmartDuty One-line Results

Note: The ability to automatically check equipment duties during analysis is only available if
you have purchased the SmartDuty™ option to EasyPower.

High voltage breakers show two results. The top result is the ANSI momentary duty, and the
bottom is the interrupting duty. A negative sign indicates that the device is under duty in that
area. A positive number indicates that the device is over duty. Notice in the example that the
top breaker is highlighted even though both duties are negative. This is because the
interrupting duty (-9%) is within the user-defined threshold tolerance of 10 percent.
Although the breaker is actually 9 percent under duty, a warning is still issued because the
tolerance is set at 10 percent. The threshold tolerance provides a warning level indication.
The tolerance value can be set in the Control tab of the dialog box accessed by choosing
Tools Short Circuit Options from the Menu bar.

Low voltage breakers and high and low voltage fuses are compared directly with ANSI
momentary duties. High voltage switches technically have two ratings: momentary
withstand, and close & latch. Both ratings are compared directly with ANSI momentary (1/2
Cycle) results.

You can output detailed text reports describing each device, its ratings, and the calculated
currents by choosing the Text Output tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box, and then
checking the Equipment Duty box.
 Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Voltage Sensitivity Studies  177

Voltage Sensitivity Studies

Faults often cause low voltages which may affect equipment operation. To perform a voltage
sensitivity study, choose the One-Line Output tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box.
To open this dialog box choose SC Options button in the ribbon. Check the High Voltage
box, Low Voltage box, or both. Then, go back to the one-line and fault a bus. Buses that are
highlighted in red indicate voltages lower than the threshold limit defined in the Control tab
of the Short Circuit Options dialog box. If you choose only High Voltage, buses under
1000 volts will not be highlighted.

Note: Voltage Sensitivity results are only available on the one-line after a fault
operation on a single bus.

You can obtain a tabulated bus and voltage list for each fault by checking the Voltage
Sensitivity box in the Text Output tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box.

Line End Fault

A line end fault occurs when the end of a line is open or separated from its bus. This is not a
standard bus fault. Current flows directly to the end of the line without any contributions
from the bus to which the end of the line is connected.

Line End Fault Procedure

1. To perform a line end fault of a branch/feeder, select the breaker/fuse/switch at the end of the
feeder.

2. In the ribbon, click on the drop down arrow of the Fault Bus(es) button and choose Fault
Line End (from menu, choose Solve  Fault Line End).

You can perform line end fault for only one feeder at a time.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  178

Short Circuit Options

Short Circuit Control

Choose SC Options button from the ribbon (Short Circuit Options from the Menu bar), and
pick the Control tab to specify various parameters for controlling the behavior of a short
circuit study.

Control tab of Short Circuit Options Dialog Box

Fault Type: Four different types of faults are available during a short circuit analysis. The
default is 3 Phase which is generally used to determine the highest available currents for
equipment duty comparisons, and relaying. The other types, Line to Ground, Double Line to
Ground, and Line to Line are generally used for specialized relaying applications or system
trouble shooting.

X/R Calculation Type: Short circuit calculations are based on one of three methods: ANSI
Standard, Standard Complex or Characteristic Current method calculation. The ANSI
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  179

Standard method uses a separate R network for the interrupting duty (2-5 cycle) network to
determine a conservative Z/R ratio. This ratio is then used as the Thevenin equivalent fault
point X/R ratio for determining the appropriate breaker contact parting time multipliers and
NACD ratios. Current and voltage calculations are based on a complex (R+jX) network
reduction. Both the momentary (1/2 Cycle) and 30 cycle calculations use a complex network
reduction for all voltage, current, and X/R ratio calculations.

The Standard (non-ANSI) calculation uses a complex network reduction for all momentary,
interrupting duty, and 30 cycle voltage, current, and X/R ratio calculations.

The Characteristic Current Method (CCM) calculates the dc component of each branch based
on phase angle of the current flowing in it and then sums the dc component is each branch
contributing to the fault current. The ratio of the total dc to the total ac is used to determine
the equivalent X/R at fault point. Branch current flows having different current phase angles
(X/R ratios) will have the current peak at slightly different times before the first-half cycle.
To simplify calculations, the dc component is taken at 0.5-cycle for all branches using the
expression in equation below.

IDC = 2 IAC RMS SYM exp (- /|X/R|)

After each dc component is determined and totaled, the equivalent X/R ratio is found from
the equation below.

Equivalent X/R = -/ ln ( IDC /  IAC RMS SYM / 2)

The CCM method provides a conservative approach to obtain the fault point X/R ratio and
appears to do the best overall job without being over-conservative.

Reference: Parise G., “A new approach to calculate the decaying AC contributions to short-
circuit: the ‘characteristic’ currents method”; IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications,
Vol. 31, No. 1, January/February 1995.

"Fault All" Filters: Allows you to specify a specific bus Area, Zone, and kV Range that
will be faulted and reported when you fault multiple or all buses. This type of analysis is
useful when you are interested in studying only a specific region and do not need all of the
output associated with a full system analysis. This method is common for old-style text
programs. However, in EasyPower, it is just as simple to select the buses you wish to fault
from the one-line fault buses. Only the selected buses will be faulted.

Driving Point kV PU: System fault point voltage in per-unit. This value defaults to 1.0 per-
unit.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  180

Equipment Duty Threshold: Sets the lower limit for flagging breaker violations in
SmartDutyTM. If the threshold is set to -10 percent, SmartDuty will flag all equipment which
has short circuit duties within 10 percent of their maximum rating (greater than 90% of their
rating).

For example, a GE AM-13.8-500 air blast breaker has a momentary and interrupting duty
rating of 19.56/37 kA at 13.8 kV. SmartDuty will provide a warning flag if the current
exceeds 17.6/33.3 kA in either the momentary or interrupting rating. If the current exceeds
19.56/37 kA, a violation will be flagged.

Note: you must choose button from the ribbon (or View Equipment Duty from the
Menu bar) for this field to have any effect on the one-line result output. You must check the
Equipment Duty box in the Text Output tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box for
this field to have any effect for text result output.

Note: The ability to automatically check equipment duties during analysis is

only available if you have purchased the SmartDuty™ option to EasyPower.

Voltage Sensitivity Threshold: Sets the lower limit setting for flagging voltage violations.
If the threshold is set to -30 percent, bus voltages lower than 30 percent (70 percent voltage)
of the bus' base kV will be flagged. This allows you to quickly check for motor contactor
dropout, lighting flicker, etc.

Note: you must check one or more of the Voltage Sensitivity boxes in the One-Line Output
tab or the Text Output tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box for this field to have any
effect.

Short Circuit One-line Output

Choose SC Options from the ribbon (Tools Short Circuit Options from the Menu bar),
and pick the One-line Output tab to specify various parameters for controlling what is
output to the one-line during the short circuit study.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  181

One-line Output tab of Short Circuit Options Dialog Box

Display Options: Allows you to control what appears on the one-line while performing
short circuit calculations. You can enable or disable the following outputs.

Show Units: The short circuit results are displayed with their corresponding units, such as
kA, MVA, or pu for branch flows and kV(LL) or pu for voltages.

Show CT and Relay Symbols: The symbols for CT and relays can be made to appear or
disappear in the one-line.

Show Branch Flows: The display of branch flows during a short circuit can be enabled or
disabled. If they are disabled, only the bus fault current will appear on the one-line.

Show All Remote V&I for Single Bus Faults: When this is enabled the branch flows and
bus voltages are shown on all branches and buses respectively. You will not need to perform
a separate Remote Bus V&I command.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  182

Decimal Precision: This sets the number of digits past the decimal point for values
displayed on the one-line.

Fault Current: Allows you to choose the unit of fault current and the type of current. You
can display on the one-line the following types of currents:

 Symmetrical: Fault current without the dc component.

 Asymmetrical: Fault current with both dc and ac components. The asymmetrical value is
the maximum possible asymmetrical value in any phase. Asymmetrical currents are
based on the following equation:

 / (X/R)} 1/2
Iasym = I sym [1 + 2e{- ]

= 0.49 - 0.1 e{-(X/R)/3}

For interrupting duty currents the asymmetrical value is based on the fault point X/R ratio,
the No AC Decay (NACD) ratio, the contact parting time of the breaker, and whether the
breaker is rated on a Total or Symmetrical basis. The NACD ratio consists of two factors
dependent upon whether generation is Local or Remote. The equations and calculation
procedures are too detailed for this discussion. If additional information is required, refer to
Reference1.

For 30 cycle faults no asymmetry is present, and the asymmetrical current equals the
symmetrical current.

 Max Symmetrical and (Max Asymmetrical): This choice displays both symmetrical and
asymmetrical branch flows.

The following fault current units are available for display in the one-line:

 kA

 MVA

 Per-unit

Remote Bus Voltage (Sym): Voltages can be displayed as symmetrical voltage in either
physical units (kV) or in Per-unit values.

1 AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.010-
1979.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  183

Voltage Sensitivity: This option highlights all buses on the one-line with voltages below a
user-specified threshold value for a single fault. Voltage sensitivity studies are used to
determine problem areas which may cause contactor dropout or equipment failure for critical
areas such as boiler feed water pumps, ID fans or drive systems. Refer to the Control tab of
the Short Circuit Options dialog box for setting the threshold value.

Both high and low voltage remote buses can be studied.

Short Circuit Text Output

Choose SC Reports button from the ribbon (Tools Short Circuit Options Text Output
from the Menu bar), to specify the reports required for you short circuit study. Text results
are displayed in individual result windows which can be scrolled, reviewed, and printed at
your discretion. Because of the many text output combinations, no attempt will be made to
detail specific combinations of output. Instead, details of each option will be described in
general terms. You are encouraged to try different options and levels of detail for your
particular study requirements.

Short Circuit Options – Text Output tab

Short Circuit Reports: Five different text reports are available during short circuit analysis:
Momentary, Interrupting, 30 cycle, Equipment Duty, and Voltage Sensitivity. These results
can be examined on the screen, or they can be printed if desired. Multiple result windows
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  184

can be displayed and studied at the same time by choosing Window Tile from the Menu
bar.

Note: The ability to automatically check equipment duties during analysis is only available if
you have purchased the SmartDuty™ option to EasyPower.

Text output to the result windows are independent of one-line output. For example, you may
wish to study detailed text results of momentary and 30 cycle currents while displaying
equipment duty results on the one-line. To do this, check the Momentary and 30 cycle boxes
in Text Output tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box. Choose or View
Equipment Duty from the Menu bar. When a fault operation is done, EasyPower
automatically applies the necessary faults for duty analysis and displays the results on the
one-line. In addition, the momentary and 30 cycle faults are performed and displayed in the
text result windows.

Note: the Voltage Sensitivity operation only tabulates Momentary text results, regardless of
what you might have chosen for the one-line's Voltage Sensitivity display.

Include Fuse Duties (HV & LV): The fuse interrupting currents are displayed in the High
and Low Voltage Momentary result window since fuses open under momentary currents.

Fuse multiplying factors are based on the fault point X/R ratio and the fuse test X/R ratio.
The interrupting currents are calculated by adjusting the symmetrical current if the equipment
test X/R is less than the fault point X/R ratio. The following equation is used to determine
the currents:

sys test
Iadjsym = Isym [1 + 2e{- ]1/2 / [1 + 2e{- ]1/2

= 0.49 - 0.1 e{-(X/R)/3}

Standard test X/R ratios are 5, 8, 12, and 15 for distribution and power fuses2.

Include HV Breaker Interrupting Duties: This option lets you display ANSI Standard
interrupting duty currents for high voltage breakers. The breaker interrupting results will be
displayed in the High Voltage Interrupting result window according to the interrupting time
chosen under the Cycles option (3, 5, & 8 cycles).

2 IEEE Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single Pole Air Switches,
Fuse Disconnecting Switches, and Accessories, C37.41-1988.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  185

The interrupting currents are calculated by adjusting the symmetrical current by a

multiplying factor. For breakers the multiplying factor is based on the fault point X/R ratio,
the No AC Decay (NACD) ratio, the contact parting time of the breaker, and whether the
breaker is rated on a Total or Symmetrical basis. The NACD ratio consists of two factors
dependent upon whether generation is Local or Remote. The equations and calculation
procedures are too detailed for this discussion. If additional information is required refer to
Reference3,4,5.

Include LV Breaker Duties: Lets you display low voltage power circuit breaker (LVPCB)
and molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) Interrupting currents for low voltage momentary
faults. The results will be displayed in the Low Voltage Momentary result window. Notice
that under ANSI terminology, when the term interrupting is used for low voltage equipment,
it applies to momentary or 1/2 cycle faults. This is because low voltage equipment typically
interrupts within 1/2 cycle of fault inception.

The interrupting currents are calculated by adjusting the symmetrical current if the equipment
test X/R is less than the fault point X/R ratio6,7. The following equation is used to determine
the currents:

 -2 + efollo  -2 [1 + elow
Iadjsym = Isym [1 + e{- ] / [1 + e{- ]

= 0.49 - 0.1 e{-(X/R)/3}

X/Rtest = TAN[ARCCOS(Tested PF)]

3 Sample System for Three Phase Short Circuit Calculations, Conrad St Pierre, IEEE/IAS Mar/Apr
1990.

4 Interpretation of New American National Standards For Power Circuit Breaker Applications, Walter C.
Huening Jr., IEEE/IAS Sept/Oct 1969.

5 AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.010-
1979.

6 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.13-1981.

7 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers, NEMA Publications BU-195x, and BU1-1972.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Short Circuit Options  186

Breaker Type Tested Power Factor

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 15%

Molded Case Circuit Breakers over 20 kA 15-20%

Molded Case Circuit Breakers between 10-20 kA 25-30%

Molded Case Circuit Breakers between 0-10 kA 45-50%

Low Voltage Fuses 20% or 50%

Create Equipment Duty Report: Creates a report with current flows through every breaker
and evaluates the fault currents (breaker duty) in percentage of breaker rating.

Create Voltage Sensitivity Reports: Creates reports listing all buses which have voltages
below a specified threshold when a fault occurs in the system.

1/2, 5 and 30 Cycle Report Formats: Three types of text output styles are available, ANSI,
Symmetrical Components, and GE. The ANSI style is designed for reporting all the
significant ANSI Standard breaker comparison multipliers and results for standard protective
relaying requirements. If the ANSI output style is chosen, three different output formats can
be displayed. Levels 1-3 provide the standard format designed for equipment duty
comparison and relaying currents. Level 3 contains the most detailed information.

The symmetrical component style is designed specifically for specialized relaying purposes
that require a component output for both voltages and current. You are encouraged to try
different options and levels of details for your particular study requirements.

The other option is GE, which is the popular General Electric short circuit format.

Remote Bus V&I Units: These options let you display remote bus results in Sequence Per-
unit, Phase Amps & kV, or Phase Per-unit format.

Branch X/R Ratios: Lets you display branch X/R ratios for each contributing branch
current.

Display Generator Contributions: Lets you display generator and utility voltages and
currents for each fault.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Arc-Flash Hazards Analysis  187

Sample Short Circuit Report

Arc-Flash Hazards Analysis

Arc-flash hazards analysis is performed in the short circuit focus. For details on arc-flash
hazards analysis, see Chapter 15.

Calculation and Theory

ANSI Standard Short Circuit Calculations

EasyPower provides a full implementation of ANSI Standards C37.010-19798, C37.5-19799,

and C37.13-198110. A separate "R" (resistance) equivalent circuit is formed for the analysis
of the high voltage interrupting impedance circuit. The X/R ratio used for the calculation of
the interrupting duty multipliers is then found from the relationship Z/R. NACD (No AC
Decrement) ratios are calculated with consideration of generator Local and Remote

8 AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.010-
1979.

9 Calculation of Fault Current for Application of AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Total
Current Basis, ANSI/IEEE St. C37.5-1979.

10 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.13-1981.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Calculation and Theory  188

contributions as outlined in ANSI Std. C37.010-1979 and Reference11. High voltage

interrupting duty multipliers are also derived from Reference12.

Methodology

EasyPower calculates three-phase and unbalanced fault duties using a nodal admittance
network and sparse vector solutions. The system is modeled in the form given below.

[I]=[V][Y]

V = voltage matrix

I = current matrix

Y = Nodal Admittance vector (G +j B)

All values are expressed as complex vectors.

From the nodal admittance matrix, the Thevenin equivalent fault point admittance is
calculated. Fault currents are found from the relationship I=V*Y for all branches in the
system. A system fault point voltage of 1.0 per unit is assumed unless you state otherwise in
the Control tab of the Short Circuit Options dialog box. Pre-fault load current is ignored.

For momentary duty (1/2 cycle) faults, the positive sequence impedance is assumed equal to
the negative sequence impedance. X/R ratios are derived from the complex network.

Interrupting duty faults are modeled using multipliers to modify rotating machine
subtransient impedances (positive sequence) as outlined in ANSI Standards C37.010-1979,
and C37.5-1979. Negative sequence impedances are modeled using the rotating machine
subtransient impedances with no multipliers. A separate "R" (resistance) network is formed
for calculation of the fault point X/R ratio. The X/R ratio used for the calculation of the
interrupting duty multipliers is then found from the relationship Z/R. This method fully
complies with the ANSI Standard and has the advantage of accurate currents and voltages,
increased speed, and increased accuracy over the Separate X Separate R solution technique.

11 Interpretation of New American National Standards For Power Circuit Breaker Applications, Walter C.
Huening Jr., IEEE/IAS Sept/Oct 1969.

12 AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.010-
1979.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI Calculation and Theory  189

For 30 cycle faults, all motor contributions have decayed to zero, and a modified generator
impedance of 1.5 X"dv is used. This provides conservative results which are typically higher
than most dynamic studies indicate.

Proper Application of ANSI Standards

We would like to clarify a common misconception about the calculation of short circuit
currents in electrical power systems. Many programs on the market calculate short circuit
currents which are theoretically correct for infinite source supplies. Unfortunately, these
programs do not properly consider the AC and DC decrement characteristics of motors and
generators as outlined in ANSI Standards C37.010-1979, C37.5-1979, and C37.13-1981.

To properly consider this decrement and its associated multipliers, separate X and R or Z and
R reductions of the equivalent high voltage interrupting impedance circuit must be
performed. This is necessary to obtain the proper X/R ratio that will correctly account for the
actual AC and DC current decay rates for a system with multiple exponentially decaying
terms.

It is important to understand that what is theoretically a correct model for an infinite source
system, may vary greatly from what the system does under actual short circuit conditions.
There is no completely accurate way to combine parallel circuits with different values of X/R
into one circuit with a single value of X/R. The currents from the different circuits will be
the sum of several exponentially decaying terms, while the theoretical model of the circuit
will contain only one term.

Investigations have shown that by calculating the X/R ratio using separate reductions, a
better correlation to the actual X/R ratio of the system is obtained than from any other
reasonably simple procedure (including phasor representation). The error resulting from this
procedure is on the conservative side.

Since the interrupting duty multipliers are calculated from the X/R ratio, it is imperative that
the correct and conservative ratio be used. Errors ranging from 10-20 percent of the actual
interrupting duty current are possible when the phasor representation (without a separate R
reduction) is used to calculate the X/R ratio.

Solution techniques which calculate only a momentary current and use a transient decay rate
for an asymmetrical solution completely disregard ANSI Standards. Therefore, they should
not be used to apply high voltage interrupting duties to ANSI Standard breakers. The legal
(liability) ramifications of this should be considered.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI DC Short Circuit  190

What this means in practical terms is that it is very difficult to compare ANSI Standard
breakers using calculations from other methods. It is apparent that results from other
methods will vary widely from ANSI Standard results depending on the type of system.

DC Short Circuit
DC short circuit calculations are performed for steady state conditions, using branch
resistances, source resistances and short circuit output of converter equipment. The
inductance and therefore the rise time of DC short circuit currents have been neglected.

Also, the rectifier/inverter output source model does not fully support switching on the input
side. For example, if a DC generator source is switched off on the input side of an inverter,
the output will not see the difference due to the user-entered FLA x Mult value. This
requires the user to manually change inverter/rectifier output currents when switching input
sources in or out. One exception: If ALL input side sources are removed, then the
inverter/rectifier gives zero output. But if any source remains, then the inverter/rectifier
output is based on its own user-entered output entry. This means the user is required to add
an input side source for the inverter to have any effect in short circuit.

Thyristor Short Circuit Modeling Limitations

The Thyristor and Diode models for the AFD, Rectifier and Inverter are not modeled in detail
to simulate actual behavior under short circuit conditions. To do so would require an extreme
level of time simulation detail to properly model the interaction of the AC and DC systems.

DC Bus Fault

Under short circuit conditions on the DC bus, a Rectifier actually pulls current from the AC
system dependent upon the location of the fault on the DC system. If the fault is directly on
the DC bus of the inverter, then a bolted three-phase fault appears on the AC side will little to
no distortion. The fault current is then limited by the system Thevenin short circuit
impedance and the equivalent resistance of the Thyristor or Diode bridge.

If the fault is located some significant distance from the rectifier after a DC cable, then both
the AC and DC side fault currents will not be fully bolted, and we will have an intermediate
condition where only a transient simulation can determine the fault level for us. This, and the
fact the DC side current has excessive ripple lead to assigning such simulations to transient
methods, which are presently beyond the scope of EasyPower to do (an analysis suited well
for EMTP).
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI DC Short Circuit  191

AC Output Bus Fault

Under short circuit conditions on the AC output bus, again the AC and DC systems respond
to the fault. What this response is however is completely dependent upon the output
frequency of the AFD and Inverter. The fault as it appears on the DC bus can create extreme
ripple with a waveform characteristic that is not easily understood, and thus only a transient
level simulation can help in this matter. For an AFD that has a diode or Thyristor front end
and a Thyristor output, the fault will even manifest on the input of the AFD. Thus again, a
simulation with transient simulation of the rectifier and inverter bridges is essential to
simulate such fault conditions.

Thyristor Blocking

One other condition that controls the fault current time is Thyristor blocking (shutoff) under
fault conditions. Most likely, a Thyristor device will stop firing when it senses a short circuit
condition. This time is up to manufacturers, and may be a software or hardware timing
system. This is a detail left typically for detailed transient simulations of a well modeled
bridge.

Thyristor/Diode Fuse Protection

Under conditions of a DC bus fault, most likely current limiting fuses (typically in series with
each Thyristor or Diode) will blow to mitigate the fault. To simulate this, again a fully
detailed model of the bridge is needed; with fuses input into each component as physically
exists. Given bridges can have both series and parallel combinations of Thyristors and
Diodes, significant detail is needed in the specification and construction of the bridge model.
Chapter 4 Short Circuit Procedures and Reference - ANSI DC Short Circuit  193
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Overview  194

Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis

Overview
The EasyPower power flow analysis is designed for the analysis of three-phase power flows
and voltage drops in industrial, commercial, and utility power systems. EasyPower can be
used to calculate MW and MVAR flows, voltage drops, overload and voltage violations,
losses and other steady state parameters. It can also be used to study system optimization,
generator and transformer control, impact motor starting, and power factor correction.

EasyPower is unique in that individual bus loads, generation, and shunts can be modeled on a
bus without grouping. This provides the highest degree of flexibility and modeling accuracy.
Detailed transformer models provide off nominal tap ratios and load tap changers on either
side of the transformer.

Program results have been verified with independent programs from Oregon State
University, numerous test and IEEE cases, and programs from the General Electric
Company. In addition, EasyPower LLC has used various versions of this program since
1989 for its consulting business.

This chapter describes how to use EasyPower's power flow analysis features. It is intended
to provide a procedural overview which will help you quickly become productive. It is not
intended to provide a tutorial on power flow study procedures. You must be in the Power
Flow focus to do the operations described here.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Overview  195

Power Flow Commands

Power Flow ribbon

Power Flow Status Bar

Power Flow Status Bar

The Power Flow Status Bar indicates the following settings:

 Zoom Factor: How much the one-line is currently zoomed. See "Zooming In and Out"
on page 70 for more information.

 Grid Snap Status: Shows "SNAP" if grid snapping is on. See "The Snap Grid" on page
73 for more information.

 Last Solve Type: Shows "Power Flow" if Power Flow was done last; "Motor Start" if
Motor Starting was done last.

 Generation & Loads: The Generation & Loads choice as set from the One-line Output
tab of the Power Flow Options dialog box. This dialog box is opened by choosing PF
Options from the ribbon.

 Voltage Unit: The Voltage Unit choice as set from the One-line Output tab of the
Power Flow Options dialog box.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Overview  196

 Flows Unit: The Power Unit choice as set from the One-line Output tab of the Power
Flow Options dialog box.

 Losses Unit: The Losses Unit choice as set from the One-line Output tab of the Power
Flow Options dialog box.

Solving A Power Flow

To solve a power flow, choose Power Flow button from the ribbon (or Solve Power
Flow from the Menu bar). The power flow will solve and display results using the options
chosen on the ribbon and in the Control, One-Line Output, and Text Output tabs of the
Power Flow Options dialog box. This dialog box is opened by choosing PF Options
button.

Once the power flow has solved (indicated by results on the one-line), you can display
various other results by clicking on the appropriate Toolbar button. By default, text reports
will not be generated. You may choose to generate detailed or summary reports in the Text
Output tab of the Power Flow Options dialog box.

Changing Equipment Parameters

After the initial power flow case is solved, you may wish to study different contingencies or
optimize the system. Generator, utility, transformer, motor, load, capacitor, and shunt
parameters can be changed during a power flow session by double-clicking on the
equipment. A temporary dialog box will come up that lets you change specific parameters
applicable to power flow analysis.

For example, here is the temporary dialog box for generators:

 Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Impact Motor Starting  197

Temporary Generator Data Dialog Box

After you make a change, click on OK the dialog and re-run the power flow by choosing
button from the ribbon (or Solve Power Flow from the Menu bar). The system results
will immediately change, and then the next optimization level can be tried.

Note: The changes you make from an item's temporary dialog box are not saved in the
database. If you want to make a permanent change to an item's data, you must do it
from the Database Edit focus.

The fields available in a power flow temporary dialog box are a subset of the full database
dialog box for any given item. Refer to “Temporary Dialog Boxes” on page 207 for more
information.

Impact Motor Starting

To start a motor:

1. Solve the initial power flow case. Those results are used as initial conditions for the current
injection.

2. Double-click on the motor or MCC where you wish to place the additional starting load. A
temporary motor data dialog will come up that looks something like the following.

Temporary Motor Data Dialog Box

 Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Impact Motor Starting  198

3. Check the Motor Start box and then fill out the motor information. Then click on the Motor

Start button to start the solution, and the motor start results are displayed.

The motor starting HP is an additional load to the existing load model. The Motor Start
choice will add a user-defined HP (actual locked rotor amps) to that load for the motor
starting case only. The motor starting load does not affect the power flow load.

Important: When starting a motor, the scaling factor must be set appropriately. If you have
modeled an individual 7000 HP motor and you want to start it, the Scaling Factor field
needs to be set to zero to indicate that the motor is not currently running. If the Scaling
Factor field says 100%, the program will start a 7000 HP motor on top of the 7000 HP motor
already running. If you have an EasyPower motor modeled as a group of motors, you can
specify the percentage of currently running motors in that group and then start a single motor
within that group.

Example of Impact Motor Starting

For example, consider a motor where the existing motor load is 7000 HP at a scaling factor
of 100 percent. The base case power flow results indicate a bus voltage of .993 per-unit with
5.676 MW and 1.866 MVAR flowing to the 7000 HP motor. This could also be shown as
5.975 MVA @ .95 power factor by changing the One-line Output.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Impact Motor Starting  199

Base Case Power Flow Impact Motor Starting Solution

For this case, a 3000 HP motor is being started. The existing 7000 HP motor load remains
constant. Notice that the motor bus voltage has dropped to .943 per-unit, and the reactive
flow has increased to 17.564 MVAR due to the highly lagging starting current. The starting
motor HP and power factor are shown below the normal motor load.

Motor Starting with Starting Capacitors

In order to solve for motor starting with starting capacitors, we need to insert breakers or
switches on the one-line upstream to the motor and the starting capacitor. See figure below.
Before running power flow and motor start solutions, open the breaker. This allows a
preliminary power flow calculation without the motor and capacitor connected. Run power
flow and motor start solutions. Then close the breaker to connect the motor and starting
capacitor. You will now get the solution. To see the motor start solution without the starting
capacitor, you can open the breaker to the capacitor.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Swing Sources  200

(a) (b)
(a) Motor Starting with Starting Capacitors; (b) Solution

Swing Sources
A swing source is a utility supply or generator in which the real power flow is not given. In
any power flow solution, the net real and reactive powers cannot be fixed in advance at every
bus because the losses in the system are not known until the solution is complete. The swing
or "slack" sources supply the difference between the given real and reactive power into the
system at the other buses and the total system output plus the losses in the system.

Voltage magnitude and angle are given for each swing source. Real and reactive power
flows from (or to) this source are determined as part of the solution.

In most large industrial plants, the utility supply is designated as the swing source. In-plant
generation is usually designated as PV (voltage controlled), or PQG (fixed power and vars).
If multiple utility ties exist in the plant, they are usually all designated as swing, unless the
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Power Flow Options  201

user knows the specific power and or voltage values at a specific tie point. For plants which
are isolated from a utility supply, the largest generator is usually set as the swing source.

For commercial systems, the utility supply is almost always designated as the swing source
for the system. Commercial systems rarely have sufficient generation to allow specification
of a generator as a swing source. For emergency conditions, however, this is often done.

For utility systems, one or more large generators or an interchange point is usually
designated as the swing source.

Power Flow Options

Power Flow Control

Choose Tools Power Flow Options from the Menu bar, and pick the Control tab to
specify various parameters for controlling the behavior of a power flow study.

Control tab of Power Flow Options Dialog Box

Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Power Flow Options  202

Solution Mismatch

Solution mismatch controls the tolerance of power flow convergence and how long
convergence will take. The smaller the mismatch, the more difficult it becomes to make
power flows and voltages converge to a solution.

MW: Convergence tolerance of the bus megawatts. Flows into a bus converging to within
this tolerance of the actual load on the bus is considered to be an acceptable solution. The
default setting of 0.0001 MW (100 watts) is an extremely accurate tolerance.

MVAR: Convergence tolerance of the bus megavars. Flows into a bus converging to within
this tolerance of the actual load on the bus is considered to be an acceptable solution. The
default setting of 0.0001 MVAR (100 vars) is an extremely accurate tolerance.

kV PU: This field determines the bus voltage tolerance for generator PQG buses that switch
back to PV buses. Bus voltage must converge to within this tolerance of the actual load on
the bus to be an acceptable solution.

Iterations: Number of solution iterations allowed for convergence. For most typical
industrial systems only five to six iterations are required for convergence. If many load tap
changers or tighter controls are used, 10-15 iterations may be required.

Isolated Subsystems: All power flow solutions require a swing (slack) source to account for
system losses, etc. (see "Swing Sources" on page 200). To solve an isolated system requires
you or the program to add a swing source. An isolated subsystem is when a portion of the
one-line is separated from the main part and does not have its own swing source (see below).
This typically occurs when you open a feeder breaker on a radial line or transformer. It may
also occur when opening multiple breakers on more complicated looped systems.

 Don't Allow: When you choose Solve and an isolated subsystem is detected by
EasyPower, you will receive a message and the Solve will not be carried out.

 Ignore: When you choose Solve and an isolated subsystem is detected by EasyPower,
the regular solution and output will occur but no output will be displayed for the isolated
subsystem.

Tap Acceleration Factor: Factor used to slow speed through iterations by changing LTC of
transformer when changing taps.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Power Flow Options  203

Motor Start Solution Method

Motor Start Solution Method controls the algorithm used, and the way loads are modeled
when motors are started in the power flow analysis.

Constant Impedance, Non-iterative: A direct solution method using the admittance matrix
and voltages from the existing power flow solution. All constant kVA and current loads are
converted to constant impedance loads for this method. Starting motors are also modeled as
a constant impedance. The advantages of this method are its speed since the solution is
direct (no iterations are required), and the fact that it cannot diverge. The disadvantage is
that it may be non-conservative depending on the solution voltages. The reason for this is
that constant impedance loads are a function of the square of the voltage. As the system
voltage is reduced, the load is proportionally reduced also, effectively reducing the load.

Constant kVA, Iterative: An iterative method using the same algorithm as the power flow
solution. All constant kVA, current, and impedance loads remain modeled as they are in a
standard power flow solution. Starting motors are modeled as a constant impedance. The
advantage of this method is its accuracy since it correctly models all load types. The
disadvantage is that it can diverge (fail to solve) if the voltages become too low, or the loads
are too high.

Output Criteria

Area: Allows you to specify a specific bus Area that will be reported in text results.

Zone: Allows you to specify a specific bus Zone that will be reported in text results.

Overload Threshold: Sets the limit for flagging overload violations. Equipment items not
in violation, yet within this threshold %, will be highlighted for easy identification. This
setting applies to both one-line output and text result output.

For example, suppose a cable rated for 500A is loaded to 480A, and the Overload Threshold
is set to -10 percent. The percent overload is determined as follows.

Overload threshold in amperes = 500A x (1 - .10) = 450A

Overload % = (480 - 500)/500 = -4%

Note that the overload is negative, indicating that while the cable is not overloaded, it is 6
percent over the threshold limit of 10 percent. Therefore, it will be highlighted on the one-
line when you choose button (or View Overloads from the Menu bar).
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Power Flow One-line Output  204

We can also display the overload as a percentage of the equipment rating. To use this option,
Open Options dialog, go to System tab and check the box “Use 100% convention for
displaying analysis overloads/overduties”.

Bus Undervoltage / Overvoltage Threshold: Sets the minimum and maximum limit for
determining voltage violations. Bus voltages that either exceed the maximum limit or drop
below the lower limit are in violation. Buses in violation will be highlighted on the one-line
and printed in Voltage Violation text reports.

Power Flow One-line Output

Note: Text output is independent of one-line output. This means you can be viewing
specific power flow results or attributes directly on the one-line, but displaying entirely
different results in the text result windows.

Choose Tools Power Flow Options from the Menu bar, and pick the One-line Output
tab to determine the type of results that are displayed on the one-line during power flow
analysis.

One-line Output of the Power Flow Options Dialog Box

Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Power Flow One-line Output  205

Show Units: Allows you to display units of branch flows and bus voltages.

Show Generator Controlled kV and Bus: Allows you to display the generator controlled
bus and the voltage in kV. Generator power flows are always shown.

Global Decimal Precision: This sets the number of digits past the decimal point for values
displayed on the one-line. This affects all results except bus voltage.

Voltage Decimal Precision: This sets the number of digits past the decimal point for bus
voltage values displayed on the one-line.

Branch Side: You can choose to display both "From" and "To" branch flows or you can
optionally restrict the display to just "From" or "To" the bus.

Bus Voltage: Voltages can be displayed in either physical units kV(LL) or V(LL) or in per-
unit values.

Branch Flows: Branch flows can be displayed in any of the following units:

 kW and kVAR

 kVA and Power Factor

 MW and MVAR

 MVA and Power Factor

 Current in Amps

Generation & Loads: Allows you to choose generator output and loads to be shown as any
of the following:

 kW and kVAR

 kVA and Power Factor

 MW and MVAR

 MVA and Power Factor

Power Unit: Generation, branch flows, or loads can be displayed in either kVA or MVA
units.

Losses Unit: System losses can be displayed in either kW and kVAR or MW and MVAR
units.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Power Flow Text Output  206

Power Flow Text Output

Note: Text output is independent of one-line output. This means you can be viewing
specific power flow results or attributes directly on the one-line, but displaying entirely
different results in the text result windows.

Choose PF Options button in the ribbon (Tools Power Flow Options from the Menu
bar), and pick Text Output to determine the output of text results during a power flow

analysis. Alternatively, you can choose PF Text Reports button from the Power Flow
ribbon. Text outputs are displayed in individual result windows which can be scrolled,
reviewed, and printed at your discretion. A detailed power flow result window and a
summary window are available. Because of the many text output combinations, no attempt
will be made to detail specific combinations of output. You are encouraged to try different
options and levels of detail for your particular study requirements.

Text Output of the Power Flow Options Dialog Box

Detail Report Options: Lets you choose from two different detailed power flow result
formats. The IEEE/WSCC format may be familiar to you; however the Standard format
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  207

provides the most detail. If you prefer to look at just the one-line output and no detailed text
results choose "None".

Units: Choose between kV(LL) and V(LL) for voltage unit and choose between MVA and
kVA for Branch Flow units of the text report output.

Summary Report Options: The summary window allows you to look at detailed
summaries for specific equipment types or conditions. You can choose all the reports at once
with the All Summary Reports check box.

Temporary Dialog Boxes

Double-clicking on a generator, utility, transformer, MCC, panel schedule, motor, load,
capacitor, or shunt while you are in the Power Flow focus will bring up a dialog box
containing a subset of the dialog box you see from the Database Edit focus. These dialog
boxes let you temporarily change specific power flow data during an analysis.

Note: Temporary changes while in analysis can now be saved to the database.
The changes can be saved to the base-case or in a scenario using Scenario
Manager.

For your reference, the item's ID name and connection information is shown at the top of the
dialog box. In some cases, other reference information is also shown (e.g. the Controlled
Bus for a generator).
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  208

Temporary Generator Data

Temporary Generator Data Dialog Box

Power Flow

Notice that the Temporary Generator Data and Temporary Utility Data dialog boxes look
similar. This is because the fields in these temporary dialog boxes perform exactly the same
functions in power flow analysis.

Model: Generator bus type used in modeling the power flow simulation. When you choose
a model, those fields which are inappropriate are grayed out.

 Swing - A swing bus holds the bus voltage and angle constant. To do this there cannot be
limits on the amount of MW or MVAR the swing machine can accept or provide.

 PV - Constant power, constant voltage generator. This is also known as a regulated

generator. This model tries to hold a user-specified bus voltage within generator MVAR
limits.

 PQG - Constant power, constant var generator. This is also known as an unregulated
generator. This model holds the MVAR generation within given voltage limits.

MW: Generator output MW. This may be actual operating or a rated value. This applies
only to a PV or PQG generator.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  209

MVAR: Generator output MVAR. This is only used when the generator is a constant
power, constant var (PQG) machine or when a PV generator MVAR limit has been reached
and the machine automatically switches to PQG.

MVAR Limits: Minimum and maximum MVAR limits for regulated generators (PV). The
generator will switch to type PQG if these limits are violated.

Ctrl kV PU: Desired control voltage for a regulated generator (PV). The generator will try
to control the voltage at the controlled bus to a given value. If the generator bus is the swing
bus, this voltage serves as the reference voltage. The voltage is entered in per-unit.

Ctrl Angle Controlled angle is used only when a generator is designated as a swing
generator. The value is entered in degrees.

Temporary Utility Data

Temporary Utility Data Dialog Box

Power Flow

Model: Utility bus type used in modeling the power flow simulation. When you choose a
model, those fields which are inappropriate are grayed out.

 Swing - A swing bus holds the bus voltage and angle constant. To do this there cannot be
limits on the amount of MW or MVAR the swing machine can accept or provide.

 PV - Constant power, constant voltage utility. This is also known as a regulated utility.
This model tries to hold a user-specified bus voltage within utility MVAR limits.

 PQG - Constant power, constant var utility. This is also known as an unregulated utility.
This model holds the MVAR generation within given voltage limits.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  210

MW: Utility output MW. This may be actual operating or a rated value. This applies only
to a PV or PQG utility.

MVAR: Utility output MVAR. This is only used when the utility is a constant power,
constant var (PQG) machine or when a PV utility MVAR limit has been reached and the
machine automatically switches to PQG.

MVAR Limits: Minimum and maximum MVAR limits for regulated utility (PV). The
utility will switch to type PQG if these limits are violated.

Ctrl kV PU: Desired control voltage for a regulated utility (PV). The utility will try to
control the voltage at the controlled bus to a given value. If the utility bus is the swing bus,
this voltage serves as the reference voltage. The voltage is entered in per-unit.

Ctrl Angle: Controlled angle is used only when a utility is designated as a swing utility.
The value is entered in degrees.

Temporary Filter Data

The Temporary Filter Data Dialog Box is essentially the same as the Filter Data Dialog Box
which opens in the Database focus. All fields which were active in the Database focus can
be changed in the Power Flow focus. However, the type of filter cannot be changed. If a
notch filter is specified in the Database focus, only those fields applicable to a notch filter
can be modified in Power Flow.

Temporary Two-Winding Transformer Data

Temporary Two-Winding Transformer Data Dialog Box

Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  211

Winding Information

Tap kV: Tap kV of a winding. Unless you change them from this dialog box, these values
default to the Tap kV values set from the Database Edit focus.

These choices are only available if the transformer is defined to have LTC information from
the Database Edit focus.

Auto: Sets LTC to automatically control voltage or var flow.

Blocked: Sets LTC to be blocked. The solution will be determined directly from
transformer taps.

Step Size: LTC step size default is the percentage in the Database dialog box, but you can
type in your own percentage step size.

Temporary Three-Winding Transformer Data

Temporary Three-Winding Transformer Data Dialog Box

Winding Information

Tap kV: Tap kV of a winding. Unless you change them from this dialog box, these values
default to the Tap kV values set from the Database Edit focus.

These choices are only available if the transformer is defined to have LTC information from
the Database Edit focus.

Auto: Sets LTC to automatically control voltage or var flow.

Blocked: Sets LTC to be blocked. The solution will be determined directly from
transformer taps.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  212

Step Size: LTC step size default is the percentage in the Database dialog box, but you can
type in your own percentage step size..

Temporary Motor Control Center Data

Temporary MCC Data Dialog Box

MCC Load

HP and Total kVA: These list the totals of the items which are connected to the MCC. If
an item has "Off" in the status column of the Description tab library of the regular database
dialog, it will not be included in this total.

Load Model: This indicates the choice made in the Power Flow tab of the regular database
dialog, either MCC Specifications or SCADA.

Load Type: MCCs can be modeled for the power flow solution in several different ways.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  213

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.

 Constant kW + j Current - This model is a combination of the above models and more
closely matches actual motor characteristics within normal operating voltages.

Scaling Factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total motor load used in determining
power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual HP (total connected value) entered in
the HP field can remain static. This reduces modeling errors and eliminates multiple
databases for different contingencies.

Motor Starting

Start Motor: When this box is checked, it declares the selected motor as a starting motor in

the current motor load. This only takes effect when you choose Motor Start button (or
Solve Motor Starting from the Menu bar). However, motor starting load is ignored when
you choose (or Solve Power Flow). Note that the starting motor HP does not become
part of the power flow solution.

Motor HP: Starting motor horsepower.

kVA/HP: The motor kVA rating per horsepower.

Locked Rotor Mult: Starting motor locked rotor multiplier. Typical values are 6 for
induction motors and 4-5 for synchronous motors. The locked rotor multiplier is the
reciprocal of the starting motor subtransient reactance (X"dv).

Start Power Factor: Starting motor power factor. This is typically between 12-15% for
most machines.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  214

Temporary Panel Schedule Data

Temporary Panel Data Dialog Box

Total kVA: This lists the total load of the items which are connected to the Panel Schedule.
If an item has "Off" in the status column of the Description tab library of the regular
database dialog, it will not be included in this total.

Load Model: This indicates the choice made in the Power Flow tab of the regular database
dialog, either Panel Specifications or SCADA.

Load Type: Motors can be modeled for the power flow solution in several different ways.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.

Scaling Factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total load used in determining power
flows. This reduces modeling errors and eliminates multiple databases for different
contingencies.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  215

Temporary Motor Data

Temporary Motor Data Dialog Box

Motor Load

HP and kVA: These list the input HP and calculated kVA.

Load Model: This indicates the choice made in the Power Flow tab of the regular database
dialog, either Motor Specifications or SCADA.

Load Type: Motors can be modeled for the power flow solution in several different ways.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more
closely matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than
other models, but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant
throughout the voltage range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  216

 Constant kW + j Current - This model is a combination of the above models and

more closely matches actual motor characteristics within normal operating voltages.

Scaling Factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total motor load used in determining
power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual HP (total connected value) entered in
the HP field can remain static. This reduces modeling errors and eliminates multiple
databases for different contingencies.

Motor Starting

Start Motor: When this box is checked, it declares the selected motor as a starting motor in

the current motor load. This only takes effect when you choose Motor Start (or Solve
Motor Starting from the Menu bar). However, motor starting load is ignored when you
choose Power Flow (or Solve Power Flow in the menu). Note that the starting
motor HP does not become part of the power flow solution.

Motor HP: Starting motor horsepower.

kVA/HP: The motor kVA rating per horsepower.

Locked Rotor Mult: Starting motor locked rotor multiplier. Typical values are 6 for
induction motors and 4-5 for synchronous motors. The locked rotor multiplier is the
reciprocal of the starting motor subtransient reactance (X"dv).

Power Factor: Starting motor power factor. This is typically between 12-15% for most
machines.

Temporary Load Data

Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Temporary Dialog Boxes  217

Temporary Load Data Dialog Box

Load Data

Any combination of constant kVA, constant current, or constant impedance loads may be
modeled. Different types of loads can also be mixed and matched to model a specific type of
equipment such as variable speed drives.

Load Model: This indicates the choice made in the regular database dialog, either
Specifications or SCADA.

Constant kVA: Constant kVA load entered in MW and MVAR. Note that the term
"constant kVA" seems to be an industry standard even though MVA seems to be the more
common unit for large industrial uses.

Constant I: Constant current load given in MW and MVAR. These values should be
entered in 1.0 per-unit volts.

Constant Z: Constant impedance load given in MW and MVAR. These values should be
entered in 1.0 per-unit volts.

Scaling factor: Each load can be varied by applying a different scaling factor. This lets you
model the actual panel or lumped load on a bus, then study different loading conditions. This
allows quick "what if" studies and prevents errors that occur from data entry.

Temporary Capacitor Data

Temporary Capacitor Data Dialog Box

Capacitor Specifications

MVAR: Capacitor MVAR rating at one per-unit voltage.

Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Considerations for Multiple Generators on a Bus  218

Temporary Shunt Data

Temporary Shunt Data Dialog Box

Shunt Specifications

R+jX: Shunt data is entered as R+jX ohms. Standard shunt reactor data is entered using
positive impedances, although negative numbers can also be entered.

Considerations for Multiple Generators on

a Bus
EasyPower allows multiple generators or utilities to be placed on a bus. To provide this
flexibility, several guidelines must be followed. These are very similar to the real world
requirements normally imposed on a system.

There are three types of generator/utility models for the power flow solution: Swing (Slack),
PV, and PQG. Each type has a specific mathematical function and an order of precedence or
rank in the solution. The Swing has the highest order because mathematically, it exerts more
control over the system. Next in line comes the PV type, and then the PQG type. This order
is used in determining how the system is modeled and how the system model changes when
breakers are open or closed.

When there are multiple PV type generators on a bus, they must all control the bus to the
same voltage. If different values are entered in the database, the program will use the voltage
from the largest generator as the control voltage. If the generators are designated as Swing,
the size of each generator is irrelevant. The voltage and angle of the first Swing generator
read in will be used.

PV and Swing generators cannot be placed on the same bus. This is because they will both
try to control the bus voltage. PV / PQG or Swing / PQG combinations are acceptable.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Considerations for Opening and Closing Breakers  219

Bus control defaults to the highest order generator on the bus.

Watt & Var Sharing

When multiple generators are present on a bus, the watt and var load must be shared. For a
PV / PQG combination, the PQG generators will output their maximum watt and vars. The
PV generators will also output their maximum watt capability, but will share the var output.
Sharing is based on the size of the generator. For example, suppose three PV generators on a
bus have ratings of 10, 40, and 50 MVA. If the var requirements of the bus are 50 MVAR,
the smallest will supply 10 percent of the load, the middle 40 percent, and the largest 50
percent.

Share = Generator Rating / Generator Total

This applies only to PV type generators. For multiple Swing generators on one bus, or
throughout the system, the share is divided evenly between the generators.

Generator Switching

When the var limit of a PV generator is reached, it must switch to a PQG type in order to
prevent violating the reactive capability limit of the generator. When the system allows, the
generator will automatically switch back to allow a PV type solution. For multiple
generators on a bus, the reactive capability limit is the sum of all the PV generators. When
this limit is violated, all the generators will switch to PQG type. When the var constraints
ease, they will all be switched back.

Considerations for Opening and Closing

Breakers
While you are in the Power Flow focus, generator breakers can be opened or closed by
double clicking on the breaker. Opening a generator breaker does not cause an isolated
system. When closing tie breakers, make sure that generators on each side of the tie are
compatible.

Note: The ability to open and close breakers or switches during analysis is only
available if you have purchased the SmartBreaker™ option to EasyPower.
 Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Troubleshooting Power Flows That Fail to Solve  220

Troubleshooting Power Flows That Fail to

Solve
All power flow equations are non-linear and require an iterative technique to solve. A wide
range of data input values that increase the chance of numerical round off are inherent in
many systems. For these reasons, some power flows may fail to converge. Following are
some helpful hints in troubleshooting a failed power flow case.

1. Often, trouble can be traced to generator control voltages being too high or too low. Typical
values should be 1.0-1.05 with 1.01 as a good starter. Don't be afraid to vary the values to
get a solution. You can then gradually increase the voltage to the desired level.

2. If a voltage controlled load tap changing transformer is electrically close to a PV generator,

they will fight each other to control the voltage. They need not be trying to control the same
bus--just being electrically close may cause problems, since one bus voltage will affect the
other's. Try blocking the LTC, turning it off, or changing it to MVAR control. You can also
change the generator type to PQG (constant power, constant var). Using the same reasoning,
the voltage that the LTC is trying to control may be influenced to a larger degree by a nearby
generator or utility supply.

3. Transformer LTCs do not have the same amount of control over system voltages as large
generators. If you are used to controlling your system with generation, don't be surprised if
LTC control is not sufficient.

4. If the load is too large, convergence may be difficult. This is especially true if high
impedance lines are present. Try converting the load to constant impedance. If the case
solves, you know that is the problem.

5. If a generator is trying to control voltages that are too electrically remote, the solution may
diverge. Try controlling the generator bus first. If you get a good solution, gradually work
your way to the remote bus. Remember the effect other controlling factors might have such
as utility supplies and LTCs. Even though they may appear far away on the one-line, they
can be electrically close. Check your input data.

6. Isolated or separated systems are not allowed in the power flow. This is because each
subsystem must have a Swing bus in order to solve. Be very careful when opening or closing
breakers.

7. A great deal of opening and closing breakers in the Power Flow focus may add to the
possibility of round off in some systems, which can eventually cause the solution to diverge.
 Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Calculation and Theory  221

If you suspect this is the problem, go to the Database Edit focus by choosing Database Edit
button (Analysis Database Edit from the Menu bar). Then, re-enter the Power Flow
focus and re-open or close the breakers that you want to be different than their normal states
(i.e. normally open or normally closed). Alternatively, while you are in the Database Edit
focus, you can change the normal states directly.

8. If you get power flow divergence, check the Mismatch report in the Power Flow Summary
report. Find the bus that has the largest mismatch over a period of several iterations. Go to
that bus in the one-line and look for problems. Some areas to look for include:

 Loading which is too high. Check for decimal place errors, remembering that EasyPower
input data is in MVA not kVA.

 Transformer taps or motor kV's which may be off by a decimal point. A transformer
MVA may also be entered too low, or the motor HP too high.

 Look for these problems in the area (within two buses) of the bus with the greatest
mismatch. After you feel you have checked this area thoroughly, move onto the bus with
the next-highest mismatch on the list, and so forth.

9. Another problem area is overloading of the complete system. Typical user input is to place
all loads at a 100 percent scaling factor. Typical scaling factors for process plants are in the
40-70 percent range. A good place to start is to scale all group loads at 40-50 percent and all
large individual motor loads to 70 percent. A quick and easy way to tell if this is the problem
is to go to the database and turn off a large selection of loads. Then re-run the power flow
and check for results.

Calculation and Theory

EasyPower calculates three-phase power flows using a newly developed Current Injection
method (CI). The CI method is more robust than either the Fast De-coupled, Gauss-Seidel,
or similar hybrid arrangements, and an order of magnitude faster than the Newton-Rhapson
method. The CI method uses the nodal admittance network and the latest in sparse vector
solutions to obtain solution accuracy's within one kVA. The system is modeled in the form
given below. Refer to Reference13 for additional details.

13 Robust Power Flow Solutions For Distribution Management Systems, W.F. Tinney, T.G. Nowak, R.
Bacher, K.I. Geisler, IEEE/PES Summer 1984
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis Calculation and Theory  222

It should be noted that many programs offer two or three solution techniques. This is done
because most solutions cannot solve a variety of problems ranging from the simple to the
difficult. The CI method is the most robust algorithm available to the industry and does not
require user-specified backup analysis, voltage profiles or starter solutions.

Impact Motor Starting

EasyPower uses the constant impedance method for calculating impact motor starting
conditions. Impact conditions are modeled at time equals 0+ and are considered the worst
case voltage for motor starting. This method models each existing load as a constant
impedance, and generation as a constant voltage source behind its subtransient impedance.
Starting motors are also considered as constant impedance loads based on the motors starting
MVA and power factor.

This method is very robust and works for all systems and voltage drop levels. Up to 10
motors can be started at once.
Chapter 5 Power Flow Analysis  223
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Overview  224

Chapter 6 Scenario Manager

Overview
Scenario Manager allows the original one-line (base case), different switching
configurations, contingency conditions, and potential modifications to be stored in one file.
When creating a one-line in the database focus, the base case must first be established. It can
be analyzed and verified in Power Flow, Short Circuit, or Harmonics analysis focus. Using
Scenario Manager, you can then do the following:

1. Add, remove, or modify equipment items,

2. Change the normal position of breakers and switches, or

3. Change the zoom scale and viewing window location.

When saving scenarios, the changes will be saved as macros, therefore preserving the
established base case. Equipment items changed in scenarios are indicated with a different
color for easy identification.

Scenario Manager Commands

Click on the Scenario Mgr button in the ribbon to view to the various commands.

Scenario Manager commands

New Scenario: Opens a new scenario. EasyPower assigns a default name.

Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Manager Functionality  225

Open Scenario: Opens an existing scenario. A list of scenarios is provided.

Open Base Case: Leaves the open scenario and reverts back to the last-saved base
case.

Store Scenario: Stores changes from the last saved base-case to a scenario.

Store Scenario As: Stores changes from the last saved base-case to a scenario
allowing you to specify the name of the scenario.

Delete Scenario: Deletes an existing scenario.

Advanced  Store Scenario as Base Case: Stores the current scenario as the base
case. This will overwrite the information in the base case.

Create Scenario Comparison Report: Creates report for worst-case arc flash
hazards by comparing results between different scenarios.

Scenario Manager Functionality

Scenarios in EasyPower are essentially macros. These macros are created by taking the
differences between the temporary database file on which EasyPower is working, and the last
saved database file. To better illustrate this, a explanation is necessary detailing how
EasyPower database files are saved and opened.

When EasyPower opens a database file (such as “simple”), EasyPower makes a copy of that
database file. All subsequent changes to the one-line are put in that copied (temporary)
database file. For example, if you add a motor, that new motor is put in the temporary
database file - not the saved database file. The saved database is not touched until the user
presses button on the Quick Access toobar (or chooses File Save from the menu).
When operating in the base case, saving the file will simply copy the temporary database to
the saved database. At that instant, the temporary and saved databases will match.

With this understood, the process of storing a scenario can be described in two steps:

1. Scenario Store creates a macro which stores all the differences between the temporary
database file and the saved database file, and

2. Scenario Store attaches the named macro to the temporary database file, not the saved
database file.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Opening a New Scenario  226

Note: Storing a scenario does not automatically put the macro in the saved database. You
must remember to perform a File Save after storing the scenario to permanently save the
scenario.

Scenario Interface (example)

Following is an example that describes the user-interface of creating a scenario:

In the EasyPower\Samples directory, open “simple”. Save the file. This will establish the
base case for this file. The Windows title bar will indicate <base case>.

Choose Scenario Mgr  New Scenario from the ribbon. This will put the one-line in
scenario mode. The Windows title bar will display <Scenario-1>, which is the default name
EasyPower assigns for a scenario. Any changes made while in “Scenario-1” will only be
saved to this scenario, and will not be seen in the saved base case.

Add a motor to “BUS-2”.

Choose Store Scenario. “Scenario-1” will become a macro which commands EasyPower to
add a motor to “BUS-2”.

Choose Open Base Case. This will return you to the last saved “base case” file (the one
saved in step #1 above). The motor will disappear.

Choose Scenario Open. A dialog box will appear. Choose “Scenario-1” and press the OK
button. This will run the macro that was stored in step #4. The motor should re-appear.

Opening a New Scenario

When opening a scenario (either new or existing), the following message box will appear if
the saved database file differs from the current temporary database file:
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Opening a New Scenario  227

Open Scenario Message Box

Save one-line before continuing: EasyPower will save the current base case before opening
the scenario. This re-establishes the base case before opening.

Re-open previously saved one-line before continuing: EasyPower will re-open the last
saved base case before opening the scenario. All current unsaved changes will be lost if this
option is chosen.

Continue: EasyPower will enter scenario mode without saving or re-opening. Any current
changes (different than the last saved base case) will remain.

If this option is chosen for Open Scenario, the existing macro (scenario) will simply be run
on the currently open file. If you then store the scenario, the changes made in the base case
before the Scenario Open - but after the last File Save - will be added to this scenario. (If
you do not store, the scenario will not be changed.)

If this option is chosen for New Scenario, the changes made in the base case before the
Scenario Open - but after the last File Save - will be included in this scenario when stored.

Opening an Existing Scenario

When opening an existing scenario, the Open Scenario dialog box will appear. A list of the
previously stored scenarios will appear. Choosing one of the scenarios and then pressing
Open will run the scenario macro and thus update the one-line.

Open Scenario dialog box

Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Opening a New Scenario  228

Open: Opens the selected scenario in the window.

Report: Creates a report for the selected scenario. The report contains information on what
item is different from the Base Case. See figure below.

Cancel: Closes the dialog.

Help: Opens online Help.

Synchronize Graphics with Base Case: If this checkbox is checked, EasyPower will ignore
any group moves, item dragging, etc. in the scenario, and simply leave all equipment in the
same location as in the current base case. All data changes (i.e. load scaling factors, breaker
ON/OFF states) will all be executed as usual in the scenario. New equipment and deleted
equipment will also be executed. This option is only intended to be a possible safety valve if
base case equipment items were later added/moved on top of new/moved scenario equipment
items.

Scenario Info: This provides information about the EasyPower version that created the
scenario and the size of macros stored in the scenario. The information displayed pertains to
the highlighted scenario in the dialog.

Caution: Changes in the base case can potentially invalidate some scenario changes.
For example:

 Deleting a motor “M-1” in the base case will invalidate the step in a scenario
that says to change the scaling factor of motor “M-1” to 60%.

 Group moving items in the base case to the same one-line location where a
scenario is adding items will leave the two groups of equipment items super-
imposed on each other. (Choosing the “Synchronize Graphics with Base Case”
option when opening the scenario might get around this problem.)

The scenarios will usually handle changes to the base case with no trouble, but obviously
there are some base case changes that will pose problems in scenarios.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Opening a New Scenario  229

Storing Scenarios

Choosing Store Scenario will store as a scenario the changes made to the one-line since the
last saved base case. If no name has been specified, the Store Scenario dialog box will
appear and request a scenario name. This same dialog appears when choosing Tools
Scenario Manager Scenario Store As from the menu.

Scenario Store dialog box

Note: You are not required to perform a Scenario New or Scenario Open before a Scenario
Store. The main benefit for using Scenario New first is that it visually puts you in scenario
“mode”. If you choose Scenario Store while operating in the base case, the changes made
after your last File Save will become part of the stored scenario.

Deleting Scenarios

Choose Delete Scenario to bring up the Delete Scenario dialog box:

Chapter 6 Scenario Manager File Save versus Store Scenario  230

Delete Scenario dialog box

You can select multiple scenarios to delete. As with the Store Scenario, the scenarios are
not deleted from the saved database until the file is saved by pressing button on the
Qucik Access toolbar or choosing File Save from the menu.

File Save versus Store Scenario

Following is a comparison the true functionalities of both Scenario Store and File Save:

While in base case…

Store Scenario creates a macro with the differences between the temporary database and
saved database. This macro is attached to the temporary database file, not the saved database
file.

File Save copies the temporary database to the saved database - thus updating the saved
database. Any attached scenarios in the temporary database would likewise become
attachments in the saved database.

While in a scenario…

Scenario Store creates a macro with the differences between the temporary database and
saved database. This macro is attached to the temporary database file, not the saved database
file.

File Save performs both a Scenario Store, and a File Save, just as described for the base case.
 Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Analysis Changes in Scenarios  231

As you can see, performing a File Save allows you to skip the Scenario Store step since File
Save stores automatically.

Analysis Changes in Scenarios

Scenarios will include temporary analysis changes in the Scenario Store. The following
gives a comparison of Scenario Store and File Save with regards to database and temporary
analysis changes:

1. Scenario Store

 While in Database Edit focus, scenarios only store the changes made in the
Database Edit focus.

 While in an any analysis focus, the scenarios store the equipment settings in the
current focus. If the equipment settings in the current focus are different than in
the Database Edit focus, the scenario store will ignore differences in the Database
Edit focus.

2. File Save, while in base case…

 While in Database Edit focus, File Save only saves the changes made in the
Database Edit focus. Any previously stored scenarios will be included in the
save.

 While in any analysis focus, File Save ignores all temporary changes made to the
equipment. Any previously stored scenarios will be included in the save.

3. File Save, while in a scenario, will perform both a Scenario Store and a File Save. The store
and save follow the same rules as described in 1 and 2. above.

 Most of the analysis options (i.e. Short Circuit Options) are also stored in scenarios.
This further allows you to customize analysis contingency cases and “what if”
scenarios that are different from your established base case mode of operation.

Scenario Colors

Items modified in scenarios will be highlighted different colors for easy reference. The
colors are specified in the Tools Options Screen dialog box:
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  232

Options dialog box

These colors take effect when opening a scenario. All new items in a scenario get
highlighted the New Scenario color specified in the Options dialog box. All changed items
(that already existed in the base case, but were changed in the scenario) get highlighted the
Changed Scenario color.

Scenario Comparison Report

The fault levels and incident energies at any bus or equipment may change with the
connection configuration within a plant or network. For example you may have a scenario
with just the utility as source, or just a local generator as source, or a combination of two or
more sources. In these different scenarios you will get different fault levels at any bus in the
system. If you have several scenarios stored in a one-line file, you can compare the results for
arc flash hazard for each scenario and automatically create a report that shows the worst-case
incident energies for bus faults. For details on arc flash hazard analysis, refer to Chapter 15 -
Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  233

The Scenario Comparison Report window shows the arc flash data in an interactive
spreadsheet view. The report can be printed or exported to Excel. Arc Flash labels can be
printed from this view.

Sample Scenario Comparison Report

Creating Scenario Comparison Report

Creating Scenario Comparison Report

Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  234

To create a scenario comparison report you need to be in the Database Edit focus. Choose
from the ribbon, Scenario Manager  Create Scenario Comparison Report…, as shown
in the figure above. Note that you must have scenarios stored in the working EasyPower file
in order to use this feature. You will get a dialog as shown below.

Create Scenario Comparison Report dialog

You can optionally configure the report output by selecting a Results Group and/or a
Scenario Group.
A Results Group is a named set of configuration options that determines what information is
included in the report. When you define your own Results Group, you can select the units for
distance, the buses/equipment you wish to evaluate, and which calculated values you want
included on the report (such as incident energy, flash protection boundary, bolted fault
current, estimated arc current, etc).
The default Results Group <<All Arc Flash Results>> will include all buses selected on the
one-line. If there is no current selection on the one-line, the report will include all buses.
The report will include all calculated values.
See also: Adding Results Group
A Scenario Group is a named set of scenarios. When you define your own Scenario Group,
you can select which scenarios will be included in the report.
See also: Adding Scenario Group

Press the Create Report button. The Arc Flash results will be calculated for each included
scenario, and then the Scenario Comparison Report window will open.

Working with the Scenario Comparison Report

The Scenario Comparison Report contains the buses and scenarios indicated by the selected
Results Group and Scenario Group on the Create Scenario Comparison Report dialog. If
you use the default Results Group, the report will contain the buses selected on the one-line,
or all buses if there is nothing selected on the one-line. If you use the default Scenario
Group, the report will contain all scenarios.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  235

The scenario that has the highest incident energy for any bus is identified as the “Worst
Case” for that bus.

You can print this report, export it to Excel®, or print Arc Flash Hazard warning labels from
this spreadsheet view.

Viewing All Scenarios or Only Worst Case Results

The Scenario Comparison Report can show either all scenarios for each bus, or just the worst
case scenario for each bus. To change the view, choose either the All or Worst button from
the Scenario Comparison Report ribbon (View  All or View  Worst in the menu).

Viewing All Scenarios or Only Worst Case

Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  236

Viewing All Scenarios for each bus. The red 'X' identifies the worst case scenario for each bus.

Viewing only the Worst Case for each bus

Removing Equipment Results from Spreadsheet

To delete any faulted bus/equipment from the spreadsheet, perform a right mouse click on
any spreadsheet cell related to the bus/equipment and select Hide Equipment from the
context menu.

Removing Columns from Spreadsheet

To delete any result columns from the spreadsheet, perform a right mouse click on the
column header and select Hide Column from the context menu.

Filtering Results from Spreadsheet

You can filter the results shown in the spreadsheet by choosing the Filter button from the
ribbon (View  Filter in the menu).
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  237

Scenario Comparison Report Filter

You can use the filter option to limit which buses are shown in the report, based on which
scenario is the worst case scenario for the bus. For example, if you expect a particular
scenario to be the worst case scenario for all of the buses, you may wish to show only buses
that have other scenarios as the worst case. This can help find exceptions to the expected
results.

Exporting Spreadsheet to Excel®

You can export the scenario comparison report to Excel® by choosing Excel button from the
ribbon (File  Open with EXCEL in the menu).
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  238

Opening scenario report with Excel®

Printing Scenario Comparison Report

To print a report, choose Print button from the ribbon (from the menu, File  Print…).
This will print to a printer.

To see a print preview, choose Print Preview button from the ribbon (from the menu, File 
Print Preview).

To change the page orientation and/or margins, choose Page Setup from the ribbon (from the
menu, File Page Setup.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  239

Printing Arc Flash Labels

To print arc flash labels, choose Print Label from the ribbon (File  Print Label from the
menu) and select one of the following options based on what is available:

Printing Labels

Selected scenarios and buses: This option will print the arc flash label for the
bus/scenario combinations that correspond to the cells selected in the spreadsheet. To
print a specific label, make sure that you have selected a cell for the bus and scenario
you wish to print the label for. You may select multiple buses and/or scenarios to
print multiple labels.

Worst scenario for all buses: This will print labels for the worst incident energies
for all of the buses in the spreadsheet.

Error Reports for Scenario Comparison Report

Scenarios are basically changes to Base Case items. If Base Case items are deleted after the
scenarios have been stored, then there will likely be errors in the scenarios. When creating a
scenario report, such errors are reported in the Error Report window. To view an Error
Report, choose from the menu, Window  Error Report for “<filename>”. A sample of
Error Report is shown below.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  240

A sample Error Report

Adding Results Group

To add a new Results Group, click the button Add Results Group… in the Create Scenario
Comparison Report dialog. The Add Results Group dialog will appear as shown in the
picture below.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  241

Adding results group

This window contains:

Results Group Name: This field displays the name of the results group that is currently
being configured or edited.

Store As…: To add a new group, click on the Store As… button. The Store Results Group
dialog will appear. Type the new group name in this dialog and choose OK. When there is a
difference between the current configuration and the stored configuration, the group name
text will appear red. Remember to store the changes made to the group name after you
configure the group.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  242

Store Results Group dialog

Delete: Choose this button to delete the group whose name that appears in the combo box
Results Group Name. Once you delete a results group, you will lose all the
configurations stored within the group.

Boundary Distance Unit: Arc Flash Boundary can be shown in inches, meters or mm as
specified in this combo box.

Results to Display in Comparison Report: Choose one of the following.

All Results: This selection displays all possible calculated values in the report.

User Specified Results Only: This is selected to display only the desired calculated
values in the comparison report. To add any value type to a group, select it in the
Available Results window and click on the Add>> button. To remove any value type
from a group, select it in the User-Specified Results window and click the <<Remove
button.

Compare for Which Items: Select one of the following.

Default: This selection displays results for all of the buses selected in the one-line. You
need to select the buses on the one-line before choosing the Create Scenario
Comparison Report command. If no bus is selected in the one-line, then results for all
buses will appear in the report.

User Specified Buses Only: Using this option, you can select a group of buses you want
to include in the report. To add any bus/equipment to a group, select that bus/equipment
in the Existing Buses window and click on the Add>> button. To remove any
bus/equipment from a group, select it in the User-Specified Buses window and click the
<<Remove button.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  243

Adding Scenario Group

To add a new Scenario Group, click the button Add Scenario Group… in the Create
Scenario Comparison Report dialog. The Add Scenario Group dialog will appear as
shown in the picture below.

Add Scenario Group dialog

This window contains:

Scenario Group Name: This field displays name of the scenario group that is currently
being configured or edited.

Store As…: To add a new group, click on the Store As… button. Store Scenario Group
dialog will appear. Type the new group name in this dialog and choose OK. When there is a
difference between the current configuration and the stored configuration, the scenario group
name text will appear red. Remember to store the changes made to the scenario group name
after you configure the group.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  244

Delete: Choose this button to delete the scenario group whose name appears in the combo
box Scenario Group Name. Once you delete a scenario group, you will lose all the
configurations stored within the group name.

Scenarios to Compare: To add any scenario to a group, select the scenario in the Existing
Scenarios window and click on the Add>> button. To remove any scenario from a group,
select it in the User-Specified Scenarios window and click the <<Remove button.

Move Up/Down buttons: These buttons allow you to sort the order of scenarios that appear
in the report.
Chapter 6 Scenario Manager Scenario Comparison Report  245
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Creating New  246

Chapter 7
EasyPower Device Library
EasyPower comes with an extensive device library that covers several thousand equipment
types and styles and provides quick access to such necessary data as machine X/R ratios,
cable/busway impedances, and protective device equipment. The device library is contained

in a .mdb file. To open the library, click on the EasyPower button on the top left conrer
of the window and choose Open Library (from the menu, File Open Library). This is
different from the Open command (File Open). The library file stdlib.mdb is located in
the following folder paths.

Windows XP:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\ESA\EasyPower\9.0

Microsoft Vista and Windows 7:

C:\ProgramData\ESA\EasyPower\9.0

Hidden files and folders…..

Creating New
New Manufacturer and Type

Insert New Manufacturer: To add a new manufacturer to any equipment, right mouse click
on the equipment name first. Choose Insert New Manufacturer from the context menu.
You can also do it by pressing shortcut keys (Ctrl)+I or by choosing the Insert button in the
ribbon. The shortcut keys will apply to adding new manufacturers only when the equipment
name is highlighted. If you select a manufacturer’s name and press (Ctrl)+I, a new Type will
be inserted.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Creating New  247

Inserting New Manufacturer

Insert New Type: A manufacturer may have several classes of a particular device within the
same equipment name. These are referred to as a Type in the EasyPower Device Library. To
add a new type of a device for a manufacturer, select the manufacturer first, then click on the
Insert button in the ribbon (choose Edit Insert New Type from the Menu bar). You can
also do it by pressing (Ctrl)+I or by using the right mouse button to view the edit options.

Insert New Type

New Style

A style in EasyPower essentially means a model of device. The method of inserting new
styles can vary for different equipment.

Tree from Type: For Solid State Trips, Non-Solid State Trips, and Motor Overload
Relays, select type name first. Then choose Insert button from the ribbon (Edit Insert
New Style from the menu). Alternatively, you can place the cursor over the device type
name and click the right mouse button to activate the edit menu.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Creating New  248

Insert New Style

Spreadsheets: For most equipment, style names are entered in the leftmost column of
the spreadsheet that appears when the type name is selected. In any spreadsheet, the style
names must be unique. If the cell for the style name is left blank, then no style data will
be stored in the library. Styles are entered in a spreadsheet for the following devices: HV
Breaker, Switches, HV Fuses, LV Fuses, ICCB Breakers, MCCB Breakers, and PCB
Breakers.

Field Edit Dialog Box

Field Edit dialog box for Model

Some action buttons such as Models and Sizes for HV Fuses, and Curves
for Relays open up a dialog box for editing the field entries. You can add, delete,
rename, move up, move down, or select any item. All items within the field must be unique.

New Library

EasyPower gives you the option of creating your own separate libraries. Choose EasyPower

button on the top left corner of the window, then choose the arrow button for New
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Creating New  249

command and finally choose New Device Library. (File New Device Library from
the Menu bar). You may also press (Ctrl)+N on the keyboard to bring up the New dialog
box.

New Dialog Box

Highlight Device Library, and then click on OK. EasyPower will generate an entirely new
device library for you to fill with entries and edit the same way you would customize the
standard device library that we provide. The default name is “Newlib1” (2,3,etc.).

A new device library with data not yet entered

You can have multiple libraries on the same computer and you may change the library used
by EasyPower. Choose Tools Options File Locations (see page 307), and you can
specify which library will be the default library for all newly created one-lines. If you don't
want a one-line to use the default library, you can assign it a different library. When the one-
line is in the active window, choose EasyPower button from the ribbon, followed by
Properties (File Properties (see page 68) from the Menu bar) and specify a particular
library for the one-line viewed in the active window.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data  250

Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data

Most of the time-current characteristics (TCC) data are entered in the library as time-current
points. A TCC curve may be represented by a number of time and current coordinates.
When plotting curves, EasyPower produces smoothed lines passing through these points.
The TCC of some relays are based on formulas.

Time-Current Points

Example 1: Relays TCC Data

The figure below is a TCC curve of GEC IAC-51 relay for pickup current of 1 amp and time
dial setting of 1 second. Ten points have been marked along the curve. The coordinates, or
the time-current values of these points, are indicated in parentheses.

Time-
Current Points of GEC IAC-51 Relay for Time Dial 1

These values are entered in the spreadsheets in Section 2 (Time Dial) of the library as shown
in the figure below. The values in the topmost yellow row are the current values. The
corresponding time values are entered in white cells. The time values for points shown in the
figure above have been entered in Row 2 in the spreadsheet below. The time values for other
time dial settings are entered in successive rows. Please note that there is only one row for
current values. Therefore, the time values for different time dial settings must correspond to
the same set of current values.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data  251

Section 2 (Time Dial) of Relay

Example 2: MCCB Breakers TCC Data

The TCC curve of Square D KAL 70Amp MCCB is shown in the figure below. The units for
the current coordinates are in multiples of rated continuous amps. For any given current
value, the MCCB may trip at any time between the times shown by Minimum Clearing
Curve and Maximum Clearing Curve. The time-current points are shown in parentheses.
Any number of points may be obtained for each curve. Typically 8 to 10 points are sufficient
to represent a curve.

The time-current points are entered in the spreadsheet in Section 1 of the MCCB information
of the library. The first two columns are for the minimum clearing curve and the last two
columns are for maximum clearing curve. You will need to specify the method of
calculating the pickup. In this example, the Pickup Calculation is: “Ipu * Trip Amps”
because the TCC is given in multiples of rated amps. If the TCC is given in actual trip amps,
then Pickup Calculation is “Current in Amps”.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data  252

Time-Current Points of Square D KAL 70A MCCB

Section 1 (Thermal) tab of MCCB

Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data  253

Time-current Points of Multi-Segment TCC

Devices such as MCCB, solid state trips, and non-solid state trips have multiple segments in
their TCC. In the case of MCCB, the thermal trip data is entered as time-current points, and
the magnetic trip data is usually entered separately as instantaneous trip current. However,
for an MCCB with fixed (not adjustable) magnetic trip, both the thermal and magnetic TCC
data may be entered as a single set of time-current points. In such a case, at the point where
the thermal curve intersects with the magnetic curve, duplicate time-current points are
obtained. Similarly, duplicate points are taken at any intersection of straight lines with
curved lines.

Example 3: Multi-Segment TCC of Square D MCCB EH 100A

TCC of MCCB with fixed magnetic trip: Square D EH 100A

For the TCC shown above, the intersection points are entered as duplicate points in the
spreadsheet shown below. The data for these have been highlighted in gray.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data  254

Time-Current Points of Square D EH 100A

TCC Based on Formulas

In some digital relays, formulas are used to generate the TCC. EasyPower includes the
following formulas in the library:

 IEC Formula
 Multilin ANSI Formula
 Basler / Siemens Formula
 Schweitzer Formula.
 ABB PCD2000 Formula
 RXIDG Formula
 Locked Rotor Constant I^2t Formula (Westinghouse IQ-1000 formula)

To enter TCC data for formulas choose the applicable formula name from the Model combo
box in Section 2 of Relay Info as shown in the figure below.

Model combo box for relays

Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Time-Current Characteristics (TCC) Data  255

The figure below is an example of Basler formula. The formula used for calculating the TCC
appears below the model name. The values used in the formula are entered in the
spreadsheet and edit fields.

Basler Formula

Adjustable Range for Settings

Protective devices may have adjustable settings for pickup current or the time delay. You
may specify any adjustable data range as either continuous or discrete.

Discrete: A range is discrete if there are a finite number of discrete values to which you can
adjust the settings. If you select any range as discrete, you must specify all the possible
settings available in the rows in the spreadsheet. For example, if the Tap range of a relay is
{0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1, 1.2, 1.5, 2} then select the data range as “Discrete”, and enter the different
tap values in separate rows in the spreadsheet called “Values”. Similarly, if time dial of a
relay is discrete, choose “Discrete” in the dialog box. All the discrete time dial values must
be entered separately in consecutive rows in the spreadsheet for time dial.

Continuous: A range is continuously adjustable if it is divisible by a step value. When

adjustments are made the setting is incremented or decremented by a multiple of the step
value. When you choose any range as continuous, you must also specify the step value. For
continuous ranges, it is sufficient to provide only two settings: the minimum and the
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Trip Devices  256

maximum values in the range. For example if the pickup of a relay is continuously
adjustable from 0.5 to 2 with the smallest increment being 0.01, then enter 0.5 as the
minimum, 2 as the maximum, setting type as continuous, and the step value as 0.01. When
you enter any data range as continuous, EasyPower will calculate the intermediate values for
the selected setting by interpolation.

Trip Devices
Relays

Tree Structure of Relay

Device Function: A tripping characteristics with only one time-overcurrent and one
instantaneous overcurrent tripping functions. Device functions are listed as the ANSI code
numbers or their combinations. You may enter your own device function names.

Single Function Relay: A single function relay has only one device function. If this is
selected in the Relay Info tab while entering data, then the user can select only one set of
relay settings in the database edit mode.

Multi-function Relay: A multi-function relay has more than one device function. If this is
selected in the Relay Info tab while entering data, then the user can select multiple sets of
relay settings in the database edit mode. If Multi-function is selected and only one device
function is entered in the library, then the user can select different trip settings at the same
time. Multiple curves can be plotted in coordination from the same relay. This feature is
applicable to relays which can sense more than one current but operate with similar device
functions.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Trip Devices  257

Relay Class: You can choose from “Generator Relay”, “Motor Relay” and “Other”. The
choice of Relay Class affects the calculation method. For Generator Relay class and Motor
Relay class, the trip settings are in multiples of full load amps (FLA). For the Other class the
trip setting may be in multiples of relay rating, CT ratio, CT primary amps, etc.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)

Tree Structure of MCCB Breaker

Style: A style is a group of MCCB breakers with the same brand, model, interrupting rating,
similar trip characteristics, and similar frame size.

Frame Description: A Frame Description is a unique name that represents a unique set of
trip characteristics data. If the same set of data applies to several Trip Amps ratings, then
they can be entered as one frame description but with different Trip Amps. In most cases,
the trip characteristics data for various MCCB ratings may be different although the same
frame size is the same. In such cases, the data must be entered using different frame
descriptions.

Frame Size: The Frame Size is the maximum rated continuous current that any frame can
have. Typical frame sizes are 125A, 250A, 400A, 600A, 800A, etc.

Trip Amps: Trip Amps is the rated continuous current of the MCCB above which the
device will trip.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Trip Devices  258

Solid State Trips

Tree Structure of Solid State Trips

Sensor Description: A Sensor Description is a unique name representing a set of trip

characteristics data.

Plug: An SST with a given frame or sensor may have several different plugs to set the long
time pickup current.

Non-Solid State Trips

Tree Structure of Non-Solid State Trips

Style: A style is a group of non-solid state trips with the same brand, model, interrupting
rating, similar trip characteristics, and similar frame size.

Frame Description: A Frame Description is a unique name that represents a unique set of
trip characteristics data. If the same set of data applies to several Trip Amps ratings, then
they can be entered as one frame description but with different Trip Amps.

Frame Size: The Frame Size is the maximum rated continuous current that any frame can
have. Typical frame sizes are 125A, 250A, 400A, 600A, 800A, etc.

Trip Amps: Trip Amps is the rated continuous current of the non-solid state trip unit above
which the device will trip.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Trip Devices  259

High Voltage Fuses

Tree Structure of HV Fuses

Model: Model usually represents the “speed” of the fuse, such as K, KS, T, etc.

kV: The voltage level for which the fuse is applicable.

Sizes: The sizes of fuses available for a given model and kV rating. Although the size
names correspond to their ampere ratings, the numbers within the size name are not
necessarily the minimum melting amps.

Continuous Current: The rated continuous current of the fuse.

Plot: Action button to plot the TCC curve for the data entered in the spreadsheet.

TCC tab of HV Fuses dialog box

Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Trip Devices  260

Low Voltage Fuses

Tree Structure of LV Fuses

Low voltage fuses are similar to HV Fuses. However, Model and kV are not part of the tree
structure in LV Fuses.

Sizes: The sizes of fuses available for a given type. Although the size names correspond to
their ampere ratings, the numbers within the size name are not necessarily the minimum
melting amps.

Continuous Current: The rated continuous current of the fuse.

Plot: Action button to plot the TCC curve for the data entered in the spreadsheet.

TCC tab of LV Fuse dialog box

Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Customizing  261

Motor Overload Relays

Tree Structure of Motor Overload Relays

Pickup Calculation: The trip amps is calculated as the trip data times the full load amps
(FLA) of the motor. The FLA is not entered in the library. It is entered in the Motor
Overload Relay dialog box in the one-line. The trip data entered in the library are per unit
values for current.

Plot: Action button to plot the TCC curve for the data entered in the spreadsheet.

Section 1 tab of Motor Overload Relay

Customizing
The device library is fully user-definable. This means you can move the rows around,
organizing them as you see fit. You can also add and delete manufacturers, types, styles and
even the data of a particular style.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Customizing  262

Selecting

You will find that selecting an item in the EasyPower library is quite simple and similar to
most major spreadsheet programs.

Selecting a cell: Place the cursor over any data cell and click to select that cell. A left
mouse click simply selects the cell, whereas a right mouse click provides you with a list of
edit options to choose from.

Selecting a range of cells: Place the cursor over the first or last data cell and using the left
mouse button, click and drag the pointer the opposite end of the range. The selected range
becomes highlighted. You can drag the cursor in any direction; from down to up, right to left
or lower right to upper left. Dragging the cursor allows you to select several rows, several
columns, or any portion from two data cells to the entire sheet.

Selecting a column: To select a column, place the cursor in the header above that column,
and the cursor will turn into an arrow. Click the mouse button, and the entire column will
be highlighted indicating a selected state. A left mouse click simply selects the column,
whereas a right mouse click provides you with a list of edit options to choose from. To select
a range of columns, drag the cursor keeping the left mouse button pressed.

Selecting a row: To select a row, place the cursor at the row label on the left side of the
row, and click when the arrow appears. The entire row will be highlighted indicating a
selected state. A left mouse click simply selects the row, whereas a right mouse click
provides you with a list of edit options to choose from. To select a range of rows, drag the
cursor keeping the left mouse button pressed.

Selecting a Device Library Row

Selecting the entire sheet: You may select the entire sheet by clicking on the top half of the
block in the upper left corner.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Customizing  263

Select All: This feature is applicable only to text fields. In the text edit field, click the right
mouse button to view the edit options. Then choose Select All.

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Using these editing commands in the device library is similar to the way they are used
elsewhere; however, there are a few differences. Style, sizes and temperatures listed in
yellow columns cannot have duplicate listings and cannot be left blank.

Cut: The Cut feature is applicable only to text edit fields, not to spreadsheets. Select the
text you want to cut. Click the right mouse button to view the edit options and choose Cut.

Copy: Select the data you want to copy. Press (Ctrl)+C on the keyboard. You may copy a
row, a column, or any section of the sheet other than the headers and the row markers. You
may also click the right mouse button to view the edit options and choose Copy cell(s).

Paste: After you have copied the data to the clipboard, you may copy to a different place on
the sheet, a different sheet, or even into a different program. However, the data cells in
EasyPower's device library have certain ranges assigned to them; you cannot paste a number
into a cell if it is outside of that range. To paste data, select the cell where you want to paste
the data and press (Ctrl)+V on the keyboard. You may also click the right mouse button to
view the edit options and choose Paste cell(s).

Note: If you attempt to paste, and at least one of the new numbers is out-of-range, you will
receive the following message: "Cannot paste all items. Some values are out of range".
When you click OK, EasyPower will paste the valid data and leave the other data unchanged.

Copy/Paste Style Contents: For some devices, a style may contain several spreadsheets or
ranges of data. Copying all the data from one style to another is made easy by the Copy Style
Contents feature. Take the cursor over the style name you want to copy data from and click
the right mouse button. From the edit options that appears, choose Copy Style Contents.
This feature applies to LV Fuses, ICCB, and MCCB.

After copying style contents from one style to the clipboard, take the cursor over the style
name you want to copy data to and click the right mouse button. From the edit options that
appear, choose Paste Style Contents. You can paste the style contents to a different style
name in the same type or to a different type, manufacturer, or library. If you are pasting the
data on the same spreadsheet you copied from, remember to create a unique style name first.

Copy/Paste Sensor Contents: This feature applies to solid state trip devices only. All of the
data within a sensor description can be copied by placing the cursor over the frame name or
row, clicking the right mouse button, and choosing Copy Sensor Contents.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Customizing  264

Copy/Paste Frame Contents: This feature applies to MCCB, solid state trip, and non-solid
state trip devices. All of the data within a frame description can be copied by placing the
cursor over the frame name or row, clicking the right mouse button, and choosing Copy
Frame Contents.

After copying the frame contents you can paste it to another frame. If the new frame is in the
same spreadsheet, it must have another name. You must type in the frame name before you
can paste any data. Place the cursor over the new frame name or row, click the right mouse
button, and choose Paste Frame Contents.

Copy/Paste kV Contents: This feature applies to HV Fuses only. To copy the TCC data for
all fuse sizes of a model and kV for an HV fuse, click on the button . To paste
the TCC data for all fuse sizes of a model and kV for an HV fuse from one kV to another or
from one model to another, click on the button .

Copy/Paste Device Function Contents: This feature applies to relays only. To copy the
device function contents of a relay from one device function to another, click the right mouse
button with the pointer over the device function name from which you wish to copy. Choose
Copy Device Function Contents. To paste the contents to another device function, make
sure that the device function name already exists. Device function names must be unique.
Click the right mouse button with the pointer over the device function name to which you
wish to paste. Choose Paste Device Function Contents. All the relay information will be
copied exactly the same.

Copy and Paste Device Function Contents

Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Customizing  265

Inserting Rows and Columns

Inserting Rows

Insert Row: EasyPower gives you the ability to insert a row anywhere in the spreadsheets in
the device library. Using the right mouse button, select the row or cell directly above which
you want to insert the new row. From the edit options that appear, choose Insert Row. The
Insert Row menu feature may not be available for all spreadsheets. This is true for those
spreadsheets in which the rows are sorted automatically by style names. In such cases a new
row will automatically be created below the last row when data is entered in the last row.

Insert Column: You can expand some spreadsheets by inserting columns. Using the right
mouse button, select the column to the left of which you want to insert the new column.
From the edit options that appear, choose Insert Column.

Moving Rows and Columns

Move Rows Up/Down: In some spreadsheets, rows can be moved up or down. Select a row
by clicking the right mouse button. From the edit options that appear, choose Move Up or
Move Down to move the row.

Move Columns Left/Right: In some spreadsheets, columns can be moved left or right.
Select a column by clicking the right mouse button. From the edit options that appear,
choose Move Left or Move Right to move the Column.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Customizing  266

Undo and Redo

The Undo and Redo features are not enabled in EasyPower 4.0 Device Library. However,
you may undo or redo recently made changes in the text edit fields or spreadsheets. To undo
the data change press (Ctrl)+Z on the keyboard. To redo the change made by the undo
action press (Ctrl)+R.
Chapter 7 EasyPower Device Library Customizing  267
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Properties  268

Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting

EasyPower saves printer settings for two separate print types; the Print One-line dialog box
and the Print Text Report dialog box. When you choose Print button from the Quick
Access toolbar (or File Print from the Menu bar), EasyPower opens the dialog box that is
appropriate for the currently active window. After making your desired choices, click OK to
start printing. The Print MCC/Panel Schedule dialog box opens when you choose
from the toolbar in an MCC Data or Panel Data dialog box with the Description tab
chosen, and will default to the settings of the Print Text Report dialog box. These settings
also apply to the Device Library Print dialog box and the Print Database dialog box which
opens when in the Database Report. When you preview a one-line or text report, the Print
Preview dialog box opens so that you may change the settings of what you are previewing.
The Print Plot dialog box is used for printing plot or data from the plot viewer.

Print One-line Dialog Box

Properties
Each of the dialog boxes opened by choosing Print (or File Print from the Menu
bar), has a button labeled Properties. The Properties dialog changes the parameters
appropriate for the window that you are printing, (i.e. graphics or text). You can change
things like paper size or page orientation (portrait or landscape). This dialog box is specific
to the chosen printer and may look different from one printer to the next. For example, the
Properties dialog box for the HP LaserJet 5000 Seies PS looks like this:
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Properties  269

HP LaserJet 5000 Series PS Properties Dialog Box

Changes you make in the Properties dialog box do not affect other applications, but they are
remembered from one EasyPower session to the next.

Page Setup

You can set the page margins by choosing the pull down arrow of the Print button, and
Page Setup (File Page Setup menu choice). The margins are given in inches from the
edge of the paper. If a one-line is active, it applies to one-lines. If a text report is active, it
applies to text reports. The paper size will default to the size you last selected for the current
default printer.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Properties  270

File Page Setup Dialog Box

Print Preview

Choose the pull down arrow of the Print button and choose Print Preview (File
Print Preview from the Menu bar), to see what a one-line or text report will look like before
you print it. The Print Preview dialog box is almost identical to the regular Print dialog box
except that when you click on OK, the one-line or report will "print" to a Preview screen.
The Preview screen offers you several buttons:

Print: If you are satisfied with the way the document looks, choose this button, and it will
be sent to the printer.

Next Page: If there is more than one page, choosing this button will show the next page.

Prev Page: Once you have used Next Page, you can choose this button to go back.

Two/One Page: This button acts as a toggle, allowing you the choice of viewing one or two
pages at a time.

Zoom In/Out: These two buttons allow you to Zoom in and out. While in Print Preview,
you only have three specific zooms.

Close: If you decide you don't want to print the document, just choose this button to get
back out of Print Preview.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Properties  271

Printing to a File

Some companies share a printer among many users by requiring them to generate print files
or plot files, which are then sent to a central computer for printing or plotting. If this is your
situation, check the Print to file box in the Print One-line or Print Text Report dialog box.
You will be prompted for a filename just before the file gets created.

Print One-line Dialog Box with Print to file checked

Printing to Acrobat Distiller

If you have the Acrobat Distiller software installed, you can print to it. This will create
portable documents in PDF format. To create PDF files simply select Acrobat Distiller as the
destination to print to in the Print dialog. You can print one-lines, TCC plots, harmonics
scans, spreadsheets, analysis reports and arc flash labels.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Printing a One-Line  272

Printing to Acrobat Distiller

Printing a One-Line
To print the one-line, first make sure the one-line you want printed is the active window.
Choose button or File Print from the Menu to open the Print One-line dialog box.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Title Block  273

Print One-line Dialog Box

Properties: Choose Properties to change printer characteristics.

Print to file: Choose Print to file to send the printout to a file instead of a printer.

Print Region: You can print either the entire one-line or a portion of it. "Current Window"
will print what you see in the active window. If you choose "Inside Box," you will be given
the rubber band-box cursor after you choose the dialog box's OK button. The area you box
in will then be sent to the printer.

Effects:

 Scale to Fit Page: This selection will cause what you chose in Print Region to be scaled to
fit just inside the margins of one printed page.

 Scale to: When this is selected, EasyPower will use as many pages as needed to cover the
entire area at the chosen scale. A scale of 100% will cause one-line text to appear at the
actual point size you chose in the Fonts tab of the Options dialog box (see page 303).

 Print a Border: Check box to draw a border inside the printed page, around the one-line
area.

Copies: Choose how many copies to print.

Title Block Check box to include a title block in the one-line print out. To select title block
template and to configure/edit the text or logo inside the title block, click on the Settings…
button. For details on configuring title block, see section Title Block.

Title Block
To include a title block in the printout of the one-line, enable the checkbox for Title Block in
the Print One-line dialog. If you are printing a title block for the first time, you will need to
configure the title block. EasyPower comes with several templates for title block. You can
also design your own title block.

To configure the title block, click on the Settings… button. You will get the Title Block
dialog.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Title Block  274

Configuring Title Block

Title Block dialog

Title Block Template: This shows the title block template that is currently selected. If no
other template was selected earlier, then the default template will be seletected. A title block
template contains information on fields, borders, block sizes and orientation.

Load Template… : Using this button you can select the template file for the title block.
These template files have the file name extension .tblk. Template files are created in XML
language and stored as text files. Details for creating template files is given in the section
One-line Title Block Template Format.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Title Block  275

Browsing for title block template

Field: Fields are the item descriptions for the items in the title block. Typically the fields are
company name, address, drawing number, drawing description, date, logo, etc. These fields
must be defined in the title block template.

Value: Value is the data you type in, corresponding to each field. To enter the value (text) for
any field, select it in the window, and click on the Modify button. Alternatively, you can
double click on the filed name. The Modify Title Block Field dialog will appear. Type the
desired text and press the OK button.

Modify Title Block Template dialog

Reserved Space: This selection positions one-line above or to the left side of the title block.
You can specify the reserved space as None, Bottom Side or Right Side.

 None: The one-line may overlap with the title block.

Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting One-line Title Block Template Format  276

 Bottom Side: The one-line is above the title block. If the title block is at the right bottom
side, then a blank space (reserved space) will appear at the bottom of the page, left to the
title block.

 Right Side: The one-line is to the left side of the title block. If the title block is at the right
bottom side, then a blank space (reserved space) will appear at the right of the page,
above the title block.

Scaling: You can scale the title block by specifying the scaling percentage or have the
program automatically scale the size based on the paper size.

One-line Title Block Template Format

It is recommended that you understand XML before creating or editing templates

Title Block File Format

The one-line title block template file is an XML file. This is a standard format for
exchanging data for many web based and standalone applications and is easily extensible.

Items can be defined in any order and attributes can be in any order. There are 4 basic types
of graphical objects that can be defined for title blocks: rectangles, lines, text and pictures.
Each of these items has attributes that describe their positions, sizes, colors, etc. The general
file format is shown below:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>

<TitleBlock>

>>> Title block item definitions go here

</TitleBlock>

All the coordinates in Title Block templates are in inches with the origin (0,0) being in the
top left corner. The x coordinate increases left to right while the y coordinate increases top to
bottom. There are no limits to how large a title block you can create. It can even be larger
than the physical page you are printing on since you will have the option of scaling it down
in the Print dialog.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting One-line Title Block Template Format  277

Title block origin

When defining attributes for the objects you define, some attributes are required such as
positioning attributes. Others are optional and if not specified, defaults are used.

Settings

The Settings section allows you to specify certain settings for the title block and can have the
following options.

Scale [Optional] Scaling for title block [Default = 0]

0 = Automatic

1 = Manual (this value should not be used in a .tblk file)

2 = Fit to right side

3 = Fit to bottom side

BorderWidth [Optional] Width of print border rectangle lines [Default = 1]

Sample:

<Settings>

<Scale>0</Scale>

<BorderWidth>1</BorderWidth>

</Settings>
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting One-line Title Block Template Format  278

Rectangles

Rectangles are simply boxes and can have the following attributes.

left [Required] Left coordinate of rectangle in inches

top [Required] Top coordinate of rectangle in inches

right [Required] Right coordinate of rectangle in inches

bottom [Required] Bottom coordinate of rectangle in inches

LineWidth [Optional] Width of the line around the rectangle [Default = 2]

Color [Optional] RGB value of color of the rectangle line [Default = 0 (black)]

Sample:

<Rect>

<left>0</left>

<top>0</top>

<right>7.25</right>

<bottom>0.75</bottom>

<LineWidth>2</LineWidth>

<Color>0xff0000</Color>

</Rect>

Lines

Lines can have the following attributes.

PosX1 [Required] Starting x value in inches

PosY1 [Required] Starting y value in inches

PosX2 [Required] Ending x value in inches

PosY2 [Required] Ending y value in inches

Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting One-line Title Block Template Format  279

LineWidth [Optional] Width of the line [Default = 2]

LineStyle [Optional] Style of the line [Default = 0]

0 = Solid

1 = Dash

2 = Dot

3 = Dash Dot

4 = Dash Dot Dot

Color [Optional] RGB value of color of the line [Default = 0 (black)]

Sample:

<Line>

<PosX1>0</PosX1>

<PosY1>0</PosY1>

<PosX2>7.25</PosX2>

<PosY2>0.75</PosY2>

<LineWidth>2</LineWidth>

<LineStyle>0</LineStyle >

<Color>0xff0000</Color>

</Line>

Text

Text can have the following attributes.

PosX [Required] Horizontal position of text in inches

PosY [Required] Vertical position of text in inches

Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting One-line Title Block Template Format  280

Alignment [Optional] Alignment of text. This field determines how PosX and PosY are
interpreted. It is specified as a combination of one of the horizonal alignment
values with one of the vertical alignment values. So a value of 30 (6 + 24)
would cause the text to be centered horizontally with PosY being the baseline.
[Default = 24 (Left Baseline)]

Left align 0

Right align 2

Center 6

Top 0

Bottom 8

Baseline 24

Label [Required] Text to display. This is static text unless the Prompt attribute is
defined in which case this value is the default text.

Prompt [Optional] Prompt for label. Makes this text item a variable and specified by
the user in the Print dialog box.

FontName [Optional] Font face name [Default = Arial]

Name [Optional] Field name [Default = none]

PointSize [Optional] Font point size [Default = 10]

Escapement [Optional] Font escapement specified in 1/10 of an angle. So for 90 degree

text you would specify 900. [Default = 0]

Bold [Optional] Bold font [Default = 0]

0 = normal

1 = bold

Italic [Optional] Italic font [Default = 0]

0 = normal

1 = italic
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting One-line Title Block Template Format  281

Color [Optional] RGB value of color of the line [Default = 0 (black)]

Sample:

<Text>

<PosX>3.625</PosX>

<PoxY>.25</PoxY>

<Alignment>30</Alignment>

<Color>0X0000000</Color>

<Label>CITY OF SEATTLE</Label>

<FontName>Arial</FontName>

<PointSize>10</PointSize>

<Escapement>0</Escapement>

<Bold>0</Bold>

<Italic>0</Italic>

</Text>

Image

Images are pictures and can have the following attributes. Images will automatically be
resized to fit the given rectangle while preserving the original aspect ratio of the image.

left [Required] Left coordinate of rectangle in inches

top [Required] Top coordinate of rectangle in inches

right [Required] Right coordinate of rectangle in inches

bottom [Required] Bottom coordinate of rectangle in inches

ImageFile [Required] Path of the graphics file. Supported files types are BMP, JPG,
GIF, TIFF, PNG, ICO, WMF, EMF.

Prompt [Required] User prompt that is displayed in the Print dialog.

Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Printing Text Reports  282

Name [Optional] Field name [Default = none]

Sample:

<Image>

<left>0</left>

<top>0</top>

<right>7.25</right>

<bottom>0.75</bottom>

<ImageFile>d:\pictures\logo.jpg</ImageFile >

<Prompt>Logo image</ Prompt >

</Image>

Printing Text Reports

If you choose to print when a text report window is active, you will see a Print Text Report
dialog box.

Print Text Report Dialog Box

Properties: Choose Properties to change printer characteristics.

Print to file: Choose Print to file to send the printout to a file instead of a printer.

Print Range: Lets you choose which pages of the report you want to print.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Printing MCCs and Panel Schedules  283

Copies: Choose the number of copies to print.

Comment Text: When you print a report, it is often useful to include a brief description.
This text is placed in the header of every page. For example, the comment might say "30-
cycle results after opening breaker between BUS-15 and TX-22."

Free-format Reports

Database Reports use "Free" format. Since they are not constrained to fixed columns of data,
they can make use of the entire page width. Choosing a smaller Report Font in the Fonts tab
of the Options dialog box lets you see more database data in fewer pages.

Printing MCCs and Panel Schedules

Both the MCC Data and Panel Data dialog boxes have Description tabs which place
additional buttons on the Dialog Toolbar. Choosing the button will allow you to print all
spreadsheet data columns or specific user configured column views. When selecting to print
the Current Configuration, only the fields you have previously assigned to the chosen
Configuration will be printed. You can also choose to print only the selected MCC/Panel
spreadsheet or all MCC/Panel spreadsheets at one time.

Database Print Config dialog

Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Printing Arc Flash Hazard Labels  284

Spreadsheet View is used to configure the columns that display in the spreadsheet. You can
create new configurations that display only selected columns. To create a new configuration,
click on Configure… button. This will open the Database Print Config dialog. Type the
new configuration name in the Configuration field, check the desired column headings from
the Columns: window, and choose the Save button. The Select All button will include all the
columns, and the Clear All will uncheck the columns. The Delete button will delete the
selected configuration. The Close button will close the dialog without cancelling the changes
– note that this is different from the Cancel command found in most dialogs.

If you have multiple configurations saved, you can display the desired configuration by
simply selecting it in the MCC dialog.

Printing Arc Flash Hazard Labels

You can print arc flash hazard labels from the Arc Flash Hazard Report spreadsheet view. To
print labels for specific bus/equipment select the buses in the arc flash hazard report

spreadsheet and click on the drop down arrow below the Label button in the ribbon,
choose Print Label for Current Device. To print labels for all buses in the spreadsheet,
choose Print Label for All Devices. You can send the output to a label printer, any printer or
to Acrobat Distiller through the Print Text Report dialog.

For further details regarding arc flash hazard labels including label printing options and
customizable label options, refer to Chapter 17, Arc Flash Hazard analysis.
Chapter 8 Printing and Plotting Printing Arc Flash Hazard Labels  285
Chapter 9 Working With EasyPower Files Overview  286

Chapter 9
Working With EasyPower Files
Overview
This chapter describes the various types of disk files created by EasyPower, and how you can
manipulate them.

Database Files
In EasyPower 3.03 and earlier versions, the database files were stored in a set of 3 files, with
the extensions “.dez”, “.kez”, and “.mez”. These were for main database, indexing keys, and
MCC and Panel schedules respectively.

EasyPower now stores all the databases in a single file, with the extension “.dez”.

Compressing Database Files

A database file can be optimized for speed or size, but not both. An EasyPower database is
optimized for speed. Thus, a 500-bus database could take an entire megabyte of disk space.

There is a simple solution: file compression. When a computer file is compressed, it is

examined for patterns, then has those patterns encoded in a way that uses less space. When
the file is decompressed, it is restored to exactly the same state it was in originally. Files can
be taken down to one tenth of their original size. You may already be familiar with this idea;
there are several good file compression programs available.

An obvious application is to compress EasyPower database files that are not currently in use,
expanding them to their full sizes only when you need to work with them in EasyPower. An
added benefit of most compression programs is that while the files are in their compressed
state you can put more than one computer file into a single compression file, leaving you
with only one file to deal with when moving and copying those databases.
Chapter 9 Working With EasyPower Files Temporary Files  287

Temporary Files
EasyPower uses two kinds of temporary files: database and text window files.

Temporary Files

When EasyPower opens a database, it makes a temporary copy of that database. This
temporary copy is what you modify during your EasyPower session. If you exit EasyPower
without saving database changes, the original database file is safe and untouched. If you
save the database, the temporary file is renamed to have the original's name and therefore
becomes the "original database" that you can always go back to.

When EasyPower has a one-line or text window active, the actual information is stored in
temporary files. These temporary files are located in the current temp directory, which
ordinarily defaults to your Windows directory. You can change the location of the temp
directory by adding a line to your autoexec.bat file. For example, if you have created a
directory called tmp on the D-drive to hold temporary files, you would add this to
autoexec.bat:
set TEMP=d:\tmp

Of course, this change will not take effect until the next time you reboot the computer. Note
that there should not be any blanks around the "=".

Under ordinary circumstances, all temporary files are deleted as soon as their windows are
closed. However, if there is an abnormal exit (like a power failure or computer crash), one or
more of these temporary files may survive.
Chapter 9 Working With EasyPower Files Temporary Files  289
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  290

Chapter 10
Customizing EasyPower
Options
Much of the ability to Customize EasyPower is controlled by the Options dialog box. You
open it by choosing Tools Options from the ribbon or the Menu bar, and then choose
from different tabs.

General

The General tab of the Options controls some of EasyPower's more general features.

General tab of Options Dialog Box

Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  291

Settings

Reload database on startup: If this is enabled, the last EasyPower file you worked on gets
loaded while starting EasyPower program.

Enable Text Properties: If this box is checked and you double-click on a segment of one
line text the following dialog box will appear, allowing you modify the appearance of that
section of text.

Text Properties Dialog Box

Append to Analysis Text Reports: Rather than clearing the previous text report, if this box
is checked each report you generate will append to those generated before.

Equipment Palette Lock: If this box is checked, when an item is chosen from the
equipment palette the cursor will remain that item until either the ESC key is pushed or a
different item is chosen. If the box is unchecked, only one item per cursor will be placed.
For instance, adding five buses to the one-line would require choosing the bus button from
the Equipment Palette five separate times.

Confirm Delete: If this box is checked, you will be asked to confirm Delete operation,
when you try to delete an item.

Confirm Delete dialog

Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  292

Confirm Disconnect: A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm that you actually do
want to disconnect the items you have chosen.

Display tooltips: Allows display of tooltips when the cursor is taken over aor near an
equipment on the one-line, TCC curve or toolbar. The tooltip provides information on
equipment data on one-lines.

Tooltip

Verify Phase Shifting Integrity of System: When this box is checked, EasyPower will
check for invalid transformer connections when entering the Short Circuit focus. For
example, a delta-wye transformer (which causes a 30 degree phase shift) in parallel with a
delta-delta transformer (no inherent phase shift), is an invalid connection. (Warning: if this
box is not checked and invalid connections exist, Short Circuit calculations could be
incorrect.)

Confirm Save on Incomplete Database Dialog: If this box is checked and you attempt to
close a database dialog box which does not have data entered in all of the required fields, you
will receive a message asking if you would like to save the data which you have entered.

Confirm to save temporary analysis focus changes: If you change any temporary data in
an analysis focus, or the options, you will be asked if you with to save those changes while
you leave the focus. Uncheck the box to disable message.

Use Windows standard mouse wheel when zooming/panning: Checking this option
allows you to use the Microsoft standard mouse wheel to pan (scroll) by spinning the wheel.
With default EasyPower setting (this setting unchecked), you can pan by pressing the wheel
and dragging the mouse; spinning the mouse wheel will zoom in or out depending upon the
direction of spin.

Auto-calculate fields for equipment dialogs and spreadsheets: When this box is checked,
all dialog boxes and spreadsheets which contain a Calculate button will automatically re-
calculate results when figures depended upon are changed. Consequently, if this box is
checked the results fields are grayed and the user cannot enter results.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  293

Show only outlines of pictures: With this setting checked, only the outline of the inserted
picture appears on the one-line. The picture area will be grayed out. This affects the one-line
only. The picture will appear in the printout. When unchecked, the entire picture appears.

Show auto-created buses as nodes: When auto creating buses (see next item below) during
addition of equipment to other equipment not terminated with a bus, the newly created bus
between the two equipment will be shown as node (dot) if this setting is enabled. See picture
below.

Auto created bus as node and as default shape

Auto create bus on unconnected line endpoints: When this setting is selected, you can add
one equipment to another such that the program will automatically create a bus at each
connection point. Without this setting enabled, you will need to create the buses manually
before you can connect one equipment to another.

Include bus nodes when printing: When this setting is enabled, the printout will show the
nodes (which are buses). Otherwise, the buses will not appear on the printout.

Enable bus resizing with right mousebutton: Allows you to stretch or shrink the bus using
the right mouse button.

Graphically show incoming main on MCCs and Panels: This will show the main fuse
symbol or main breaker symbol inside the MCC symbol in the one-line if the MCC data has
the main fuse or main breaker defined.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  294

Show MCC and Panel in database report: Items such as breakers/fuses, cables, loads and
motors that are defined the Description tab of MCC or Panel data will appear in the Database
Report under their respective sections.

Show simple splash: A simple splash screen appears during startup of EasyPower.

Options

Recently Used File List: You can declare if the files you last used are listed under the File
menu and decide how many are listed.

Automatic Save Every: If the box is checked, EasyPower will save automatically at the
interval stated in the field.

Check for program update every: When this option is selected, EasyPower will
automatically prompt you to check for program updates with the message below after a
specified number of days.

Auto-messaging for checking for program updates

Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  295

Clipboard

To change how ID names are chosen for copied items, choose the Clipboard tab in the
Options dialog box before doing the Group Copy.

Clipboard tab of Options Dialog Box

This dialog box gives you the following choices.

ID Name Assignment For Copies: If you choose "Generate unique name", each copied
item will receive an automatically-generated unique name that is based on the item type and
the next number in sequence. For example, if the last transformer you added had the name
"TX-15", the first copied transformer will have the name "TX-16".
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  296

If you choose "Append variable text to original's name", each copied item will receive a
name that is based on the name of the original item. For example, if the original item's name
is "TX-15", the copy might be called "TX-15_A". If adding the variable text would make an
item's name too long, a unique name is chosen as described for the "Generate unique name"
choice above. For example, "TX-43/00BA01" already has 12 characters, which is the
maximum for an ID name. A copy of this item would be named something like "TX-17" and
such items will be listed in an error report.

Variable Text: When you are using "Append variable text to original's name" as described
above, this choice lets you control what that variable text is.

If you choose "Alphabetic", EasyPower uses letters of the alphabet, starting with "A". If the
original transformer's name was "T5/9927", the copy's name will be "T5/9927_A". If that
name already exists, EasyPower will try "T5/9927_B" and so forth until a unique name is
found. If "Z" is reached without finding a unique name, EasyPower switches to two letters,
i.e. "AA", "AB", etc.

If you choose "Numeric", EasyPower uses numbers, starting with "1". This option would be
used for naming conventions where the names end in an alphabetic character. For example,
if the original transformer's name was "T5/99NL", the copy's name will be "T5/99NL_1". If
that name already exists, EasyPower will try "T599NL_2" and so forth until a unique name is
found.

For either type of variable text, you can change the prefix. In the above examples, a prefix of
"#" would create names of "T5/9927#A" and T5/99NL#1" respectively. The prefix can be
more than one character if desired. For example, if the prefix is "/23-" the names would be
"T5/9927/23-A" and T5/99NL/23-1" respectively.

If you specify a prefix, it is considered to be a delimiter for variable text to be incremented

for a copy. For example, if the original's name is "T5/9927_A" and your prefix is "_", the
copy will be named "T5/9927_B", not "T5/9927_A_A". If the characters after the last
occurrence of the prefix in the original name don't match the variable text type (i.e. all digits
for "Numeric" or all letters for "Alphabetic"), then the prefix is added at the end. For
example, if the original's name is "T5/9927_A", your prefix is "_", and the variable text type
is "Numeric", the copy will be named "T5/9927_A_1".

For a very practical application of the above see Copying Subsystems on page 102.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  297

Text Visibility

The Text Visibility tab of the Options dialog box lets you choose which item types will
show ID name text and data text on the one-line. Check the appropriate boxes to view the
text you want to see for each equipment item. Your choices are remembered from one
EasyPower session to the next. They apply to all one-lines, not just the current one.

Text Visibility tab of Options Dialog Box

Some choices for line data are:

One-line Display: If you choose Equipment Data, EasyPower will display the data for each
item that has a box checked in the Show data for list. Choosing PU Impedances will display
the per unit impedance for each item with a box checked in the Show data for list. Using this
feature, you can produce an impedance diagram of your power system. The positive
sequence and zero sequence (in parenthesis) impedances are displayed.

Show For Cables: You can determine whether the “Raceway Type” or the “Raceway
Material” is shown in the cable data text.

Show for SSTs: The text representing circuit breaker rating will show one of the following:

 Frame/Plug: Frame size amps/ rating plug amps.

 Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  298

 Frame/LTPU: Frame size amps/ LTPU amps (trip amps).

 Plug/LTPU: Rating plug amps/ LTPU amps (trip amps).

Side For “Line” Data: The sides where the data will appear are categorized as “From” or
“To” based on how the user connected the endpoints when creating the line. The “From”
side and “To” side of a line can be switched by opening the line dialog and switching the
names in the “From Bus:” and “To Bus:” fields.

LV Breaker/Fuse: You can choose to the show the manufacturer and Style data in the same
line or different lines.

 Show Resistor Amps: This enables display of the amp rating of grounding resistor.

These global settings can be changed for individual equipment items. Select the equipment
item(s) you want changed, then choose the Text Visibility from the ribbon (Edit Change
Text Visibility from the menu), which brings up the following dialog:

Change Text Visibility Dialog Box

The Change Text Visibility command is also available in the context menu activated by a
right-mouse click when an item is selected.

Colors

The Colors tab of the Options dialog box lets you change the appearance of the screen and
printer elements. This dialog box has three sections:
1) Screen Colors
2) Printer Colors
3) Equipment Colors Based on kV.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  299

Colors tab of Options Dialog Box

Most colors can be changed independently for the screen and printer, accounting for the fact
that color printers sometimes do not render screen colors very well.

To change color of any item, place the cursor over the box next showing the current color
format and click the left mouse button. A color palette will appear. Select the desired color
and press on the “Apply” button at the bottom of the dialog. The changes will take place
immediately and the dialog will still be open. You can change the color of other items using
the “Apply” button. To close the dialog after making the change, press the “OK” button.

You can also change the colors selecting the “Item” you wish to format using the pull down
menu and select the Color, Style (pattern/shade) and Weight (thickness of lines).

The equipment color selected will be the default equipment color for all equipment unless the
“Equipment Color Based on kV” feature is enabled. Also, if any particular equipment has
been formatted with a certain color, then this color will apply regardless of the default color.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  300

Screen Colors

For screen appearance, the style and weight options are grayed out.

Text: This is used set the color of the text on the one-line, e.g. item ID text or analysis
results.

Inactive: The color of an item turned "off" with by choosing Deactivate

button (or Edit  Deactivate from the Menu bar).

Warning: This is the color used to show that something is lacking or wrong with a
particular item. The exact meaning is context-specific. For example, in Database Edit focus
it means either the item is not fully connected or the item's data is incomplete. In Short
Circuit, it could mean that a breaker is being overloaded.

Analysis: This color is most commonly used for buses that have been faulted in a Short
Circuit analysis or buses at which harmonics injected is during harmonics analysis.

Harmonics Plot: To choose the color of harmonics plots in Define Plot.

Selected Item: When you select an item by clicking on it, enclosing it in a rubber rectangle,
or finding it by choosing Find button (or Edit Find from the Menu bar), it is
displayed in this color.

Selection box: This allows you to change the rubber band color on your screen.

Window Background: Set the color of the background of the screen in the one-line.

New Scenario: While in a scenario, any new items will be indicated with this color.

Changed Scenario: While in a scenario, any equipment data or location changes will be
indicated by this color.

Printer Colors

For printer output, the style (pattern/shade) and/or weight options also can be selected
besides the color.

Text: This color is used for text on the one-line, e.g. item ID text or analysis results.

Inactive Color: The color of an item turned "off" with by choosing De-Activate
button.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  301

Warning Color: This is the color used to show that something is lacking or wrong with a
particular item. The exact meaning is context-specific. For example, in Database Edit focus
it means either the item is not fully connected or the item's data is incomplete. In Short
Circuit, it could mean that a breaker is being overloaded.

Warning Bus: Buses that are highlighted (e.g. to show which buses are faulted or have a
violation) can be given a pattern that makes them distinguishable from non-highlighted
buses. This is especially useful on monochrome printers like the HP LaserJet.

Warning Line: Non-bus items that are highlighted (e.g. to show Line End faults or
equipment duty violations) can be printed bolder to make them distinguishable from non-
highlighted items. This is especially useful on monochrome printers like the HP LaserJet.

Analysis Bus: This color is most commonly used for buses that have been faulted in a Short
Circuit analysis or buses at which harmonics injected is during harmonics analysis.

Equipment Colors Based on kV

Drag the slider to adjust the range

of kV the color code represents

To format the equipment colors based on kV, check the box. Turning this feature off will
result in the default equipment color. As shown in the figure above, a scale in kV, the color
codes for different kV ranges and sliders representing the boundary kV of the color code is
provided to allow you to set the color for desired voltage ranges. The slider can be dragged
left and right to set the boundary voltage for any kV range. Below the slider the kV value
appears depending on the position of the position of the slider relative to the kV scale.

To change the color for any range of voltage, place the cursor over the color in the color bar
and click the left mouse button. A color palette will appear. Select the desired color.

Note: To avoid confusion, make sure that the equipment color is not the same as the
warning or analysis color.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  302

Changing Grid Parameters

The Grid tab of the Options dialog box is used to change the grid parameters.

Grid tab of Options Dialog Box

Grid Spacing: The X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) spacing of the grid, as it would be
measured on a printout scaled at 100%. (Note that the gridpoints themselves do not print.)

Applies to text dragging: Normally, dragged text does not snap to gridpoints since there is
not usually a gridpoint where you will want the text to go. In some cases however, you
might want to have the text snap to gridpoints for specific alignment purposes.

Display grid points: If you check this box, the gridpoints will be displayed with actual dots
on the screen; otherwise, they will be invisible (but still active if grid snapping is on). By
using this check box and choosing Tools Snap to Grid from the Menu bar, you can have the
grid displayed and off, displayed and on, not displayed and off, or not displayed and on.

Grid color: You can choose any one of several colors for the grid to be displayed in.

All of these setup parameters, including the snap grid on/off status are saved with the current
database.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  303

Text Fonts, Styles, and Sizes

Fonts tab of Options Dialog Box

Using the Fonts tab of the Options dialog box, you can independently control the font, style,
and size for text. The One-line font and Comment font info is saved with the database, since
these choices are often closely associated with the layout of a particular one-line. If you
choose EasyPower button and New (File New from the Menu bar), the One-line and
Comment fonts used will be those of the last open database.

Category

Report: EasyPower provides several text reports that can be printed. This font setting lets
you control how they get printed. For example, if you don't mind small text, you can print a
large amount of data on just a few pages.

Note that the standard Windows Font dialog box says that choosing a TrueType font will
give you the "same font on the screen and printer". For Report windows, this is not true; the
screen font is always the same.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  304

One-line: This is text that appears on the one-line diagram, either as ID text or as analysis
results. Since an EasyPower one-line is WYSIWYG ("What You See Is What You Get"), the
same settings apply to both the screen and printer. Only True Type fonts are available here,
since EasyPower uses rotated text. The Size field says what to use for a print or plot at a
scale of exactly 100%. You can specify sizes smaller than what the list box shows (which
only goes down to 8-points) by typing in a number. For example, type "5" for 5-point text.
On some printers, 5-point text is readable.

If your printer uses a stick font, you will get best results with the "Courier New" font.

Comment: This is the font for any comment text you type in the Print dialog to identify
what that print represents.

Setting System Info

Choose the System tab of the Options dialog box to set system parameters.

System settings

Base MVA: The base MVA of the system your one-line represents.

Frequency: The frequency of the system your one-line represents. This number is used for
some of the database dialog box Calculate buttons. You should be sure it is correct before
you build your one-line.

The above fields are active in the database focus only.

Units: Choose U.S. or Metric, depending on your application.

Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  305

System tab of Options Dialog Box

ANSI/IEC Settings

Symbols: Choose either ANSI or IEC to change the one-line symbols used to represent
different items (i.e. transformers) in the power system you are modeling.

SC Calculation Method: Based on the short circuit calculation features you have purchased
you can choose ANSI or IEC short circuit method.

Generator 30 Cycle X: The 30 cycle reactance for generator can be selected as

1.5xMomentary reactance (default), or the transient reactance Xd’.

Arc Flash Ground Vpu: In arc flash hazard calculations, the program determines that a bus
is effectively grounded if the average voltage per unit for B and C phases during a line-to-
ground fault on A phase is less than the value specified in this field.

Show stability symbols in database focus: Equipments such as motors and generators with
stability data have different symbols in the Dynamic Stability focus. These symbols can be
made to appear in the Database Edit focus also with this checkbox enabled.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  306

Use 100% convention for displaying analysis overloads/overduties: Displays the

calculated duty or loading of equipment as a percentage of the rating. For example, if a cable
has a rating of 100A and the load current is 95A, then the cable overloading will be displayed
on the one-line as 95%. Without this option enabled, the display will be -5%.

Equipment

Choose the Equipment tab of the Options dialog box.

Equipment tab of Options Dialog Box

X/R Calculation for Grouped Motors

For the purpose of X/R calculation, EasyPower allows you to set the average Hp for ANSI
codes '<50' group, '>50' group, and 'lumped' group as chosen in the Motor Data dialog box.

Code Factors – Design

This factor is used to calculate the Design kVA (or Amp) values in for bus equipment. The
Code factor kVA (or Amp) value is multiplied by this factor to obtain the Design size.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Options  307

Relay Calibration Multiple

The Database Reports for relays will show the calibration Amps and Seconds at the specified
multiples of pickup.

Cable Derating Based on: The LV cable ampacity calculations will include the derating for
Ambient temperature based on this selection. The choices are:

 <None>: No derating is applied for ambient temperature.

 US: The derating for ambient temperature is applied as per NEC (NEC 2005, Tables
310.16 - 310.19, pages 142 – 145).

 CSA: The derating for ambient temperature is applied as per CEC (CEC 2006, Part I,
Table 5A, page 283).

Schedule Defaults – Scale: The graphical scale of schedules inserted in the drawings.

Auto-fill LV breaker trip with min values: When the Manufacturer, Type and Style are
chosen for the trip, the settings are automatically selected at the minimum possible in the
dialog.

Auto Design

These options affect the way you auto size equipment with SmartDesign feature. For details
see chapter 17.

File Locations

The File Locations tab of the Options dialog box allows you to set the default path for types
of files and templates.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Viewing Toolbars  308

File Locations tab of Options Dialog Box

Highlight the file you wish to modify by clicking on it with the mouse. Click on the Modify
button, and a browse dialog will come up allowing you to find the file and set the path by
either highlighting it and clicking on OK or just double-clicking on it.

Viewing Toolbars
When the interface Style is Toolbars, you can view or hide various toolbars and customize
them. Choosing View Customize Toolbars from the Menu bar will bring up the
Customize dialog box. Go to the Toolbars tab of the dialog. Check the box in front of the
particular Toolbars you want displayed in the regular windows.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Customizing Toolbars  309

Toolbars Dialog Box

Customizing Toolbars

Add or Remove buttons form Toolbar

In the Toolbar Style interface, you can choose which buttons to display on the toolbar. Click
on the drop down arrow at the right end of the toolbar, then choose add or Remove Buttons,
then the toolbar name. All the possible buttons will be listed. Check or uncheck the buttons to
customize the toolbar.

You can also create your own toolbar. To create a new tool bar, choose View  Customize
Toolbars Toolbars from the menu. Click on the New button. Type a name in the Toolbar
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Customizing Toolbars  310

Name dialog and choose OK. A new blank toolbar will be created. Next, go to the
Commands tab of the Customize dialog. Using the mouse, you can drag and drop the
desired buttons into the new toolbar.

.
Toolbar Name

Customizing new toolbar

You can also delete undesired items from your toolbar. To do this the Customize dialog must
be open. Drag the undesired button out of the toolbar into the one-line area. The button will
be removed.

You can also insert separators in the toolbar. To do this, drag a button slightly to the left or
right. A separator will be inserted. You can remove the separator by moving the button
towards it.

Clicking on Reset will cause the toolbar to go back to the default setting.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Report Options  311

When a Toolbar is in view, you can drag it almost anywhere you want on the screen and
attach it to the bottom, top or either side of the window. You can even change the shape of
the Toolbar similar to the way you change the shape of a window. Once a Toolbar is pulled
away from the header, a label will appear above the buttons. Then hold the cursor near one
of the edges, and it will turn into arrows. Hold down the left mouse button to drag the edge
of the toolbar and change the shape anywhere from totally horizontal, to a box, to totally
vertical.

Toolbar Options

Report Options
You can customize text reports by right-clicking on the report and choosing Report
Options…
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Report Options  312

Report Options – Font

Category: Type of information such as title, header or results. Select the desired Category
first to customize the font size, style, color etc.

Report Options – Settings

Organization Name: If you want the company name to appear different from the default
company name, type the new desired name in this field.

Show Table Shadow: Show or hide shadow effects on the report at the edge of the table.

Assumed Page Width: When you export the report to Microsoft Word 2003 or newer
version, the report is sized to fit the specified width.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Subsystems  313

Subsystems
A subsystem is a group of equipment, such as a substation, switchgear, distribution network,
etc. When you have a power system that comprises of similar subsystems, you can use
various methods to build them in the EasyPower one-line. Copying and pasting groups of
items is one way to save time. Another method is to save the subsystem as a template. Once
you create a template of a subsystem, you can insert it into your one-lines. Subsystem
templates are saved as Subsystem Template Files (*.sez). A subsystem template file is
similar to a one-line file.

Example LV substation as a subsystem

Creating New Subsystem Template

To create a new subsystem template, choose EasyPower button  New  New

Subsystem Template.

After you insert the items of the subsystem, enter data and format them, you can save the file
as a subsystem template file (.sez). Before saving the file it is recommended that you specify
the properties such as Category, Block Type and Manufacturer of the subsystem so that it is
easy to query or organize the multiple templates you may eventually have.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Subsystems  314

Setting File Properties of Subsystem Templates

To set the properties of a subsystem template, choose EasyPower button  Properties

to get a dialog as shown below. Specify the details in the fields available in the Summary tab.
Click on Advanced tab and select the Category, Block Type and Manufacturer from the
available choices in the combo boxes, or type your own text to create new items. Press OK
button when done, and save file.

Setting properties of subsystem template

Inserting Subsystem

In order to insert a subsystem into your one-line, you must have subsystem templates already
created. Subsystem templates are typically grouped together inside a template folder so that it
is easy to locate them. You can then specify the default folder for EasyPower to look into
when inserting subsystems. This saves time. To specify the default template folder, choose
from the menu: Tools  Options  File Locations, then double click on Subsystems under
the heading Property to select the folder. See picture below.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Subsystems  315

Default template file location

To insert a subsystem, go to Insert ribbon and choose Subsystem button. You will get a
dialog as shown below. The Working Folder will be the default folder specified in Tools-
Options dialog. The subsystem template files existing in the working folder will be displayed
in the Subsystem panel as shown in the picture below. If no default folder has been defined,
then Working Folder field as well as other fields will appear blank. You can change the
Working Folder by clicking the button and selecting the desired folder.

Insert Subsystem dialog

Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Subsystems  316

After selecting the Working Folder, search for the subsystem that you need. When the fields
Category, Block Type and Manufacturer have the values <ALL>, all files in the Working
Folder are displayed. To narrow you search you can specify the Category, Block Type and
Manufacturer that you are interested in. Only those files meeting your selected criteria will
be listed.

Listing templates by properties

If you highlight any file name with the cursor, the description of the subsystem will be
displayed in the Description panel of the Insert Subsystem dialog as shown in the picture
below. A preview of the one-line will also be available.

To insert a subsystem, highlight the filename in the dialog and click the Insert button.

Template Description
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Subsystems  317

Customizing Subsystems Toolbar

Toolbars dialog

When your interface Style is set to Toolbars, you can customize the toolbar. To enable the
Subsystems toolbar, choose from the menu: View  Customize Toolbars. Check the box
for Subsystem and select the Close button. You will get a toolbar shown in the picture
below.

Subsystems Toolbar

Subsystems toolbar contains up to 9 buttons, each representing a subsystem. Clicking on one

of the buttons will insert the corresponding subsystem. You can customize this tool bar in the
following ways:

1. Number of buttons on the toolbar: To add or remove buttons from the toolbar, choose
View  Customize Toolbars. Highlight Subsystem in the Categories window. You can
drag the Commands window icon to your Tool bar to add them. You can also remove the
icons by dragging them away from the Toolbar.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Subsystems  318

Customize dialog

2. Associating buttons with subsystems: To associate Subsystems toolbar buttons with

subsystem template files, open the Insert Subsystem dialog by choosing from the menu:
Insert  Subsystem and click on Customize… button to get the dialog Customize
Subsystem Toolbar as shown below. For every button, you can type in the Title and
associate it with a template file by clicking on the button and selecting the file.

Customize Subsystem Toolbar dialog

After customizing, a tool tip will appear next to a tool button when you place the cursor over
it. See the picture below.
Chapter 10 Customizing EasyPower Subsystems  319

Tool tip
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs Subsystems  320
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs Overview  321

Chapter 11 Using EasyPower

With Other Programs
Overview
EasyPower has full support for printing and plotting one-line diagrams from inside the
program, without any external CAD systems needed. So, you may never need to send
EasyPower one-lines outside the program.

However, some users might need to get portions of an EasyPower one-line into a word
processor for a power system study report or other purpose. Other users might want to get an
EasyPower one-line into AutoCAD® or some other drafting program for additional
documentation. For example, your company might specify a certain AutoCAD® title block
or drawing border style for all electrical diagrams.

Sending to a Word Processor

There are several ways to get an EasyPower one-line image into a word processor document.
All of them put the image on the Windows Clipboard, which can then be pasted into the word
processing document with that application's Paste command.

Using ALT-Print Screen

One way to get an image from EasyPower or any other Windows application is to hold down
the Alt key and press Print Screen. This Windows command takes a picture of the current
application's window and puts it on the Windows Clipboard.

For example, the following picture was captured using ALT-PrintScreen and was pasted
into this document using Microsoft Word For Windows 7.0.
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs Sending to a Word Processor  322

This Figure Captured With Windows ALT-Print Screen Command

Copying EasyPower Graphics to Other Applications

When you choose the Copy button from the ribbon, while there are no one-line items
selected, EasyPower takes the section of one-line currently showing in the active window
(this option is not available for text reports) and puts it on the Windows Clipboard. The
graphics format is Windows Metafile. Then you can then paste it into another application.
However, if items are selected when you choose , those selected database items will be
copied to the clipboard instead - not the one-line graphics. For example, the following
bitmap picture was generated by choosing ,and pasted into this document using Microsoft
Word. (The border was added in the word processor.)
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs Databases  323

Captured with EasyPower Copy Command

Copying Text Reports to Other Applications

Though you can print text reports directly from EasyPower, you may wish to incorporate
only certain sections of a text into another document or you may just want the ability to save
the whole report in a word processor.

To print the Report, select File Print from the menu bar.

To save the Report as an HTML file select File Save from the menu bar.

To export the Report to Word, right mouse click on the report and select Export as HTML to
Word or Export as HTML to Word, Fit to Page. Export as HTML to Word, Fit to Page will
fit all tables to the width of the page.

Select the lines you wish to copy or choose Edit Select All from the Menu bar if you want
to copy the entire report. Then just choose Edit Paste to place it into the word processor.

Databases
The Device Library, Motor Control Centers and Panel Schedules all have cells of data
presented in a spreadsheet format. This means that you can choose or Edit Copy from
the Menu bar to put selected data on the Windows Clipboard and then paste it into another
application.

You can also paste data from another application into the EasyPower Device Library, MCCs
or Panel Schedules by choosing or Edit Paste.
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs Sending to a CAD System  324

Exporting Database Text Files

EasyPower has the ability to export database text files which can be opened and manipulated
by a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel®. With the one-line as the active window,
choose File Export from the Menu bar. When the Export dialog box opens, choose
Delimited database text files (*.csv) in the Save as type field. The Options button will
become active and clicking on it will bring up the equipment dialog and allow you to choose
which equipment items you want to have database text files output for. You may choose one
item, multiple items, or all items. Checking the All types box will generate database text files
for all specified items contained in the one-line.

Sending to a CAD System

EasyPower's SendCAD™ sends one-line information to CAD systems through the industry-
standard DXF file format (based on AutoCAD® Release 11). Most CAD systems can read a
file created using this standard.

How To Write a DXF File

Choose button  Export  Export Drawings from the ribbon. The Export Drawing
to AutoCAD Dxf dialog box will appear. Enter the destination folder and the filename.
Select the drawings or the main one-line using the check boxes. When OK is clicked,
EasyPower will create a DXF file. The DXF file will contain different layers which can be
turned on or off using most CAD programs.

Exactly what gets sent to the DXF file depends on which EasyPower focus you are in at the
time. For example, if you are looking at Short Circuit results on the one-line, those results
will also appear in the DXF file.
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs Sending to a CAD System  325

Using AutoCAD® to Read the File

The simplest way to put the one-line drawing into AutoCAD®:

1. Make sure you are in the EasyPower focus to be sent to AutoCAD®, and write a DXF file
by choosing button  Export  Export Drawings as explained above in the
section How To Write a DXF File.

2. Use the AutoCAD® Import command to read into your AutoCAD® drawing the DXF
file which you created in Step 1.

Layer Names

Here is a list of the layers in EasyPower-created DXF files. Using CAD system commands,
you can turn on/off, rename, and otherwise manipulate these layers.

Layer Name Contents

OLI_EQUIP Symbols associated with equipment, i.e. transformers, motors,

etc.

OLI_FAULT Buses that have been faulted in EasyPower's Short Circuit focus.

OLI_WARNING EasyPower items that are highlighted as a warning. For

example, buses with voltage violations (by default, highlighted
in red on an EasyPower one-line) will appear on this layer.

OLI_BUS Ordinary buses (not faulted or highlighted).

OLI_LINE Lines that connect buses and equipment together.

OLI_IDTEXT Identification text, e.g. "BUS-XL21" or "TX-13".

OLI_ANTEXT Analysis text

OLI_INACTIVE Items that were deactivated in EasyPower (by default, shows as

light gray on an EasyPower one-line)

OLI_NOTE_ALL Notes with visibility in all focuses

Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs SCADA Importing and Exporting  326

OLI_NOTE_DB Notes visible in Database Edit/RT Link focus

OLI_NOTE_SC Notes visible in Short Circuit focus only

OLI_NOTE_PF Notes visible in Power Flow focus only

OLI_NOTE_HM Notes visible in Harmonics focus only

OLI_METER All meters

SCADA Importing and Exporting

EasyPower allows the input and saving of motor, load, MCC, and Panel data through an
ASCII file format. This provides a facility for reading in near real time data from a
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition (SCADA) or a Power Monitoring System. Near
real time data is used for the control of generation and the utility inter-tie for maximum
efficiency. It can also be used for reviewing histories to study specific events or problems.

In this same manner, data cases can be saved from real data and can be modified and reused
for load forecasting, contingency, and what-if cases with minimal effort. The following
information describes the ASCII file structure.

File Structure

File Header: Defines the EasyPower database file which created the ASCII load file. The
header is not necessary for EasyPower to read the file. It is simply used as a reference to
determine which database created the file. The file name will be listed in the System Info
dialog in EasyPower.

If the file was created from a SCADA system or spreadsheet, the file header is not required.

Unit Header: Defines the units of all watt and var entries. Units can be watts, kW, or MW.
EasyPower will then scale the load data to the appropriate unit for the database.

UNIT=WATTS UNIT=kW UNIT=MW

Different units for different equipment types are allowed.

SPEC/SCADA Field: The SPEC/SCADA field determines if the data is placed in user
Specified or SCADA data fields when it is read in. For files created from a SCADA system
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs SCADA Importing and Exporting  327

or spreadsheet, you will almost always use SCADA. For files saved from EasyPower both
types will be saved in the file. This field is not required for generators or utilities since the
database does not support both Specified and SCADA entry for these types.

Load Field: There are three formats for importing load data. Each starts with a BEGIN
statement and ends with an END statement. Below is a detailed description of each format:

1. The following fields define the standard CSV file format for load data:

BEGIN LOAD1
Load ID, SCADA, kWkVA, kVARkVA, kWI, kVARI, kWZ, kVARZ
Load ID, SPEC, kWkVA, kVARkVA, LFkVA%, kWI, kVARI, LFI%, kWZ, kVARZ, LFZ%
END LOAD1

In this format, the user defines the kW and kVAR values for each load model: constant
kVA, constant I, and constant Z as defined in the database section for loads.

Note that the SPEC import requires the user to specify the scaling factor percentage. This
value must range between 0-200% and be an increment of 5%. The scaling factors of
SCADA imports are always forced to 100%. Any blank kW, kVAR, or LF% field in this
format will leave that field unchanged in the load dialog box. The Load ID field and
SPEC/SCADA field are required.

2. An alternative format is provided for data which cannot be specifically broken down to
different load models:

BEGIN LOAD2
Load ID, SCADA, kW, kVAR, kVA%, I%, Z%, DF%
Load ID, SPEC, kW, kVAR, kVA%, I%, Z%, DF%
END LOAD2

Here, the user need only know the measured kW and kVAR values. The breakdown for
constant kVA, constant I, and constant Z is described in percentages that the user can
adjust for specific loads. The user is responsible for ensuring that these percentages add
up to 100%. The diversity factor (DF) is a separate scaling factor between 0-100%. It
allows the user to modify collected data which may be in non-concurrent peak values to
more realistic average values. The kW and kVAR values above are multiplied by the
specific model percentage and then by the diversity factor to determine the actual values
placed in the load dialog box.

The scaling factor percentages for SPEC imports are not given in the LOAD2 format.
Therefore, the scaling factors for these SPEC imports are not changed and remain as they
were before the import. However, the scaling factor percentages for the SCADA imports
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs SCADA Importing and Exporting  328

are forced to 100%. The DF% field defaults to 100% if left blank. No other fields in this
format should be left blank.

3. Another alternative format is provided for data which cannot be specifically broken down
to the different load models:

BEGIN LOAD3
Load ID, SCADA, kW, PF, DF%
Load ID, SPEC, kW, PF, DF%
END LOAD3

This format works well when data is derived from only a kW meter. The user need only
estimate the power factor (PF), and the diversity factor (DF). EasyPower will calculate
the kVAR value based on the PF and multiply the kW and kVAR values by the scaling
factor, DF. The resulting values will be input into the constant kVA fields while the
existing constant I and constant Z loads will be set to zero for that record. Negative
power factors are allowed.

Again, the scaling factors for LOAD3 SPEC imports are unchanged and the scaling
factors for LOAD3 SCADA imports are forced to 100%. The PF field defaults to 1 and
the DF% field defaults to 100% if they are left blank. No other fields in this format
should be left blank.

Motor Field: The following fields define the CSV file format for motor load data:

BEGIN MOTORS
Motor ID, SCADA, kW, kVAR, Load Type
Motor ID, SPEC, HP, FLA, PF, Efficiency, kVA/HP, Load Type, LF%
END MOTORS

Load types can be the following:

kVA = Constant kVA
I = Constant Current
Z = Constant Impedance
kJI = Constant kW and Constant Current

Refer to “Motor Data” on page 433 for additional information regarding the motor fields
shown above. BEGIN MOTORS and END MOTORS start and end the motor import
field. Negative power factors are allowed.

Note that the motor SPEC data requires the user to specify the scaling factor percentage.
The SCADA imports always force the scaling factors to 100%. The only required fields
are the Motor ID and the SPEC/SCADA fields. Any other field left blank will leave that
field unchanged in the motor dialog box.
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs SCADA Importing and Exporting  329

Generator Field: The following fields define the CSV file format for generator watt and
var data:

BEGIN GENERATORS
Generator ID, MW, MVAR, kV, Power Model
END GENERATORS

Refer to “Generator Data” on page 385 for additional information. The kV field is the
terminal voltage of the generator. Power model determines if the model is swing, PV, or
PQG. Normally it will default to PV and only the voltage and MW will be used. BEGIN
GENERATORS and END GENERATORS start and end the generator import field.

The only required field is the Generator ID field. Any other field left blank will leave
that field unchanged in the generator dialog box.

Utility Field: The following fields define the CSV format for utility watt and var data:

BEGIN UTILITIES
Utility ID, MW, MVAR, kV, Power Model
END UTILITIES

Refer to “Utility Data” on page 520 for additional information. The kV field is the
terminal voltage of the source. Power model determines if the model is swing, PV, or
PQG. Normally it will default to swing and only the voltage will be used. BEGIN
UTILITIES and END UTILITIES start and end the utility import field.

The only required field is the Utility ID field. Any other field left blank will leave that
field unchanged in the utility dialog box.
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs SCADA Importing and Exporting  330

Sample File
;Sample ASCII File Specification
FILE=BIGGER ;This is the file header

UNIT=KW ;This is the units

BEGIN MOTORS ;Beginning of motor section

M-1,SPEC,500,,-0.9,0.9,1.00,I,100 ;SPEC is read first and is the default
M-1,SCADA,423,-334,kji
M-14,SPEC,,,,,,, ;These fields are allowed to be blank
M-14,SCADA,,,
END MOTORS ;End of motor section

UNIT=MW ;Change the units

BEGIN LOAD1 ;Beginning of LOAD1 section

L-10,SCADA,0,0,0.5,0.2,0,0 ;SCADA is read first and is the default
L-10,SPEC,0,0,100,0.5,0.2,100,0,0,100
L-11,SCADA,,,,,, ;These fields are allowed to be blank
L-11,SPEC,,,,,,,,,
END LOAD1 ;End of LOAD1 section

BEGIN LOAD2 ;Beginning of LOAD2 section

L-1,SPEC,20,10,50,25,25, ;The last field can be left blank
L-1,SCADA,20,10,100,0,0,75
END LOAD2 ;End of LOAD2 section

BEGIN LOAD3 ;Beginning of LOAD3 section

inverter,SCADA,.5,.9,100 ;ID Names can be written in lower case
RECTIFIER,SPEC,.3,, ;These fields are allowed to be blank
END LOAD3 ;End of LOAD3 section

BEGIN GENERATORS ;Beginning of generator section

GEN-3,26.5,18,12,PV
GEN-4,,,, ;These fields are allowed to be blank
END GENERATORS ;End of generator section

BEGIN UTILITIES ;Beginning of utility section

UTIL-1,0,0,115,Swing ;Blank fields are same as for generator
END UTILITIES ;End of utility section

Saving an ASCII File

EasyPower allows you to save motor, load, generator, and utility data to an ASCII file. The
File Export command brings up a dialog box and asks for a destination filename. The Export
File as Type field also needs be set to SCADA Data Files (*.csv). The Specified data for
each utility and generator record will be saved in the file. Additionally, the Specified and
SCADA data for each load and motor record will be saved in the file. The type which is
selected in the database (either Specified or SCADA) will be saved first in sequence for that
record. (See the sample file above for clarification.) EasyPower saves the load data in the
LOAD1 format.
Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs SCADA Importing and Exporting  331

Reading an ASCII File

The File Import command opens an ASCII file for reading into EasyPower. As shown in
the sample file above, the first type read (Specified or SCADA) for a record will become the
default type. Blank fields in a record leave that field unchanged in the database (refer to the
sample file above). The ID names in the ASCII file can be either upper case or lower case.
The default is to overwrite existing data, but by choosing the Options button in the Import
dialog, you may prevent certain data from being overwritten.

Import SCADA Data Options dialog box

Chapter 11 Using EasyPower With Other Programs SCADA Importing and Exporting  332
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Overview  333

Chapter 12 Database Technical

Reference
Overview
The EasyPower database stores detailed information describing each equipment model in
your system. The information is entered through dialog boxes which have industry standard
data input fields for describing the specific type of equipment you are modeling.

Comments tab in Equipment Data

All equipment data dialog contains a “Comments” tab. You may use this space to write notes
on the device.

Comments tab in equipment data dialog

Data Status: Allows you to specify whether the data entered for this item is estimated,
verified or incomplete. You can run a query to select items that are incomplete or estimated.
Then you can color code the selected items by picking a color from the color palette in the
ribbon.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference AFD Data  334

AFD Data
ID Name: Uniquely identifies the adjustable frequency drive (AFD). This ID name is
sometimes referred to as the AFD name, and can be up to 16 characters long. The names
default to AFD-1, AFD-2, AFD-3... as you enter new AFD on the one-line diagram, but you
can change those names as desired.

Input Bus: ID Name of the bus on the input side of AFD. The based kV of the bus is shown
on the right.

Output Bus: ID Name of the bus on the output side of AFD. The based kV of the bus is
shown on the right.

Specifications

AFD Data dialog – Specifications tab

Input AC Frequency: The fixed frequency on the input side. This is specified in the System
tab of Options dialog.

Output AC Frequency: The adjustable frequency on the output of the AFD. This affects the
frequency of all equipment connected on the output of the AFD.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference AFD Data  335

Rating: Rated Input kVA or the motor HP of the drive.

X/R: If the AFD is regenerative, this value is used to define the short circuit X/R ratio of the
contribution delivered at the input of the AFD. The Calculate button uses an ANSI standard
lookup table to fill in this value.

PF: The input power factor of the AFD for power flow simulations.

Efficiency: The efficiency of the AFD. This will create a real power increase from the
output to the input of the AFD

Input Side

Diode / IGBT: This is presently forced to IGBT only.

ANSI Code: Choose Non-regen to simulate and non-regenerative drive and Regenerative to
simulate a regenerative drive (which includes a short circuit contribution on the input of the
AFD).

Momentary Fault x FLA: The defined bolted fault level for the input of the AFD if it is
regenerative.

Output Side

IGBT / Thyristor: Choose IGBT to model a source inverter on the output, or choose
Thyristor to model a Thyristor output. This presently does not affect any calculations.

Fault x FLA: The fault current output of the AFD under a bolted fault condition.

Fault Time: The time that Fault x FLA is produced by the AFD under fault conditions.

Notes on AFD

Power Flow Modeling

For the AFD power flow simulation, the motor on the output of the AFD will respond in its
loading dependent upon the output frequency and voltage. The modeling used in EasyPower
is approximated based on a typical 100 HP motor response to these factors, with the motor
load on the shaft modeled as speed squared.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference AFD Data  336

For output frequencies below system frequency, a drive will maintain constant Volts/Hz by
dropping the voltage proportionally with the frequency. For output frequencies above system
frequency, voltage is typically held constant, as there is no need to drop voltage since
Volts/Hz drops as frequency increases. Additionally, one must be careful to consider that
when operating a motor above system frequency, that it should be specified to accommodate
the additional load at the highest frequency. As frequency increases, so does the load on the
shaft, since we have elected to approximate behavior with a speed-squared load
characteristic.

From the tables below, we see an interesting behavior. Because we are holding a constant
Volts/Hz when below system frequency, the motor power factor is practically constant.
Above system frequency, power factor improves. This happens because a motor rated for
higher than system frequency operation is actually operating at a “lower” frequency than the
nameplate of the specified motor. Thus, there is a drop in motor power factor.
Actual Actual Governor
Desired Output Desired Output Speed Motor Motor Motor Motor PF
Freq Freq Voltage Voltage Step kW kVar kVA PF Ratio
60 60.0 1.000 1.000 0.0000 81.98 48.14 95.07 0.862 0.9997
50 49.8 0.833 0.833 -0.1670 56.32 32.26 64.91 0.868 1.0060
40 39.9 0.667 0.668 -0.3330 35.99 20.65 41.49 0.867 1.0056
30 29.9 0.500 0.501 -0.5000 20.10 11.56 23.18 0.867 1.0050
20 20.0 0.333 0.334 -0.6670 8.80 5.09 10.16 0.866 1.0036

Rated Condition: 82.00 48.10 95.066 0.8626 1.0000

Motor Tabulated Results for AFD Operating from 20 to 60 Hz

1.000

0.900

0.800

0.700

0.600
Motor PF

0.500

0.400

0.300

0.200

0.100

0.000
10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0

Frequency (Hz)

Plot of Motor pf vs. Frequency for AFD Operating from 20 to 60 Hz

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference AFD Data  337

1.2000

1.1500

1.1000

1.0500

1.0000

Motor PF
0.9500

0.9000

0.8500

0.8000

0.7500

0.7000
10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0

Frequency (Hz)

Plot of Correction to pf vs. Frequency for AFD Operating from 20 to 60 Hz

Actual Actual Governor

Desired Output Desired Output Speed Motor Motor Motor Motor PF
Freq Freq Voltage Voltage Step kW kVar kVA PF Ratio
20 20.0 0.333 0.335 -0.6667 8.98 10.40 13.74 0.653 0.757
30 29.9 0.500 0.502 -0.5000 20.31 23.35 30.95 0.656 0.761
40 39.9 0.667 0.668 -0.3333 36.18 41.46 55.03 0.658 0.762
50 49.8 0.833 0.834 -0.1667 56.44 64.56 85.75 0.658 0.763
60 60.0 1.000 1.000 0.0000 81.99 97.66 127.51 0.643 0.746
70 69.7 1.000 1.000 0.1667 110.51 101.97 150.37 0.735 0.852
80 79.5 1.000 1.000 0.3333 143.87 108.54 180.22 0.798 0.926
90 89.5 1.000 0.999 0.5000 181.78 118.20 216.83 0.838 0.972
100 99.3 1.000 0.998 0.6667 224.01 131.94 259.98 0.862 0.999

Rated Condition: 227.70 133.60 264.00 0.862 1.000

Motor Tabulated Results for AFD Operating from 20 to 100 Hz

1.000

0.900

0.800

0.700

0.600
Motor PF

0.500

0.400

0.300

0.200

0.100

0.000
10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0
Frequency (Hz)

Plot of Motor pf vs. Frequency for AFD Operating from 20 to 100 Hz

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference AFD Data  338

1.200

1.000

Motor PF Correction 0.800

0.600

0.400

0.200

0.000
10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0
Frequency (Hz)

Plot of Correction to pf vs. Frequency for AFD Operating from 20 to 100 Hz

And so, the tables and plots above show a clear relationship between motor power factor and
AFD output frequency. These results are used to generate general relationships that apply
corrections to motor pf in EasyPower as a motor on an AFD output has a frequency specified
different than system base frequency. In addition, consider the next table where we have
shown motors specified for increasing maximum frequency of operation. We see that
increasingly higher HP ratings are needed to satisfy the greater power requirement at higher
AFD frequency outputs. These results assume:

The motor is fully loaded at 60 Hz such that a higher rated motor is needed to supply the
additional load as load torque increases by the square of the speed.

The initial motor HP rating is 100 HP.

The motor cannot have its terminal voltage increased above rated nameplate voltage.

Max
Desired Motor Motor Motor Motor PF Motor
Freq kW kVar kVA PF Ratio Rated HP
60 82.00 48.10 95.07 0.863 1.0000 100.0
70 82.00 51.40 96.78 0.847 0.9823 116.7
80 82.00 67.30 106.08 0.773 0.8962 177.8
90 82.00 81.20 115.40 0.711 0.8238 225.0
100 82.00 97.60 127.47 0.643 0.7458 277.8
110 82.00 116.10 142.14 0.577 0.6688 336.0
120 82.00 136.70 159.41 0.514 0.5964 400.0

Rated pf and HP for Greater Than 60 Hz AFD Operation

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference AFD Data  339

1.000

0.900

0.800

0.700

0.600
Motor PF

0.500

0.400

0.300

0.200

0.100

0.000
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Frequency (Hz)

Plot of pf at 60 Hz vs. Frequency as we increase motor HP to accommodate increased loading.

1.2000

1.1000

1.0000
Motor PF Correction

0.9000

0.8000

0.7000

0.6000

0.5000

0.4000
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Frequency (Hz)

Plot of pf Correction at 60 Hz vs. Frequency as we increase motor HP to accommodate increased loading.

Thus, from our results, it is clear that below system frequency, we do not need to make any
corrections to motor power factor, but for frequencies above system frequency, we need to
consider:

Motor HP rating.

The much lower power factor at system frequency for a motor with a nameplate speed higher
than system frequency.

The increase in motor power factor as increase speed from system frequency up to the
maximum frequency of the motor.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference AFD Data  340

The plot below takes this into consideration for our typical 100 HP motor, and presents the
corrections needed with a curve fit equation used to simulate this action. The corrections
from this plot are used in EasyPower to simulate the increased frequency effects on AFD
motors.

1.1000

1.0000

70 Hz Sim
80 Hz Sim
0.9000 90 Hz Sim
Motor PF Correction

100 Hz Sim
110 Hz Sim
120 Hz Sim
0.8000
120 Hz Fit
110 Hz Fit
100 Hz Fit
90 Hz Fit
0.7000
80 Hz Fit
70 Hz Fit

0.6000

0.5000
50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 110.0 120.0 130.0

Frequency (Hz)

Correction to motor pf when specified with over-frequency capability

The best way to read the plot above is to look at one curve in relation to a given AFD motor
application. If we have an AFD and need to operate its motor at say a maximum frequency of
100 Hz, then we first select the aqua curve set that has its highest correction value of 1.0 at
100 Hz. If the motor specified for this application has a rated speed of 100 Hz (i.e. an actual
speed of 1800 RPM for 60 Hz and a rated maximum speed of 3000 RPM at 100 Hz) then if
the motor were actually running at 60 Hz, its power factor would be about 0.75 times the
motor’s rated power factor. If it were running at 80 Hz, the motor’s power factor would be
about 0.92 times the motor’s rated power factor.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference ATS Data  341

ATS Data

ATS Data dialog

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the automatic transfer switch (ATS). This ID name is
sometimes referred to as the ATS name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names
default to ATS-1, ATS-2, ATS-3... as you enter new ATS’s on the one-line diagram, but you
can change those names later if desired.

Base kV: Base kV for the ATS. An ATS has three buses as shown by the nodes in the
symbol. Note that the bus must have a kV entered before equipment can be connected to the
bus. Anything less than 1kV is considered low voltage, anything 1kV or more is high
voltage.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference ATS Data  342

Specifications

Area: Area numbers are used to uniquely define different areas of the electrical system.
These areas can then be used for creating specific text reports from analysis operations that
represent subsets of the system. For example, typical paper plant areas may be the power
house (Area 1), caustic plant (Area 2), pulp mill (Area 3), and paper machine (Area 4). Area
numbers are positive integers between 1 and 999.

Zone: A zone number is simply a sub-area. This allows even more specific reporting. You
may wish to define the pulp mill as Area 3 and the digester electrical equipment as Zone 2.
Specific reports can then be generated for this combination without including the entire pulp
mill or the other digesters.

Switch Type: To select the one-line graphics (symbol).

Source Connection: Normal connection of the switch. “Source 1Bus” corresponds to the bus
on the left. To have the switch normally connect to the right side bus, select “Source 2 Bus”
in the combo box.

ATS Model: You can specify the short circuit ratings of the ATS as switch or LV circuit
breakers, depending upon their construction. Selecting Edit Data… button will open the
dialog for Switch Data or LV Breaker Data.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference ATS Data  343

Stability

Enable: Check box enables stability data

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of ATS manufacturers available in the device library.
If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the library.

Type: ATS types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: ATS models available from the type chosen in the Type field above. If the desired
style is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Lib button: Populates ATS data from the library.

Trip Voltage: ATS disconnects from the source when voltage drops below this value.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Battery Data  344

Del on Start (sec): Time delay when

Arc Flash Hazard

See Bus Data.

Battery Data

Battery Data dialog

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the battery. The names default to BAT-1, BAT-2, BAT-3... as
you enter new battery on the one-line, but you can change those names later if desired.

To Bus: This is the ID Name of the bus to which the battery is connected. The Base kV of
the bus is indicated on the right.

Specifications

Total Rated kV: This is the total voltage rating of the battery string.

Charging Multiplier: This is multiplier for the battery voltage reflecting the charge
condition. For example a fully charged battery could have 1.05 and a slightly drained battery
may have 0.95 as the charging multiplier.

Total R: This is the internal resistance of the battery string in Ohms.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  345

Rated Amps: The rated amperes of the battery or battery string. Most batteries typically
have the ampere-hour rating on an 8-hour basis. The nominal amp rating is the ampere-hour
divided by 8 for such batteries. If the battery rating in ampere-hours is given at a different
discharge duration, then divide by the stated number.

Note

Batteries are modeled as a straight Thevenin voltage source behind a resistance. Thus, they
HOLD voltage behind an internal resistance like a Swing Bus. Batteries thus have the ability
to be the single source that will allow a system to enter power flow and solve the system.

Bus Data

Bus Data Dialog Box

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the bus. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the bus
name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to BUS-1, BUS-2, BUS-3... as
you enter new buses on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names later if
desired.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  346

Base kV: Base kV for the bus. Note that the bus must have a kV entered before equipment
can be connected to the bus. Anything less than 1kV is considered low voltage, anything
1kV or more is high voltage. MCCs and Panel Schedules can only be connected to low
voltage buses.

Lock Auto Sizing: When check box is checked, bus will not allow auto sizing.

Specifications

Area: Area numbers are used to uniquely define different areas of the electrical system.
These areas can then be used for creating specific text reports from analysis operations that
represent subsets of the system. For example, typical paper plant areas may be the power
house (Area 1), caustic plant (Area 2), pulp mill (Area 3), and paper machine (Area 4). Area
numbers are positive integers between 1 and 999.

Zone: A zone number is simply a sub-area. This allows even more specific reporting. You
may wish to define the pulp mill as Area 3 and the digester electrical equipment as Zone 2.
Specific reports can then be generated for this combination without including the entire pulp
mill or the other digesters.

Rating (A): Continuous current rating of the bus in amperes.

Bracing (kA): Short circuit rating of bus bracing in kA. The testing standard unit is specified
on the right side as follows:

High voltage Bus can have one of the following units:

 Asymmetrical kA.

 Peak kA (crest).

Low voltage bus has symmetrical kA unit.

Type: Type of equipment inside which the bus exists. This may be open air, MCC,
switchgear, ATS, etc. The Bus Type definition is important for Auto-Design and arc flash
hazards calculations. In arc flash hazard calculations, the parameters affected by Type are
gap between conductors and distance exponent. The various types are:

 Switchgear: This can be low voltage or high voltage switchgear.

 Open Air: The bus has no enclosures.

 Conductor: wire ways, bus ways, etc.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  347

 MCC: Motor Control Center.

 Panel: Small and lighting panels.

 Panelboard: Low voltage power panelboards.

 Switchboard: This can be low voltage or high voltage switchboard.

 NEMA E2 Contactor: NEMA E2 motor starter enclosures. The power voltage is at

medium voltage. For low voltage control circuits this type can be used.

 Int Switch: Interrupting or disconnect or safety switch.

 VFD: Variable frequency drive or some type of motor drive.

 UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

 ATS: Auto or manual transfer switch.

 Transformer Terminal: Enclosure transformer terminals/bushings.

 Vault: Underground space such as manhole for cable connections, transformers, etc.

 Padmount Equipment: Padmount switches, padmount transformers cabinets, etc.

 Control Panel: Enclosure for control circuits.

 Junction Box – Large: Large or deep junction box.

 Junction Box – Small: Small or shallow junction box.

 Network Protector: Spot or grid network protectors used in network distribution systems.

 Other: Any other type not specified.

One-line Graphics – Line Style: Box drawn around the bus symbol in the one-line. Any line
style can be selected from the combo box to represent an enclosure such as switchgear.

DC Bus - Base Voltage Specification

On DC buses, the base kV defined is not LL nor is it LG. It is a DC average value. If the
system you are defining is completely DC with nothing but DC sources, then defining the bus
base voltage can be done by finding the rated DC voltage on the gear you are simulating, and
then enter it for the bus.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  348

However, if you are simulating a DC system that connects to an AC system via a Rectifier or
Inverter, then the proper DC voltage (that works in line with Rectifier and Inverter equations)
needs to be specified. For such systems, the DC voltage is related to the AC voltage under no
load conditions as follows:

This equation includes the ripple on the DC bus, and is typically used on DC systems that do
not include a large smoothing capacitor; systems such as HVDC and simple large rectifiers.
If you know that the DC bus includes a DC bus capacitor, and that under loaded conditions
ripple is minimal, you should use:

Base Voltage Consistency

DC Buses that are connected using DC Cables must have the same base kV. Consistency
checks are included in the code that should not allow differing kV buses to be connected by a
DC Cable.

Switchgear/Panelboard/Switchboard

Switchgear tab of Bus Data dialog

This tab allows you to calculate downstream loads on all the branches breakers connected to
the bus. This tab can be labeled as Siwtchgear, or Panelboard, or Switchgear depending on
the Bus Type selected in the Specifications tab.

Enable Switchgear Spreadsheet: Checking this checkbox allows you to modify

information, enter load data and calculate downstream loads. Once you make the necessary
 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  349

data entry and calculations you can you can uncheck the box to prevent changes. When
unchecked, the data can still be read.

 Diversity: Enter the diversity factor for the bus. The factor is used in calculating connected,
demand, code, and design kVA. The range is 1 to 10.

Calculate Downstream Load: Clicking on this button calculates all downstream loads for
each breaker/fuse/branch connected to this bus. All branches are considered downstream
unless there exists a source such as UPS, Generator or Utility in the direction of the branch.
The program traverses through all the paths and determines whether or not there is a power
source in the path. All loads are summed and reported in the spreadsheet if there is no power
source in the path.

Unit: You can display downstream loads in kVA or Amps.

 Elevation: You can choose the elevation layout of the switchgear such that protective
devices in stacked in columns or rows. For Columns, the breakers in one unit will be
vertically stacked. For Rows, you can have a single breakers, or breaker on the left or right.
See section on Elevation in Chapter 2.

Spreadsheet Column Headings:

ID Name: ID name of the equipment connected to the bus. If any branch has a protective
device such as a switch, fuse or breaker connected to the bus, then the ID name of the
protective device is reported. Otherwise the branch ID name is reported.

Section Space: This is a field in which users can enter their own text to describe the space
for the protective device or branch.

Description: Text field to describe the branch connected to this bus.

Device: You can specify the protective device/branch as Feeder, Main or Tie. This is for
record only and does not affect calculations.

Diversity: Number shown is the diversity factor of the downstream bus with equipment type
Switchgear, Switchboard, or Panelboard. If other equipment type is selected, diversity factor
is defaulted to 1. Diversity factor is used in calculating the connected, demand, code and
design kVA. Press Calculate Downstream Load button to update diversity factor. The range
is from 1 to 10.

Device Rating(A): Continuous current rating of the protective devices in Amps.

Cond Rating (A): Amp rating of branch conductors.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  350

User Values: Check box to allow users to enter their own load. When checked, the entered
values are used and the calculated downstream values from the one-line are ignored.

Arc Flash Hazard

The Arc Flash Hazard tab allows you to specify the necessary details of the equipment for
arc-flash hazard calculations.

AF For This Bus: Specify how you would like Arc Flash results determined for this bus.
The (3) selections to choose from:

 Calculated

 Excluded

 Forced To

Bus Data Arc Flash Hazard tab

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  351

Calculated: When calculated is selected, ‘Trip times for this bus’ and ‘Working Distances’
sections become active. Select method for determining trip times for this bus by choosing on
the following:

 Pre-defined Fixed Times: Obtains arc clearing time for the bus from the library default
values. This is not the same as the trip times calculated form the TCC curves of the
upstream trip device. The values stored in the library are simply predefined approximate
trip times. This method is not recommended. This option is a legacy method.

 User-defined Times: With this option you can specify the protective device clearing
time for each bus. The details of arcing time for the bus can be specified in the fields –
Device ID, Relay Function and Time (s). If no time is specified then the arc flash results
do not appear.

 TCC Times (Automatically Calculated): Arc flash incident energy are calculated based
on time characteristic current curves specified in each protective device data dialog box.

Working Distances: Specifying working distances shown on one-line and in arc flash hazard
report.

 Default from Options: When selected, workings distances used are from Default
Working Distances spreadsheet in the Arc Flash Hazard Options.

 User Specified: Selecting this option allows user to enter the working distance for this
bus only.

 Excluded: Select to exclude the bus from arc-flash reports. Some examples of when
“Excluded” may be selected are buses that are on utility side (not worked on by company
employees) but still modeled on the one-line and buses where energized work is not
likely (splices).

 Forced To: When selected an additional cell will appear. Enter the user-defined incident
energy for this bus. The arc flash value incident energy entered for this bus is shown on
the one-line and in the Arc Flash Hazard Report. This is typically used for buses where
the NFPA-70E has stated a particular PPE level can be assumed if certain conditions
exist. Particularly, 208 volt equipment fed by 125 KVA or smaller transformers.

AF Output For This Bus: This specifies what whether to display results on the line side or
the load side of the Main protective device of the bus equipment. If the arc flash hazards
output for this bus needs to be different from the global option, then this field is used. The
choices in this combo box are:

 <<Use Global Option>>: Use the option specified in Short Circuit Options.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  352

 Including Main: Always display the arc flash hazard results on the load side of the Main
protective device for this bus equipment regardless of what options are selected in the
Short Circuit Options.

 Excluding Main: Always display the arc flash hazard results on the line side of the Main
protective device for this bus equipment regardless of what options are selected in the
Short Circuit Options.

 Both (Incl & Excl Main): Always display the arc flash hazard results on both the line side
and the load side of the Main protective device for this bus equipment regardless of what
options are selected in the Short Circuit Options.

Orientation: This is the orientation of the bus with respect to a worker that may be exposed
to arc flash. This is not related to the vertical and horizontal buses in MCC and Switchgear.
Arc travels away from source and extends from the tip of the conductors. Based on the
orientation of the conductors, the incident energy can vary. This choice affects the
calculations factor (Cf) used in the arc flash hazard equations.

 Vertical: The load side end of conductor does not point towards a worker. IEEE
1584-2002, NFPA-70E (2009) and calculation methods preceding these were based on
lab tests with the conductor orientation being vertical. The orientation is vertical for most
equipment. In a switchgear or MCC, both the horizontal and vertical buses are considered
to be “vertical” orientation if the tips of the conductors do not point outwards towards a
worker.

Examples of Vertical orientation

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Bus Data  353

 Horizontal: The load side end of conductor points towards a worker. Since the arc
extends away from the source towards the worker, the incident energy would be higher.
Arc flash tests carried out more recently had conductors in “horizontal” orientation and
hence the name. Reference: “Effect of electrode orientation in arc flash testing,” Wilkins,
R.; Allison, M.; Lang, M., Industry Applications Conference, 2005, Volume 1, Issue , 2-6
Oct. 2005 Page(s): 459 - 465 Vol. 1.

Example of Horizontal Orientation

 Vertical into Barrier: The load side end of conductors has a block of insulation
(perpendicular to the conductors). This is not the same as interphase barriers. See figure
below. The insulation holds the arc in position (not allowing the arc to move away from
conductors as in the case of open air). This results in higher incident energy. Reference:
“Effect of Insulating Barriers in Arc Flash Testing,” R. Wilkins, M. Lang and M. Allison,
September 2006, Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

Insulation

Example of Vertical Into Barrier

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Busway Data  354

Busway Data

Busway Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the busway. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
busway name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to BWY-1, BWY-2,
BWY-3... as you enter new busways on the one-line diagram, but you can change those
names if desired.

From Bus: The bus which the busway connects “from”, which must already exist on the
one-line. You must be careful that the From Bus has the same base kV as the busway’s To
Bus. For your reference, the From Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

To Bus: The bus which the busway connects “to”, which must already exist on the one-line.
You must be careful that the To Bus has the same base kV as the busway’s From Bus. For
your reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Busway Data  355

Show Entire Line: This box is checked by default and causes the entire line to be displayed.
By un-checking the box, the line will only be shown as a short section at each end with labels
indicating which bus the other end is attached to.

Busway Specifications

Unit: Choose either U.S. or Metric.

Mfr: Provides a drop down list of busway manufacturers available in the device library.

Type: Provides a drop down list of busway types available in the device library.

Length: The length of the busway in feet or meters.

Ampacity: Busway rating in amperes. After you choose a Mfr and Type, the available
ampacities will be displayed in the drop down menu of the Ampacity field. If the desired
manufacturer is missing from the list, choosing “Generic” in Mfr field and “(std)” in the Type
field will cause the Ampacity field to be filled with several possible values.

Material: The busway material (copper or aluminum).

Impedances

Impedances are described in ohms/100 feet or ohms/100 meters . Zero sequence impedances
are found from the positive sequence impedance using a Z0/Z1 multiplier from Reference14.

R1: Positive sequence resistance.

X1: Positive sequence reactance.

R0: Zero sequence resistance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), the positive sequence
impedance will be used.

X0: Zero sequence reactance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), the positive sequence
impedance will be used.

Calculate Button: Fills in computed values for the Impedances R1, X1, R0, and X0 fields.
You can override these values by typing in different numbers. The calculations are based on

14 Let's Be More Specific About Equipment Grounding, R.H. Kaufmann, General Electric Co., GER
1974
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  356

the specific manufacturers’ data for the type of busway chosen with the Mfr, Type, Ampacity,
and Material fields.]

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Cable Data

Cable Data Dialog Box

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  357

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the cable. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the cable
name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to C-1, C-2, C-3... as you
enter new cables on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names later if desired.

From Bus: The bus which the cable connects “from”, which must already exist on the one-
line. You must be careful that the From Bus has the same base kV as the cable’s To Bus.
For your reference, the From Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

To Bus: The bus which the cable connects “to”, which must already exist on the one-line.
You must be careful that the To Bus has the same base kV as the cable’s From Bus. For your
reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Show Entire Line: This box is checked by default and causes the entire line to be displayed.
By un-checking the box, the line will only be shown as a short section at each end with labels
indicating which bus the other end is attached to.

Lock Auto-Sizing: While sizing cables with SmartDesign (Auto-Design feature), the cable
data is not changed if this field is checked. However, Auto-Design report will be created for
the cable to show what would have been designed. Use this field to prevent cable data from
being changed in Smart-Design.

Cable Specifications 1

Unit: Choose either U.S., CSA, Metric or Per Unit. If you choose Per Unit, all fields except
those in the Impedance (PU) section will be grayed out.

No/Phase: Total number of cables modeled. The default of one (1) means one conductor
per phase. Two (2) means two conductors in parallel per phase, etc. When two or more
conductors are in parallel, the impedance of the circuit will be decreased by that factor. The
impedances shown in the dialog box are for one conductor only, and are not based on the
No./Phase field. So if you enter these values instead of using Calculate, make sure they are
for one conductor only. This lets you easily check handbook values without additional
arithmetic. The per-unit impedances listed in a database report considers the total number of
conductors.

Type: Five different cable types can be modeled. Cable type is used in determining the
impedance of the conductor.

 1/C - One conductor. Three separate conductors are used for a circuit, one each for A
phase, B phase and C phase.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  358

 3/C - Three conductor. This is the same as three separate conductors, except that the
conductors are encased with an insulated overall outer jacket effectively forming one
cable. The cable may or may not have an interstitial ground wire.

 IAA - Interlocked armor aluminum. This is the same as the a three conductor cable
except that the outer jacket is made of aluminum instead of protective insulation. IAA is
a generic term for describing any type of aluminum jacket including continuous sheath
products such as Okonite CLX.

 IAS - Interlocked armor steel. This is the same as IAA except that the outer jacket is
made of steel instead of aluminum.

 MAC - Messenger aerial cable. Messenger aerial cable is three separate conductors
bundled together with a messenger cable easy hanging from poles. Because the
conductors are held in a triangular fashion with the bundling, the impedance of this
configuration is the same as for the 3/C cable.

 Teck cables: Choose CSA unit. For single conductor Teck, choose “1/C” and for 3-
conductor Teck, choose IAA for aluminum armor or IAS for Steel Armor. Look for Teck
or Teck-90 in the Insulation type.

Size: Conductor size in AWG, MCM, or mm2. Cable size is used in determining the
impedance of the conductor.

Length: Length of the cable in feet or meters.

Insulation:

US Low Voltage Insulation (1000 volts or less):

 EPR - Ethylene Propylene Rubber

 PVC - Polyvinyl chloride.

 RH - Heat Resistant Rubber, 75oC

 RHH - Heat Resistant Rubber

 RHW - Moisture and Heat Resistant Rubber. This is the 480 volt equivalent of EPR.

 THHN - Heat Resistant Thermoplastic

 THWN - Moisture and Heat Resistant Thermoplastic

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  359

 THW - Moisture and Heat Resistant Thermoplastic

 TW - Thermoplastic insulated moisture resistant cable.

 XHHW - Moisture and Heat Resistant Crosslinked Synthetic Polymer. This is the 480
volt equivalent of XLPE.

 US High Voltage Insulation (Over 1000 volts):

 XLPE - Crosslinked Polyethylene

 XLPE-133% - Crosslinked Polyethylene with 133% insulation

 XLPE-NJ - Non-Jacketed Crosslinked Polyethylene

 XLPE-NJ-133% - Non-Jacketed Crosslinked Polyethylene with 133% insulation

 XLPES - Shielded Crosslinked Polyethylene

 XLPES-133% - Shielded Crosslinked Polyethylene with 133% insulation

 EPR - Ethylene Propylene Rubber

 EPR-133% - Ethylene Propylene Rubber with 133% insulation

 EPR-NJ - Non-Jacketed Ethylene Propylene Rubber

 EPR-NJ-133% - Non-Jacketed Ethylene Propylene Rubber with 133% insulation

 EPRS - Shielded Ethylene Propylene Rubber

 EPRS-133% - Shielded Ethylene Propylene Rubber

 PILC - Paper Insulated Lead Sheath

 PILC-133% - Paper Insulated Lead Sheath with 133% insulation

Material: The conductor material.

Raceway Configuration

Type: Medium in which the conductor is supported or run (conduit, cable tray, air, or direct
buried). If “none” is selected, the cable ampacity will default to 10A
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  360

Material: Raceway material, which can be either metallic such as steel, or non-metallic such
as aluminum, PVC, IMT, or EMT. This value is used in determining reactances.

Buried Conduits: Choose Buried for Type, then choose the material (Steel, PVC, etc.). You
can apply the derating for ampacity via the “Duct Config” field. The NEC does not have a
table for buried conduits. Therefore we need to apply the appropriate derating.

Impedances

Impedances are described in Ohms/1000 feet, Ohms/KM or PU. Zero sequence impedances
are found from the positive sequence impedance using a Z0/Z1 multiplier from Reference15.

R1: Positive sequence resistance.

Rdc (One way length): This is the resistance per 1000 feet for each conductor of DC cables
only. (Not applicable for AC cables.)

X1: Positive sequence reactance.

R0: Zero sequence resistance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), the positive sequence
impedance will be used.

X0: Zero sequence reactance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), the positive sequence
impedance will be used.

Rating: Conductor rating in amperes. If you use Calculate, this value will be brought from
the device library and is for one conductor. You will need to input the proper rating. The
75(C) rating is shown, to indicate lug ratings, below the rating field if calculate is used to
determine the rating (low voltage only). You can derate cable Amp rating based on Ambient
temperature and number of conductors in conduits or raceways by specifying the Ambient
temperature and the Duct Config field in the Specification 2 tab of the dialog. For the
Ambient Temp derating to take effect, you need to specify the derating standard in Tools 
Options  Equipment dialog.

Calculate Button: Fills in computed values for the R1, X1, R0, X0, Xc, Xc0,and Rating (A)
fields. You can override these values by typing in your own numbers. The calculations are
based on the cable specifications and the type of ground circuit16.

15 Let's Be More Specific About Equipment Grounding, R.H. Kaufmann, General Electric Co., GER
1974
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  361

Cable Specifications 2

All fields have a substantial effect on conductor impedances when using the Calculate
button.

Ampacity Derating: Cable ampacities can be derated in two ways – Duct Config field and
Ambient Temp (C) field.

Specifications 2 tab of Cable Data

Duct Config: This field allows for cable ampacity derating based on the number of
conductors in the conduit, tray or duct. Select from D-1, D-2, etc. which correspond to NEC
Detail 1, NEC Detail 2, etc. of the National Electric Code. If this field is left blank, a 1.0
multiplier will be assumed for the ampacity calculations. The rating factors are stored in the

16 General Electric Wire and Cable Handbook, March 31 1983

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  362

standard device library and can be customized if desired. If you need to derate cables based
on number of conductors in the conduit or tray, you can add to the library.

Cable Derating in the Standard Device Library

Detail 1 (left) and Detail 2 (right)

Detail 1: 11.5” X 11.5” Electrical duct bank. One electrical duct.

Detail 2: 19” X 19” Electrical duct bank. Three electrical ducts.

For a complete listing of duct configurations, please see article 310 in the National Electric
Code.

Ambient Temp: Ambient air temperature. This is used for ampacity derating based on the
standard selected in Tools  Options  Equipment. You can choose US (based on NEC),
CSA (based on CEC) or <None> in the Options. No derating is applied when the option is
<None>.

Field Temp of Conductor (C): Temperature of the loaded conductor. This can be varied
from 25C to 250C depending on the type of study being performed. Cable temperature is
used in determining the resistance of the conductor. The resistance increases with the
conductor temperature. NOTE: This is not the Ambient air temperature or the ground
temperature.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  363

Cond Spacing: Distance between the outside insulation or jacket edges of adjacent phase
conductors. This will affect the reactance calculations. All three spacings are modeled as the
same or as a GMD equivalent. NOTE: This is not the center to center distance. See figure
below.

Conductor spacing: zero spacing (left) and with spacing (right)

Conductor Lay: Lay of the conductor, which affects the impedance. 3/C, IAA, IAS, and
MAC configurations are always defined with a triangle configuration and zero spacing even
if you choose a different configuration. Single conductor cables, however, can be in flat,
triangle or a right triangle configuration with any spacing factor.

Conductor Form: Conductor form is determined by the extrusion process of the copper or
aluminum. Choose either round or sectored.

Conduit Size & Num: Size and number of conduits. This does not affect the impedance or
ampacity calculations, but is stored as data. SmartDesign populates this field while
automatically sizing the cables.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  364

Ground Wire

Ground Wire tab of Cable Data Dialog Box

Type: Ground conductor type (none, interstitial, separate, or as part of a group of

conductors). This choice has an effect on the zero sequence impedance calculation. See
Reference1 for more information on ground impedance calculations.

 None: No ground conductor.

 Interstitial: The ground wires in a three conductor cable (or IAA, IAS, CLX, TEC).
Typically there are three bare ground wires spaced evenly between the phase conductors.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Cable Data  365

Interstitial

 Separate: A separate ground conductor in a conduit for a specific circuit.

Separate

 Group: A ground conductor in a duct bank or tray that is used for multiple circuits.

Number: Number of ground wires in the circuit. This value is for reference only and does
not affect analysis.

Size: Ground conductor size. This value is for reference only and does not affect analysis.

Material: Ground conductor material. This value is for reference only and does not affect
analysis.

Insulation: Type of insulation for the ground wire. Select <None> for bare conductor. This
value is for reference only and does not affect analysis.

NOTE: The size of ground wire may not have a direct influence on the effective zero
sequence resistance (R0) and reactance (X0). Refer to Kaufmann’s paper on grounding. For
steel conduits, ground currents flow through the conduit close to the outer surface because of
skin effect.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference DC Cables  366

Neutral Wire

All neutral wire fields are for reference only and do not affect analysis.

 Number: Number of neutral wires.

 Size: Size of neutral wire.

 Rating: Amp rating of the neutral conductor. Enter amp rating based on size.

 Material: Neutral material type (copper or aluminum).

 Insulated: Whether or not the neutral conductor is insulated.

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

DC Cables
DC Resistance Specification

Resistance specification

Rdc (One way length): The DC resistance of the cable, specified in Ohms per 1000 feet and
as the one way (i.e. not out and back) value.

Rating (A): Ampacity of the DC Cable.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Capacitor Data  367

Notes - Doubling of Cable Length

Since DC systems are not “balanced”, cable runs need to simulate the total out and back DC
resistance. Thus, internally, all DC line lengths are doubled to properly simulate the total
voltage drop correctly.

Capacitor Data

Capacitor Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the capacitor. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
capacitor name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to CAP-1, CAP-2,
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Capacitor Data  368

CAP-3... as you enter new capacitors on the one-line diagram, but you can change those
names if desired.

To Bus: The bus the capacitor connects to, which must already exist on the one-line. For
your reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Capacitor Specifications

Rated kV: Capacitor rated kV. This is used to determine the per-unit impedance of the
capacitor for a given base kV.

Rated Size: Capacitor MVAR or kVAR rating at the rated voltage. The unit is specified in
the combo box on the right.

Inrush: Specify the inrush current and duration for the capacitor. This is used in auto-
coordination.

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Current Limiting Reactor Data  369

Current Limiting Reactor Data

Current Limiting Reactor Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the C. L. Reactor. This ID name is sometimes referred to as

the C. L. Reactor name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to CLR-1,
CLR-2, CLR-3... as you enter new C. L. Reactors on the one-line diagram, but you can
change those names if desired.

From Bus: The bus which the C. L. Reactor connects “from”, which must already exist on
the one-line. You must be careful that the From Bus has the same base kV as the C. L.
Reactor’s To Bus. For your reference, the From Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus
name.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Current Limiting Reactor Data  370

To Bus: The bus which the C. L. Reactor connects “to”, which must already exist on the
one-line. You must be careful that the To Bus has the same base kV as the C. L. Reactor’s
From Bus. For your reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

C. L. Reactor Specifications

Ampacity: This field provides a list of industry standard reactor ampere ratings. But you
can also type in a rating which is not listed.

Impedance kVA: 3-phase reactor impedance kVA. This value is used to determine the
impedance and X/R ratio of the reactor. If this value is not known, you must enter the
positive and zero sequence impedance (X1 and X0) to compute the X/R ratio with the
Calculate button. The Impedance kVA is calculated with the following equation:

Impedance kVA3ph = 3(IL)2(Xohm)/1000

Material: Reactor material (copper, aluminum, or high-Q aluminum). This value is used to
determine the X/R ratio of the reactor.

X1: Positive sequence impedance. When filled in with the Calculate button, this field’s
value is based on the reactor impedance kVA.

X0: Zero sequence impedance. When filled in with the Calculate button, this field’s value
is considered the same as the positive sequence impedance X1. If you enter this value as
zero (0.0), the positive sequence impedance will be used.

X/R Ratio: The reactance to resistance ratio of the reactor. When filled in with the
Calculate button, this field’s value is based on the impedance kVA and the material type of
the reactor.

Calculate Button: Fills in computed values for the X1, X0, and X/R fields. You can
override these values by typing in different numbers.

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Current Transformer Data  371

Current Transformer Data

CT Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the current transformer. This ID name is sometimes referred
to as the CT name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to CT-1, CT-2,
CT-3... as you enter new current transformers on the one-line diagram, but you can change
those names if desired.

Conn Relay: The relay connected to the CT. The ID Name of the connected relay is
displayed here.
 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Current Transformer Data  372

Conn Bus: The bus connected to the CT. The ID Name of the connected bus is displayed
here.

Conn Item: The item connected to the CT. The ID Name of the connected item is displayed
here.

Specifications

CT Function: Number of CT ratios. You can select either “Single Ratio” or “Multi-Ratio”.
If you select Multi-Ratio, you will also need to enter the CT ratio that has been set.

Connected: The connection type. You can select either “Wye” or “Delta”.

CT Ratio: The ratio of rated primary to rated secondary amps of the current transformer.
Specify both ratings in the form: (primary amps) / (secondary amps).

Set CT Ratio: The ratio that has been set in the case of Multi-Ratio CT.

Multi-Ratio

No. of CTs: The number of current transformers in the group.

One-line Graphics: To select the way the CT symbol appears in the one-line diagram. The
available choices are as follows:

Positive Sequence Zero Sequence

Show Entire Line: If you check this box, the CT will appear connected to the relay with a line.
If it is unchecked, the entire line is not shown. “TO (Relay ID)” appears next to the CT symbol
as shown below.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Filter Data  373

Filter Data
A filter is a passive tuned circuit that presents a low impedance “sink” to currents at a given
frequency or frequencies. The button on equipment palette toolbar, inserts a filter in the
one-line diagram. The Application of harmonic filters can cause the creation of parallel
resonance below the filter tuning point (single tuned notch). Therefore, the filter must be
designed to minimize the impact of this resonant point.

Filter Data Dialog Box

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Filter Data  374

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the filter. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the filter
name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to FL-1, FL-2, FL-3... as you
enter new filters on the one-line diagram, but these names can be changed if desired.

To Bus: The bus which the filter connects to, must already exist on the one-line. For your
reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Specifications

Type: You can choose from four different types of filters by choosing one of the radio
buttons in the dialog box. When you choose the type of filter, EasyPower will gray out those
filter data fields which are inappropriate.

Filter Data:

Resistor: Resistance of resistor of the filter in ohms.

Inductor: Real and imaginary impedances (ohmic resistance and inductive reactance) at
system frequency in ohms.

Capacitor Bank (1 and 2): The reactive power of capacitors for the system frequency in
MVARs at the voltage level specified in kilovolts.

Harmonics

The database dialog boxes for motors, loads, motor control centers and panel schedules also
contain a tab labeled Harmonics. This is where it may be indicated whether or not this
equipment item is introducing harmonics into your power system.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Filter Data  375

Harmonics tab of Filter Data dialog box

Resistance Factor: EasyPower offers two methods for calculating RH:

1. Resistance varying with a power of the harmonic (R-EXP):

RH = RFund * H R-EXP

2. Resistance varying with a percent eddy current factor (%ECF):

RH = RFund * (1+ECF*H2)/(1+ECF)

EasyPower defaults all skin effect correction to R-EXP and a value of 0.5.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Filter Data  376

R-EXP %ECF

Transformer 0.5-1.0 1.0-3.0

Utility 0.0-0.8 -

Generator 0.3-0.6 -

Line/Cable 0.5 -

Reactor 0.5-1.0 0.8-3.0

Motor 0.2-0.4 -
Typical Resistance Correction Factors

Fundamental Amps: These are radio buttons. Equipment Rating will set Fundm Amps to
the equipment rating of the item described in the Specifications tab. User Specified will
activate the Fundm Amps field, allowing specification of a value. To use fundamental
current calculated by power flow, choose the Power Flow button in the Summation
Fundamental Voltage field of the Harmonics Options Control dialog box.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  377

Fused Switch Data

Fused Switch Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the fused switch. This ID name is sometimes referred to as
the fused switch name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to FS-1, FS-
2, FS-3... as you enter new fused switches on the one-line diagram. You can change the ID
Name as desired.

Open: Normal state of the fused switch. If “Open” is chosen, the one-line will show
“OPEN” next to the fused switch symbol.

Closed: If “Closed” is chosen, the one-line symbol will not show the “OPEN” tag.
 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  378

On Bus: The bus connected to the fuse switch, which must already exist on the one-line.

Base kV: The kV of the bus to which the fuse switch is connected. The options available in
the Specifications tab and Short Circuit tab depend upon the bus voltage. Either LV or HV
fused switches can be selected from this dialog box. Although the EasyPower Device
Library has HV and LV Fused Switches as separate devices, the same dialog box is used to
select both types.

Connection Type: Whether the fused switch is connected as a “Feeder”, (e.g., to a cable,
busway, transformer, etc.) or as a “Tie” (between two buses).

Lock Auto-Sizing: When checked, equipment will not allow auto sizing if selected.

Lock Auto-Coordination: When checked, equipment will not allow Auto Coordination if
selected.

Specifications

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of fused switch manufacturers available in the device
library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.

Type: Fused switch types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If
the desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Style: Fused switch styles available from the type chosen in the Type field above. If the
desired style is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Find Style button: Allows user to search the library for a fuse style.

One-line Graphics: To select the symbol that appears on the one-line diagram, you can
select either “Fused Switch”, “Fused Contactor” or “Fuse Only” for symbol.

Fused Switch: Default setting that will show a fused switch symbol on the one-line
diagram.

Fused Contactor: If “Contactor” is chosen, a fused contactor symbol will show on the one-
line diagram.

Fuse Only: Shows fuse only in the fuse symbol, i.e. without either contactor or switch.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  379

Plot Phase TCC: Check this box to plot the TCC for the Fused Switch. If the Plot Phase
TCC box is not checked, the TCC for the device will not be plotted.

Model: This field allows you to view available models of the Fuse style that you have
chosen and select a specific model.

Library kV: Choose the section of the library the fuse data is entered. In most cases the
selected Library kV will be approximately the base kV of the fuse. For LV fuses this field is
blank.

Size: This field allows you to view available sizes of the Fuse model that you have selected
and select a specific size.

One-line Data Text: To select text to appear on one-line diagram, you can select either
“Automatic (Based on ‘Size”)” or “User Specified Field”. For text to appear next to symbols
on the one-line diagram, choose Tools Options  Text Visibility and check box for
Fused Switch.

Automatic (Based on ‘Size”): When selected, fuse ‘Size’ will appear next to the fused switch
on the one-line diagram.

User Specified Field: When selected, adjacent field is activated and text information can be
entered.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  380

Short Circuit

Fused Switch Short Circuit Dialog Box

Ratings:

Fused Interrupting (kA): The interrupting rating of the fused switch.

Test X/R: Test X/R ratio of the circuit. ANSI Standard test ratios may be different for the
same fuse depending on the voltage level at which the fuse is applied.

Testing Standard: The Testing Standard comes directly from the device library and cannot
be changed.

Calculate Button: Fills in computed values for the Test X/R and Fused Interrupting fields,
based on the device library entry for Mfr, Type, Style, and the base kV. You can override
these values by typing in different numbers. This button also causes the appropriate Testing
Standard to be displayed for your information.

TCC Defaults: Data entered in this section is used to place tick marks representing short
circuit values on the TCC plot.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  381

TCC Clipping: You can clip the time current curve (TCC) for the breaker at the specified
current in kA for Momentary (1/2 cycle), 5-cycle or 30-cycle. Select <None> to avoid
clipping of TCC.

SC Tick Marks: Check the appropriate boxes to display the tick mark on the TCC plot.
You can display Momentary, Interrupting and 30 Cycle short circuit values. Enter the
corresponding short circuit values in kiloamps in their respective edit fields for phase short
circuit.

Phase SC Values: The values in kA, entered in these fields can be displayed for phase
currents on TCC plots.

Switch

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of switch manufacturers available in the device library.
If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the library.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  382

Type: Switch types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Style: Switch styles available from the type chosen in the Type field above. If the desired
style is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Cont. Current (A): Continuous current rating of the switch.

Momentary / C&L (kA): Momentary or Close and Latch rating of the switch.

Calculate Button: Fills in device ratings based on library entries for the specified switch

Stability

Enable: Enables stability data.

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of contactor manufacturers available in the device

library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  383

Type: Contactor types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: Lists available contactor models in the library.

Lib button: Populates contactor data from the library.

Mtr O/L (Motor Overload)

Fused Switch Mtr O/L Dialog Box

Plot Motor Overload Relay TCC: To plot the TCC of an attached motor overload relay
with the fused switch TCC, check this box. If you do not check this box, then no TCC will
be plotted for an attached motor overload relay.

Motor Overload Relay: To specify the motor overload relay associated with the breaker in
protecting the motor.

Mfr: Provides a list of motor overload relay manufacturers available in the device library. If
the desired manufacturer is not listed, you may add it to the library.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Fused Switch Data  384

Type: Provides a list of motor overload relay types available from the manufacturer chosen
above. A type would include a group of models or brands with similar functions. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Style: Provides a list of motor overload relay styles available from the type chosen above.
Styles are essentially models. If the desired style is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Motor Parameters: Determines the pickup level for the motor overload relay.

User Specified: The Motor Overload Relay is user specified only in this version.

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the relay being specified. This ID name is sometimes
referred to as the relay name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to R-1,
R-2, R-3... as you enter new relays on the one-line diagram. You can change the ID Name as
desired.

Full Load Amps (FLA): The full load amps specified for motor, or the relay rating.

Service Factor: Overload factor of the rated amps. This factor does not increase the rating
but simply increases the pickup level. You may enter any value between 1.0 and 1.25

Harmonics
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  385

Fused Switch Harmonics Dialog Box

EasyPower can monitor whether or not the IEEE 519 guideline for harmonics is met at the
point of common coupling.

Monitor IEEE 519 Point of Common Coupling: If the checkbox is checked, then the
Harmonics Report will report this guideline not being met.

KVA Demand: The kVA Demand.

PCC Isc/Load: The ratio of short circuit current to load current at the point of common
coupling.

DC Fused Switch

DC fused switch is modeled similar to AC fuses.

Generator Data

Generator Data Dialog Box

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  386

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the generator. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
generator name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to GEN-1, GEN-2,
GEN-3... as you enter new generators on the one-line diagram, but you can change those
names later if desired.

To Bus: The bus the generator connects to, which must already exist on the one-line. You
must be careful that the To Bus has approximately the same base kV as the generator. For
your reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Conn: This specifies the type of connection of the generator windings. This affects the
symbol of the generator in the on-line. The options are:

D: Delta connection. ………………

Y: Star connection. ………………

YG: Star connection with grounded neutral ……

For wye-grounded connections, you can attach CTs or relays to the ground as shown in the
figure below.

Generator Specifications

kV: Generator rated kV.

MVA: Generator nominal MVA. Generators may be represented as a group or individually.

Type: Generator type. This value is for reference only except for HG and SYN-SP types,
which have their momentary reactances determined by X’dv.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  387

 IND - Induction

 SYN-DP - Distributed pole synchronous

 SYN-SP - Salient pole without amortisseur winding

 SYN-SPA - Salient Pole with amortisseur winding

 SYN-COND - Condenser

 HG w/o A - Hydro generator without amortisseur winding (same as SP)

Power Factor: Generator operating power factor. This value is for reference only and does
not affect analysis.

Efficiency: Generator operating efficiency. This value is for reference only and does not
affect analysis.

RPM: Revolutions per minute of the machine. This value is for reference only and does not
affect analysis.

X/R: Generator reactance to resistance ratio, which is used to determine resistance values in
short circuit studies. Typical range is 30-150 for most generators greater than 10 MVA.

Calculate Button: Fills in a representative computed value for the X/R field, based on ANSI
C37.010. You can override this value by typing in a different number.

GSU Transformer: This field is available only when you configure your system to IEC
short circuit. If the generator has a unit substation, then the ID Name of the unit transformer
is specified in this field. This association is required in order to implement the impedance
correction on the generation station unit (GSU) or power station unit (PSU).
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  388

DC Generator Specifications

DC Generator Specifications tab

Rated kV: Name plate rated voltage in kV.

kW: Name plate (rated) power in kW.

RPM: Rated speed in revolutions per minute.

Efficiency: efficiency in per unit.

R (armature): internal resistance of dc generator in ohms.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  389

Power Flow

Power Flow tab of Generator Data dialog box

Model: Generator bus type used in modeling the power flow simulation. When you choose
a particular model, those fields which are not appropriate will be grayed out.

 PV - Constant power, constant voltage generator. This is also known as a regulated

generator. This model tries to hold a user-specified bus voltage within generator MVAR
limits.

 Swing - A swing bus holds the bus voltage and angle constant. To do this there cannot be
limits on the amount of MW or MVAR the swing machine can accept or provide. (See
“Swing Sources” on page 200.)

 PQG - Constant power, constant var generator. This is also known as an unregulated
generator. This model holds the MVAR generation within given voltage limits.

Ctl kV PU: Desired control voltage for a regulated generator (PV). The generator will try to
control the voltage at the controlled bus to a given value. If the generator bus is the swing
bus this voltage serves as the reference voltage. The voltage is entered in per-unit.

Ctl Angle: Controlled angle is used only when a generator is designated as a swing bus.
The value is entered in degrees.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  390

Ctrl Bus: For a PV generator (regulated), the bus that is to be controlled to the control
voltage. If this field is blank in the database, EasyPower will fill it in with the name of the
bus listed in the To Bus field. (Note that this does not take effect until you accept it by
choosing OK to close the database dialog box.) This field is ignored if the Model field is set
to “Swing”.

MW: Generator output MW. This may be actual operating or a rated value. This applies
only to a PV or PQG generator.

MVAR: Generator output MVAR. This is only used when the generator is a constant
power, constant var (PQG) machine or when a PV generator MVAR limit has been reached
and the machine automatically switches to PQG.

MVAR Limits: Minimum and maximum MVAR limits for regulated generators (PV). The
generator will switch to type PQG if these limits are violated. If there is only one swing
generator (Model = “Swing”) on a bus, it should not have any MVAR limits. If there are
more than one swing generators on a bus, at least one of them must be unlimited.

DC Generator Power Flow

DC Generator Power Flow tab

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  391

Model

DC Gens have three control modes:

1. Regulated

2. Un-Regulated

3. Constant Power

In Regulated mode, the voltage is controlled directly on the terminal of the generator. Thus, a
Regulated DC Generator has the ability to be the single source that will allow a system to
enter power flow and solve the system.

In Un-Regulated mode, the voltage is held constant internally as a Thevenin source. The
terminal of the generator will thus change with loading. An Un-Regulated DC Generator has
the ability to be the single source that will allow a system to enter power flow and solve the
system.

In Constant Power mode, the generator is modeled as a constant power generator, similar to a
PQ generator in the AC power flow. A Constant Power DC Generator DOES NOT have the
ability to be the single source that will allow a system to enter power flow and solve the
system. To enter power flow focus, at least one other source must be modeled that supplies
the system with stiff internal or external source.

Generator Impedance

Impedance tab of Generator Data Dialog Box

X”dv: Subtransient reactance in percent on generators MVA base. Most synchronous

generators have subtransient reactances in the 9-20% range17. The subtransient reactance is

17 Short Circuit Calculations, General Electric , GET 3550

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  392

used for ½ cycle, 5 cycle and 30 cycle short circuit calculations in accordance with ANSI
Standards.

X’dv: Transient reactance in percent on generators MVA base. This value typically ranges
from 15-30%. The transient reactance is not used in ANSI standard calculations except for
hydro and salient pole generators without amortisseur windings (Xpu = 0.75X’).

X0v: Zero sequence reactance in percent on generators MVA base. This value may range
from 3-15% for typical generators. Zero sequence values are used in all ground fault
calculations.

Xlr: Locked rotor impedance for induction machines. When actual data is not available, use
16.7%.

Ground R: Generator neutral ground resistance in ohms. This is the most common method
of grounding generator neutrals and is usually given in amperes. The impedance is found
from the following equation.

R = Vln / I

If the generator is grounded through a grounding transformer with a secondary resistance,

this resistance must be converted to the primary winding. If you know the Amp value for the
resistor, you can enter the amp value in the Amp Class field and use the <<Calculate button
to find the resistance.

Ground jX: Generator neutral ground reactance in ohms.

Amp Class: This is the current in amps through the ground impedance at the rated voltage.
You can enter data in this field directly in Amps or calculate it based on the voltage and
ground impedance R +jX using the Calculate>> button.

Generator TCC

You can plot short circuit decrement curves “with” and “without” excitation field forcing.

Plot Generator Decrement Curves

Without Field Forcing: Plots TCC for “without field forcing” option.

With Field Forcing: Plots TCC for “with field forcing” option. You can plot both with and
without field forcing options for comparison purpose.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  393

Maximum Plot Time: The amount of time in seconds that the generator can sustain
overcurrents without exceeding safe temperature limits.

TCC tab of Generator Data dialog

Synchronous
Xd: Synchronous reactance of the generator, percent.

T”d: Direct axis sub-transient short circuit time constant.

T’d: Direct axis transient short circuit time constant in seconds.

Ta: Armature time constant in seconds.

A typical generator datasheet will provide the Ta value. However, some manufacturers may
not provide Ta in the datasheet. The armature time constant is associated with the rate of
change of dc current in the stator when the generator is subjected to a 3-phase fault. Ta for
different types of generator is provided in the book “Power System Control and Stability”, by
Paul M. Anderson and A. A. Fouad, IEEE Press, 1994.

Ta = (Ld’ + Lq) / 2r
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  394

Where Ld’ is the d axis transient inductance and Lq is q axis inductance. A typical value of
Ta is 0.15 seconds for fault on the machine terminal.

Prabha Kundur’s book “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw-Hill, 1994, provides
the following equation for Ta:

Ta = (Ld” + Lq”) / 2/ Ra

Typical value for Ta lies between 0.03 and 0.35s.

Forcing Field: Forced excitation current at a given load expressed as per unit value of field
current at no load, Ifd0.

Thermal Damage Curve

This section allows you to plot “I^2t” thermal damage curve for the generator.

Plot Thermal Damage Curve: Check this box to allow plotting of the damage curve and to
enter data for this section.

I2t Value: This defines the (I^2)t line for the damage curve. I is in per-unit of generator rated
current and t is in seconds. If I2t Value is 20, then the extrapolated damage curve line would
intersect with the FLA of the generator at 20 seconds.

Plot From/To: The damage curve is drawn on the TCC plot within these values as the lower
and upper limits in seconds.

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  395

Stability 1

Generator Model:

Enable: Enables stability data entry for Generator Model

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of generator manufactures available in the device

library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.

Type: Generator types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: Lists available generator models in the library.

Lib button: Populates generator data from the library.

 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  396

Exciter Model:

Enable: Enables stability data entry for Exciter Model

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of exciter manufacturers available in the device

library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.

Type: Exciter types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: Lists available exciter models in the library.

Lib button: Populates exciter data from the library.

Governor Model:

Enable: Enables stability data entry for Governor Model

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of governor manufacturers available in the device

library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.

Type: Governor types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: Lists available governor models in the library.

Lib button: Populates governor data from the library.

For details on the parameters see Dynamic Stability Chapter19.

 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Generator Data  397

Stability 2

Stabilizer Model:

Enable: Enables stability data entry for Stabilizer Model.

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of stabilizer manufacturers available in the device

library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.

Type: Stabilizer types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: Lists available stabilizer models in the library.

Lib button: Populates stabilizer data from the library.

For details on the parameters see Dynamic Stability Chapter19.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference High Voltage Breaker Data  398

High Voltage Breaker Data

High Voltage Breaker Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the high voltage breaker. This ID name is sometimes referred
to as the high voltage breaker name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default
to BH-1, BH-2, BH-3... as you enter new high voltage breakers on the one-line diagram, but
you can change those names if desired.

Open/Closed: Normal state of the high voltage breaker. If “Open” is chosen, the one-line
will show “OPEN” next to the high voltage breaker symbol. If “Closed” is chosen, the one-
line symbol will not show the “OPEN” tag.

On Bus: The bus the high voltage breaker connects to, which must already exist on the one-
line. For your reference, the On Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Connection Type: Whether the high voltage breaker is connected as a “Feeder”, (e.g., to a
cable, busway, transformer, etc.) or as a “Tie” (between two buses).
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference High Voltage Breaker Data  399

High Voltage Breaker Specifications

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of high voltage breaker manufacturers available in the
device library. After you choose a manufacturer, the available styles are displayed in the
Style field. If the desired manufacturer is missing from the list, choose “Other”.

Type: High voltage breaker types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field
above.

Style: High voltage breaker styles which correspond to the yellow column on the device
library page for the manufacturer and type chosen.

Normally: Normal state of the high voltage breaker. If “Open” is chosen, the one-line will
show “OPEN” next to the high voltage breaker symbol. If “Closed” is chosen, the one-line
symbol will not show the “OPEN” tag.

Continuous Current: The continuous current of the high voltage breaker. This value is for
reference only and does not affect analysis.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference High Voltage Breaker Data  400

Short Circuit

Max kV: Maximum voltage for which the breaker is designed and the upper limit for
operation.

Rated kA @ Max kV: Rated interrupting kA of the breaker at the breaker’s maximum
voltage.

Interrupting (kA): Interrupting rating of the breaker.

Close & Latch (kA): Close & latch rating of the breaker.

K-factor: Ratio of rated maximum voltage to the lower limit of the range of operating
voltage in which the required symmetrical and asymmetrical interrupting capabilities vary in
inverse proportion to the operating voltage.

Cycles: Interrupting time of the breaker in cycles.

Testing Standard: The data in the library for the breaker is applicable for the specified test
standard. The following testing standards are defined:
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  401

 ANSI-TOTAL: The interrupting and momentary close & latch ratings are both in
asymmetrical kA (total rms kA). Circuit breaker prior to 1964 used this test standard.

 ANSI-SYM: The interrupting rating is in symmetrical kA whereas the momentary close

& latch rating is in asymmetrical kA (total rms kA).

 ANSI-Crest: The interrupting rating is in symmetrical kA whereas the momentary close

& latch rating is in peak kA.

 IEC: the circuit breaker ratings are as per IEC test standard.

Calculate Button: Fills in computed values for the Max kV, Rated kA @ Max kV, K-factor,
Cycles, Interrupting, and Close & Latch fields, based on the device library entry for Mfr,
Type, Style and the base kV. You can override these values by typing in different numbers.
This button also causes the appropriate Testing Standard to be displayed for your
information. (The Testing Standard comes directly from the device library and cannot be
changed.)

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Inverter Data
ID Name: Uniquely identifies the lumped load. This ID name is sometimes referred to as
the inverter name, and can be up to 16 characters long. The names default to INV-1, INV-2,
INV-3... as you enter new inverters on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names
if desired.

Input Bus: The DC bus the inverter connects to, which must already exist on the one-line.
For your reference, the Input Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Output Bus: The AC bus the inverter connects to, which must already exist on the one-line.
For your reference, the Output Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  402

Specifications

Inverter data dialog

kVA: Rated output kVA of the inverter.

X/R: X/R ratio of the inverter short circuit contribution as seen from the load side.

IGBT / Thyristor: Type of inverter. This affects power flow simulation methods. If IGBT,
there are three control modes possible. For Thyristor, the output real and reactive power
conditions are simulated using Kimbark’s equations.

Fault x FLA: Maximum fault current expected on the load side in multiples of the full load
amps (FLA) rating.

Fault Time: Duration the inverter can supply the fault current. The time can be specified in
cycles or seconds.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  403

Power Flow

Power Flow tab of Inverter dialog

Model: Describes the way the output of the inverter is controlled for IGBT type. The options
are:

 Stand Alone: The inverter will supply any amount of required load, just like an AC grid
Swing Bus. The specified voltage magnitude (Ctrl kV PU) and angle (Ctrl Angle) will
be maintained. Users should carefully check the capability (limits) of the inverter.

 Voltage Controlled: This model supplies the specified amount of kW to connected

system, keeping the voltage magnitude at specified value (Ctrl kV PU) on the load side
bus. There must be a Stand Alone system present when an inverter is operating in
Voltage Controlled mode. Specify the kVAR Min and kVAR Max limits for the inverter.

 Const PQ Output: This model supplies the specified amount of kW and kVAR to
connected system. There must be a Stand Alone system present when an inverter is
operating in Const PQ Output mode. Specify the kVAR Min and kVAR Max limits for
the inverter.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  404

Ctrl kV PU: The per unit magnitude of Inverter output voltage. This is maintained at the
specified value for a Stand Alone model, and is maintained at the specified value while
within var limits for a Voltage Controlled model.

Ctrl Angle: The angle in degrees of the controlled output voltage for Stand Alone model.

Eff: Efficiency of the inverter. This is the ratio between output and input power in percent.

kW: Specified controlled output active power in kW for Voltage Controlled and Const PQ
Output models.

kVAR: Specified controlled output reactive power in kVAR for Const PQ Output models.

kVAR Min: Minimum kVAR capability of the inverter in voltage controlled mode.

kVAR Max: Maximum kVAR capability of the inverter in voltage controlled mode.

Min Voltage Threshold: For an IGBT inverter only, if the DC voltage on the input to the
inverter drops below this value, then the inverter begins stepping its specified kW loading
down until the input voltage rises above Min Voltage Threshold.

Note that the power flow will not solve when loading on Photovoltaics causes them to
experience a severe terminal under-voltage. Therefore, this special control was added so that
Inverters fed by Photovoltaics reduce load when voltage drops below VMP so that
Photovoltaics are required to supply less power, thus helping the DC voltage on the
Photovoltaics increase into a range where a power flow solution can be reached..

Gamma Min: Minimum inverter margin angle in degrees for thyristor type inverter.

Gamma Max: Maximum inverter margin angle in degrees for thyristor type inverter.

Commutation Impedance: Commutation impedance used to calculate the power flow using
Kimbark’s equations with Thyristor type. The inverter must feed a dedicated transformer that
matches these same values one-for-one.

Z1: Commutation impedance in percent on kVA base specified below. This must correspond
to the downstream transformer.

X/R: X/R ratio of the commutation impedance. This must correspond to the downstream
transformer.

kVA: kVA rating base for Z1. This must correspond to the downstream transformer
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  405

Notes on Inverter Model

DC Rated kV

When simulating a DC system that connects to an AC system via an Inverter, then the proper
Rated DC voltage needs to be specified for the Inverter. The DC voltage is related to the AC
voltage under no load conditions as follows:
3× 2 ×VAC-LL
VDC = = 1.35 VAC-LL
π

This equation is for a 6-pulse rectifier and includes the ripple on the DC bus, and is typically
used on DC systems that do not include a large smoothing capacitor; systems such as HVDC
and simple large rectifiers. If you know that the DC bus includes a DC bus capacitor, and
that under loaded conditions ripple is minimal, you should use:

VDC = 2 VAC-LL

Mandatory Commutation Impedance

When an Inverter is specified as Thyristor, mandatory commutation impedance must be

specified on the Power Flow tab. This impedance is used to calculate terminal conditions on
the output of the Inverter according Kimbark’s Equations. In addition, we mandate a
transformer be placed downstream of the Inverter that has the exact same impedance
specification as the commutation impedance. This is the reason why the commutation
impedance specification in the Power Flow tab is specified just like a transformer; so that
there is a one-to-one correspondence. Kimbark’s equations have been written with a basis
from high voltage DC lines, which always incorporate and isolation and voltage
transformation transformer from the AC line voltage where the converter is specified, and the
converter itself. Thus, to use the equations, there must always be a converter-transformer
pair, or the equations are not correct for the model.

Power Flow Modeling

An Inverter source has three source control modes similar to the AC power flow source
control modes. The control modes are:

1. Stand Alone (i.e. SWING)

2. Voltage Controlling (i.e. PV)

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  406

3. Non-Voltage Controlling (i.e. PQG)

An Inverter also requires knowledge of rectifier behavior if a Thyristor type is specified;

which includes the need for more data. That data is commutating reactance and firing angle
min and max. Since Kimbark’s DC equations are written with Alpha for the rectifier and
Gamma for Inverter, we will follow this convention, and require Gamma Min and Gamma
Max limits be specified.

Now, if the user fails to enter a commutation impedance matching an external inverter
transformer, the DC bus voltage will not properly reflect the AC side bus voltage drop. This
will result in the DC Bus voltage being different than it actually would be if the commutation
impedance had been included properly.

From several analysis efforts, we have come to realize that Kimbark’s equations are not
perfect. Tests show they may not produce exactly the same kW on the AC side as seen on the
DC side; an obvious violation of conservation of energy. If the user notes that he/she has set
the efficiency of a Rectifier or Inverter to 100%, and notices that the kW values are slightly
different, it simply is an issue of Kimbark’s equations supplying a very close approximation
to the AC side power, versus an exact match for an ideal “lossless” converter.

Note also that Thyristor Inverters have their Type forced to be PQG, and that Q is not
specified since Kimbark’s equations determine it.

Stand Alone Control Mode

In the Stand Alone control mode, the output of the Inverter is basically a SWING source.
Thus, whatever DC source is on its input, needs to supply the load that the output of the
inverter is forced to serve. This means that we could have conditions where the system
doesn’t solve. Consider these conditions:

We have a Battery, DC Gen or DC Util operating as unregulated sources. If the voltage drop
on the input to the inverter is too severe, we could never reach a solution, as the Invert input
load is constant power.

A Photo-Voltaic is loaded incorrectly to cause its voltage to drop below VMP, thus creating a
condition where its power must be dropped to hold its terminal current at ISC.

Under such conditions, we need the inverter to reduce its loading on the DC system.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  407

Min Load Voltage Set Point

Due to the discussion in the previous section, it is clear (especially for Photovoltaics), that we
need a method to reduce the specified load of the Inverter if we are creating a voltage
collapse condition on the DC system. Thus, a feature was implemented that reduces the
specified load until the DC voltage rises above the Min Load Voltage Set Point.

This feature works for Voltage Controlling and Non-Voltage Controlling modes, but does not
function when in Stand Alone mode. In Stand Alone mode, we are required to satisfy the
load on the AC output (i.e. it is a SWING). In this mode of control, no change to the load can
be made, even if the DC input voltage is collapsing. And thus, we are led into the next
section.

Min Solution Voltage Set Point – For Photovoltaics Only

Since a legitimate voltage collapse can occur on the input to the Inverter, we must cover for it
and alert. We have thus implemented the Min Solution Voltage Set Point. However, this
really is only a condition that will occur with a Photo Voltaic that is being loaded to a point
where it drops voltage to maintain ISC on its output. And so, when the DC voltage on any
Photo-Voltaic drops below this value, the solution is terminated, and the user is informed that
a solution cannot be reached due to issues with the loading of Photovoltaics.

Voltage Controlling Mode

In voltage controlling mode, the Inverter source is basically a PV generator with a specified
real power output and control voltage set point. Var limits are active. If the input DC voltage
drops below the Min Load Voltage Set Point, the specified real power is reduced until that
set point is met. The source still controls voltage and includes var limits during this real
power control action.

Non-Voltage Controlling Mode

In non-voltage controlling mode, the Inverter source is basically a PQ generator with a

specified real and reactive power output. If the input DC voltage drops below the Min Load
Voltage Set Point, the specified real power is reduced until that set point is met.

Islanding of DC Input

Due to the need for inverters to detect having their inputs offline, we have added island
checking code that detects all islands. After every switching action, islands are detected and
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Inverter Data  408

tagged. If the input to the Inverter is in an island without a SWING, the output source of the
Inverter is taken out of service with an additional switching action and subsequent island
check. This then allows us to remove the DC input to the Inverter, and its output will zero
out.

Islanding of AC Output

Inverters also need to make sure that if the AC output is in an island with no SWING, that no
load is placed on the DC input. If an island condition is created on the output of the Inverter,
then the DC load draw on the input of the Inverter is zeroed out, and the DC system will not
be loaded by the Inverter.

Load Reduction Deadband

This setting is used to help the solution solve quicker when Inverters are reducing their load
to meet their Min Voltage kW Reduction Threshold (MVKWRT). In a condition where the
input DC voltage to an Inverter drops below MVKWRT, we need to reduce the scheduled
kW required on the DC side by the inverter. This is accomplished on each iteration using:

kWReduction =  MVKWRT-VTerm  kWScheduled 

if  kWReduction < InvLRDB 

{
kWReduction = InvLRDB
}

where InvLRDB is this registry variable.

Name: InvLoadReductionDeadband
Location: Options
Type: DWORD
Represents: Values in percent
Default: 5
Example: A value of 5 is 5% which is 0.05 pu in the engine.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Load Data  409

Load Data

Load Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the lumped load. This ID name is sometimes referred to as
the load name, and can be up to 16 characters long. The names default to L-1, L-2, L-3... as
you enter new loads on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names if desired.

To Bus: The bus the load connects to, which must already exist on the one-line. For your
reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Specifications

Load Class: To specify the class of in terms of importance. You can select “Essential” or
“Critical” or “Non-essential”. This field does not affect analysis. It can be used in database
query to distinguish a certain load class from others. Please see Advanced Query, page
Error! Bookmark not defined..
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Load Data  410

Load Model

Specified: Designates the Load Data field to a user-entered model. Any combination of
constant kVA, constant I, or constant Z load may be entered.

SCADA: Designates the Load Data field to an imported real-time SCADA model. Data can
also be user input in the SCADA fields just like Specified data.

Load Data

Any combination of constant kVA, constant current, or constant impedance loads may be
modeled. Different types of loads can also be mixed and matched to model a specific type of
equipment such as variable speed drives.

Load Unit: Specifies the units that will be used for load data. Use combo box to choose the
unit.

Constant kVA/MVA: Constant kVA load entered in MW and MVAR. Note that the term
“constant kVA” seems to be an industry standard even though MVA seems to be the more
common unit for large industrial uses.

Constant I: Constant current load given in MW and MVAR. These values should be
entered in 1.0 per-unit volts.

Constant Z: Constant impedance load given in MW and MVAR. These values should be
entered in 1.0 per-unit volts.

Scaling Factor: Each load can be varied by applying a different scaling factor. This lets
you model the actual panel or lumped load on a bus, then study different loading conditions.
This allows quick “what if” studies and prevents errors that occur from data entry.

Demand Factor: Demand factor for the load.

Code Factors: NEC code factor for the load.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Load Data  411

DC Load Specifications

DC Load Specifications

Load Class: To specify the class of in terms of importance. You can select “Essential” or
“Critical” or “Non-essential”. This field does not affect analysis. It can be used in database
query to distinguish a certain load class from others.

Load Value: Rated load in kW or Amps.

Scaling Factor: Ratio of actual load to rated load in percent. This is used in power flow
calculations.

Load Type: Choose one of the following types:

 Constant kW: the kW consumed remains constant even when terminal voltage changes.

 Constant I: Constant current is drawn by the load even when terminal voltage changes.

 Constant R: The resistance is constant, so the kW and current will vary based on the
terminal voltage.

Harmonics

The database dialog boxes for motors, loads, motor control centers and panel schedules also
contain a tab labeled Harmonics. This is where it may be indicated whether or not this
equipment item is introducing harmonics into your power system.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Load Data  412

Harmonic tab of Load Data Dialog Box

Load Type: The default is to linear, indicating the equipment does not produce harmonics.
Choosing harmonic makes the item a harmonic source and will activate the other fields under
this tab.

Fundamental Amps: These are radio buttons. Equipment Rating will set Fundm Amps to
the equipment rating of the item described in the Specifications tab. User Specified will
activate the Fundm Amps field, allowing specification of a value. To use fundamental
current calculated by power flow, choose the Power Flow button in the Summation
Fundamental Voltage field of the Harmonics Options Control dialog box.

Harmonic Spreadsheet: This spreadsheet allows you to enter the harmonic spectrum
produced by this item. You may enter up to 30 different harmonics in each equipment item.
In the spreadsheet, enter the Harmonic Number (i.e. 5 for the 5th harmonic), the Harmonic
Current in percent of the Fundamental Amps, and the Current Angle. By indicating the
current angle, you can simulate transformer phase shift effects on rectifiers so appropriate
canceling can take place. The harmonic may be integer or non-integer.

Library Load: Common harmonic spectra may be entered from the device library. For
instructions on how to enter your own spectra information, see Chapter 13. After choosing a
 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Load Data  413

particular device library spectrum from the Mfr and Type drop down lists, click on Import,
and that spectrum will be entered into the harmonic spreadsheet.

. Resistance Factor: EasyPower offers two methods for calculating RH:

Resistance varying with a power of the harmonic (R-EXP)

RH = RFund * H R-EXP

Resistance varying with a percent eddy current factor (%ECF)

RH = RFund * (1+ECF*H2)/(1+ECF)

EasyPower defaults all skin effect correction to R-EXP and a value of 0.5.

R-EXP %ECF

Transformer 0.5-1.0 1.0-3.0

Utility 0.0-0.8 -

Generator 0.3-0.6 -

Line/Cable 0.5 -

Reactor 0.5-1.0 0.8-3.0

Motor 0.2-0.4 -
Typical Resistance Correction Factors
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  414

Low Voltage Breaker Data

Low Voltage Breaker Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the low voltage breaker. This ID name is sometimes referred
to as the low voltage breaker name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default
to BL-1, BL-2, BL-3... as you enter new low voltage breakers on the one-line diagram, but
you can change those names if desired.

On Bus: The bus connected to the low voltage breaker, which must already exist on the one-
line. Next to the bus name, the Base kV of the bus is displayed.

Connection Type: If the low voltage breaker is connected to two buses, then the connection
type is “Bus Tie”. For all other connections, the Connection Type is “Feeder”.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  415

Open: Normal state of the low voltage breaker. If “Open” is chosen, the one-line will show
“OPEN” next to the low voltage breaker symbol.

Closed Normal state of the low voltage breaker. If “Closed” is chosen, the one-line symbol
will not show the “OPEN” tag.

Lock Auto-Sizing: When checked, equipment will not allow auto sizing if selected.

Lock Auto-Coordination: When checked, equipment will not allow Auto Coordination if
selected.

Low Voltage Breaker Specifications

Class: Low voltage breakers are separated into three categories: low voltage power circuit
breakers (LVPCB), insulated case circuit breakers (ICCB), and molded case circuit breakers
(MCCB). These classes of breakers are each listed separately in the equipment field of the
device library. Depending upon the class of breaker you select, the list of manufacturers for
the breaker class will be available in the Manufacturer (Mfr) combo box.

Breaker Mfr (Manufacturer): Provides a list of low voltage breaker manufacturers

available in the device library. After you choose a manufacturer, the available types are
displayed in the Type field. If the desired manufacturer is missing from the list, you may
enter the data in the EasyPower library. The list of manufacturers shown in the combo box
depends upon the Class of breaker. Select Class before selecting manufacturer.

Breaker Type: Provides a list of low voltage breaker types available from the manufacturer
chosen above. After you choose a type, the available styles are displayed in the Style field.
A type would include a group of models or brands with similar functions.

Breaker Style: Low voltage breaker styles available from the manufacturer for the type
chosen above. Styles are essentially models. Breaker frame size for selected style will appear
under breaker style field.

One-line Graphics: Choosing “Breaker Only”, “Fused Breaker” or “Breaker Contactor”

will change the symbol on the one-line:

Breaker Only: LV breaker

Fused Breaker: Fused LV breaker

Breaker Contactor: LV breaker with a contactor

 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  416

Trip: Type of trip device or mechanism. Selecting the type of trip device affects the
contents of the dialog box. For LVPCB class, you can select “Solid State Trip” or “Non-
Solid State Trip”. For ICCB and MCCB classes, you can select “Solid State Trip” or
“Thermal Magnetic”.

Solid State Trip

Description of the solid state trip unit of the low voltage breaker. This section is available for
selection only when “Solid State Trip” is selected in the Trip field.

Solid State Trip box

 Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of solid state trip unit manufacturers available in the
device library.

 Type: Provides a list of solid state trip unit types (or brands) available from the
manufacturer chosen above.

 Style: Solid state trip unit styles (or models) available from the manufacturer for the type
chosen above.

 Sensor: Sensor rating of the trip unit for the style chosen above. The sensor feeds the trip
unit with a current proportional to the current in circuit. Selected sensor value may be used
in calculation to plot TCC.

 Plug / Tap: The plug or tap values available for the sensor selected. Selected plug or tap
value may be used to determine trip pickup. Either Plug or Tap field will appear, depending
on the data entered in the library.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  417

Non-Solid State Trip

Description of the non-solid state trip unit of the low voltage breaker. This section is
available for selection only when “Non-Solid State Trip” is selected in the Trip field. This is
similar to the Solid State Trip section described above, except that sensor and plug/tap are
not applicable to the non-solid state trip. The manufacturer, type and style need to be
selected in this section.

Non-Solid State Trip box

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  418

Short Circuit

Short Circuit dialog box

Ratings Based On: In many cases the type of trip or the application of the breaker
determines the interrupting current of the breaker. Older (pre-1964) low voltage power
circuit breakers with instantaneous trips typically have higher interrupting ratings than the
same device without instantaneous trips. The LVPCB device library allows instantaneous
and non-instantaneous trip ratings. All ICCB and MCCB breakers are equipped with
instantaneous trips. The old cascade application for LVPCBs is not supported in this library.
However, you can determine this rating and enter the value directly into the Interrupting kA
field.

Recent standards allow ICCBs and MCCBs to be rated for series application. This provides
increased interrupting kA for some devices. The ICCB and MCCB device libraries allow
instantaneous and series rated trip ratings.

Interrupting (kA): Interrupting rating of the breaker

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  419

Calculate Button: Fills in computed value for the Interrupting kA field, based on the device
library entry for Mfr, Type, Style and the base kV. (The Interrupting kA value is based on
the breaker multi-pole rating at the 480 volt level.) You can override interrupting kA by
typing in different numbers. This button also causes the appropriate Testing Standard to be
displayed for your information. (The Testing Standard comes directly from the device
library and cannot be changed.)

Calculation of series ratings: When you calculate the Interrupting kA based on Series Rating,
you will first need to define the upstream breaker Mfr, Type and Style. If the library has the
series rating data, then the data will be imported from the library. If not, the fully rated Inst
trip value will be sued.

Testing Standard: The standard to which the device complies for testing procedure.

TCC Defaults: Data entered in this section is used to place tick marks representing short
circuit values on the TCC plot.

TCC Clipping: You can clip the time current curve (TCC) for the breaker at the specified
current in kA for Momentary (1/2 cycle), 5-cycle or 30-cycle. Select <None> to avoid
clipping of TCC.

SC Tick Marks: Check the appropriate boxes to display the tick mark on the TCC plot.
You can display Momentary, Interrupting and 30 Cycle short circuit values. Enter the
corresponding short circuit values in kiloamps in their respective edit fields for phase short
circuit and ground short circuit.

Phase SC Values: The values in kA, entered in these fields can be displayed for phase
currents on TCC plots.

Ground SC Values: The values in kA, entered in these fields can be displayed for ground
currents on TCC plots. Ground SC values section is applicable only for solid state trip units
with ground fault trip.

Phase Trip

The Phase Trip dialog box stores data which determine the TCC curves of the device for
phase currents. Pickup and delay settings for long time, thermal, short time, and
instantaneous trip of the device are selected here. The fields and contents that appear on the
dialog box depend upon the type of trip unit selected in Specification tab.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  420

Phase Trip for Thermal Magnetic

Plot Phase TCC: For thermal magnetic devices, this field cannot be checked or unchecked
in the Database Edit mode. However, you can check or uncheck it in Temporary Thermal
Magnetic Data dialog box in Coordination mode to avoid plotting the TCC.

Breaker: This message shows the Manufacturer (Mfr), Type and Style of low voltage
breaker that was selected.

View Notes…: Press View Notes… button to view notes recorded in library for device.
Information may include data sheets or manufactures information used the model device or
assumptions needed to model device.

Thermal Magnetic: The title of this section indicates the kind of trip unit selected.

 Frame: Frame description. This may be the frame size, the largest rating in the range of
similar models, or a range of sizes that have similar curves.

 Trip Setting: Nominal rated amps the device is rated to carry without tripping.

 Instantaneous: Nominal instantaneous trip amps, multiple, or pickup setting. When you
highlight or select a choice, the corresponding trip amps will appear in parenthesis.

Phase Trip dialog box for Thermal Magnetic

Phase Trip for Solid State Trip

Plot Phase TCC: For solid state trip devices, this field can be checked to plot TCC or
unchecked to avoid plotting the TCC of the phase trip characteristics. To obtain a TCC plot
of Ground Trip only this box is left unchecked.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  421

Solid State Trip: This message shows the kind of trip unit selected and other descriptions of
device selected in the Specifications tab such as the Manufacturer (Mfr), Type, Style, Sensor
rating, and Plug/Trip value of the trip unit.

View Notes…: Press View Notes… button to view notes recorded in library for device.
Information may include data sheets or manufactures information used the model device or
assumptions needed to model device.

Phase Trip dialog box for Solid State Trip

LT Pickup: The long time pickup and delay are selected in this section. The pickup
calculation depends on the device selected. It may include LTPU Mult, but it will include
Setting (C) and either Sensor or Plug/Tap. After the settings are selected, the actual pickup
in amperes appears in parentheses.

 Setting (C): The long time pickup current setting below which the device will not trip.
This is a fraction of the sensor or plug/tap amps. For some trip units LTPU multiple may
also be required to set the pickup current.

 LTPU Mult: Multiple of Setting (C), which can be adjusted to “fine-tune” the long time
pickup setting. Some trip units may not have this feature.

 Curve: Some solid state curves may have multiple LT delay curves to choose from. This
field allows you to choose the curve shape.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  422

LT Delay Curve

 LT Delay: Long time delay setting to select the delay band.

ST Pickup: Short time pickup and delay settings. This section is applicable to only devices
with short time trip. After the settings are selected, the actual pickup in amperes appears in
parentheses.

 Pickup: The short time pickup current setting below which the device will not trip for
short time trip. The short time pickup setting may be a multiple of long time pickup,
sensor rating, plug or tap value, or the current setting times the sensor or plug/tap.

 (I^x)t: To select shape and slope of delay short time band. When you select “In”, the
(I^x)t function is enabled. The delay band has a slope of minus “x”. When you select
“Out”, the (I^x)t function is disabled, and the short time delay is independent of the
current. For some new circuit breakers, the (I^x)t delay may be adjustable. In such case
they choices available will be the various possible delay settings.

 Delay: Short time delay setting to select the delay band.

Inst Pickup: Nominal instantaneous trip amps, multiple, or pickup setting. When you
highlight or select a choice, the corresponding trip amps will appear in parenthesis.

 Pickup: The instantaneous trip pickup setting.

 Enable Override: Selecting Enable Override disables tripping based on pickup setting.
The device trips at an override value that depends on the device style. This feature may
or may not be applicable to the device selected.

Maint-Inst: This is the additional instantaneous setting used during maintenance to lower the
arc flash hazard. The name of this section may be manufacturer specific such as ARMS,
Maint Mode, RELT, Quick-Trip, etc.

 On: Checked box indicates the maintenance switch is on. In analysis focus, you can
select the breakers and with a right mouse click you can toggle the maintenance mode
switch on or off.

 Pickup: Setting for maintenance mode trip.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  423

Phase Trip for Non-Solid State Trip

Phase Trip dialog box for Non-Solid State Trip

Plot Phase TCC: For thermal magnetic devices, this field cannot be checked or unchecked
in the Database Edit mode. However, you can check or uncheck it in Temporary Thermal
Magnetic Data dialog box in Coordination mode to avoid plotting the TCC.

Non-Solid State Trip: This message shows the kind of trip unit selected and other
descriptions of device selected in the Specifications tab such as the Manufacturer (Mfr), Type
and Style of low voltage circuit breaker.

View Notes…: Press View Notes… button to view notes recorded in library for device.
Information may include data sheets or manufactures information used the model device or
assumptions needed to model device.

Frame: Frame and Trip descriptions.

 Frame: This may be the frame size, the largest rating in the range of similar models, or a
range of sizes that have similar curves.

 Trip: Nominal rated amps the breaker is rated to carry without tripping.

LT Pickup: The long time pickup and delay are selected in this section. After the settings
are selected, the actual pickup in amperes appears in parentheses.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  424

 Setting: The long time pickup setting below which the device will not trip. This is a
multiple of the Trip amps or the trip unit rating.

 Band: Long time delay band to adjust the delay.

ST Pickup: Short time pickup and delay settings. This section is applicable to only devices
with short time trip. After the settings are selected, the actual pickup in amperes appears in
parentheses.

 Setting: The short time pickup setting below which the device will not trip for short time
delay. This is a multiple of the long time pickup.

 Band: Short time delay band to adjust the delay.

Instantaneous: The instantaneous pickup setting, which is a multiple of long time

pickup. When you highlight or select a choice, the corresponding trip amps will appear
in parenthesis.

Gnd Trip

Ground Trip dialog box for Solid State Trip

This tab section is applicable for solid state trip devices, but not for thermal magnetic and
non-solid state trip devices.

Plot Ground TCC: For solid state trip devices, this field can be checked to plot TCC or
unchecked to avoid plotting the TCC of the ground trip characteristics.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  425

Solid State Trip: This message shows the kind of trip unit selected and other descriptions of
device selected in the Specifications tab such as the Manufacturer (Mfr), Type, Style, Sensor
rating, and Plug/Trip value of trip unit.

GF Pickup: This section is for setting the ground fault pickup, the type of delay and the
delay time.

 Pickup: The ground fault pickup setting, which is either in amps or multiple of sensor,
plug, or setting C.

 (I^x)t: To select shape and slope of ground fault delay band. When you select “In”, the
(I^x)t function is enabled. The delay band has a slope of minus “x”. When you select
“Out”, the (I^x)t function is disabled and the delay is independent of the current.

 Delay: Ground fault delay setting to select the delay band.

Maint-Inst: This is the ground instantaneous setting used during maintenance to lower the
arc flash hazard. The name of this section may be manufacturer specific such as ARMS,
Maint Mode, RELT, Quick-Trip, etc. The On/Off for the maintenance mode is the checkbox
as the Phase Trip tab.

 Pickup: Setting for maintenance mode trip for ground fault.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  426

ZSI

ZSI tab of LV Breaker Data dialog

The ZSI tab specifies the zone selective information for LV breakers. This information is
used in Coordination, fault simulations and arc flash calculations. EasyPower automatically
determines the fault zone for each breaker and trips only the breakers in the fault zone. The
ZSI feature is available in some breakers only and is specified in the device library.

ST ZSI: Checkbox to indicate if the Short Time Trip ZSI is set “On”. In analysis focus
(Short Circuit, Coordination, etc.), ST ZSI can be turned “On” or “Off” temporarily using the
right mouse context menu.

Ground ZSI: Checkbox to indicate if the Ground Trip ZSI is set “On”. In analysis focus
(Short Circuit, Coordination, etc.), Ground ZSI can be turned “On” or “Off” temporarily
using the right mouse context menu.

Upstream Breaker ID: List of upstream breakers that receive restraining signal from this
breaker. Typically there will be one upstream breaker. All LV breakers immediately
upstream, downstream or adjacent, will be available in the combo box. Pick the appropriate
breaker. The ZSI status for the upstream breaker will be indicated in the column on the right
(Upstream ZSI).
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  427

Upstream ZSI: This column automatically indicates whether the ZSI is “On” in the breaker
selected in Upstream Breaker ID column.

Auto Select: Command button to automatically list all the immediately upstream,
downstream or adjacent breakers in the Upstream Breaker ID column. After choosing this
button, you can delete the undesired breakers from the spreadsheet.

Self Restrained: Self-restrained breakers have the ZSI “Out” terminals jumpered to the ZSI
“In” terminals so that the breaker always trips on restrained mode. Restrained mode is
typically a short time delay trip. If a breaker is self-restrained, then check this checkbox. If a
breaker is self restrained, it allows downstream breakers without ZSI to trip. At the same
time it would send restraining signal to an upstream breaker to allow the self restrained unit
to trip first (preventing the upstream breaker to trip on instantaneous). This provides selective
coordination.

NOTE: Since the ZSI information depends on other breakers, it would be best to fill in ZSI
information only after other data have been entered.

Fuse

This section is applicable for fused breakers only, and the fields in this dialog box are used to
select the fuse.

Fuse dialog box for fused breakers

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  428

Plot Fuse TCC for Fused Breakers: For fused breakers, this field can be checked to plot
TCC or unchecked to avoid plotting the TCC of the fuse trip characteristics.

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of low voltage fuse manufacturers available in the
device library. After you choose a manufacturer, the available types are displayed in the
Type field.

Type: Provides a list of low voltage fuse types available from the manufacturer chosen
above. After you choose a type, the available styles are displayed in the Style field. A style
may be a brand name or the name of the group of fuses with similar functions.

Style: Low voltage fuse styles available from the manufacturer for the type chosen above.

Size: The ampere rating of the fuse.

View Notes…: Press View Notes… button to view notes recorded in library for device.
Information may include data sheets or manufactures information used the model device or
assumptions needed to model device.

Motor Overload (Mtr O/L)

Motor Overload Relay dialog box

Plot Motor Overload Relay TCC: This field can be checked to plot TCC or unchecked to
avoid plotting the TCC of the motor overload relay which trips the LV breaker.

Motor Overload Relay: To specify the motor overload relay associated with the breaker in
protecting the motor.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  429

 Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of motor overload relay manufacturers available in

the device library. After you choose a manufacturer, the available types are displayed in
the Type field.

 Type: Provides a list of motor overload relay types available from the manufacturer
chosen above. After you choose a type, the available styles are displayed in the Style
field.

 Style: Motor overload relay styles available from the manufacturer for the type chosen
above.

Motor Parameters: Determines the pickup level for the motor overload relay. The values
are user specified.

 Full Load Amps (FLA): The full load amps specified for motor, or the relay rating.

 Service Factor: Overload factor of the rated amps. This factor does not increase the
rating but simply increases the pickup level. You may enter any value between 1.0 and
1.25.

Harmonics

Harmonics dialog box for LV Breaker

Monitor IEEE 519 Point of Common Coupling: EasyPower can monitor whether or not
the IEEE 519 guideline for harmonics is met or not at the point of common coupling. If the
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Low Voltage Breaker Data  430

checkbox is checked, then the Harmonics Report will report about the guideline not being
met.

kVA Demand: The kVA Demand .

PCC Isc/ILoad: The ratio of short circuit current to load current at the point of common
coupling .

Stability

Enable: Enables stability data fields for Contactor model.

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of Contactor manufacturers available in the device

library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.

Type: Contactor types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: Lists available Contactor models in the library.

Lib button: Populates contactor data from the library.

DC LV Breaker

DC LV breakers are modeled similar to AC breakers. Only molded case thermal magnetic
circuit breakers are currently supported for DC. Enter data in the Specifications tab and
Phase Trip tab.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Meter Data  431

For fused breaker, you can enter additional fuse data in the Fuse tab.

Meter Data
The meter allows EasyPower to connect to on-line metering systems. Historical data stored
in a database can be displayed directly on the EasyPower one-line and stored in SCADA
fields for analysis purposes.

Meter Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the meter. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
meter name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to MET-1, MET-2,
MET-3... as you enter new meters on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names
later if desired.

Status: When the meter is “On” or active, it is processed as part of the system. When “Off”
or inactive, it is ignored during analysis. Choosing “On” or “Off” here has the same effect as
choosing Activate or Deactivate. See page Error! Bookmark not defined..
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Meter Data  432

Bus Conn: The meter is connected to one end of an equipment item. This states the bus to
which that equipment item is in turn connected.

Equip Conn: This states the bus to which that equipment item is connected. Unlike most
equipment, the connectivity of meters cannot be changed from the Meter Data Dialog Box.

Load Equipment

The meter can be assigned to a particular Motor, Load, MCC, or Panel. Choosing Motor will
place all available motors in the drop down menu in the ID Name field. Multiple meters can
be assigned to one meter, but only data from the last one assigned will be saved to that
equipment item’s SCADA fields.

Association

When EasyPower is connected to a SCADA database and the SCADA focus is entered, the
data for the associated meter will be displayed on the one-line. Once a meter is associated, it
will no longer be available from the drop down lists in Site and Meter.

When meter information is available, choosing Save or Store Scenario will store the
information into the SCADA fields of the equipment item assigned in the Load Equipment
ID Name field above.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  433

Motor Data

Motor Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the motor. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
motor name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to M-1, M-2, M-3... as
you enter new motors on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names later if
desired.

To Bus: The bus the motor connects to, which must already exist on the one-line. You must
be careful that the To Bus has approximately the same base kV as the motor. For your
reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Model

Individual: Labels motor as an individual motor.

Group: Labels motor as a group of motors.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  434

Motor Specifications

Unit: Choose either US or Metric.

kV: Motor rated kV. This is normally 460 volts on a 480 volt base, or 2300 volts on a 2400
volt base.

Hp: Motor horsepower. Motors may be represented individually or as a lumped group. For
grouped motor, enter the total horsepower for the group.

RPM: Revolutions per minute. Used in output reports and defining equipment for ANSI
standard short circuit calculation multipliers.

Load Class: To specify the class in terms of importance. You can select “Essential” or
“Critical” or “Non-essential”. This field does not affect analysis. It can be used in database
query to distinguish a certain load class from others. Please see Advanced Query, page
Error! Bookmark not defined..

FLA: Calculate button will look up FLA from NEC tables if the motor HP is listed in
NEC table. The Full Load Amps field is not required to be filled in, but a value greater than
0 will affect how kVA is calculated. See Motor kVA Calculations below.

PF: Motor operating power factor. This is used with the Efficiency field to determine kVA.
Motor groups should use an average value of power factor.

Eff: Motor operating efficiency. This is used with the Power Factor field to determine
kVA. Motor groups should use an average value of efficiency.

Service Factor: The factor by which the motor can be safely overloaded. You may select
any value between 1.0 and 1.25.

Demand Factor: This factor is used to calculate the Demand kVA or Amps for the motor.
The demand factor for a motor would be the ratio of maximum motor load to total rating of
the motor.

One-line Graphics

Type: Motor type (induction, synchronous, synchronous condenser, or DC). This choice
affects the motor impedances for short circuit calculations. The one-line symbol for the
motor will follow the selection.

With Adjustable Frequency Drive: Enabling this check box changes the motor symbol in
the one-line as shown below.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  435

Motor symbol with adjustable frequency drive

Motor kVA Calculations

There are two ways to calculate motor kVA in the Motor Specifications section of the motor
dialog box. The one EasyPower uses depends on which fields you decide to enter. Below
the kVA calculation methods are shown in priority order:

If the FLA is greater than 0, the motor kVA will be determined by the following equation.

KVA = (1.73)(FLA)(kVmtr)

If the FLA is left blank or 0, the motor kVA will be determined from the following equation.

KVA = (HP)(0.746)/(EFF)(PF)

Keep in mind that the above applies to the Motor Specifications kVA. The Short Circuit
focus always uses the Motor Specifications kVA for a base value when calculating a motor’s
short circuit current. However, the Power Flow focus, which uses the Motor Specifications
kVA by default, has the option of using the real-time SCADA kW and kVAR values to
calculate kVA. This option is in the motor Power Flow tab of the Motor Data dialog box.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  436

DC Motor Specifications

DC Motor Specifications

Unit: Choose either US or Metric.

Rated kV: Motor rated kV.

Hp: Motor rated horsepower.

RPM: Revolutions per minute.

Ia (Armature): Rated armature current in Amps.

Efficiency: Ratio of output mechanical power to input power.

R (Ohms): Armature resistance in Ohms. This affects the short circuit contribution.

Connected (%): Scales the short circuit contribution from the motor.

Load Class: To specify the class in terms of importance. You can select “Essential” or
“Critical” or “Non-essential”. This field does not affect analysis. It can be used in database
query to distinguish a certain load class from others.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  437

Short Circuit

Short Circuit tab of Motor Data dialog box

ANSI Code: Provides an easy way to enter ANSI Standard impedances and interrupting
duty multipliers. Code numbers are chosen according to the motor types, sizes and modeling
method. Regardless of the code chosen, ANSI Standard interrupting value multipliers are
used.

The codes available in this drop down list will change depending on what you have chosen in
the Type field of the Specifications tab. Using the ANSI Code field is the recommended
method to enter motor impedances to assure that the proper interrupting duty impedance
multiplier is used for ANSI Standard calculations18,19,20,21

18 AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.010-1979

19 Calculation of Fault Current for Application of AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Total Current Basis,
ANSI/IEEE St. C37.5-1979

20 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures, ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.13-1981

21 Calculation of Short Circuit Currents with Contributions From Induction Motors, Walter C. Huening Jr.,
IEEE/IAS Mar/Apr 1982
 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  438

Momentary Duty Interrupting Duty

Code Motor First Cycle 1.5 - 4 Cycles

Synch Synchronous 1.0 X"dv 1.5 X"dv

Ind>1000 Induction Motor > 1000 Hp 1.0 X"dv 1.5 X"dv

> 250 @ Induction Motor > 250 Hp at 3600 RPM 1.0 X"dv 1.5 X"dv
3600

>50 Induction Motor or Motor Group > 50 Hp 1.2 X"dv 3.0 X"dv

<50 Induction Motor Group < 50 Hp 1.67 X"dv Infinite X"dv

Lumped Lumped Induction Motor Group 1.0 X"dv (X=25%) 3.0 X"dv
Impedance Multipliers for ANSI Std. Short Circuit Calculations

Note: X" for induction motor groups >50 HP and <50 HP are typically assumed equal to
16.7%. Using the impedance multipliers, this corresponds to an equivalent motor
contribution of 3.6 to 4.8 times the full load current.

If the Adjustable Frequency Drive field is checked in the Specifications tab, the following
choices are available for the ANSI Code field:

 Non-Regenerative: Motor does not contribute short circuit currents to upstream faults.

 Regenerative: Motor contributes to upstream faults. The impedance multipliers are used
as per Conrad St. Pierre’s A Practical Guide to Short –Circuit Calculations.

X/R: You can either type in the reactance to resistance ratio, or choose Calculate to have
EasyPower fill in this field.

X" or Xlr: Subtransient reactance in percent on the motor Hp base. Normally this is 16.7%
for induction motors.

Calculate: Click this button to have EasyPower fill the X/R and X" or Xlr fields. Choose
Tools Options from the Menu bar, and pick the Equipment tab to specify the average Hp
for grouped motors.

Connected: Provides an easy way to adjust the total motor horsepower used in determining
short circuit currents. By changing the percent connected, the actual Hp (total connected
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  439

value) entered in the Hp field can remain static. This reduces modeling errors and eliminates
multiple databases for different contingencies.

For example, an MCC has a group of induction motors (all over 50 HP) that add up to a total
load of 600 HP. However, 300 HP is considered backup and is not on-line. In order to keep
proper records of the MCC HP, 600 would be entered in the HP field. Since only 300 HP is
spinning at any one time and can contribute short circuit current, the connected field is set to
50%.

TCC

TCC tab of Motor Data dialog box

Motor Starter Type: Provides a list of motor starters. Select the appropriate starter from
the following:
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  440

 Full Voltage: The motor starts at the rated voltage, without any starting device connected
to it.

 Auto-transformer: An auto-transformer is used as a starting device to reduce the starting

current. The tap value of the auto-transformer, as a percentage of the rated motor
voltage, is entered in the edit field Auto-Xfrmr Tap at the bottom of the dialog box.

 Part-Winding: Part-winding start motors, in which only a part of the winding is used for
starting. The entire winding is energized after start up. The Winding Tap must be
specified at the bottom of the dialog box.

 Wye-Delta: The starter keeps the motor windings in wye-connection while starting to
reduce the starting current. After start up the starter connects the windings in delta
configuration.

 Reduced Voltage: The starting voltage during starting is less than the rated voltage. The
inrush current for reduced voltage starting, as a multiple of full load amps, must be
specified at the bottom of the dialog box.

Largest Motor: In grouped motorn data, you can specify the size of the largest motor. This
field is grayed out when your select the motor as individual motor. When you plot the motor
starting curve on a time-current curve (TCC), the program plots the curve such that the
largest motor is being started and the rest of the motors in the group are running at full load.

Full Voltage Starting Parameters

This section specifies the motor current characteristics during starting at the rated motor
voltage.

Locked Rotor Multiple: Locked rotor current as multiples of full load amps.

Asymmetrical (Asym) Offset: Factor by which the inrush current is higher due to the
asymmetry current.

Plot Thermal Limit Curve: Check box to plot thermal limit time-current curve of the
motor. The curve is shown within the limits of the Stall Time described below. The curve is
an I2t curve passing through the Stall Time and the locked rotor amps.

Stall Time: The maximum time in seconds that the motor can safely withstand stalling.

To: The maximum time in seconds of the thermal limit curve of motor we wish to plot.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  441

Reduced Voltage Starting Parameters

Specifies the starting time and the current or voltage ratio under reduced voltage. Depending
upon the motor starter type selected enter one of the following. The starting current will be
calculated from this.

 Auto-Xfrmr Tap: The auto-transformer tap ratio as a percentage of rated voltage.

 Winding Tap: Starter winding ratio as a percentage of full motor winding.

 Reduced Inrush Mult: The inrush current at reduced voltage, as a multiple of full load
amps.

Acceleration Time: The starting time in seconds.

Power Flow

Power Flow tab of Motor Data Dialog Box

Load Model: Allows the user to select the motor kVA from the Specified data or from
SCADA (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) data. SCADA data can be read in by
choosing File Import from the Menu bar.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  442

Motor Specifications

Motor kVA: Calculated from motor specifications. This is for user reference only and
cannot be changed except by new specifications.

Load Type: Motors can be modeled for the power flow solution in several different ways.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.

 Constant kW + j Current - This model is a combination of the above models and more
closely matches actual motor characteristics within normal operating voltages.

Scaling Factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total motor load used in determining
power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual Hp (total connected value) entered in
the Hp field can remain static. This reduces modeling errors and eliminates multiple
databases for different contingencies.

SCADA Model

SCADA data is derived from real time, or metered data, and converted to an ASCII format
which can be read into EasyPower. SCADA data is read in as a 100% scaling factor load.
When saving data, the load value is multiplied by the user defined scaling factor. This
provides a way to adjust SCADA loads to form new cases. The SCADA load fields can be
changed by the user, or entered as a new value and saved using the File Save Load command
from the main menu.

kW: The kW value as read in from the SCADA ASCII file.

kVAR: The kVAR value as read in from the SCADA ASCII file.

Load Type: SCADA data can be modeled in the power flow solution in several different
ways. SCADA load type is set in the ASCII file, and can be changed by the user.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  443

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.

 Constant kW + j Current - This model is a combination of the above models and more
closely matches actual motor characteristics within normal operating voltages.

Scaling Factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total SCADA load used in
determining power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual kW +j kVAR read in
from the ASCII file remains static, however the load used in the power flow is adjusted by
this factor. If the SCADA data is saved using the File Save Load command, the values will
be adjusted by the scaling factor.
Load Speed Exponent: When you run power flow calculations, the motor load is scaled
based on the frequency of the AFD. Speed is proportional to frequency. The simplified load
model used is:

Output Power = (Rated Power) * (AFD frequency / System Frequency) ^ x.

Where, x is the Load Speed Exponent.

If you have a machine in which the load (power) is independent of the speed, then set
exponent to 0. If machine load (power) is proportional to speed, then set exponent to 1. Pump
loads are closer to speed squared model. So set exponent to 2. This is the default.

Example:
A 100HP motor rated at 60Hz is fed by AFD at 30Hz. If the Load Speed Exponent is 2, the
power output at 30Hz would be:
100 * ( 30 / 60 ) ^ 2 = 25HP.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  444

Load Speed Exponent Data in Power Flow tab of Motor Data dialog box
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  445

DC Motor Power Flow

DC Motor Data - Power Flow

Scaling Factor: ratio of actual load to connected (rated) load in percent. This is used in
power flow calculations.

Load Type: Choose one of the following models:

 kW: The kW consumed remains constant even when terminal voltage changes.

 Current: Constant current is drawn by the motor even when terminal voltage changes.

 Impedance: The equivalent resistance for steady state is constant, so the kW and current
will vary based on the terminal voltage.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  446

Harmonics

Please see Harmonics of Load Data, Page 411.

Stability

Stability tab of Motor Data dialog

Enable Motor Model: Enables the dynamic stability model for the motor. Without this, you
cannot run a dynamic simulation for the motor.

Motors

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of motor manufacturers available in the device library.
If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the library.

Type: Motor types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  447

Model: Lists available motor models in the library.

Lib button: Populates motor models from the library.

Define parameters button: Allows user to obtain an estimate of the motor circuit
parameters from the torque vs. speed characteristics.

Starting: This setting selects the method by which the motor will be initialized. The two
options for this setting are:
 Init Using Rated Power
 Init Using Rated Slip

When initialized using rated power (default), the motor determines the slip necessary to
maintain the terminal power conditions (kW) from the power flow case. Motor kVar is
determined completely by the induction motor machine equations.

When initialized using rated slip, the motor forces terminal real power conditions (kW) to
correspond to the specified rated slip of the motor. Thus, power conditions defined in the
power flow case are abandoned to match slip. Motor kVar is determined completely by the
induction motor machine equations.

Explanation: There are conditions where a motor parameter derivation has significant errors
in rated conditions (i.e. upwards to 10%) when attempting to match a manufacturer's torque
vs. speed curve. This is most likely created by inconsistencies in the supplied data for various
reasons. For such conditions, initializing to rated power defined by the power flow will cause
a new slip to manifest via initialization, which is not equal to the specified rated slip. This
then creates a condition where the torque produced by the motor during starting can be
significantly greater than the torque vs. speed curve generated in the parameter derivation.
For a motor in a borderline start condition (near stalling), the results may show an incorrect
successful start (we have seen up to 12% greater torque over the motor's speed range). To
correct for this, select "Init Using Rated Slip". This will force the motor to re-create the exact
torque vs. speed curve generated in the parameter derivation. Note however that the rated
conditions reached after starting will have the error accepted in the parameter derivation.

Motor Starting Load

This section defines the model for load characteristics while the motor is starting.

Manufacturer (Mfr) & Type: Provides a list of starting load characteristics available in the
device library.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  448

Model: Lists available models for starting load in the library. The choices are:

 Speed Squared: The torque is proportional to the square of the speed.

 Speed Cubed: The torque is proportional to the cube of the speed.

 Torque vs. Speed: User defined spreadsheet.

Lib button: Populates data from the library.

Motor Running Load

This section defines the model for load characteristics while the motor is running.

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of manufacturers available in the device library for
load running characteristics. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library,
you may add it to the library.

Type: Contactor types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may add it to the library.

Model: Lists available Contactor models in the library.

Lib button: Populates Contactor data from the library.

Define Motor Paramaters :

This feature is used to obtain an estimate of the motor circuit parameters from the name-plate
values and the speed-torque curve of the motor. Notes provided in the upper left corner are
instructions on how to use this tool to derive the motor parameters.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  449

Define Induction Motor Parameters-Step 1

Load image : Allows user to load image of motor curve to be digitized.

Set max torque : Enter motor maximum torque in %.

Flip speed axis : Curve axis can be flipped to match manufacturer.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Data  450

Define Induction Motor Parameters (Step 2)

Define Induction Motor Parameters-Step 2

Gravity Points : The Gravity Points are movable points used to optimize the
derived torque speed curve to the actual torque speed curve.

Flip speed axis : Curve axis can be flipped to match manufacturer.

Minimize : The Minimize button attempts to reduce the error.(TBD-to be discussed)

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  451

Motor Control Center Data

MCC Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the MCC. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the MCC
name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to MCC-1, MCC-2, MCC-3...
as you enter new MCCs on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names later if
desired.

Base kV: The base kV of the MCC. MCC’s are modeled like a bus in many ways. You can
connect cables, busways or transformers to it, and perform fault calculations.

Lock Auto-Sizing: When checked, equipment will not allow auto sizing if selected.

Specifications

These are the specifications for the MCC including the bus.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  452

Service: The drop down menu allows you to choose 3Phase-3Wire or 3Phase-4Wire.

Unit: Choose either U.S. or Metric.

Description: Use this text field to describe the particular MCC.

Location: Use this text field to indicate where the MCC is located in the power system you
are modeling.

Fed By: Use this field to indicate the transformer or the power supply source feeding the
Panel Schedule.

Comment: Use this field for any comment on the MCC.

Last Updated: The date and time the MCC data was last updated is displayed here.

Bus Rating

These are all user defined fields.

Mfr: Use this text field to describe the MCC manufacturer.

Type: Use this text field to further describe the MCC manufacturer model.

Bus SC Rating (kA): The rating of the bus used in calculating the Short Circuit duties for
SmartDuty™.

Horz Bus Rating (A): The current rating of the horizontal bus.

Vert Bus Rating (A): The current rating of the vertical bus.

Bus Data

Area: Area numbers are used to uniquely define different areas of the electrical system.
These areas can then be used for creating specific text reports from analysis operations that
represent subsets of the system. For example, typical paper plant areas may be the power
house (Area 1), caustic plant (Area 2), pulp mill (Area 3), and paper machine (Area 4). Area
numbers are positive integers between 1 and 999.

Zone: A zone number is simply a sub-area. This allows even more specific reporting. You
may wish to define the pulp mill as Area 3 and the digester electrical equipment as Zone 2.
Specific reports can then be generated for this combination without including the entire pulp
mill or the other digesters.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  453

Incoming

Incoming tab in MCC Data

Incoming Device Type: You can select the type of incoming protective device type for the
MCC. The choices available are:

 Main Lug Only: No protective device is present.

 Main Breaker: LV breaker protects the MCC bus. You can select the breaker using the
button “Incoming Device Settings…”.

 Main Fuse: Fuse protects the MCC bus. You can select the fuse using the button
“Incoming Device Settings…”.

Incoming Branch: You can select the incoming branch equipment such as cables,
transformers or busways. All the branches connected to the MCC in the one-line will be
displayed in the combo box.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  454

Incoming Device Settings…: Pressing this button will open the data dialog for the main fuse
or main breaker, whatever has been specified as the incoming device type. Refer to LV
Breaker Data or Fuse Data section in this chapter for details.

Description

This is a spreadsheet listing similar to the Device Library. When you place a new MCC on
the one-line, the first time you open its database dialog and click on the Description tab,
EasyPower will bring up the MCC/Panel Schedule Spreadsheet Creation Wizard which
allows you to select the number of rows you want. Uncheck the box at the bottom of the
Wizard dialog if you don't want it to appear with each new MCC/Panel Schedule. You can
insert or append new rows in the spreadsheet should you need them later.

Description tab of MCC Data dialog box

MCC Spreadsheet Creation Wizard dialog

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  455

You will notice that whenever you click on the Description tab, additional buttons are placed
on the MCC dialog box Toolbar. Some of these buttons are the same as those in the Device
Library (see chapter 7 pages 3 through 5) and are the way to add rows if the Wizard is not
used.

MCC Library: The drop down list contains all of the same Schedules as the Device
Library. To enter a listing other than those contained in the drop down list, create a New
Page in the MCC section of the Device Library.

Schedule: This drop down list allows you to specify which Device Library Schedule your
chosen Library Load spreadsheet is located in. To enter a listing other than those contained
in the drop down list, create a New Page in the MCC section of the Device Library.

Export: The spreadsheets can be exported to metafiles and delimited files. The Export
button is beside the Print button on the MCC/Panel dialog box toolbar when the viewing
the Description tab.

Spreadsheet

The Section Space and Equipment Name are not necessary for calculation purposes but are
used to match the way they are organized in the MCC.

Section Space: Enter the location of the individual bucket in the MCC. Typical entries
would be 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 2C, ...etc.

Equipment Name: Allows you to identify each piece of equipment.

Library Load: This is a drop down list and corresponds directly to the Library Load column
in the Device Library. After you have made selections in the MCC Library, Schedule and
Library Load fields, all of the following data cells will be automatically filled in as soon as
you click on another cell. You may also double-click on the cell to enter something different
than what is listed.

Status: The third column is a toggle "On/Off" to indicate if this particular item is currently
connected to the MCC Schedule. This affects the power flow and short circuit current
contribution.

Load Type: You can select different kinds of loads such as motors, loads, or sub-
MCC/panel. Based on the load type selected, various analyses are possible. When this
selection is made, the inappropriate cells in that row will be grayed out. Some buttons with
the label “Data…”may appear indicating you need to click the button to enter data specific to
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  456

the load type. The following load types are available. Cells highlighted in red require data in
order to perform any analysis.

Motor: The motor data required for analysis are usually Motor HP, Motor X/R, and the
X/R Ratio in the short circuit tab. The required data fields are highlighted in red. If you do
not know the motor X/R ratio, you can calculate typical X/R ratio for the motor based on size
by selecting the cell for Motor X/R and pressing the Calculate button on the toolbar or by
pressing [F9] on the keyboard. A motor contributes to the short circuit current. You can enter
other data in the row, such as, cable description, protective device and starter description and
capacitor data. When “Motor” is selected as load type, you can plot its curves on the TCC
plot.

Load: The load data is entered in the columns Static kW and Static kVAR. Other data are
optional. You cannot plot curves for devices in the TCC plot.

Sub-MCC: This means the current MCC is feeding another MCC. You need to specify the
sub-MCC ID Name and the cable connecting the two MCC’s. You also need to enter the
protective device data for the sub-MCC. You can plot the protective device curve on a TCC.

Sub-Panel: This is similar to a sub-MCC type, except, it is used when connecting the MCC to
a sub-panel.

Motor w/ TCC: The load type is motor. However, you can plot the cable damage curve,
protective device trip curve and the motor starting curve on a TCC plot. You need to specify
the motor data, protective device data and the cable data.

 Load w/ TCC: You can plot the curves for cable and protective device on a TCC plot. The
load is specified in kW and kVARs.

 <50 HP Lump: This is to model a group of motors all of which are under 50 HP rating.
No TCC plot is obtained for this type of load.

 >50 HP Lump: This is to model a group of motors all of which are larger than 50 HP
rating. No TCC plot is obtained for this type of load.

The rest of the fields correspond directly to those in the Device Library. MCCs are validated
upon creation. That means that if you create an MCC and do not input any data, you can still
go into an analysis focus without receiving an error message. However, once you create a
row in this spreadsheet, you will not be allowed to enter an analysis focus until all required
data is input. The cells which require data for analysis are highlighted in red.

If you are making a custom entry, you will notice that many of the data cells contain drop
down list of items. Some of the cells have Bold headings, and when they are selected the
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  457

Calculate button becomes active. Clicking on it will calculate the data for those cells. You
can select several cells at a time before clicking on the Calculate button. For instance,
clicking on the header itself will select the entire column.

Because the MCC is a library, along with the Calculate button, all of the other editing
features are identical to those listed in the Customizing section for the Device Library.

Spreadsheet View

Spreadsheet View is used to configure the columns that display in the spreadsheet. You can
create new configurations that display only selected columns. To create a new configuration,
click on Configure… button. This will open the Database Print Config dialog. Type the
new configuration name in the Configuration field, check the desired column headings from
the Columns: window, and choose the Save button. The Select All button will include all the
columns, and the Clear All will uncheck the columns. The Delete button will delete the
selected configuration. The Close button will close the dialog without cancelling the changes
– note that this is different from the Cancel command found in most dialogs.

If you have multiple configurations saved, you can display the desired configuration by
simply selecting it in the MCC dialog.

Database Print Config dialog

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  458

Export MCC or Panel Schedule

Export dialog for MCC or Panel Schedule

Save as type: You can save the schedule as a “csv” (spreadsheet) file or as a “wmf” (picture)
file.

Print Range: Choose one of the following.

 All: Prints all of the possible columns in the Description tab.

 Current Configuration: Prints only the columns that appear in the current configuration.

Export All MCCs/Panels: When unchecked only this MCC or panel is exported. When
checked, all the MCC and Panels are exported.

Summary

The Summary tab of MCC Data dialog provides the total load on the MCC and the load that
must be used in designing.
 Calculate Downstream Load: This button calculates the total load on the MCC, taking
into account, the connected load, demand factors, diversity factors and NEC code factors.
 Override with User values: This check box allows you to enter data in the column Total
Downstream Load – kVA.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  459

The Summary spreadsheet has two sections – MCC Load and Total Downstream Load.

Summary tab of MCC Data Dialog Box

MCC Load
This spreadsheet section provides the summary of the loads fed by the feeders of the MCC.
The loads from the sub-MCC and sub-panels are not included in this.
 Total kVA: This is the aggregate load.
 Total FLA: Total load in amps.
 Motor HP: The total HP for the items with "On" in the Status column of the Description
section.
 Motor kVA >= 50 HP: The total KVA for connected items equal to or greater than
50HP.
 Motor kVA < 50 HP: The total KVA for connected items less than 50HP.
 Static kVA: Total kVA of the loads.
 Capacitor kVAR: Total kVARs of all the capacitors.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  460

 Connected kVA = [(kW)2 + (kVAR)2]1/2

 Demand kVA = [(kW * DF)2 + (kVAR * DF)2] ½
 Where DF is the individual demand factor of each MCC circuit.
 Code Factors kVA = [(kWL + kW)2 + (kVARL + kVAR)2]1/2
 Where, kWL = Code Mult Factor * kW for largest motor in MCC.
 KVARL = Code Mult Factor * kVAR for largest motor in MCC.
 And, kW, kVAR are for the rest of the loads.

The Code Multiplying Factor can be specified in Tools  Options  Equipment as shown
in the figure below.

Setting Code Factor for MCC

Design kVA = Code Factors kVA * Diversity Factor * Design Factor

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  461

Diversity Factor is specified in the Specifications tab of MCC Data. The Design Factor is
specified in Tools  Options  Equipment.

Total Downstream Load

This provides the sum of the loads fed by feeders inside the MCC and the sub-MCC and sub-
panels.
kVA: Total kVA load calculated. You can enter your own values in these fields by checking
the check box for Override with User Values.

Power Flow

Power Flow tab of MCC Data Dialog Box

Load Model: Allows the user to select the motor kVA from the Specified data or from
SCADA (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) data. SCADA data can be read in by
choosing File Import from the Menu bar-.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  462

MCC Specifications

kVA: Use these radio buttons to choose between Connected, Demand, Code and Design.

Load Type: Motors can be modeled for the power flow solution in several different ways.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.

 Constant kW + j Current - This model is a combination of the above models and more
closely matches actual motor characteristics within normal operating voltages.

Scaling Factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total motor load used in determining
power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual Hp (total connected value) entered in
the Hp field can remain static. This reduces modeling errors and eliminates multiple
databases for different contingencies.

SCADA Model

SCADA data is derived from real time, or metered data, and converted to an ASCII format
which can be read into EasyPower. SCADA data is read in as a 100% scaling factor load.
When saving data, the load value is multiplied by the user defined scaling factor. This
provides a way to adjust SCADA loads to form new cases. The SCADA load fields can be
changed by the user, or entered as a new value and saved using the File Save Load command
from the main menu.

kW: The kW value as read in from the SCADA ASCII file.

kVAR: The kVAR value as read in from the SCADA ASCII file.

Load Type: SCADA data can be modeled in the power flow solution in several different
ways. SCADA load type is set in the ASCII file, and can be changed by the user.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  463

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.

 Constant kW + j Current - This model is a combination of the above models and more
closely matches actual motor characteristics within normal operating voltages.

Scaling Factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total SCADA load used in
determining power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual kW +j kVAR read in
from the ASCII file remains static, however the load used in the power flow is adjusted by
this factor. If the SCADA data is saved using the File Save Load command, the values will
be adjusted by the scaling factor.

Short Circuit

Short Circuit tab of MCC Data Dialog Box

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  464

kVA >50Hp: Total kVA of the motors which are greater than 50Hp.

X"dv or Xlr: Is set at the default value for >50Hp. You can enter your own value and it
applies to all the motors greater than 50Hp.

X/R Avg: The Calculate button fills this field using values from the spreadsheet. You may
enter your own X/R Average.

KVA <50Hp: Total kVA of the motors which are less than 50Hp.

X"dx or Xlr: Is set at the default value for <50Hp but you can change this. You can enter
your own value and it applies to all the motors less than 50Hp.

X/R Avg: The Calculate button fills this field using values from the spreadsheet. You may
enter your own X/R Average.

Harmonics

Please see Harmonics of Load Data, Page 411.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Motor Control Center Data  465

Arc Flash Hazard

Arc Flash Hazard tab of MCC Data

Since the MCC can be analyzed like a bus, you can also obtain arc flash hazard assessment
results for MCC. The arc flash tab is similar to that of Bus Data. However, the Equipment
Type is forced to MCC/Panel, since an MCC cannot be another type. You can specify the trip
time as available in the default library, enter the incident energy or you can enter the trip
times in the fields. For detail descriptions see section on Bus Data.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  466

Panel Schedule Data

Panel Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

Specifications

These are the specifications for the Panel Schedule including the bus.

Service: The drop down menu allows you to choose 3Phase-3Wire, 3Phase-4Wire, 1Phase-
2Wire or 1Phase-3Wire.

Unit: Choose either U.S. or Metric.

Description: Use this field to describe the particular Panel Schedule.

Location: Use this text field to indicate where the Panel Schedule is located in the power
system you are modeling.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  467

Fed By: Use this field to indicate the transformer or the power supply source feeding the
MCC.

Comment: Use this field for any comment on the MCC.

Last Updated: The date and time the MCC data was last updated is displayed here.

Bus Rating

These are all user defined fields.

Mfr: Use this text field to describe the Panel Schedule manufacturer.

Type: Use this text field to further describe the Panel Schedule manufacturer model.

Panel SC Rating (kA): The rating of the bus used in calculating the Short Circuit duties for
SmartDuty™.

Main Bus Rating (A): The current rating of the main bus.

Bus Data

Area: Area numbers are used to uniquely define different areas of the electrical system.
These areas can then be used for creating specific text reports from analysis operations that
represent subsets of the system. For example, typical paper plant areas may be the power
house (Area 1), caustic plant (Area 2), pulp mill (Area 3), and paper machine (Area 4). Area
numbers are positive integers between 1 and 999.

Zone: A zone number is simply a sub-area. This allows even more specific reporting. You
may wish to define the pulp mill as Area 3 and the digester electrical equipment as Zone 2.
Specific reports can then be generated for this combination without including the entire pulp
mill or the other digesters.

Incoming

Incoming Device Type: You can select the type of incoming protective device type for the
panel schedule. The choices available are:

 Main Lug Only: No protective device is present.

 Main Breaker: LV breaker protects the panel bus. You can select the breaker using the
button “Incoming Device Settings…”.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  468

 Main Fuse: Fuse protects the panel bus. You can select the fuse using the button
“Incoming Device Settings…”.

Incoming Branch: You can select the incoming branch equipment such as cables,
transformers or busways. All the branches connected to the panel in the one-line will be
displayed in the combo box.

Incoming Device Settings…: Pressing this button will open the data dialog for the main
fuse or main breaker, whatever has been specified as the incoming device type. Refer to LV
Breaker Data or Fuse Data section in this chapter for details.

Device Information: Information on selected main breaker or main fuse.

Incoming tab in Panel Data

Description

This is a spreadsheet listing similar to the Device Library. When you place a new Panel
Schedule on the one-line, the first time you open its database dialog and click on the
Description tab, EasyPower will bring up the MCC/Panel Schedule Spreadsheet Creation
Wizard which allows you to select the number of rows you want. Uncheck the box at the
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  469

bottom of the Wizard dialog if you don't want it to appear with each new MCC/Panel
Schedule.

You will notice that whenever you click on the Description tab, additional buttons are
placed on the Panel Schedule dialog box Toolbar. These buttons are the same as those in
the Device Library (see chapter 9 pages 3 through 5) and are the way to add rows if the
Wizard is not used.

Description tab of Panel Data Dialog Box

Library: The drop down list contains all of the same Schedules as the Device Library. To
enter a listing other than those contained in the drop down list, create a New Page in the
Panel Schedule section of the Device Library.

Schedule: This drop down list allows you to specify which Device Library Schedule your
chosen Library Load spreadsheet is located in. To enter a listing other than those contained
in the drop down list, create a New Page in the Panel Schedule section of the Device
Library.

Show Panel: These radio buttons allow you to choose which of the panels you want to
view: Left, Right or Both. The choice 3 Phase shows the ABC buses in the middle with the
loads on both sides of the spreadsheet.

Export: The spreadsheets can be exported to metafiles and delimited files. The Export
button is beside the Print button on the MCC/Panel dialog box toolbar when the viewing
the Description tab.

Spreadsheet

Library Load: This is a drop down list and corresponds directly to the Library Load
column in the Device Library. After you have made selections in the Library, Schedule and
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  470

Library Load fields, all of the following data cells will be automatically filled in as soon as
you click on another cell. You may also double-click on the cell to enter something
different than what is listed.

Status: The second column is a toggle "On/Off" to indicate if this particular item is
currently connected to the Panel Schedule. Turning any load as “off” is similar to de-
activating them in the one-line.

Load Type: You can select from three types of load:

Load: Specify loads in kW and kVARs.

Motor: Specify motor HP and X/R ratio.

Sub-Panel: Specify the ID Name of the connecting cable and the sub-panel.

The rest of the fields correspond directly to those in the Device Library. Panel Schedules
are validated upon creation. That means that if you create a Panel Schedule and do not input
any data, you can still go into an analysis focus with out receiving an error message. When
you create a row in this spreadsheet the loads are set to zero until you change them. This
means the Panel Schedule (unlike the MCC) remains validated for analysis even after you
have created rows but have not input any data.

If you are making a custom entry, you will notice that many of the data cells contain drop
down lists of items. Some of the cells have Bold headings, and when they are selected the
Calculate button becomes active. Clicking on it will calculate the data for those cells. You
can select several cells at a time before clicking on the Calculate button. For instance,
clicking on the header itself will select the entire column.

Because the Panel Schedule is a library, along with the Calculate button, all of the other
editing features are identical to those listed in the Customizing section for the Device
Library.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  471

Summary

Summary tab of Panel Data Dialog Box

The summary tab sums all the connected loads and displays results for total connected,
demand, code factor and design. There are two sections in this summary: Pnael Load and
Total Downstream Load.

Panel Load

This summarizes the loads fed directly from this panels. It does not include loads fed through
downstream sub-panels. These are not user-definable fields. They are updated automatically
when you make changes in the spreadsheet of the Description tab. The watts and vars shown
in this table do not reflect the downstream load of the sub-panels.


n
Connected W (A phase): Total of the 1
of (VAA * PF)

Total of the 
n
Connected VAR(A phase): 1
of (VA2A - W2A)1/2


n
Connected W (B phase): Total of the 1
of (VAB * PF)

Total of the 
n
Connected VAR(B phase): 1
of (VA2B - W2B)1/2


n
Connected W (C phase): Total of the 1
of (VAC * PF)

Total of the 
n
Connected VAR(B phase): 1
of (VA2C - W2C)1/2
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  472


n
Demand W (A phase): Total of the 1
of (VAA * PF) * DF

Total of the 
n
Demand VAR(A phase): 1
of (VA2A - W2A)1/2 * DF


n
Demand W (B phase): Total of the 1
of (VAB * PF) * DF

Total of the 
n
Demand VAR(B phase): 1
of (VA2B - W2B)1/2 * DF


n
Demand W (C phase): Total of the 1
of (VAC * PF) * DF

Total of the 
n
Demand VAR(B phase): 1
of (VA2C - W2C)1/2 * DF

Total Downstream Load

Loads connected through downstream sub-panels and buses are summarized in this section.

Override with User Values: This checkbox allows you to enter your own data. You can enter
measured data or assumed data in the available fields. If this chaeckbox is not enabled then
the program checks all the downstream loads and displays the total. In order for this feature
to work, it is necessary to have a source upstream to the panel. This feature is applicable only
to radial distribution systems. Downstream branches with any power source are not
accounted for.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  473

Power Flow

Power Flow tab of Panel Data dialog box

Load Model: Allows the user to select the motor kVA from the Specified data or from
SCADA (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) data. SCADA data can be read in from
the File Import command in the main menu.

Panel Specifications

kVA: Use these radio buttons to choose between Connected, Demand, Code and Design.

Load Type: Motors can be modeled for the power flow solution in several different ways.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Panel Schedule Data  474

Scaling factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total motor load used in determining
power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual Hp (total connected value) entered in
the Hp field can remain static. This reduces modeling errors and eliminates multiple
databases for different contingencies.

SCADA Model

SCADA data is derived from real time, or metered data, and converted to an ASCII format
which can be read into EasyPower. SCADA data is read in as a 100% scaling factor load.
When saving data, the load value is multiplied by the user defined scaling factor. This
provides a way to adjust SCADA loads to form new cases. The SCADA load fields can be
changed by the user, or entered as a new value and saved using the File Save Load command
from the main menu.

kW: The kW value as read in from the SCADA ASCII file.

kVAR: The kVAR value as read in from the SCADA ASCII file.

Load Type: SCADA data can be modeled in the power flow solution in several different
ways. SCADA load type is set in the ASCII file, and can be changed by the user.

 Constant kVA - This is the most common model. It is conservative, and will result in
slightly lower voltage values than would be measured on an actual system.

 Constant Current - This model is generally not used in motor modeling. It more closely
matches an induction motor's characteristics in the reactive component than other models,
but is technically incorrect because kW is relatively constant throughout the voltage
range for an induction motor.

 Constant Impedance - This model is used for starting induction and synchronous
machines, and closely matches motor characteristics during low voltages.

Scaling factor: Provides an easy way of adjusting the total SCADA load used in
determining power flows. By changing the scaling factor, the actual kW +j kVAR read in
from the ASCII file remains static, however the load used in the power flow is adjusted by
this factor. If the SCADA data is saved using the File Save Load command, the values will
be adjusted by the scaling factor.

Harmonics

Please see Harmonics of Load Data, Page 411.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Photovoltaic Data  475

Arc Flash Hazard

The arc flash hazard tab is similar to that of an MCC. Refer to MCC Data section for details.
Since the panel can be faulted like a bus, you can perform arc flash hazard analysis directly.

Photovoltaic Data

Photovoltaic Data dialog

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the Photovoltaic/solar power device. This ID name can be up
to 16 characters long. The names default to PVC-1, PVC-2, PVC-3... as you enter new
photovoltaics on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names later if desired.

To Bus: ID Name of the dc bus connected to this photovoltaic. The Base kV of this bus is
shown on the right.

Specifications

Max Power Rating: Maximum power (peak power) rating of the photovoltaic in kW.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Photovoltaic Data  476

Isc: Short circuit current of the photovoltaic in Amperes.

kVoc: Open circuit voltage in kV.

kVmpp: Voltage at which the maximum (peak) power is generated.

Notes on Data Specification

Care should be taken to specify data correctly for a Photovoltaic equipment item in
EasyPower. The data items should correspond directly to an actual VI curve for a
Photovoltaic panel. For example, a curve could be as follows:

For this curve, we see that for this panel, we have:

VMP V at Maximum Power 16 V

VOC V at Open Circuit 21 V
ISC I Short Circuit 3.3 A

This curve has been simplified in EasyPower as follows:

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Photovoltaic Data  477

ISC

V
VMP VOC

For this simplified approach, the maximum kW would then be calculated as:

kW Max =  ISC  VMP 

This simplified curve is used in the PF Engine to simulate the Photovoltaic. Thus, as terminal
voltage of device drops from VOC down to VMP, the power output of the device will
increase. As the voltage drops below VMP, power decreases to near zero when V = Zero. To
properly get solutions under a number of circumstances (i.e. voltage conditions, and other
DC Load Types on the same DC system the Photovoltaic is connected to) there are a number
of algorithmic additions made.
Now, in most cases, one should make the defined DC Bus rated Base kV equal to VOC for
an entire string of panels that have been hooked both in series or series and parallel. In
EasyPower, we do not have any method for representing a set of series connections, and so
we must rely upon specifying a series string as the lowest common denominator. In this way,
we get the VOC definition at the voltage that will be applied to the Inverter, and many strings
(each represented by ONE (1) EasyPower Photovoltaic equipment item) can then be put in
parallel to generate a total Photovoltaic array.

Test Case 1

A couple example systems have been built that show such construction. The first is “Photo
Voltaic – Large Array.dez”. This case creates a single a Photovoltaic Array up to a single
Inverter where each EasyPower Photovoltaic equipment item is a string of panels defined by:

Max Power: 2.7 kW

VMP 0.38 kV
VOC 0.43 kV
ISC 7.5 A
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Photovoltaic Data  478

This data was extracted from a paper documenting a Photovoltaic power plant in Tucson,
Arizona. This paper can be located at http://www.greenwatts.com/Docs/TEPSolar.pdf.
Notice that the base voltage for all DC Buses is defined at 0.43 kV, which is the open circuit
voltage for the series string.

Solving the system in the PF Focus will reveal all DC Buses highlighting red due to voltages
dropping below the default 0.95 pu under-voltage threshold for display. A quick check on the
ratio of VMP / VOC shows that the voltage at maximum power is 0.38 kV / 0.43 kV which is
0.88 pu. Thus, we should expect the voltage to be somewhere near this value when at
maximum power.

Now since this case has the Inverter specified at 125 kW, after some testing with the case,
one will find that when the specified power of the Inverter (the kW field in the Inverter PF
Tab) is such that the voltage on its input bus drops below the Minimum Voltage Threshold
(the Minimum Voltage Threshold field in the Inverter PT Tab), that the Inverter will back off
its power requirement in steps until that is met. This special behavior is described further
below.

For this test case, the Minimum Voltage Threshold was set to 0.9 pu, and thus the loading
was not allowed to reach the maximum capability of each string. Note that the power flow
solution also included all of the losses in the DC distribution equipment so that the power at
the Inverter input should be equal to All Photovoltaic Outputs + DC Cable Losses.

Running short circuit fault simulations will reveal how each Photovoltaic produces the output
current specified as ISC. Since the EasyPower fault calculation method is classical and based
on an injection method, this current output is completely dependent upon DC Cable
impedances being small. If the Cable impedances become significant compared to the
equivalent internal fault resistance of the Photovoltaic, one will see a reduction in the
Photovoltaic’s output current under fault conditions.

Test Case 2

The second test case is “Photo Voltaic – Large System.dez”. This case uses one Photovoltaic
equipment item to represent an entire array connected to a single Inverter. In such a case, we
are more interested in the AC distribution system than we are in the DC distribution system,
as modeled in detail in the first test case. If one desired, the full detail of the array could be
substituted into for each single Photovoltaic equivalent. That would produce a case with
extensive detail. That is left for the reader to mess with.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Photovoltaic Data  479

Notes on Power Flow Modeling

During a power flow solution, the photovoltaic considers the two voltage conditions that
have a shutdown and limiting effect. These conditions need to be automatically handled
during a solution so that reasonable solutions can be reached. These conditions typically
happen when the photovoltaic system and the load demanded of it, or the voltage conditions
applied to it are not in line with normal operating conditions.

A Photovoltaic has the ability to be the single source that will allow a system to enter power
flow and solve the system.

The Photo Voltaic Has a Terminal Voltage Greater Than VOC

For this condition, we force the Photovoltaic current output to zero. If this were not
controlled, the device would go into a reverse power condition which does not follow after
the photovoltaic characteristic.

The Photovoltaic Terminal Voltage Is Less Than VMP

For this condition, we need to limit the photovoltaic output current to ISC. We typically get
into this condition when:

There are no inverters in the model being fed by this photovoltaic, and we need to current
limit to properly simulate a DC system with other DC sources and other DC loads.

An inverter being fed by this photovoltaic has reached a condition where it cannot lower
loading any more, and so the voltage drop cannot be improved.

Note that this current limiting is typically active only when:

There are no inverters being fed by this photovoltaic.

If the inverter fed by this photovoltaic has already limited out on its load reduction in an
attempt to keep DC input voltage above the inverter Minimum Voltage Threshold.

Photovoltaic Loading 1

When building a DC system that has Photovoltaics AND Loads, care should be taken to
specify the Loads properly. Photovoltaics will prevent a power flow solution if the voltage on
the Photovoltaic drops below a threshold (defaulting to 0.4 pu bus voltage). Testing has
shown as the voltage drops on a DC system with Photovoltaics that a run-away voltage
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Photovoltaic Data  480

collapse condition can occur due to inappropriate load specification. An automatic check is
made on the Photovoltaics so that when voltage reaches a severe under-voltage condition
(actually an impractical condition due to desiring to always extract maximum power out of a
Photovoltaic array) during the power flow solution, the solution is terminated for this
unreasonable condition.

We recommend the load be specified as Constant Impedance so that loading drops with a
drop in DC voltage. If the load is specified as Constant Power or Constant Current, then
loading can actually increase as voltage drops, thus causing an additional drop in the DC
voltage at the Photovoltaic. When using Constant Power or Constant Current loads, great
care should be taken to properly specify the load to match the output capability of the
Photovoltaic.

Photovoltaic Loading 2

When a Photovoltaic is used with an Inverter, care must be taken to properly specify the kW
set-point of the Inverter so that the Photovoltaics feeding the Inverter are loaded properly. If
the Photovoltaics are loaded beyond their capability, such that their terminal voltage falls
below VMP, their loading capability will drop according to their defined VI Curve. If this
power output drop continues while the Inverter continues to demand the same power during
the power flow solution, then the power draw (a constant power load) of the Inverter
obviously cannot be met. The power flow solution will fail in this condition. The setting Min
Voltage Threshold is supplied with the Inverter model to allow for automatic load reduction
of the Photovoltaic systems (stepping the kW set point down on each iteration as needed to
drop load so a power flow solution can be reached).

Photovoltaic Minimum Voltage Limit

This limit is specified in the Registry, and defaults to a value of 0.4. It is used to terminate
the power flow solution if the terminal voltage on a Photo Voltaic drops below this setting.
The condition of extreme low voltage typically occurs when a Photovoltaic is supplying a
constant power load that cannot be met by the Photovoltaic. Voltage proceeds to drop, and
the solution spirals into a voltage collapse condition.

Name: PFPVMinVoltSolnLimit
Location: Options
Type: DWORD
Represents: Value in percent
Default: 40
Example: A value of 40 is 40% which is 0.40 pu voltage in the engine.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Photovoltaic Data  481

Photovoltaic Voltage Reduction Acceleration

This setting is used to accelerate the voltage reduction on a Photovoltaic for a condition
where the terminal voltage of the Photovoltaic has dropped below VMP, and we need to hold
ISC. In this condition, the power flow solution is dropping the Photovoltaic’s internal voltage
model on each iteration by:

VInt =VInt +  ISC - ITerm  R PV AccPV-VRA

where:
 VOC - VMP 
R PV =
ISC
and AccPV-VRA is this registry variable .

Name: PFPVVoltReductionAcc
Location: Options
Type: DWORD
Represents: Values in percent
Default: 300
Example: A value of 300 is 300% which is 3.0 pu in the engine.

Short Circuit Modeling

The Short Circuit modeling of the Photovoltaic is forced to be that of a simple Thevenin
model like that of a utility or generator with the exception of modifying the internal
resistance so that the desired Times FLA short circuit current is delivered when VDrive is set
to 1.0 pu. Due to the simplistic (but fast) short circuit method of connecting all sources to the
reference bus through their short circuit impedance, and then using a single current injection
to get the driving point impedance at the point of the fault, we need to compensate the
internal resistance of the Photovoltaic. This is done using the following equation:
BusKV
R DC = 1000.0
ISC
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Rectifier Data  482

Rectifier Data

Rectifier Data dialog

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the rectifier. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
rectifier name, and can be up to 16 characters long. The names default to RTF-1, RTF-2,
RTF-3... as you enter new rectifiers on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names
as desired.

Input Bus: ID Name of the AC bus on the input side of rectifier. The based kV of the bus is
shown on the right.

Output Bus: ID Name of the DC bus on the output side of rectifier. The based kV of the bus
is shown on the right.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Rectifier Data  483

Specifications

DC Rated kV: Name plate voltage rating of dc output in kV.

DC Rated FLA: Name plate current rating of dc output in Amps.

Type: Specify the component for the rectifier. Choose from Diode, Thyristor and IGBT. This
will affect power flow simulation methods. Diode and Thyristor types use Kimbark’s
equations to determine the real and reactive power on the Rectifier input, and to control DC
voltage or current. The IGBT type controls power factor and voltage. Control fields are
specified in the power flow tab.

Fault FLA: Expected fault current on the DC side, in multiples of full load amp rating.

Fault Time/Block Time: Duration the fault current will last. The unit can be seconds or
cycles.

Power Flow

Rectifier Data – Power Flow tab

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Rectifier Data  484

Thyristor Control: When the rectifier type is thyristor, the control can be one of the
following:

 Voltage: If the output is voltage controlled, specify the per unit control voltage in the
Ctrl kV PU field.

 Current: If the output is current controlled, specify the output current in the Current
Set Point field.

Commutation Impedance: Commutation impedance is used to calculate the power flow

using Kimbark’s equations. The rectifier must be fed by a dedicated transformer, where the
characteristics are also defined here:

Z1: Equivalent impedance in percent. Corresponds to the upstream rectifier transformer.

X/R: X/R ratio of the upstream rectifier transformer.

kVA: kVA rating base for Z1.

Input PF: When the rectifier type is IGBT, this specifies the control input power factor.

Efficiency: Ratio of output power to input power in percent.

Ctrl kV PU: For IGBT type or voltage control thyristor type, this is the controlled output
voltage in per unit.

Current Set Point: The fixed value of output current in Amps for current controlled thyristor
type.

Alpha Min: Minimum firing angle of the rectifier.

Alpha Max: Maximum firing angle of the rectifier.

Modeling Notes

DC Rated kV

When simulating a DC system that connects to an AC system via a Rectifier, then the proper
Rated DC voltage needs to be specified for the Rectifier. The DC voltage is related to the AC
voltage under no load conditions as follows:
3 2 VACRated LL
VDC = = 1.35 VAC-LL
π
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Rectifier Data  485

This equation is for a 6-pulse rectifier and includes the ripple on the DC bus, and is typically
used on DC systems that do not include a large smoothing capacitor; systems such as HVDC
and simple large rectifiers. If you know that the DC bus includes a DC bus capacitor, and
that under loaded conditions ripple is minimal, you should use:

VDC = 2 VAC-LL

Mandatory Commutation Impedance

When a Rectifier is specified as either Diode or Thyristor, a mandatory commutation

impedance must be specified on the Power Flow tab. This impedance is used to calculate
terminal conditions on the input of the Rectifier according Kimbark’s Equations. In addition,
we mandate a transformer be placed upstream of the Rectifier that has the exact same
impedance specification as the commutation impedance. This is the reason why the
commutation impedance specification in the Power Flow tab is specified just like a
transformer; so that there is a one-to-one correspondence. Kimbark’s equations have been
written with a basis in high voltage DC lines, which always incorporate and isolation and
voltage transformation transformer from the AC line voltage where the converter is specified,
and the converter itself. Thus, to use the equations, there must always be a converter-
transformer pair, or the equations are not correct for the model.

Note: Specification of Diode is modeled as Thyristor with Alpha forced to zero at all times.
Thus, Kimbark’s equations are used for all Diode modeling.

Parallel Rectifiers and Short Circuit

If parallel rectifiers are not connected to the same bus and they have two independent parallel
paths that supply a summing fault contribution, the total fault contribution will simply be the
total of the two sources as defined by their Times FLA value. This is an adequate
approximation for all rectifier types.

However, if we have two Diode or Thyristor rectifiers in parallel, and they have the same
supply side transformer, then the total short circuit on the DC side will not be represented
correctly, as their Times FLA values represent two independent rectifiers. The short circuit
current on the DC bus will be nearly double what it actually is if the rectifiers are the same
size. The paralleled converter resistance plays very little part in the fault level, which is
controlled mostly by the single up-stream supply transformer.

For example, if we have two diode rectifiers in parallel with independent supply
transformers, then the short circuit on the output will be an excellent representation.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Rectifier Data  486

UTIL-1 UTIL-1
100000MVA
150 (X/R)
100000MVA
150 (X/R)

0.000

0
00
kV

1.
BUS-3 BUS-3

0.000

0.000
TX-1 TX-2 TX-1 TX-2
1000 kVA 1000 kVA
1 - 1 kV 1 - 1 kV
5% 5%

0.000

0.000
0

0
kV

kV

00

00
1.

1.
BUS-5 BUS-4 BUS-5 BUS-4
1

0.000

0.000
RTF-1 RTF-2 RTF-1 RTF-2
1000.0 FLA 1000.0 FLA
1.50 Times FLA 1.50 Times FLA

1.500

1.500
kV

0
35

00
1.

3.
BUS-2 BUS-2

Acceptable representation if Times FLA for each rectifier is determined independently

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Rectifier Data  487

UTIL-1
UTIL-1
100000MVA
150 (X/R)
100000MVA
150 (X/R)

0.000

00
0
1.
BUS-3

kV
BUS-3
1

0.000
TX-1
TX-1
1000 kVA
1 - 1 kV
5%

0.000

0
00
1.
kV
BUS-1
BUS-1
1

0.000

0.000
RTF-1 RTF-2 RTF-1 RTF-2
1000.0 FLA 1000.0 FLA
1.50 Times FLA 1.50 Times FLA

1.500

1.500
kV

0
00
35

3.
1.

BUS-2 BUS-2

Inaccurate representation, since the total fault current is NOT the sum of the individually determined Times
FLA values for the two rectifiers.

Power Flow Modeling

Voltage Control Mode

The Rectifier has two control modes. The first is voltage control. In this mode, the output of
the Rectifier is held at the specified voltage set point unless the following limiting conditions
occur:

Diode Rectifier: The control mode is disabled. The Rectifier will produce a DC voltage in
accordance with Kimbark’s DC equations. This mode is also the same as forcing Alpha to
zero.

Thyristor Rectifier: Voltage control will hold the specified voltage, and a phase back
(increase in Alpha) is calculated to hold the specified voltage. The DC voltage will be the
result of Kimbark’s DC equations. Note that the combination of the input AC voltage and the
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Rectifier Data  488

Thyristor phase back action can create limiting conditions. Consider these two limiting
conditions:

Alpha Max: If the AC voltage is too high and the Thyristor control phases back and hits
Alpha Max, the Rectifier will stop at Alpha Max, and the DC voltage will be calculated for
this condition using Kimbark’s equations.

Alpha Min: If the AC voltage is too low and the Thyristor control hits Alpha Min, the
Rectifier will stop at Alpha Min, and the DC voltage will be calculated for this condition
using Kimbark’s equations. When Alphas Min is equal to zero, this is basically the same
conditions as a Diode Rectifier.

IGBT Rectifier: Since the controls and limiting conditions for IGBT’s are not well known
and vary significantly between manufacturers, the DC voltage is held like a SWING bus. No
AC input voltage condition will have any effect on the DC voltage.

Current Control Mode

In Current Control Mode, the Rectifier holds the DC current on the Rectifier output at the
specified current level unless a limit is hit. If a limit is hit, the DC current is determined by
Kimbark’s equations and the DC system on the output of the Rectifier.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  489

Relay Data

Relay Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the Relay. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
Relay name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to R-1, R-2, R-3... as
you enter new relays on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names if desired.

Specifications

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of relay manufacturers available in the device library.
After you choose a manufacturer, the available types are displayed in the Type field. If the
desired manufacturer is missing from the list, you may enter the data in the EasyPower
library.

Type: Provides a list of relay types available from the manufacturer chosen above. A type is
essentially a model name.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  490

No. of Units: Number of relay units of the same type that are part of a relay system.

One-line Symbol Graphics: You can make the desired text appear inside the relay symbol
by typing in the edit fields for “Function Text (upper)” and “Function Text (lower)”. You
may type up to 4 characters each. EasyPower assigns the text “R” in the upper field by
default.

Motor/Equipment Parameters: These are parameters of the equipment being protected by

the relay. For example a motor relay would require as parameters the Full load current.

Motor/Equipment Parameters

Generator Parameters: Full load amps (FLA) of the generator is entered here. This section
appears in the dialog box only for those relays which have been entered in the library as
generator protection relays. EasyPower calculates pickup amps from FLA and pickup setting

Generator Parameters for generator relays

Relay: Number of trip units or relay functions set differently. You may select either “Single
Function” or “Multi-Function”. One device function can have a time-overcurrent function
and an instantaneous over-current function. A relay with only one device function is a single
function relay. A multi-function relay may have more than one device function. For
example, a relay with time-overcurrent and instantaneous over-current trip functions for
phase current, negative sequence current and ground current, is a multi-function relay.

The description of different device functions is entered row by row. If you select Single
Function, you will be able to enter only device function. If a relay has been entered in the
library as a single function relay, then you will not be able to select it as a multi-function
relay.

TCC Clipping: Combo box to select the type of fault current to clip the relay TCC with.
Select <None> to avoid clipping.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  491

Function ID: A unique ID name for each device function in the relay. The ID name can
have up to 12 characters. Type the desired ID name.

Plot TCC: Check box to enable plotting TCC. Any device function with the box unchecked
will result in a plot without the TCC of that device function.

Device Function: Provides a list of device functions available for the relay. The following
table of ANSI/IEEE relay device functions modeled in the EasyPower library. The table
includes suffixes added to clarify applications:

Device Description Suffix Description

No.

46 Phase Balance Current Relay P Phase

49 Thermal Relay G Ground

50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Relay N Neutral

51 Time Overcurrent Relay Q Negative Sequence

51/50 Time and Instantaneous Overcurrent Relay IAC IAC Curves

67 AC Directional Overcurrent Relay IEEE IEEE Curves

79 AC Reclosing Relay IEC IEC Curves

87 Differential Protective Relay DT Definite Time Curves

Dev Fctn Type: The Device Function Type provides the description of the selected relay
function. Arc flash calculations may or may not use the device function trip time based on
the device function type. For example, while performing a 3-phase fault calculation, the
device function type Ground OC is ignored and Phase OC and Maint Phase OC are included.
The types Differential and Other are always excluded from arc flash calculations.

CT: Provides a list of current transformers connected to the relay in the one-line diagram.
The CT ratio of the selected CT will be used in calculations to obtain TCC plots. In the one-
line diagram, up to 6 CTs may be connected to a relay. In the case of multifunction relays,
different CTs may be used for different device functions.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  492

Default SC Values (kA): To mark the short circuit values in the TCC plot check the box
below “Tick” and enter the short circuit values in kilo amperes for Momentary (1/2 cycle),
Interrupting (3-5 cycles), or 30 cycles.

Breaker Trip: Specify the breaker or switching device opened by the relay upon tripping.

Eqp Type: Choose the switching device from HV Breaker, LV Breaker, Fuse and Switch.

Eqp ID: ID Name of the equipment on the one-line.

Aux Time: Additional relay time or time delay of auxiliary relays.

For arc flash and auto-coordination calculations the Aux Time and HV breaker opening time
are taken into account.

Settings

Relay Data - Settings dialog

System: Shows the Function ID, Device Function name and CT Ratio of the device
function selected. The values entered in the remaining sections of the Specifications tab are
for the device function shown in Function ID field.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  493

Lock AC: Check box to lock from Auto Coordination. Any device function with the box
checked will not auto coordinate.

Maintenance Mode: Specifies whether the maintenance mode instantaneous trip switch is
on or off for the device function. Some relays may not have maintenance mode trip switch.
When the checkbox is on, the TCC can be plotted and arc flash calculation will the trip time.

View Notes: Button to view notes on the relay. Notes may contain source of data for the
relay, specific instructions or any other pertinent details. Notes are stored in the device data
library (stdlib.mdb).

Tap: The tap settings or the pickup settings for time-overcurrent function. The name may be
relay specific, such as Pickup, I>, etc.

Tap Range: The range of tap settings which is applicable to the relay. Some relays may
have only one range of tap settings, but relays of the same model may come with different
tap ranges. In such cases all possible ranges may be included in a relay type in the library.

Tap Setting: Depending upon the tap range selected, the available tap choices are listed here.
The selected tap sets the pickup current.

Tap Amps: The pickup current in the one-line circuit is displayed below Tap Setting.

Time Dial: Selection of type of time-overcurrent curve, and the time dial (delay). This
section is name as Time Dial in the library by default. In some cases, for example motor
protection relays, they may be called by other names such as Thermal Overload, etc.

Curve: Provides a list of available curves for the device function.

Time Dial Setting: Provides the range of time delays that can be set for the curve selected.
Some relays call this time multiplier. In some recloser relays, the time dial (or time
multiplier) also affects the instantaneous time delay.

Shift Mult: Shift Multiplier shifts the curve in the vertical direction. This is functionally
similar to the time dial and is available in only some relays.

Time Adder: Some relays (mostly recloser relays) have additional time delays to the regular
trip curves. This field increases the trip time by the selected value of time in seconds or
cycles.

Minimum Time: Some relays (mostly recloser relays) have a minimum time setting. The
time-overcurrent function never trips faster than the specified time. In a TCC plot, the curve
becomes flat at this time even if the inverse time curve is programmed to trip at faster times.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  494

Instantaneous: The instantaneous pickup range and setting, and time delay are entered in
this section. Some relays may have different names for this section, such as Short Circuit
Instantaneous, Locked Rotor Instantaneous, etc. For relays that have both high and low
instantaneous settings, it may be necessary to use two device functions.

Instantaneous Range: Provides a list of ranges of instantaneous pickup values applicable to

the relay. The Instantaneous settings available depend on the Instantaneous Range selected.

Instantaneous Setting: The instantaneous pickup setting.

Instantaneous Amps: The instantaneous pickup current in the one-line circuit is displayed
below Tap Setting.

Instantaneous Delay: Time delay for instantaneous trip.

ST Pickup: Relays with three stage overcurrent relays have the second instantaneous trip
with time delay (also called short time in some relays).

ST Pickup Range: Provides a list of ranges of short time or second instantaneous pickup
values applicable to the relay. The ST Pickup settings available depend on the ST Pickup
Range selected.

ST Pickup Setting: The second instantaneous or shot time pickup setting.

ST Pickup Amps: The instantaneous pickup current in the one-line circuit is displayed
below Tap Setting.

ST Delay: Time delay for short time trip.

Some relays have settings and time current curves just like the low voltage breaker solid state
trip devices. The common type is direct action trip (DAT) units found in some medium
voltage breakers. The settings tab for these relays has a slightly different layout as described
below.

Plug: Select the rating plug on the trip unit. The sensor is equal to the CT primary amps.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  495

Relay Data – Settings dialog for DAT

LT Pickup: The long time pickup and delay are selected in this section. The pickup
calculation depends on the device selected. It may include LTPU Mult, but it will include
Setting (C). After the settings are selected, the actual pickup in amperes appears in
parentheses.

Setting (C): The long time pickup current setting below which the device will not trip. This
is a fraction of the sensor or plug/tap amps. For some trip units LTPU multiple may also be
required to set the pickup current.

LTPU Mult: Multiple of Setting (C), which can be adjusted to “fine-tune” the long time
pickup setting. Some trip units may not have this feature.

Curve: Some relays may have multiple LT delay curves to choose from. This field allows
you to choose the curve shape.

LT Delay Curve
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Relay Data  496

LT Delay: Long time delay setting to select the delay band.

ST Pickup: Short time pickup and delay settings. This section is applicable to only devices
with short time trip. After the settings are selected, the actual pickup in amperes appears in
parentheses.

Pickup: The short time pickup current setting below which the device will not trip for short
time trip. The short time pickup setting may be a multiple of long time pickup, sensor rating,
or plug.

(I^x)t: To select shape and slope of delay short time band. When you select “In”, the (I^x)t
function is enabled. The delay band has a slope of minus “x”. When you select “Out”, the
(I^x)t function is disabled, and the short time delay is independent of the current. For some
new circuit breakers, the (I^x)t delay may be adjustable. In such case they choices available
will be the various possible delay settings.

Delay: Short time delay setting to select the delay band.

Inst Pickup: Nominal instantaneous trip amps, multiple, or pickup setting. When you
highlight or select a choice, the corresponding trip amps will appear in parenthesis.

Pickup: The instantaneous trip pickup setting.

Enable Override: Selecting Enable Override disables tripping based on pickup setting. The
device trips at an override value that depends on the device style. This feature may or may
not be applicable to the device selected.

Maint-Inst: This is the additional instantaneous setting used during maintenance to lower the
arc flash hazard. The name of this section may be manufacturer specific such as ARMS,
Maint Mode, etc.

On: Checked box indicates the maintenance switch is on. In analysis focus, you can select
the breakers and with a right mouse click you can toggle the maintenance mode switch on or
off.

Pickup: Setting for maintenance mode trip.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Shunt Reactor Data  497

Shunt Reactor Data

Shunt Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the shunt reactor. This ID name is sometimes referred to as
the shunt name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to SH-1, SH-2, SH-
3... as you enter new shunts on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names if
desired.

To Bus: The bus the shunt connects to, which must already exist on the one-line. For your
reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Shunt Specifications

R+jX: Shunt data is entered as R+jX in ohms. Standard shunt reactor data is entered using
positive impedances, although negative numbers can also be entered.
 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Switch Data  498

Harmonics

Please see Filter Harmonics, Page 374.

Switch Data

Switch Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the switch. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
switch name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to SW-1, SW-2, SW-
3... as you enter new switches on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names if
desired.

On Bus: The bus the switch connects to, which must already exist on the one-line. For your
reference, the On Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Switch Data  499

Connection Type: Whether the switch is connected as a "Feeder", (e.g., to a cable, busway,
transformer, etc.) or as a "Tie" (between two buses).

Open/Closed: Normal state of the switch. If "Open" is chosen, the one-line will show
"OPEN" next to the switch symbol. If "Closed" is chosen, the one-line symbol will not show
the "OPEN" tag.

Switch Specifications

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of switch manufacturers available in the device library.
If the desired manufacturer is missing from the list, choose "Other".

Type: Switch types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired manufacturer is missing from the list, choose "Other".

Style: Switch styles available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above in the
type specified. After you choose a manufacturer and type, the styles available in the yellow
column of the corresponding device library page are displayed here.

Continuous Current: Continuous current of the switch. This value is for reference only
and does not affect analysis.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Switch Data  500

Short Circuit

Short Circuit tab of Switch Data dialog box

Mon/C&L (kA): Momentary or close & latch rating of the switch. The values available
from the device library are typically the close and latch values for spring and mechanically
operated switches, since this is the lowest rating. Some switches, however, have only
momentary ratings.

Calculate Button: Fills in a computed value for the Mon/C&L field, based on the device
library entry for Mfr, Type, Style, and the base kV. You can override this value by typing in
a different number. This button also causes the appropriate Testing Standard to be displayed
for your information. (The Testing Standard comes directly from the device library and
cannot be changed.)

Harmonics

Please see Harmonics of Fused Switch Data.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Three-Winding Transformer Data  501

Three-Winding Transformer Data

Three-Winding Transformer Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the transformer. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
transformer name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to TW-1, TW-2,
TW-3... as you enter new transformers on the one-line diagram, but you can change those
names if desired.

Primary Bus: The bus which is connected to the main transformer winding, or the largest
MVA winding. This bus must already exist on the one-line. You must be careful that the
Primary Bus has approximately the same base kV as the transformer's Primary Rated kV.
(However, EasyPower can model any off-nominal kV rating.) For your reference, the
Primary Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Three-Winding Transformer Data  502

Secondary Bus: The bus which is connected to the secondary transformer winding. This
bus must already exist on the one-line. You must be careful that the Secondary Bus has
approximately the same base kV as the transformer's Secondary Rated kV. (However,
EasyPower can model any off-nominal kV rating.) For your reference, the Secondary Bus
base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Tertiary Bus: The bus which is connected to the tertiary transformer winding. This bus
must already exist on the one-line. You must be careful that the Tertiary Bus has
approximately the same base kV as the transformer's Tertiary Rated kV. (However,
EasyPower can model any off-nominal kV rating.) For your reference, the Tertiary Bus base
kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Conn: The transformer winding connection type, which is either "Delta" (D), "Wye
Ungrounded" (Y), or "Wye Grounded" (YG). If "Wye Grounded" is chosen, grounding
impedances can be entered in the Grounding tab.

Transformer Specifications

Type: Type of transformer (oil, gas, dry, silicone, or vapor). This field is used to determine
the rating capacity of the transformer for the power flow overload solution.

Class: Type of cooling used by the transformer. Various combinations of forced air, water
and forced oil are available. This field is used to determine the rating capacity of the
transformer for the power flow overload solution.

Temp: ANSI temperature rating of the transformer. Various combinations can be chosen
and are dependent upon the type of transformer. Dual ratings such as 55/65 increase the
overload capability of the transformer by 12 percent.

Form: Either core or shell type transformers can be chosen. This value is for reference only
and does not affect analysis.

Winding Information

Rated kV: Rated kV of a winding. The rated kV can be different than the base kV or the
tap kV. EasyPower automatically adjusts the model to account for different taps, turns ratio
and bases you choose.

Tap kV / Tap% : Tap kV of a winding. You can also specify the tap kV in terms of
percentage of the rated value. To select the unit, choose Tap kV or Tap % form the combo
box. If the actual tap kV is not known, enter the rated kV. Load tap changer control can be
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Three-Winding Transformer Data  503

used to determine final tap settings if desired. EasyPower automatically adjusts the model to
account for different taps, turns ratio and bases you choose.

MVA/kVA: Self cooled rating of the transformer. To select the unit in MVA or kVA, use the
combo box.

MVA OL: The overload rating is based on the temperature and class ratings. It is filled in
using the Calculate button or you can type in a different rating.

Impedance

Impedance

Transformer impedance is in percent on the self-cooled MVA of the winding and nominal
voltage rating. The strict definition is the percent of rated voltage impressed on the high
voltage winding to produce rated full load current in the short circuited low voltage winding.

In this dialog box, Zps stands for Primary to Secondary, Zpt stands for Primary to Tertiary,
and Zst stands for Secondary to Tertiary.

Manufacturers provide impedance data in many different formats depending on the test
facility and transformer size. The data entry format for EasyPower was chosen from one of
the most common testing procedures.

You may specify the impedances in any MVA base: the primary, secondary, or tertiary.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Three-Winding Transformer Data  504

Impedance tab of Three-Winding Transformer Data Dialog Box

R1: Positive sequence winding resistance in percent.

X1: Positive sequence winding leakage reactance in percent.

R0, X0: Zero sequence winding leakage impedance in percent. If you don't know this value,
enter the positive sequence impedance (Z) for shell transformers (see the Form field on the
transformer's main dialog box). For core transformers, use approximately 85% of Z. If you
enter this value as zero (0.0), the positive sequence impedance will be used.

MVA Base: The winding MVA based upon which the percent impedance value is specified.

Grounding

Clicking the Grounding tab lets you enter grounding impedances. They only apply to wye
grounded connections. The units are R + jX in ohms. If you only know the ground amperes
of the circuit, divide the line to neutral voltage of the circuit by the amperes to get the
impedance. This can be achieved in EasyPower by entering the Amp Class first and then
clicking on Calculate button.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Three-Winding Transformer Data  505

R: Transformer neutral ground resistance in ohms. This is the most common method of
grounding the transformer neutral winding. Grounding resistors are usually given in
amperes. The impedance is found from the following equation.

R = Vln / I

If the transformer is grounded through a grounding transformer with a secondary resistance,

this resistance must be converted to the primary winding. Only wye grounded transformers
are modeled with grounds. Mid or corner tapped delta windings are not modeled.

jX: Transformer neutral ground reactance in ohms.

Amp Class: This is the current in amps through the ground impedance at the rated voltage.
You can enter data in this field directly in Amps or calculate it based on the voltage and
ground impedance R +jX using the Calculate button

Load Tap Changer (LTC)

LTC tab of Three-Winding Transformer Data Dialog Box

Tap: Load tap changers (LTC) can be placed on one or two windings of a three-winding
transformer. Any combination of primary, secondary or tertiary is allowed, provided that
they do not specify the same winding. Also, if only one LTC is used, it must be LTC #1. If
the transformer does not have an LTC, choose the "None" radio button for standard fixed
taps. Fixed off-nominal taps can be entered in the main dialog's Tap kV field.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Three-Winding Transformer Data  506

Step Size: The default is 0.625 but you can type in your own percentage step size both here
and in the power flow three-winding transformer temporary dialog box.

Min Tap kV: Minimum tap kV is used to determine the bottom limit to which the tap can
be adjusted during a power flow analysis. This value should be the lowest tap on the
transformer to get meaningful results. The default of 0.12 kV is not realistic and should be
changed to the actual values if the LTC is used.

Max Tap kV: Maximum tap kV, which is used to determine the upper limit that the tap can
be adjusted to during a power flow analysis. This value should be the highest tap on the
transformer to get meaningful results. The default of 1500 kV is not realistic and should be
changed to the actual values if the LTC is used.

Control Value (Ctrl Value): Control value, which is determined by the Control Type field.
If "Voltage" is chosen, the control value should be entered in per-unit voltage. A typical
range would be .975-1.01 per-unit, with 1.0 per-unit as a starting point. If "MVAR" is
selected, the value should be enter in actual MVAR rather than adjusted per-unit. To
determine what MVAR range is appropriate for a given transformer size, determine the
MVAR flow without using an LTC then multiply by .975-1.01 for an approximate starting
place. It should be mentioned that LTC control is much more limited in strength and range
than large generator control.

Control Type: Determines how the LTC model is used. You can select either “Voltage” or
“MVAR”. If "Voltage" is chosen, the LTC will attempt to control the voltage of the bus on
the same side of the LTC. For example, if LTCs are chosen on both the secondary and
tertiary sides, voltage will be controlled at those buses. This works well if the secondary and
tertiary sides are load buses as is common for split winding transformers. However, if the
primary side is chosen for the LTC and the secondary and tertiary sides are load buses, the
primary side (source side) cannot control the load bus voltage. For this type of system
standard fixed taps will work well.

If "MVAR" is chosen, the LTC will attempt to control the MVAR flow through the
transformer to a given value.

TCC

Transformer damage Curve

Plot 100% Withstand TCC: Check box to plot transformer damage curve for 100%
withstand. This is without taking into consideration the derating factor for winding
connection type and the type of fault.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Three-Winding Transformer Data  507

Plot Unbalanced Derating (58% or 87%) TCC: Check box to plot transformer damage
curve taking into consideration the derating factor for winding connection type and the type
of fault. The transformer curve shifts left by 58% or 87% depending on the connection type.

Use Frequent Fault Curve(s): Check box to plot the transformer damage curves as
Category II to IV (thermal and mechanical withstand) for frequently occurring faults. The
curve shifts towards the left depending upon the transformer impedance.

Standard: The standard according to which the curve is plotted.

Maximum Plot Time: The maximum time in seconds for which the transformer damage
curve is plotted.

TCC tab for Three Winding Transformer Data dialog box

Magnetizing Inrush

FLA x: Magnetizing inrush current as multiples of full load amps for the primary winding.

Cycles: Time taken by magnetizing inrush current in terms of number of cycles.

FLA Based on: Calculation basis for full load amps. “MVA O/L” is MVA capacity for
overload and “Rated MVA” is self-cooled capacity.

Plot Side: The side of transformer for which the short circuit withstand is plotted. Short
circuit is applied on Secondary or Tertiary side. The primary line current is shown in the
plot.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Transmission Line Data  508

Auto-Coordination Setting: Specify whether the protective device is accessible only to

qualified personnel (supervised) or unsupervised. This affects the protective device settings
based on NEC rules.

Z System: While plotting the transformer damage curve, typical practice assumes infinite
source (zero system impedance) on the upstream side of the transformer. You can include the
upstream system impedance to lower the maximum fault current that the transformer will see.
The system impedance must be converted to per unit impedance on the transformer MVA
base.

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Rated eddy-current loss, PEC-R: Eddy-current loss under rated conditions expressed as a
percentage of rated I2R loss.

Transmission Line Data

Transmission Line Data Dialog Box

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Transmission Line Data  509

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the transmission line. This ID name is sometimes referred to
as the transmission line name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to X-
1, X-2, X-3... as you enter new transmission lines on the one-line diagram, but you can
change those names if desired.

From Bus: The bus which the transmission line connects "from", which must already exist
on the one-line. You must be careful that the From Bus has the same base kV as the
transmission line's To Bus. For your reference, the From Bus base kV is displayed next to
the bus name.

To Bus: The bus which the transmission line connects "to", which must already exist on the
one-line. You must be careful that the To Bus has the same base kV as the transmission line's
From Bus. For your reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Show Entire Line: This box is checked by default and causes the entire line to be displayed.
By un-checking the box, the line will only be shown as a short section at each end with labels
indicating which bus the other end is attached to.

Transmission Line Specifications

Unit: Choose either US or Metric.

No/Phase: Total number of lines modeled. The default of one (1) means one conductor per
phase. Two (2) means two conductors in parallel per phase, etc. When two or more
conductors are in parallel, the impedance of the circuit will be decreased by that factor. The
impedances shown in the dialog box are for one conductor only, and are not based on the
No./Phase field. So if you enter these values instead of using Calculate, make sure they are
for one conductor only. This lets you to easily check handbook values without additional
arithmetic. The Calculate button does not consider bundled conductors at this time.

Material: Material (copper, aluminum, aluminum cable steel reinforced, or copper weld).

Size: Conductor size in AWG or MCM. For more information, see the Aluminum Electrical
Conductor Handbook .

Length: The length of the line in miles or meters.

Temp: Temperature of the loaded conductor. This can be varied from 25°C to 250°C
depending on the type of study being performed. This temperature is used in determining the
resistance of the conductor.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Transmission Line Data  510

Earth Res: Earth resistivity in ohm-meters. This value is used to determine ground
impedance. A default value of 100 ohm-meters is typically used when measured data is not
available.

GMD: Geometric Mean Distance of the conductor spacing. This value is used to determine
the impedance of the line. Typical default values are used based on the kV of the line.

Average Height: Average height of the transmission line in feet. This value is also used to
determine the line impedance. Typical default values are used based on the kV of the line.

Impedances

Impedances are described in ohms/mile or ohms/km, except for Xc, which is in megaohm
miles or megaohm km. For more information, see the Westinghouse Transmission and
Distribution (T&D) book.

R1: Positive sequence resistance.

X1: Positive sequence reactance.

R0: Zero sequence resistance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), the positive sequence
impedance will be used.

X0: Zero sequence reactance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), the positive sequence
impedance will be used.

Xc: Shunt capacitive reactance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), "infinity" is assumed.

Xc0: Shunt capacitive zero sequence reactance. If you enter this value as zero (0.0),
"infinity" is assumed.

Rating: Conductor rating in amperes. This field is used to determine line overloads in
power flow analysis. If you use Calculate, this value will be brought from the device library
and is for one conductor. EasyPower will not calculate a new rating if there are multiple
conductors per phase. You will need to input the proper rating.

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Two-Winding Transformer Data  511

Two-Winding Transformer Data

Two-Winding Transformer Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the transformer. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
transformer name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to TX-1, TX-2,
TX-3... as you enter new transformers on the one-line diagram, but you can change those
names later if desired.

From Bus: The bus which the transformer connects "from", which must already exist on the
one-line. You must be careful that the From Bus has approximately the same base kV as the
transformer's From Rated kV. For your reference, the From Bus base kV is displayed next to
the bus name.

To Bus: The bus which the transformer connects "to", which must already exist on the one-
line. You must be careful that the To Bus has approximately the same base kV as the
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Two-Winding Transformer Data  512

transformer's To Rated kV. For your reference, the From Bus base kV is displayed next to
the bus name.

Conn: The transformer winding connection type, which is either "Delta" (D), "Wye
Ungrounded" (Y), or "Wye Grounded" (YG). If "Wye Grounded" is chosen, grounding
impedances can be entered in the Grounding tab.

Lock Auto-Sizing: When this is checked, Auto-Design does not change the size of the
transformer.

Transformer Specifications

Type: Type of transformer (oil, gas, dry, silicone, or vapor). This field is used to determine
the rating capacity of the transformer for the power flow overload solution.

Class: Type of cooling used by the transformer. Various combinations of forced air, water
and forced oil are available. This field is used to determine the rating capacity of the
transformer for the power flow overload solution.

Temp: ANSI temperature rating of the transformer. Various combinations can be chosen
and are dependent upon the type of transformer. Dual ratings such as 55/65 increase the
overload capability of the transformer by 12 percent.

Form: Either core or shell type transformers can be chosen. This value is for reference only
and does not affect analysis.

Winding Information

Rated kV: Rated kV of a winding. The rated kV can be different than the base kV or the
tap kV. EasyPower automatically adjusts the model to account for different taps, turns ratio
and bases you choose.

Tap kV / Tap% : Tap kV of a winding. You can also specify the tap kV in terms of
percentage of the rated value. To select the unit, choose Tap kV or Tap % form the combo
box. If the actual tap kV is not known, enter the rated kV. Load tap changer control can be
used to determine final tap settings if desired. EasyPower automatically adjusts the model to
account for different taps, turns ratio and bases you choose.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Two-Winding Transformer Data  513

Rated: Self cooled rating of the transformer. To select the unit in MVA or kVA, use the
combo box on the right.

MVA O/L: The overload rating as filled in using the Calculate button or you can type in a
different rating.

Impedance

Impedance tab of Two-Winding Transformer Dialog Box

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Two-Winding Transformer Data  514

Z: Transformer nameplate impedance in percent. By definition, this is the positive sequence

leakage impedance in percent on the self-cooled MVA and nominal voltage rating. The strict
definition is the percent of rated voltage impressed on the high voltage winding to produce
rated full load current in the short circuited low voltage winding.

Z0: Transformer zero sequence leakage impedance in percent. If you don't know this value,
enter the positive sequence impedance (Z) for shell transformers (see Form field above). For
core transformers, use approximately 85% of Z. If you enter this value as zero (0.0), the
positive sequence impedance will be used.

X/R Ratio: Transformer reactance to resistance ratio, which is used to determine resistance
value.

Calculate Button: Fills in a computed value for the X/R field, based on the transformer's
MVA rating. You can override this value by typing in a different number. The calculated
X/R ratio curve is based on the medium ANSI Standard curve [ANSI C37.010-1979]. This
curve was developed mainly for power transformers and is typically high for low voltage unit
substations less than 2500 kVA.

Grounding

Grounding impedances only apply to wye grounded connections. The units are R+jX in
ohms. If you only know the ground amperes of the circuit, enter the amp class and use the
Calculate button to calculate the grounding impedance.

R: Transformer neutral ground resistance in ohms. This is the most common method of
grounding the transformer neutral winding. Grounding resistors are usually given in
amperes. The impedance is found from the following equation.

R = Vln / I

If the transformer is grounded through a separate grounding transformer with a secondary

resistance, this resistance must be converted to the primary winding. Only wye grounded
transformers are modeled with grounds. Mid or corner tapped delta windings are not
modeled.

jX: Transformer neutral ground reactance in ohms.

Amp Class: This is the current in amps through the ground impedance at the rated voltage.
You can enter data in this field directly in Amps or calculate it based on the voltage and
ground impedance R +jX using the Calculate button.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Two-Winding Transformer Data  515

Load Tap Changer (LTC) Data

Tap: Load tap changer (LTC) position can be placed on either side of the transformer by
choosing the "From" or "To" radio button. If the transformer does not have an LTC, choose
the "None" radio button for standard fixed taps. Fixed off-nominal taps can be entered in the
main dialog's Tap kV field.

Step Size: The default is 0.625 but you can type in your own percentage step size both here
and in the power flow two-winding transformer temporary dialog box.

LTC tab of Two-Winding Transformer Data Dialog Box

Min Tap kV: Minimum tap kV, which is used to determine the bottom limit that the tap can
be adjusted to during a power flow analysis. This value should be the lowest tap on the
transformer to get meaningful results. The default of 0.12 kV is not realistic and should be
changed to the actual values if the LTC is used.
 Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Two-Winding Transformer Data  516

Max Tap kV: Maximum tap kV, which is used to determine the upper limit that the tap can
be adjusted to during a power flow analysis. This value should be the highest tap on the
transformer to get meaningful results. The default of 1500 kV is not realistic and should be
changed to the actual values if the LTC is used.

Control Value: Control value, which is determined by the Control Type field. If "Voltage"
is chosen, the control value should be entered in per-unit voltage. A typical range would be
.975-1.01 per-unit, with 1.0 per-unit as a starting point. If "MVAR" is selected, the value
should be entered in actual MVAR rather than adjusted per-unit. To determine what MVAR
range is appropriate for a given transformer size, determine the MVAR flow without using an
LTC, and multiply by .975-1.01 for an approximate starting place. It should be mentioned
that LTC control is much more limited in strength and range than large generator control.

Control Type: Determines how the LTC model is used. If "Voltage" is chosen, the LTC
will attempt to control the voltage of the bus on the other side of the LTC. For example, if
the LTC is chosen to be on the "From" side, voltage will be controlled on the "To" side. If
"MVAR" is chosen, the LTC will attempt to control the MVAR flow through the transformer
to a given value.

Control Side: The LTC can control the voltage or MVAR on either side of the transformer,
regardless of which side the tap is located.

TCC Data

Please see TCC tab of Three Winding Transformer Data, page 506.

Stability
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Two-Winding Transformer Data  517

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of Transformer manufacturers available in the device

library. If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the
library.

Type: Transformer types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If
the desired type is not listed, you may addit to the library.

Model: Lists available transformer models in the library.

Lib button: Populates transformer data from the library.

Harmonics

Please see Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Rated eddy-current loss, PEC-R: Eddy-current loss under rated conditions expressed as a
percentage of rated I2R loss.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference UPS Data  518

UPS Data

UPS Data dialog

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the UPS. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the UPS
name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to UPS-1, UPS-2, UPS-3... as
you enter new UPS’s on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names later if
desired.

Input Bus: The ID name of the bus connected to the input branch. The bus voltage
determines the input voltage rating of the UPS.

Output Bus: The ID name of the bus connected to the output branch. The bus voltage
determines the output voltage rating of the UPS.

Specifications

UPS kVA: kVA rating of the UPS.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference UPS Data  519

X/R: X/R ratio used for short circuit calculations at the output.

Short Circuit Output

½ Cycle Short Circuit Capabilities: Momentary short circuit contribution. Value is entered as
multiple of kVA rating. Example: A 500kVA/0.48kV UPS has a momentary short circuit
contribution of 3000Amps. The short circuit capability in multiples of kVA rating is 4.988
(~5.0). [ multiple = sqrt(3)*3kA*0.48kV/500kVA.]

Interrupting Short Circuit Capabilities: Short circuit contribution at 5 cycles.

30 Cycle Short Circuit Capabilities: Short circuit contribution at 30 cycles.

Power Flow

UPS Data Power Flow tab

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  520

Normal Mode Settings

%Efficiency: Efficiency of UPS in delivering active power to load. When there is no battery
charging, input active load is equal to output active load divided by efficiency.

% Battery Charging: Power consumed in charging battery, expressed as percentage of

Rated kVA of UPS.

Input PF: Power factor of input.

Source Output

Ctrl kV PU: The per unit output voltage of the UPS, which the UPS tries to maintain.

Ctrl Angle: The output voltage angle of the UPS, which the UPS tries to maintain.

Utility Data
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  521

Utility Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the utility. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
utility name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to UTIL-1, UTIL-2,
UTIL-3... as you enter new utilities on the one-line diagram, but you can change those names
later if desired.

To Bus: The bus the utility connects to, which must already exist on the one-line. For your
reference, the To Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.

Utility Specifications

Utility kV: Utility operating kV for calculation of per-unit impedance. This does not affect
the power flow controlled voltage.

Fault Duty Unit: Specifies the unit in which the short circuit information is entered. Any of
the four following units may be selected from the combo box.

Fault Duty Unit Name Short Circuit Units

MVA MVA X/R

kA kA X/R

Ohms R jX

Zpu Rpu jXpu

Utility MVA Base: When Zpu is selected as the fault duty unit, you will also need to specify
the MVA Base of the utility for the per unit values.

3-Phase Short Circuit MVA: Utility 3-phase short circuit MVA. Used in determining
short circuit reactance values.

3-Phase Short Circuit X/R: Utility reactance to resistance ratio for a three-phase bolted
fault (positive sequence impedance). Used in determining the resistance value in short circuit
studies.

SLG Short Circuit MVA: Utility line to ground short circuit MVA. Used in determining
short circuit reactance values. This value is calculated using:
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  522

MVASLG=SQRT(3)VLLI1ph

SLG Short Circuit X/R: Utility zero sequence reactance to resistance ratio. Used in
determining the resistance value in short circuit studies.

DC Utility Specifications

DC Utility Specifications

kV: DC Utility operating kV. If this value is different than the bus base kV, then the
controlled voltage will be scaled appropriately.

Fault Duty: Expected fault value (in Amperes) or the Thevenin equivalent resistance (in
ohms) at the DC utility connection point.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  523

Power Flow

Power Flow tab of Utility Data dialog box

Model: Utility bus type used in modeling the power flow simulation. When you choose a
particular model, those fields which are not appropriate will be grayed out. A utility is
normally modeled as the reference or swing bus, but may be modeled as another generator
bus. (See "Swing Sources" on page 200.)

 PV - Constant power, constant voltage utility. This is also known as a regulated utility.
This model tries to hold a user-specified bus voltage within utility MVAR limits.

 Swing - A swing bus holds the bus voltage and angle constant. There cannot be limits on
the amount of MW or MVAR the swing machine can accept or provide.

 PQG - Constant power, constant var utility. This is also known as an unregulated utility.
This model holds the MVAR generation within given voltage limits.

MW: Utility output MW. This may be actual operating or a rated value. This applies only
to a PV or PQG utility.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  524

MVAR: Utility output MVAR. This is only used when the utility is a constant power,
constant var (PQG) machine, or when a PV utility MVAR limit has been reached and the
machine automatically switches to PQG.

MVAR Limits: Minimum and maximum MVAR limits for regulated utilities (PV). The
utility will switch to type PQG if these limits are violated. If there is only one swing utility
(Model = "Swing") on a bus, it should not have any MVAR limits. If there is more than one
swing utility on a bus, at least one of them must be unlimited.

Ctl kV PU: Desired control voltage for a regulated utility (PV). The utility will try to
control the voltage at the controlled bus to a given value. If the utility bus is the swing bus,
this voltage serves as the reference voltage. The voltage is entered in per-unit.

Ctl Angle: Controlled angle is used only when a utility is designated as a swing bus. The
value is entered in degrees.

Ctrl Bus: For a PV utility (regulated), the bus that is to be controlled to the control voltage.
If this field is blank in the database, EasyPower will fill it in with the name of the bus listed
in the To Bus field. (Note that this does not take effect until you accept it by choosing OK to
close the database dialog box.) This field is ignored if the Model field is set to "Swing".

DC Utility Power Flow

DC Utility Power Flow tab

Model

The power flow can be one of the following models:

 Swing (Regulated): Holds the utility bus voltage at specified per unit value (Ctrl kV PU).

 Swing (Un-Regulated): The utility bus voltage drops with the increase of load current
based on Thevenin impedance.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  525

 Constant Power: Outputs the specified amount of kW (Output kW).

Harmonics

Harmonics tab of Utility Data dialog

Resistance Factor: EasyPower offers two methods for calculating RH:

Resistance varying with a power of the harmonic (R-EXP)

RH = RFund * H R-EXP

Resistance varying with a percent eddy current factor (%ECF)

RH = RFund * (1+ECF*H2)/(1+ECF)

EasyPower defaults all skin effect correction to R-EXP and a value of 0.5.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  526

R-EXP %ECF

Transformer 0.5-1.0 1.0-3.0

Utility 0.0-0.8 -

Generator 0.3-0.6 -

Line/Cable 0.5 -

Reactor 0.5-1.0 0.8-3.0

Motor 0.2-0.4 -
Typical Resistance Correction Factors

Fundamental Amps: These are radio buttons. Equipment Rating will set Fundm Amps to
the equivalent Amp rating calculated from System base MVA. User Specified will activate
the Fundm Amps field, allowing specification of a value. These values are used to calculate
the percentage harmonic flow – the absolute harmonics amps will not be affected.

Table Values in: When the frequency response of the utility is specified in the table
(spreadsheet), the impedance can be in per-unit of a specified MVA or in Ohms.

Harm Calcs Use: The utility response to harmonics can be based on the impedance
calculated from short circuit values in the Specifications tab or based on the table.

Harmonic Table: If the Tables Values is selected for Harm Calcs Use, then this table will
be active. For each harmonic number you can enter the impedances: R Pos, X Pos, R Zero
and X Zero. For each harmonic number entered in the spreadsheet the row must be complete
with data. The harmonic may be integer or non-integer.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Utility Data  527

Stability

Manufacturer (Mfr): Provides a list of Utility manufacturers available in the device library.
If the desired manufacturer is not listed in the device library, you may add it to the library.

Type: Utility types available from the manufacturer chosen in the Mfr field above. If the
desired type is not listed, you may addit to the library.

Model: Lists available utility models from the library.

Lib button: Populates Utility data from the library.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Zigzag Transformer Data  528

Zigzag Transformer Data

Zigzag Data Dialog Box

Connection Information

ID Name: Uniquely identifies the transformer. This ID name is sometimes referred to as the
transformer name, and can be up to 12 characters long. The names default to TZ-1, TZ-2,
TZ-3... as you enter new transformers on the one-line diagram, but you can change those
names later if desired.

From Bus: The bus which the transformer connects "from", which must already exist on the
one-line. For your reference, the From Bus base kV is displayed next to the bus name.
Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Zigzag Transformer Data  529

Specifications

Voltage Rating (kV): Transformer nameplate rated kV.

Impedance (Ohms): Transformer nameplate impedance in ohms. This is the impedance

between each line terminal and neutral.

R: Transformer neutral ground resistance in ohms.

jX: Transformer neutral ground reactance in ohms.

Harmonics

See Harmonics tab of Filter Data, Page 374.

Chapter 12 Database Technical Reference Zigzag Transformer Data  531
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Overview  532

Chapter 13
Harmonics With Spectrum
Overview
In the Harmonics analysis focus you can do frequency scans, current flows and summations.
The display of one-line results, frequency scan plots, and text reports are all designed to help
you understand and control the effects of harmonics on your power system.

Harmonics Ribbon

Harmonics ribbon

Harmonics Toolbar
You can view menus and toolbars by choosing Style  Toolbars.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Harmonics Status Bar  533

Harmonics toolbar

Harmonics Status Bar

Spectrum Status Bar

The Harmonics Status Bar indicates the following settings:

Grid Snap Status: Shows "SNAP" if grid snapping is on. See "The Snap Grid" on page
736 of Chapter 2 for more information.

Voltage Unit: Either kV or per-unit, as set in Harmonic Options One-line Output.

Current Unit: Either Amps or per-unit, as set in Harmonic Options One-line Output.

Losses Unit: Either kVA or MVA, as set in Harmonic Options One-line Output.

Harmonic Load Data

Loads with harmonic content can be specified as harmonic loads. To specify any load or
motor as having harmonic content, you need to be in Database Edit focus. The equipment
data dialog, for example Load Data, has a tab called Harmonics.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  534

Harmonics tab of Load Data dialog

Specify the Load Type as Harmonic. A spreadsheet will be enabled. You can specify the
harmonic content of the load in this spreadsheet. If you do not have any data on the harmonic
content you can browse the Library Load data and select the appropriate load type.
EasyPower offers several types of typical harmonic load data.

When entering harmonic content in the spreadsheet, DO NOT ENTER the fundamental
component. This may lead to erroneous results. The fundamental is accounted for through the
rated load value or through user specifed field.

Analysis Results
The Harmonics focus may be entered the same as any other analysis focus. Choose
Harm button in the ribbon (or Analysis Harmonics from the menu). Since there are
some criteria that need to be met before entering an analysis focus, and some analysis
features are the same, you may want to review Chapter 3, "Analysis Overview".

EasyPower allows three major types of harmonic analysis: frequency scan, current flow, and
summation.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  535

Frequency Scan

Frequency scans show how a system under study responds to an injected current at increasing
frequency. The output of a frequency scan is a plot of per unit voltages, per unit currents, or
both. From these plots you can derive results such as voltage and current amplification,
resonant points and natural filter points. Frequency scanning utilizes a 1.0 per unit current
injection at a single, user-selected location. Since Z=V/I, a 1.0 per unit current makes Z=V.
Therefore, the bus voltage at the point of injection is the driving point impedance.

To obtain a frequency scan at a bus by injecting current at the same bus, simply double click
on the bus. You will obtain a window with a plot and spreadsheet as shown below. To
obtain frequency scan at a bus by injecting current at another bus, you need to define plots.
The scan of bus at which current is injected appears on the tab called “AutoPlot”.

Frequency scan at a bus

The plot feature in the Harmonics focus allows you to select as many as ten plots with up to
five buses or items each. For buses, the per-unit voltage is plotted; and for branch items, the
per unit current is plotted.
 Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  536

Plot Viewing Window

Defining a Plot

1. To enter Define Plot Mode, choose the Define Plot button in the ribbon (or Plot 
Define Plot from the menu bar). This will activate the Define Plot ribbon and provide the
Plot Select cursor .

Define Plot ribbon

2. Choose a Plot from the drop down list in the Plot to Define field.

3. Select up to five bus or branch items to plot. Remember that new items can be selected,

without deselecting others, by holding down the shift key. Choose Add button or
Remove button to add or remove items from the Plot.
 Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  537

4. Click on the Plot to Define field and choose another Plot, until all desired items are assigned
to one plot or another.

5. To clear the selections on a plot choose Clear button. To clear the selections on all

plots choose Clear All button.

6. To exit Define Plot Mode choose Close button on the Define Plot ribbon.

Performing a Frequency Scan

1. Choose Harmonic Options button and pick the Plot Output tab. In the Frequency
Scan Range section enter the range and step size of frequencies to be scanned. Choose the
Text Output tab and check any text reports for output. Then choose OK. You can also

access the dialog for Text Output formatting by clicking on Harmonics Reports button.

Note: The plot viewer is limited to 5000 data points per item. Therefore, selecting a very
small step size (ie .001pu) may limit the scan range and increase computer processing time.

2. Use the Define Plot button to add or remove items to be plotted.

3. Select the bus where harmonic current is to be injected, then choose Scan button from
the ribbon, (or Solve Frequency Scan from the menu bar) and EasyPower will perform
the frequency scan and open the plot viewer. Or just double-click the bus to injection on.

Shortcut: When the scan range is already set and there are no plots defined, you can
automatically plot the voltage for a bus by double-clicking on that bus.

Plotting Results

Even though EasyPower opens the plot viewer automatically, there are many aspects of the
plot window that are user controlled.

Viewing Plots

Similar to other windows, the Plot Window has scroll bars which function as described in
"Moving Around the One-line". The zoom buttons are also available for viewing plots, and
they work as discussed in "Zooming In and Out".
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  538

To view any of the ten different plots, just click on the tab for that plot. The default is to
show only a few of the tabs. Click on the arrow keys to the left of the tabs to scroll through
the other tabs.

Scrolling Through Plot Tabs

To view a separate Y-axis for each curve, choose Y-Axis (Format Y Axis) button from
the Plot ribbon, go to Appearance tab of Format Y-Axis dialog and select the check box for
Multiple Y-Axis field. To toggle whether data is viewed or just the plot, choose the
checkbox Data View. To view more of the data window, use the vertical splitter window
cursor to drag the window boundary one way or the other. Change column widths by using
the column resizing cursor or by using the Format Plot Data dialog box.

Changing Column Boundaries

Selecting data is performed by using the same method as the device library. Selected data
can be copied to the clipboard and then pasted into other applications.

Formatting Plots

The Format group in the Plot ribbon has several buttons for matting the plot. Each
command: Data, Title, Plot Area, X Axis, Y Axis, Legend, and Curves, opens a different
dialog box for customizing that respective area.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  539

Format Curves Dialog Box

These dialog boxes can also be opened by double-clicking on the area to be formatted. For
instance, double-clicking on any of the curves opens the Format Curves dialog box, and
allows formatting of one or all of the curves.

A right mouse click in either the plot or data area will bring up a context menu for that area
containing the Format and View commands.

To change the default settings, open the appropriate format dialog box and change the
desired parameters. Then click the Default button in the lower-left corner. Any changes
made will be reflected in all new plots.

Printing Plots and Data

Quick Access Toolbar

If the plot viewer is open, choose Print button from the Quick Access Toolbar. The
Print Plot dialog will appear.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  540

Print Plot Dialog Box

The Print Plot dialog box is similar to the others discussed in Printing and Plotting (Chapter
8). However, the radio buttons in Print What choose whether to print Data or Plots.
EasyPower gives the option of printing multiple plots at the same time.

When Data is selected, the Scaling field will be inactive. If Plots is selected, Scaling
remains active, and the plot size (full, ½, or ¼) is determined by the radio buttons.

Current Flow

Clicking on (Single Point Current Flow) button or (All Point

Current Flow) button in the Harmonics ribbon will output equipment currents and bus
voltages. A Single Point Current Flow is a current flow with a single harmonic source
injected on user-defined bus at the magnitude, angle and frequency set in the Control tab of
the Harmonic Options dialog. An All Source Current Flow will consider every harmonic
source in the system which has that selected frequency.
 Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  541

Performing a Current Flow

1. Choose Harmonics Options and select the Control tab. In the Harmonic Current Flow
section, enter the current flow frequency to be injected. Choose the Text Output tab and
check any output text reports. Then choose OK.

2. Select the bus for source current injection.

3. Choose (Single Point Current Flow) and EasyPower will display the bus voltages
throughout the system, in either kV or per-unit. Select the One-line Output tab of the
Harmonic Options dialog to set the kV type display.

4. Choose (All Point Current Flow) and EasyPower will inject harmonic currents
at the specified frequency for every harmonic source in the system which contains that
frequency in its harmonic spectrum. These currents will be injected at the magnitude and
angle specified in the Harmonics tab of the source equipment item. Buses do not need to be
selected prior to solving. The output will again be kV or per-unit as selected.

Summation

Summation analysis performs a system solution using injected harmonic currents from each
harmonic source defined. Results are accumulated over all available injection frequencies
and presented on the one-line and in text reports.

Most of the remaining toolbar buttons control which results of Summation are displayed on
the one-line.

Performing a Current Summation

1. Select a section of the one-line.

2. Choose Summation button in the ribbon (or Solve Summation from the menu bar)
and only the results for the sections selected will be displayed.

These results are stored so viewing is as fast as clicking different toolbar buttons. To solve
for summations of all harmonic contributions, choose button without selecting any item
on the one-line.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  542

Choose the Text Output tab of the Harmonic Options dialog box to select the different
summary report options.

Branch Currents

Branch currents results consist of ITHD, IRSS, and IT Product. The calculations
are:

1/ 2
H 
 
2

I THD =  I pu-sys  * 100% (Percent)

 h 1 

1/ 2
 2

= I RATING  +  I h  
H
2
I RSS (Amps)
 h 1 

2 1/ 2
 
IT Product =  0.25 * I RATING  +  I  TIF 
H
2 2
h FACTOR  (Amps)
 h 1 

Losses and Derating

Losses and derating of branch equipment consists of Losses, Transformer

Derating via ANSI/IEEE C57.110-1986, K Factor , and Conductor Derating.
The results are displayed at the center of a branch item. The calculations for these figures of
merit are:


    *  R   * Base MVA
H
MW Losses =  I RATING pu-sys * R1pu-sys +  I h pu-sys
2 2
h pu-sys (MW)
 h 1


    * X  * Base MVA
H
MVar Losses =  I RATING pu-sys * X1pu-sys +  I h pu-sys
2 2

h pu-sys (Mvar)
 h 1

1 + P  EC-R

1 + P 
Transformer Derating% = *100% (Percent)
EC-R * K - Factor

 I  h 
h 1
h
2 2

K - Factor = (dimension less)

I Rating
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  543

The K-factor equation is based on UL 1561, and differs slightly from the IEEE 519 K-Factor
which in turn is based off of ANSI C57.110. In the K-Factor equation above, the value IRating
is the transformer name plate rating and Ih is the current magnitude for each harmonic.

Bus Voltages

Voltage results are displayed at the right end of a bus and consist of VTHD, VRSS,
Telephone Interference Factor, and VSUM. These are calculated using:

 
1/ 2
H 2
VTHD =  Vh pu-sys  * 100% (Percent)
 h 1 

 
1/ 2
 H 2
VRSS = V1pu-sys +  Vh pu-sys 
2
* kVBase (kV)
 h 1 
1/ 2
 
  +  V  TIF
2


H
2
 0.25 * V1kV
2
kV FACTOR 
 h 1 
VTIFpu = (dimensionless)
VRSSkV

H
VSUM = V1pu-sys + V
h 1
h pu-sys (Per - unit)

Notes on Voltage Displayed

When the Harmonics Options Control is set to calculate based on Positive Sequence, the
voltage THD values displayed are positive sequence values. When the option is set to
calculate based on Positive Sequence with Zero Seq. Triplens, the voltage THD values
displayed are zero sequence values.

The phase voltage for systems with harmonics zero sequence currents can be calculated from
the sequence voltages:

Vph = (V1 + V2 +V0) / 3

 Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Analysis Results  544

Plotting Bar Charts

Once you have defined plots, the plot viewer will open displaying bar charts whenever
Bar Chart button is chosen. The bars show the per-unit voltage for defined buses and per-
unit current for defined branch items at the respective harmonics.

Plot Viewer Showing Bar Chart

1. Choose Harmonics Options button in the ribbon (or Tools Harmonic Options in
the menu bar) and pick the Plot Output tab. In the Summation Bar Chart Range section
enter the range and step size of frequencies to be analyzed. Choose the Text Output tab and
check any text reports for output. Then choose OK.

2. Use the Define Plots button to add or remove items to be plotted.

3. Choose Bar Chart button in the ribbon (or Solve Summation Bar Chart from the
menu bar). EasyPower will display bar charts.

4. Format plots if desired.

Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Harmonics Options  545

Harmonics Options
Harmonics Control

Choose Harmonics Options button in the ribbon (Tools Harmonics Options from
the Menu bar), and pick the Control tab to specify various parameters for controlling the
behavior of the harmonic analysis routines.

Summation Fundamental V&I: Choosing Calculated from Power Flow will cause the
fundamental voltages and currents calculated in the Power Flow to be used for Summation
calculations. Choosing User Defined activates that field allowing the user to enter a per-unit
fundamental voltage and causing the fundamental current to be determined by the
Fundamental Amps setting in the Harmonics tab of the equipment dialog boxes.

Harmonic Current Flow: This field specifies the frequency for Single Point Current
Flow or All Source Current Flow calculations.

Summation/All Source Network: All solutions will use positive sequence unless Pos Seq
with Zero seq triplens is chosen, in which case the solution for the 3, 6, 9, etc. harmonics will
use the zero sequence/network.

Scan/Single Point Injection: Magnitude is defined in either Amps or Per-unit. The Angle
of the current being injected may also be entered. For Network you can choose to have the
network solved based on the Positive Sequence or the Zero Sequence.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Harmonics Options  546

Control tab of the Harmonics Options Dialog Box

Transformer Branch Side: For items using a pi-model impedance representation (cable,
transmission lines, and transformers), the branch side currents may differ. Choose either the
From or To, indicating which branch side to use for determining item losses, K-factor and
derating. Frequency scans are also affected by this choice, where the current value plotted
for a branch is selected here.

Summation Thresholds: VSUM, VRSS, and K-Factor violations can be highlighted on the
one-line using threshold values.

Harmonics One-line Output

To specify parameters which control how results are displayed on the one-line, choose
Harmonics Options, and pick the One-line Output tab.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Harmonics Options  547

One-line Output tab of the Harmonics Options Dialog Box

Show Units: Enabling this displays the units of the one-line results.

Show THD Per-unit in Percent: When this is enabled, the THD values are displayed in
percent. Otherwise they are displayed in Per-Unit.

Global Decimal Precision: This sets the number of digits past the decimal point for values
displayed on the one-line. This is applicable for all values except voltages.

Bus Voltage Precision: This sets the number of digits past the decimal point for bus
voltages displayed on the one-line.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Harmonics Options  548

Branch Side: Display branch flows which are "From" the bus, "To" the bus, or both "From"
and "To" the bus.

Bus Voltage: The output can be displayed in either V(LL), kV(LL) or Per-unit.

Current Unit: Current can be displayed in Amps, Per-unit (system base), or Per-unit
(equipment rating base).

Losses Unit: Choose either “kW and kVAR” or “MW and MVAR”.

Harmonics Text Output

To select output report types choose Harmonics Options, and pick the Text Output tab.

You could also click on the Harmonics Reports button.

Text Output tab of the Harmonics Options Dialog Box

Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Harmonics Options  549

Current Flow Report: By checking Current Flow Report, a text report will be generated
whenever a Single Point Current Flow or All Source Current Flow is performed. This
report will contain bus voltages and angles, as well as equipment currents and angles.

Summation Detail: The Summation Detailed Report contains a list of each bus and its
attached equipment items along with the output analysis related to each item.

Summation Spectra: When Summation is chosen, the Summation Spectra Report will
contain a list of buses with per-unit voltages and branch items with per-unit currents. All
harmonics present will be listed, insignificant amounts will be represented with a zero value.

To obtain a report of all harmonic sources, choose the drop down arrow below button in
the ribbon and choose Query (Edit Query from the menu bar) Then check Item Types
(Motor, Load, Motor Control Center, Panel Schedule), choose Output Item Selection, then
in the Advanced tab pick Load Class Any and Load Type Harmonic.

Summation Summary: Choose one or more of these reports, or choose All Reports to have
EasyPower create the complete report list.

Bus Voltage: The output can be displayed in either V(LL), kV(LL) or Per-unit.

Current Unit: Current can be displayed in Amps, Per-unit (system base), or Per-unit
(equipment rating base).

Plot Output

The Plot Output tab lets you control the Frequency Scan plots and the Summation Bar Chart
plots.

Y-Axis Frequency Scan Units

Plot Bus Output: Allows you to specify the unit for frequency scan Y-axis. The choices are
kV(LL), Vpu, Ohms, Zpu, Rpu, Xpu, and Angle (Deg).

Plot Branch Current: Allows you to specify the unit for frequency scan Y-axis for branches
such as cables and transformers. The choices are Ipu and Amps.

Y-Axis Bar Charts Units

Bus Voltage: Allows you to specify the unit for Summation Bar Chart Y-axis. The choices
are Vpu, V(LL) and kV(LL).
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum Harmonics Options  550

Branch Current: Allows you to specify the unit for frequency scan Y-axis for branches such
as cables and transformers. The choices are Amps, Per-unit (system base) and Per-unit
(Equipment rating base).

X-Axis: You can set the x-axis units to either frequency in hertz or harmonic multiple.

Harmonics Options Plot Output dialog

Frequency Scan Range: These fields control the Start and Stop points and the Step size for
frequency scans. Be aware that a data point will be generated and output for each step.
Since the plot output is limited to 5000 data points per curve, choosing a very small step size
may limit the scan range.

Summation Bar Chart Range: When plots are defined, choosing Summation will open the
plot viewer and display bar charts. These fields specify the bar chart range.
Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum DC Effects in Harmonics  551

DC Effects in Harmonics
In Harmonics, we have the following behavior from DC components:

 A Rectifier provides a harmonic injection on its input or load side.

 An Inverter, if specified as “Harmonic” will be a harmonic source injection on its output

with NO SINK; i.e. the source to reference bus admittance is not built into the network.

 An Inverter, if specified as “Linear” will be a SINK with its source admittance added to
the network on the output of the Inverter.

 No harmonics are simulated on any portion of a DC network.

Chapter 13 Harmonics With Spectrum DC Effects in Harmonics  553
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Overview  554

Chapter 14 Coordination With

PowerProtector
Overview
EasyPower PowerProtector Coordination includes multiple easy-to-use graphical tools to
solve protective device coordination problems. Using the data stored in the Device Library,
EasyPower can plot time-current characteristics (TCC) curves of protective devices as well
as the damage curves of other devices. Individual plots can be coordinated with each other
and with the short circuit analysis results. Selection of the type and settings of the protective
devices can be made using the coordination features.

Coordination Focus

After you complete entering data of protective devices in the one-line diagram, you can plot
their TCC curves. To do so, choose Coordination button in the ribbon (or choose
Analysis  Protective Device Coordination from the menu bar). When you enter the
coordination focus, the Coordination ribbon will appear. When you plot a TCC the TCC
ribbon will appear.

Coordination Ribbon

Coordination ribbon

TCC Ribbon

TCC ribbon
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Short Circuit Analysis in Coordination Focus  555

TCC Status Bar

The TCC Status Bar indicates the following settings:

Grid Snap Status: Shows “SNAP” if grid snapping is on. See “The Snap Grid” on the 8th
page of Chapter 2 for more information.

Fault Type: Displays the selected fault type.

Calc Method: Calculation method selected in Tools  Options  System dialog.

Voltage: Either kV or per-unit.

Coordinates: Displays the coordinates of the cursor arrow on the time-current curve by
current (amperes) @ time (seconds).

Short Circuit Analysis in Coordination

Focus
Basic ANSI short circuit calculation procedures are provided in the coordination focus. The
calculated short circuit currents can be used in TCC plots to clip the TCC curves of devices
or to simply indicate their coordinates.

Fault Bus: To fault a particular bus or a number of buses, select the bus(es) in the one-line,

and then choose Fault Bus button in the Coordination ribbon (or Solve Fault Bus
from the menu bar). The fault currents will be displayed. For details on short circuit
procedures, please see Chapter 4- Short Circuit Technical Reference. To fault all buses,
simply choose the fault command without selecting any bus on the one-line.

Calculate Remote Bus Voltage and Current: After faulting a single bus you may view the
resulting voltage and currents on any other bus in the one-line diagram by selecting the bus
and choosing the drop down arrow below the Fault Bus button to select on the button
Remote V and I command. To view the voltage and current of a number of remote buses
you may either select all the desired buses at once or continue to select and choose the
Remote V and I command one after another. The remote bus values that appear on the
window will be cleared when you fault another bus.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Coordination Options  556

Viewing Remote V & I

Line End Fault: You can perform line end fault on a branch by selecting a breaker/fuse at

the end of the branch and clicking on the drop down arrow below the Fault Bus button
and choosing Fault Line End.

Coordination Options
You may specify some features of TCC appearance using the Coordination Options. When

you are in Coordination focus, choose PDC Options (Coordination Options) to open
the dialog box. The Coordination Options will not be available when the TCC plot window
is open.
 Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Coordination Options  557

General

Coordination Options dialog box

TCC Defaults: Check boxes to confirm commands with pop-up dialog and to show title
block on new TCC plots.

- Confirm when creating blank TCC: When you plot a TCC without selecting any equipment, a
blank TCC will be created. This checkbox allows you to bring up a message when a blank
TCC is being created.

Message box for blank TCC

- Show Title Block on new TCCs: Allows you to show or hide the TCC title block while
creating a new TCC. Once the TCC is created you can choose to show or hide the title block
using the Title Block checkbox in the ribbon.

- Allow multiple TCC windows: When this option is checked, you can create multiple TCC
windows. When this option is unchecked, creating a new TCC will close the previously
 Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Coordination Options  558

opened TCC window. Before closing the previously open TCC, you will be asked if you
want to store the TCC.

- Synch TCC one-line colors to TCC curve colors: When this option is checked, the protective
device symbols on the one-line window will have the same color as the corresponding curves
in the TCC window.

- Show cable ampacity tick marks: When this option is checked, a tick mark will be placed at
the top of the TCC to indicate the ampacity of the cable.

- Show selective CD table tick marks: When this option is checked, a tick mark will be placed
on the TCC at the amp value up to which a pair of protective devices (typically LV breakers)
are selectively coordinated as per tables published by manufacturers.

Blank TCC Settings: Sets the default base voltage for calculating current on the new blank
TCC.

Default One-line Box Position: Sets the location of the one-line box on the lower left or
upper right corner of the TCC plot area when making a new TCC plot.

Default TCC Short Circuit Currents: The short circuit currents used in the TCC may be
“User-Specified” or “Calculated from SC”. If you select “User-Specified”, then you must
enter the short circuit current in edit fields provided in the Short Circuit tab of device data
dialog box or the temporary data dialog box of the protective device in order to use TCC
clipping or show the tick mark on the TCC plot. When you select “Calculated from SC”,
EasyPower calculates the maximum fault current that may pass through the protective
device. The selection for TCC Short Circuit (SC) Currents can also be made in the TCC
Options dialog box.

Sequence of Events Display: You can choose to either show the absolute trip times or the
trip time difference from the next downstream device for a faulted bus on the one-line.

Create Sequence of Events Report: With this option checked, this creates the Sequence of
Events report when a bus is faulted in the Coordination focus.

TCC Curve Styles

You can change the default format (color, lines, weight) of the curves that are plotted for
various devices. To change the default color of any device, select that device in the Curve
window of the dialog, and choose the Change… button for the order of the curve. The order
of the curve, 1, 2, 3, etc., is the first, second, third, etc. curve plotted for the same type of
device.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Short Circuit Options  559

TCC Curves Style tab of Coordination Options

Auto Coordination

The Auto Coordination options are discussed in the Chapter 20 on Auto Coordination. This
option is available if you have the SmartPDC (auto-coordination) feature.

Short Circuit Options

To configure the short circuit type, calculation methods, units, and appearance of results in

the one-line diagram, choose SC Options button from the Coordination ribbon. The
procedures are the same as Short Circuit Options in the Short Circuit focus. Please see
Chapter 4 - Short Circuit Technical Reference for details.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector TCC Options  560

TCC Options
TCC options can be used in the coordination focus to select the type of fault, the short circuit
values, the calculation type, and the output pictures in the TCC plots. When the TCC

window is open, choose TCC Options button from the TCC ribbon.

SC Control tab of TCC Options dialog box

Short Circuit Control

Fault Type: Four different types of faults are available during a short circuit analysis. The
default is 3 Phase which is generally used to determine the highest available currents for
equipment duty comparisons, and relaying. You may also select 3Phase fault by clicking on
the button on the TCC ribbon. The other types, Line to Ground (button ), Double
Line to Ground (button ), and Line to Line (button ) are generally used for specialized
relaying applications or system trouble shooting. The green dots in the buttons indicate the
ground fault type.

TCC Short Circuit (SC) Currents: The short circuit currents used in the TCC may be
“User-Specified” or “Calculated from SC”. If you select “User-Specified”, then you must
enter the short circuit current in edit fields provided in the Short Circuit tab of device data
dialog box or the temporary data dialog box of the protective device in order to use TCC
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector TCC Options  561

clipping or show the tick mark on the TCC plot. When you select “Calculated from SC”,
EasyPower calculates the maximum fault current that may pass through the protective
device. The selection for TCC Short Circuit (SC) Currents, can also be made in the
Coordination Options dialog.

Driving Point kV PU: System fault point voltage in per-unit. This value defaults to 1.0 per-
unit.

X/R Calculation Type: Short circuit calculations are based on one of three methods: ANSI
Standard, Standard Complex or Characteristic Current method calculation. The ANSI
Standard method uses a separate R network for the interrupting duty (2-5 cycle) network to
determine a conservative Z/R ratio. This ratio is then used as the Thevenin equivalent fault
point X/R ratio for determining the appropriate breaker contact parting time multipliers and
NACD ratios. Current and voltage calculations are based on a complex (R+jX) network
reduction. Both the momentary (1/2 Cycle) and 30 cycle calculations use a complex network
reduction for all voltage, current, and X/R ratio calculations.

The Standard (non-ANSI) calculation uses a complex network reduction for all momentary,
interrupting duty, and 30 cycle voltage, current, and X/R ratio calculations.

The Characteristic Current Method (CCM) calculates the dc component of each branch based
on phase angle of the current flowing in it and then sums the dc component is each branch
contributing to the fault current. The ratio of the total dc to the total ac is used to determine
the equivalent X/R at fault point. Branch current flows having different current phase angles
(X/R ratios) will have the current peak at slightly different times before the first-half cycle.
To simplify calculations, the dc component is taken at 0.5-cycle for all branches using the
expression in equation below.

IDC = 2 IAC RMS SYM exp (- /|X/R|)

After each dc component is determined and totaled, the equivalent X/R ratio is found from
the equation below.

Equivalent X/R = -/ ln ( IDC /  IAC RMS SYM / 2)

The CCM method provides a conservative approach to obtain the fault point X/R ratio and
appears to do the best overall job without being over-conservative.

Reference: Parise G., “A new approach to calculate the decaying AC contributions to short-
circuit: the ‘characteristic’ currents method”; IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications,
Vol. 31, No. 1, January/February 1995.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector TCC Options  562

TCC One-line

The contents of the Short Circuit One-line Output tab of the TCC Options dialog box are the
same as those described for Short Circuit Options dialog box. Please see Chapter 4 - Short
Circuit Technical Reference for details.

Arc Flash Hazard Analysis in Coordination Focus

You can perform arc flash hazard analysis in coordination focus by selecting the desired bus
to fault and choosing the (Arc Flash) button. For this application, you must have the arc
flash hazard feature enabled in your software.

Insert SC Tick Mark

To insert user defined short circuit tick marks on the TCC plot, click on the (Insert SC
Tick Mark) button on the TCC ribbon.

Insert SC Tick Mark dialog box

Current: You can select Symmetrical or Asymmetrical current to choose the appearance of
the symbol that represents the short circuit current type. A symmetrical current appears as an
arrow with unfilled head. An asymmetrical current appears as an arrow with solidly filled
head as shown in the figure below. These are default settings and can be edited by formatting
tick marks. You can also save the format as new default tick marks.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector TCC Options  563

Short Circuit Tick Marks

Fault: Selection of fault type affects the time coordinates of the tick mark. The choices are
Momentary for half cycle, Interrupting for 5 cycles, and 30-cycle. The short circuit tick mark
may be dragged vertically within a limited distance.

Short Circuit Current: Enter the short circuit current value in kilo amps. The tick mark
will be placed on the TCC plot at the specified current value times the ratio of short circuit
reference voltage to TCC plot reference voltage.

Reference Voltage: Enter the reference voltage at the short circuit point in kilo volts. The
tick mark will be placed on the TCC plot at the specified current value times the ratio of short
circuit reference voltage to the TCC Scale reference voltage.

Formatting SC Tick Marks

To format a short circuit tick mark to the desired shape, color and size, click on the drop

down arrow below the Format TCC button and choose SC Tick Mark from the list.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector TCC Options  564

Format SC Tick Mark

You can also set the default format for tick marks by choosing the default button.

Arcing Current Tick Mark

Arcing current tick mark represents the current through a protective device for an arcing fault
(Arc flash). You can insert an arcing current tick mark by right clicking on the TCC curve
and choosing from the context menu Insert Arcing Current tick Mark. Before you insert
this tick mark, you will first need to fault a bus on the one-line window. This command is
available only if your program has the ArcFlash feature.

LV Breaker Series Coordination Tick Mark

As per manufacturers’ publications, LV Breakers in series may be selectively coordinated in

the instantaneous trip region up to a certain short circuit level although the TCC plot may
indicate otherwise. If two breakers plotted on the TCC have series coordination data
specified in the library, then a tick mark will appear to indicate the maximum short circuit
current up to which coordination is possible. If a breaker style is changed in a TCC plot, the
TCC will need to be plotted again to get the new series coordination tick mark.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Plotting a TCC Curve from a One-Line  565

Series Coordination Tick Mark

Plotting a TCC Curve from a One-Line

To plot a Time Current Characteristic (TCC) Curve from a one-line diagram, you must first
enter the Coordination focus of EasyPower. You can enter the Coordination focus by
clicking on the Coordination button in the ribbon (or by going to Analysis 
Protective Device Coordination in the menu bar.) After entering the Coordination focus,
the one line diagram will still appear, but the Coordination ribbon will appear in place of the
Home ribbon. Select the device(s) for which you would like to plot TCC Curves. You may
select only one item by left clicking the mouse button over the item that you would like to
select. If you would like to select more than one item, hold down the Control [Ctrl] key and
select items individually by left-clicking the mouse over the items that you would like to plot.
You may also hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse, forming a box, that
contains the items you would like to plot. After selecting the items that you would like to

plot, click on the Plot TCC button. Clicking this button will cause the TCC Curve of
the selected items to appear next to a one-line diagram of the selected items. If there is not
sufficient data to plot an item, the following dialog box will appear:
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Plotting a TCC Curve from a One-Line  566

Dialog box indicating an item not fully specified

Clicking on yes will produce a report informing you of areas not specified for the item(s) that
coordination is unable to plot and the data that is missing. Clicking on no will prevent
EasyPower from plotting the TCC Curve for that item. If more than one item is selected to
plot TCC Curves, then only the items not fully specified will be eliminated from the plot.

Error Report for Unspecified Data

If all data is entered correctly, then Coordination will plot TCC Curves for all items selected
as shown below.

One Line Diagram of Note about TCC One Line Diagram

Selected Items for Curve’s Device of Selected Items
Coordination for Coordination
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Plotting Motor Starting Curve on TCC  567

TCC Curve

Title Block

Coordination Plot of TCC Curves

Plotting Motor Starting Curve on TCC

You can plot motor starting curves on the TCC plot by:

 Select the motor and other items you wish to include in the TCC plot.

 Choose Plot TCC command.

Plotting Individual Motor Curve

The plot below shows a motor starting curve for a 50 HP motor as well as a solid state trip
curve for a breaker. The motor starting curve parameters are specified in the Motor Data
dialog. After plotting the TCC, you can access the Temporary Motor Data dialog and change
the parameters for the motor starting curve.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Plotting Motor Starting Curve on TCC  568

Motor Thermal
FLA Limit Curve

Maximum
Allowable
Stall Time

Acceleration
time

Locked rotor
current

TCC Plot for 50 HP motor start

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Plotting Motor Starting Curve on TCC  569

Temporary Motor Data dialog for TCC

Plotting Grouped Motor Curve

When plotting the starting curve for grouped motors, you need to specify the largest motor
size in addition to other data required for individual motors. The plot assumes that the largest
motor is starting and the rest of the motors are already operating at steady state. Therefore the
current in the plot is calculated as follows:

During Acceleration:

Total Amps = Locked rotor amps of largest motor + FLA of the rest.

After Acceleration:

Total Amps = Total FLA of all the motor.

 Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Plotting Motor Starting Curve on TCC  570

Grouped motor data

The following plot shows the starting curves of two motors:

1. Grouped motor with total of 500HP and largest motor of 100 HP.

2. Individual motor of 100 HP.

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Plotting Items in MCC and Panels  571

TCC Plot for 100 HP individual motor and 500 HP grouped motor

Plotting Items in MCC and Panels

You can plot the following items in an MCC:

 Incoming cable and protective device (breaker or fuse).

 Load type specified as “Motor w TCC”: you can plot the motor, cable and feeder
breaker.

 Load type specified as “Load w TCC”: you can plot the cable and feeder breaker.

 Feeder cable and breaker/fuse for feed to sub-MCC or sub-panel.

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  572

You can plot the following items in a panel:

 Incoming cable and protective device (breaker or fuse).

 Feeder cable and breaker/fuse for feed to sub-panel.

You can disable plotting individual items inside the MCC by unchecking the box for Plot
Item in the data dialog for these items.

Editing TCC Curves

Dragging TCC Curves

After plotting TCC Curves, you can modify the curves by using the mouse to drag the curves
to the desired position. Place cursor over the TCC plot you wish to modify. Move the cursor
along the curve until a double headed arrow appears. Then drag the curve to the desired
position. Dragging is only effective when the double headed arrow appears. A note will
appear telling you which device corresponds to the TCC Curve to which you are dragging
your original curve. The note will tell you the Manufacturer, Type, Style, Device Name, and
the information being modified. An arrow will also appear that shows how far you have
dragged the curve from its original position.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  573

Dragging Curves in Coordination

Dragging the TCC Curve will change different information for different devices. Dragging a
Fuse on a TCC Curve will change the size of the fuse, as shown below.

Dragging a Fuse TCC

Dragging an MCCB on a TCC Curve will change the instantaneous setting of the MCCB, as
shown below.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  574

Dragging an MCCB

Dragging a Relay on a TCC Curve can change several things about the relay including time
dial setting, instantaneous pickup, and instantaneous delay of the relay. All of these features
are shown below.

Dragging a Relay

Once you have dragged the curve to the desired position, please note that the temporary data
specifying the device has been changed to match what has been plotted. You may save the
changes that you have made by dragging the curve by placing your mouse over the curve that
you wish to modify, right click, and choose “Edit Temporary”. This will bring you to a
Temporary Data dialog box that will allow you to temporarily change the data in order to do
further evaluation. If you try to exit the TCC Curve screen without saving the data that you
have modified it will prompt you to save the data.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  575

Note: If you are not able to drag the desired curve, use the Temporary Dialog box to
modify, as discussed below.

Dragging Pickup and FLA Tick Marks

When you plot relay curves, a tick mark appears near the top of the curve representing the
pickup amps. Similarly, a tick mark representing the FLA appears when plotting the thermal
limit curve of a transformer. When several tick marks are present about the same ampere
value or when they are overlapping, the tick marks for different devices are automatically
arranged at different vertical positions such that the tick marks are clearly seen. This is done
only to obtain better visibility, and has nothing to do with the time coordinate.

You can drag these tick marks up or down within a decade of time interval. To drag the
pickup or FLA tick marks take the cursor arrow over the tip of the tick mark so that a double-
headed vertical arrow appears. Drag the tick mark up or down by clicking on the left mouse
button. Note that dragging with a horizontal double-headed arrow will result in changing the
pickup value itself.

Cursor becomes
Double-headed
arrow
Range for
Tick mark for dragging FLA
Transformer and Pickup Tick
FLA Marks

Tick mark for

relay Pickup
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  576

Arranging FLA and Pickup Tick Marks

Curve Insertion

Inserts equipment curves into a TCC plot. These curves do not have to correspond to a one-
line equipment item.

While in a TCC plot, choose New Curve button (Insert  Curve in the menu bar) to
choose which curves to add. Alternatively, you can right mouse click on the TCC and select
from the menu as shown in the figure below. When you select an equipment, the dialog box
will appear. In the equipment dialog you will also need to specify an equipment ID name
besides selecting the device type, style, settings or parameters.

Inserting Curve into a TCC

Add Item Existing in One-line

Insert an existing component onto one-line without recreating TCC plot.

To add an existing item’s curve to TCC plot, the item will need to be added to one-line. The
curve will then appear in the TCC plot. To insert an existing item into one-line, select the
component the item is connected to in one-line. Choose New Curve button to view
choices, and select Existing Item… from the list. Alternatively, you could right click on
the item in the one-line window and choose Insert Existing Item from the context menu. (In
the menu bar style, you can choose Insert  Existing Item from the menu). Then click the
check box corresponding to item or items you would like to add to the one-line. The selected
items added to the one-line are now seen in TCC plot.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  577

Selecting Item to Insert

To add an item not connected to an existing component, you will need to add all the branches
until that item is available to be added.

Deleting Curves

To delete a curve from the TCC plot, select the curve and press the Delete key form the
keyboard. If the device is shown in the one-line of TCC plot, the device will not be removed
from the one-line. After you delete a curve you cannot “undo” the delete action.

Deleting Devices from One-line of TCC Plot

To delete a device from the one-line of the TCC plot, select the device in the one-line and
press Delete key from the keyboard. Alternatively, you can use the Edit  Delete menu.
Deleting the device from the one-line will also delete the corresponding curve from the TCC
plot. You cannot “undo” the delete action.

Inserting Shifted Curves

Shows dotted shadow curve of protective device curves based on transformer phase shifting.
To account for the phase shift due to connection type (e.g. delta/star) and unbalanced fault
the “shadow” of a curve can be plotted with a shift in the current by 58%, 87%, 115% and
173%.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  578

Inserting Shifted Curve 58% Shifted “Shadow” Curve (dotted line)

To insert a shadow curve for any equipment curve, you must first select the curve. Right
click on the curve and from the context menu choose Shift Curve  Insert and then select
the desired percentage.

Shifting Curves by Modifying

You can also shift curves by a user specified percentage. This is done to coordinate devices
in parallel paths with an upstream or downstream device. For example, if there were 2
parallel cables with one limiter each of 100A rating the effective total would be 200A.
Therefore you can shift the 100A fuse curve by 200%. You can also shift fuse curves along
the time axis to account for pre-loading of fuses.

Modify Curve Shift

The following user specified curve shifting methods are available:

 Left/Right: You can shift the curve along the current axis by the specified
percent.

 Up/Down: Shift along time axis.

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Editing TCC Curves  579

Show Original Curve

If you drag the protective device settings in the TCC plot to new values and would like to
view the original settings at the same time, you right click on the curve and choose Show
Original Curve from the context menu. A shadow curve will appear with the original
settings as shown in the picture below.

Show Original Curve

Changing Overlapping Curve Position

You can change the position of overlapping curves by bringing it front or sending it back.
This can be done by clicking the right mouse over the curve you desire to reposition, and
selecting the desired command (Bring to Front or Send to Back). This feature is applicable
only for opaque curves, and not for semitransparent curves.

Changing position of opaque curves

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Insert Difference Calculator  580

Insert Difference Calculator

Using Difference Calculator

Using the Difference Calculator, you can calculate the difference in trip time between the
TCC plot of any two protective devices at any given current value. First select any two TCC
curves on the TCC plot. To select two curves, hold down the [Shift] key and clik on the two

curves in the TCC window. Then click on the button (Insert Time Difference
Calculator) button in the TCC ribbon. When you insert a difference calculator, a red vertical
line will appear representing a current value as shown in the figure above. Next to it the
calculated time difference will appear along with a time difference marker. The time
difference marker is a line that looks like a square bracket (]). You may drag the red line to
calculate the time difference at various current values. To calculate the minimum time
difference between the two curves, select the time difference marker and choose the drop

down arrow below the button. From the list, choose Calculate Min Difference. The
red line will move to the current value at which the minimum time difference occurs between
the two curves. Alternatively, you may also click the right mouse button after selecting the
time difference marker and select Calculate Min Difference from the context menu..
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Temporary Data Dialog Boxes  581

Temporary Data Dialog Boxes

Double-clicking on certain devices while you are in the Coordination focus will bring up a
dialog box containing a subset of the dialog box you see from the Database Edit focus.
These dialog boxes let you temporarily change specific coordination data during an analysis.
Temporary changes while in analysis can be saved to the database. The changes can be
saved to the base-case or in a scenario using Scenario Manager.

Temporary Data Dialog boxes are similar to Device Data Dialog boxes described in Chapter
12 (Database Technical Reference). However, a few special features are available in the
Temporary Data Dialog boxes. The Appearance Tab is one special feature available in the
Temporary dialog box. This tab allows you to designate the color, pattern and border style of
the TCC Curves with which you are working. The Appearance tab appears on the temporary
data dialog box only when the TCC Plot mode is active. Other specific features are
described by equipment type. For your reference, the item’s ID name and connection
information is shown at the top of the dialog box. In some cases, other reference information
is also shown (e.g. the Base kV for a fused switch).

Temporary Data Dialog Box

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Temporary Data Dialog Boxes  582

You can access the temporary data dialog box in several ways:
 Double click mouse on the device in the one-line in coordination focus.
 Double click mouse on the device in the one-line panel in TCC Plot mode.
 Double click mouse on the TCC plot of the device.

Temporary Data Dialog Boxes and TCC Plots

When you adjust the device settings by dragging the curve on the TCC plot, the new settings
appear on the temporary data dialog boxes. Similarly you can modify the TCC curve by
adjusting the settings in the temporary data dialog boxes. A convenient way of working with
temporary dialog boxes is to drag it to a side so that the TCC plot can be seen completely,
and to press the button after making the changes. The effect of modification can
be seen immediately on the TCC plot and the dialog box will still be open.

Dragging a TCC allows you to change the settings of a particular device but not the
manufacturer, type or style of device. With temporary data dialog boxes you can change the
manufacturer, type or style of device.

Temporary Data and TCC Plot

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Temporary Data Dialog Boxes  583

TCC Clipping

TCC Clipping allows you to clip the curves by the maximum short circuit current the device
may see. This is a useful tool since we do not need to coordinate devices at currents higher
than the maximum short circuit current for the device. The field TCC Clipping is available in
the Short Circuit tab of equipment data dialogs. You can select the type of fault current to
clip the TCC plot. If you choose “<None>”, then the curve will not be clipped. Other
choices are “Momentary”, “Interrupting” and “30 Cycle”. In order to clip a TCC you must
specify the Default Phase Short Circuit values.

Short Circuit tab of Temporary Fused Switch Data dialog box

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Save and Store  584

Example of TCC clipped at 100A

Saving Temporary Data

When you exit the Coordination focus and change to Database Edit mode, the temporary data
becomes lost and the device data defaults to the original data stored in the Database Edit
mode. In order to keep the changes you made in the temporary data, you will need to save
the file. When you save, you will be prompted with the message shown below. Select “Yes”
to keep the changes. The settings selected in the temporary data will replace the existing
database.

Save temporary changes

Save and Store

You may save work done in Coordination by clicking on EasyPower button and choose
Save As… from the list. A dialog box will appear that will prompt you to choose a location
to save your work. It will also prompt you to name your file. Notice that one-line drawings
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Open and Delete TCC  585

are saved as .dez files. If your file has already been saved with a name to a location, you may
save by going to choosing Save in the list or by clicking on button in the Quick Access
Toolbar (top left).

Another feature available in Coordination is the Store feature. The Store feature allows you
to store information about TCC Curves while EasyPower is open. To store a TCC, choose

Store TCC button in the TCC ribbon. If you do not save the one line diagram that you
are working with, then the information that you select to store will not be saved after closing
EasyPower. However, if you save the one-line diagram that you are working with, you may

still view and alter the TCC Curves that you have stored by choosing Open TCC button
and selecting the desired stored TCC.

Store TCC As dialog

Open and Delete TCC

You can open stored TCC Curves by choosing Open TCC button in the Coordination
or TCC ribbon. The Open TCC dialog will appear as shown in the picture below.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  586

Open TCC dialog

Choose the TCC that you would like to open and click on the Open button. If you would
like to view the original TCC Curve that was stored, click on “Open Using Stored Curves
(Read-Only)” at the bottom of the dialog box. Selecting this option will only allow you to
view the TCC Curve as it was saved. You will not be able to alter the TCC Curve in any
way. If you choose “Open Using Latest Settings”, then the latest data that you have entered
for the device will be plotted. You will also be able to drag and modify the TCC Curve if
you choose this setting.

Formatting Appearance
Title Block

Double-clicking on any area inside the Title Block will allow you to edit it. This will cause
the Format Title Block dialog to appear. The Title Block Data tab allows you to enter
Company Name or Logo, TCC Curve Name, Revision Number, Date, Text Alignment, and
any comments that you would note in the Title Block. Clicking on Browse will allow you to
insert a company logo from another file. EasyPower supports logo in various formats such as
formats .bmp, .gif, .jpg, etc. By clicking on the Default… button, you can set default
information for the title block that will affect all new TCC that you create in the future. You
can enter default data in the dialog and then click on the Default…button.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  587

Format Title Block dialog

The Appearance tab of the Title Block dialog allows you to edit the border color, thickness,
and line style. It will also let you choose a color for the Title Block under “Fill Color”. This
tab will also allow you to choose default settings for the border and coloring as described
above for choosing default settings. Remember that you must click on Apply before the
default settings will be stored for future use.

Insert a One-Line Diagram

You may also insert a one-line diagram onto TCC Curve plot by choosing the checkbox
in the TCC ribbon. This will insert the One-Line diagram of the items plotted
onto the TCC plot. You may move the One-Line diagram to any location on the TCC plot by
clicking with the mouse anywhere on the box and dragging it to the desired location.

You can format the one-line on the TCC plot by clicking on the drop down arrow below the

Format TCC button in the ribbon and choosing One-line on TCC from the list.
You can format the border and the fill color. To save the format as default setting, press the
Default button.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  588

Zoom and Pan

There are several ways to zoom and pan on the EasyPower Coordination curves. If you have
a mouse with a spin wheel, the simplest way is to scroll forward, and you will zoom in, and if
you scroll backward, you will zoom out. The other way is to use the zoom buttons in the
ribbon. The Zoom Out Full button stores to the original zoom size, with the time axis
visible from 0.01 seconds to 1000 seconds.

Zoom buttons in the TCC ribbon

You can also control zoom from the slider bas and the zoom buttons on the right side of the
status bar as shown in the picture below.

Zoom control slider

You can pan the TCC by moving the mouse while pressing the spin-wheel of the mouse. The

cursor will change to symbol to indicate the window is being panned.

Inserting Notes

Coordination will also let you insert a note on the curve with a leader that will point to the
area on the curve that you want to note. To do this, you can click on the drop down arrow

below the Note button in the ribbon and choose Note with Leader. Place the text
box where you would like for the note to appear, and drag the red portion of the leader to the
part of the curve that you would like to note.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  589

A note with leader

You can also add a note without a leader on the curve by clicking the Note button in the
TCC ribbon.

A note without leader

You can adjust the font, color, leader, and border of your note by right-clicking on the note
and selecting Format Note. Use the tabbed screens to navigate between font, leader, and
appearance to change the desired settings. Right-clicking on the note will also give you
options to cut, copy, paste, delete, and edit the text of the note.

Format Plot Area

EasyPower Coordination will allow you to format several aspects of the TCC plot area. You
can format the plot area by right clicking on a blank area in the TCC and selecting Format
Plot Area... Format Plot Area dialog will appear with multiple tabbed screens.

Plot Area options

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  590

Format Plot Area dialog box

The tabbed screens are:

Appearance: Allows you to change the border size, color, style, weight, and background
color.

TCC Curves: Formats all curves in the TCC plot as Opaque or Semitransparent. When
curves are selected as opaque, the individual curves can be brought forward or sent
backward. The same is not applicable when the curves are semitransparent.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  591

TCC Curves tab of Format Plot Area dialog

(a) (b)

TCC Curves: (a) Opaque; (b) Semitransparent

Grid: Allows you to change the line style and color for both x- and y- major and minor axes.

Scale: Allows you to set the Reference kV and scale for the curve.

Font: Allows you to change the size and color of the font around the curve.

Scale

By changing the Reference kV and Current Scale values in the Scale tab of the Format Plot
Area dialog box, you can modify the current scale (or the horizontal axis) of the TCC plot.
The time scale remains the same.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  592

Scale tab of Format Plot Area dialog box

Reference kV: Select the voltage level through which the current is to be seen. The method
of calculation is similar to those involving transformation ratios. When the TCC of a high
voltage device is plotted with the Reference kV set to the low voltage, then the current shown
in the plot will be equal to the actual current times the ratio of device voltage to Reference
kV.

Current Scale: Current Scale sets what one unit on the current axis equals to. Changing the
scale shifts the TCC plot left or right. The choices for Current Scale values are 0.1, 1, 10,
100, etc. Unlike Reference kV, changing current scale does not change the current values in
the TCC plot.

Example 1: Reference kV and Current Scale

One-line Example with two voltage levels

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Formatting Appearance  593

In the figure above, the transformer TX-1 is protected by the high voltage fuse FS-1 at 11kV
and the low voltage breaker BL-1 at 0.4kV. The TCC plot of both devices is shown below.
Notice that the current values in the TCC plots are higher for reference voltage of 0.4kV.

TCC Plot for Current Scale of 10 and Reference kV of 0.4

TCC Plot for Current Scale of 1 and Reference kV of 11

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Copy to Metafile  594

Default

Press the Default button at the bottom of the Format Plot Area dialog box to change the
default settings to current settings. The settings for Appearance, Grid and Text tabs are
stored as default. However the settings in the Scale tab will not be stored as default.

Default dialog box for Format Plot Area

Copy to Metafile
Copies the TCC graphics into a metafile format. You can copy/paste the TCC graphics into
MS Word or other Windows program. While viewing the TCC click on the Copy button.
Storing TCC graphics as metafile allows editing of text, format, etc. and uses less file space
than bitmaps.

Reports
TCC Coordination Report

A TCC Coordination Report is a spreadsheet containing the description and settings of trip
devices. You may include any number of trip devices in your TCC Coordination report.
TCC Coordination report can be generated from the coordination focus one-line view or from
the TCC view. In the one-line diagram, select the trip devices you wish to include in the

TCC Coordination report. From the ribbon choose the Report (Coordination Report)
button. An example of coordination report is shown in the figure below. If no items are
selected in the one-line diagram, then all the trip devices are listed in the report. When you
create a TCC Coordination Report from the TCC view only the items plotted can appear in
the report.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Reports  595

Coordination Report

You can format the report using the ribbon commands or right click on the report to choose
the Report Options…. The Report Options dialog allows you to specify the format for
various texts, Company name, report width, etc.

Select Report Category to Format: Choose the text type from Page Title, Page Header, Table
Main Header, Table Sub Header, Table Text and Table Banding. For each category you can
choose a different format of font.

With the coordination report you have the following actions: Print, Print Preview,
Copy, Select All.

 Copy copies the selected range to the clipboard. You can then paste the contents
into other programs.
 Print sends the report to the specified printer.
 Print Preview creates a preview of the coordination report.
 Select All selects the entire report.

You can configure the data that appears in the TCC Coordination Report by clicking on the
Report Config button. The TCC Report Configuration dialog will appear as shown in
the picture below.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Reports  596

TCC Report Configuration dialog

Configuring Reports

To add a new report configuration, choose the Add… button. In the dialog, choose the type
of device first (relays, fuses, SST’s, etc.), then check or uncheck the column header names.
You can save the new configuration, using the Save As button.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Print  597

Print
To print from the coordination focus, click on the printer icon button on the Quick
Access Toolbar or click on EasyPower button and choose Print from the list.

Name: Choose the printer you wish to use. You can also print to a “pdf” file using software
such as Adobe PDF/Acrobat.

Properties: Clicking on this button opens the dialog to control printer properties such as
page size, orientation, color quality, etc, that are available through the printer driver.

TCCs to Print: This box contains the names of the TCC that have been stored and TCC
windows that are currently open. TCC that have been created but not stored are provided
with asterisk (*) prefix. Check the desired TCCs to print.

Print What: This allows you to select whether you would like to print only the One-Line
diagram, only the TCC diagram, or both the One-Line diagram and the TCC Curve and
which side you would like for each to be on, whether the left or the right. Also notice that as
you select a different setting under the “Print What” heading, the diagram to the immediate
right shows what will be printed.

Print Settings: You can print stored TCC plots using latest settings or using stored curves
(image).

Always Print Title Block: When this is checked, the printout will include the title block
regardless of whether the title block is visible on the monitor. When this is unchecked, the
printout will appear exactly as shown on the monitor, with or without the title block.

Number of Copies: Number of pages to print for the same TCC.

Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Zone Selective Interlock (ZSI)  598

Print TCC dialog box

Zone Selective Interlock (ZSI)

You can model ZSI for LV breakers. The library has data in the Solid State Trip section for
ZSI of some LV breakers. To model the ZSI settings of any breaker, the data must be defined
in the library. The settings on the breaker may depend on the design of the breaker.
EasyPower models ST ZSI, Ground ZSI and Self Restrained breakers. Check the appropriate
checkboxes in the ZSI tab of the LV Breaker Data dialog. When the In and Out terminals for
ZSI are jumpered, the breaker is Self Restrained.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Zone Selective Interlock (ZSI)  599

Typical ZSI settings on breakers

The sample one-line below shows the trip zones for various circuit breakers. The breaker in
Zone 3 in this example is the most downstream. In the ZSI tab of the breaker’s dialog, the
breaker in Zone 2 needs to entered as Upstream Breaker. Similarly, breaker in Zone 1 needs
to be entered as the Upstream Breaker for Zone 2 breaker.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Zone Selective Interlock (ZSI)  600

Note: before filling out the ZSI data in the LV Breaker Data dialogs, it is important to make
sure that the other settings in the Solid State Trip have been filled out for all upstream
breakers.

TCC Plots for ZSI Breakers

When you plot TCC for breakers with ZSI tripping, the initial plot will show the restrained
trip times. This allows for viewing whether the breakers are selectively coordinated during
restrained mode. This is a requirement for ZSI tripping to be effective in selective
coordination. After the TCC is plotted, you can then fault buses on the one-line window, one
at a time. EasyPower will detect the fault zone and will show the unrestrained trip for the
breaker in the zone.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Maintenance Mode Trip  601

Maintenance Mode Trip

Some circuit breakers have an additional instantaneous trip setting that can be turned on
during maintenance work. In the case of faults this results in fast tripping, limiting the arc
flash incident energy. During normal operation this trip is set to “Off” for selective
coordination. This additional trip may be known as Maintenance Mode or have commercial
names such as ARMS, Quick-Trip, RELT, etc.

While performing coordination of protective devices, the maintenance mode trip needs to be
set “Off”. While you are in Coordination focus or Short Circuit focus, you can turn the
Maintenance Mode setting “On” or “Off” through the right mouse click context menu as
shown in the picture below. This will affect the selected breakers. You can also the highlight
the breakers that have Maintenance Mode setting “On”.

Maintenance Mode context menu

Global TCC Changes versus TCC

Dependent Changes
This section describes the difference between global TCC changes and TCC dependent
changes. In general, global TCC changes affect all open TCCs, while TCC dependent
changes affect only the active TCC.
Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Global TCC Changes versus TCC Dependent
Changes  602

Global Changes

Equipment Trip Settings: This includes all equipment setting information (i.e.
manufacturer, pickup, instantaneous ...etc.).

TCC Dependant Changes

Short Circuit Settings: This includes tick mark checkboxes, clipping specifications, and all
user-entered kA values.

TCC Plot Checkboxes: This includes Phase Trip, Ground Trip, Fuse, Mtr O/L…etc. See
the picture below for an example.

Example Plot Checkbox

TCC Appearances: This includes TCC curve colors, styles, and line types. This also
includes TCC plot area formatting, title block formatting ...etc.

TCC Options: These primarily relate to which short circuit currents are used in a TCC.
This includes the option to choose between User-Specified values and Calculated from
Short Circuit values.

Global and TCC Dependent Issues

In general, data entered from the main one-line becomes the user-defined default for new
TCC plots.

Changes made to equipment trip settings affect all open TCCs. This includes modifications
made from both a TCC and the main one-line. This is because device settings are universal
rather than plot dependent.

Modifications made to short circuit information while inside a TCC affect only the active
TCC. This allows different short circuit currents to be used for phase and ground
coordination plots.
 Chapter 14 Coordination With PowerProtector Global TCC Changes versus TCC Dependent
Changes  603

 If user-specified values are used in a TCC instead of calculated short circuit values, the user-
specified values entered from the main one-line become the assumed currents for all new
TCCs.

 If calculated short circuit currents are used in a TCC, the user-specified values are ignored.
Instead, the settings in the TCC Options determine which short circuit calculations are used.

Note: When using the user-specification option to enter TCC short circuit values, we
recommend specifying from the main one-line which currents new TCCs will use by
default. This will save time by ensuring all new TCCs will contain the currents most often
preferred (typically 3-phase momentary currents). If a particular TCC requires different
currents (i.e. grounding currents), this can be modified for that individual TCC.

Changes made to plot checkboxes affect only the active TCC. This allows different curves to
be used for phase and ground coordination.

Note: Much like the short circuit currents, we recommend specifying from the main one-
line which curves to plot by default. This will save time by ensuring that all new TCCs plot
the curves most often used. If a particular TCC requires different curves plotted (i.e.
ground trip curves), this can be modified for that individual TCC.
Global TCC Changes versus TCC Dependent Changes  605
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Calculating Arc Flash Hazards / Currents  606

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis

Arc flash hazard analysis is carried out in the short circuit focus. The analysis yields
results as required by NFPA-70E. NFPA requires specification of the arc flash boundary
(AFB) and the incident arc energy at a probable working distance. Various analysis
options are available such as the type of calculation method, working distances, units, type
of enclosure for equipment, and use of arcing time. Results may be viewed on the one-line
as well as in spreadsheet reports. The arc flash report is an interactive spreadsheet, in which
users can change some values and the results will change automatically. You can create
Work Permits for working on energized equipment that recommends the appropriate PPE
based on arc flash hazard analysis and the nature of work.

This tutorial demonstrates how to use several of EasyPower’s arc flash analysis features.
EasyPower ArcFlash is integrated with the program’s short circuit analysis module.
Therefore, the interfaces are similar.

Calculating Arc Flash Hazards / Currents

To perform an Arc Flash analysis, you must be in the Short Circuit focus.

1) Open the file “Protection-1.dez” in your SAMPLES directory.

2) Enter Short Circuit focus by choosing the Short Circuit button in the ribbon. A
Short Circuit ribbon appears.

3) Press the (Arc Flash) button.

4) Press the Fault Bus(es) button. The program displays the arc flash boundaries
(AFB), incident energies, and recommended personal protective equipment (PPE) for
operation near the energized buses in the system. For example, a PPE requirement of
three (3) is recommended (based on IEEE 1584) for any person working within 18
inches of energized BUS-4.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Calculating Arc Flash Hazards / Currents  607

Arc flash results on one-line

Fault Interface

When arc flash hazards are analyzed with EasyPower, the program determines the
theoretical arcing current for each faulted bus. This information is then used to calculate the
hazard for each faulted bus.

In EasyPower, different interfaces are available to fault buses while in Short Circuit focus:

1) Press the Fault Bus(es) button without selecting any bus. This runs a batch fault on
all the buses in your system. This will provide arc flash hazard results for all buses.

2) Double-click on a single bus to fault a bus.

3) Select a bus or multiple buses (so they turn green) and press the Fault Bus(es) button.
To select a single bus, click on it with the left mouse button. To select extra buses, click on
each bus while pressing the [Shift] key.)
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Options  608

Unbalanced Fault Types

Three-phase fault currents are typically used for the arc flash analysis. The IEEE-1584
equations indicate that these provide conservative arc flash results for most systems. By
default the program does not allow unbalance fault arc flash calculations. You can perform
unbalanced arc flash fault through Advanced Arc Flash Hazard Options.

Arc Fault Currents

When the Arc Flash button is pressed, all calculations automatically default to ½ cycle
momentary results. This is based on the assumption that the arc flash is initiated by user
actions (screw driver, dropping tools, etc) and not random insulation breakdown leading to
a longer-term arcing fault. This provides the most reasonable and conservative results for
the initial arc blast. Interrupting and 30 Cycle currents can also be used. Arc fault current
can be set in the Arc Flash Hazard Options through the combo box Calculate Arc flash
Using. The fourth option is the Integrated method. The Integrated method takes into
account the decreasing currents from motors and generators and also from multiple sources
being switched out through protective devices tripping. The Integrated method is the
closest to a realistic scenario.

Arc Flash Hazard Options

To select arc flash hazard options, choose SC Options from the ribbon and go to the
Arc Flash Hazard tab.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Options  609

Short Circuit Options – Arc Flash Hazard tab

Standard: You can select any of the following standards for calculation method.

 IEEE 1584

 NFPA-70E 2009 D.5, D.6+

 V7.0 Enhanced

 V6.0 Enhanced

The IEEE 1584 equations are applicable up to 15kV. Above 15kV the program uses the
Ralph Lee method and the distance “X’ factor and the gap from the library do not apply.
This method has the distance exponent of 2.

Worst-Case Arc Flash Hazards: EasyPower obtains the arcing time from the upstream
protective device of the faulted bus. The program uses the coordination feature
PowerProtector™ to calculate the trip time for the estimated fault current passing through
the protective device. This is the most accurate method. This option works only if you
have the PowerProtector™ feature included in your EasyPower.

Output: Select one of the options in the drop down box to evaluate the arc flash hazard
results for any bus in the following ways:

 Including Main: This option yields the results for fault on the bus bar itself. If a
main breaker or fuse protects the bus and this breaker or fuse is connected to the
bus, then the arcing time would be equal to the trip time for this main device. If a
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Options  610

worker is working on the bus or on the load side of the main breaker/fuse, then this
option of output applies. However, this option of output should not be used if
energized work is required on the line side of the main breaker/fuse.

 Excluding Main: This option yields the results for fault on the bus bar excluding
the tripping effect of the main breaker. This option of output is applicable to
energized work on the line side of the main breaker of the bus. The remote
upstream trip device is used to calculate the arcing time.

Panels typically have the main breaker, bus bar and feeder breakers housed inside
the same enclosure. Opening the front cover would expose a worker to arc on the
line side of main breaker. To simulate this hazard, “Excluding Main” option should
be selected, since thedevice to interrupt faults would have to be an upstream device.

 Both (Incl & Excl Main): This option yields the results for fault on the bus bar as
well as on the line side of the main breaker/fuse, provided the bus has a main
breaker/fuse attached on the upstream side.

 Detailed: This option evaluates the results for the bus bar as well as the load side
terminals of all protective devices attached to and downstream from the bus.

Use the worst case of the following arcing currents: IEEE 1584 recommends using two
scenarios – one with 100% of estimated arc current and the other with 85% of estimated arc
current. This is due to the fact that arc currents may be random and usually vary by some
proportion about the estimated value. For inverse-time over-current characteristics of
protective devices, the arcing time is greater for smaller currents than it is for larger
currents. Since the incident energy of arc faults is more sensitive to arcing time than it is to
arc currents, it is necessary to obtain a more accurate arcing time. IEEE 1584 therefore
proposes taking 85% of the initial estimate of the arc current.

EasyPower allows you to consider two scenarios of arc currents. EasyPower calculates
both scenario and automatically reports the worst case of incident energy, thus providing
conservative results.

The IEEE 1584 recommended 100% and 85% of arc current are default values. You may
change these ratios by typing in the fields or using the buttons to increase or decrease the
values.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Options  611

When 100% or the upper value yields greater arc flash incident energy, then the text results
are displayed in black in the Arc Flash Report spreadsheet. When 85% or the lower value
yields greater incident energy, the text is displayed in pink.

Max Times (sec): The value specified as the Max Time is the maximum time that the
program will use to calculate the incident energy. If the trip time calculated as per device
TCC is less than the specified maximum time, then the device trip time will be used. If the
device trip time exceeds the specified maximum time, then the Max Time value will be
used. The default maximum time is 1000 seconds.

Calculate Arc Flash Using: Specify the fault current used during arc flash calculations.
Choose between Momentary, Interrupting, and 30 Cycle fault currents or the integrated
method. The EasyPower defaults are set to momentary (1/2 cycle) currents. This is based
on the assumption that the arc flash is initiated by user actions (screw driver, dropping
tools, etc) and not random insulation breakdown leading to a longer-term arcing fault.
Interrupting and 30 Cycle currents can also be used. The fourth option is the Integrated
method. The Integrated method takes into account the decreasing currents from motors and
generators and also from multiple sources being switched out through protective devices
tripping. The Integrated method is the closest to a realistic scenario.

Display Working Distance in: You can select the units for working distance from any of
the following. This affects the results such as arc flash boundary as well.
 Inches
 Feet
 Inches/Feet: Displays results in both inches and feet.
 mm
 Meter
 mm/Meter: Displays results in both mm and meters.

Working Distances (Below) Apply to: You can specify separate working distances for
open air and enclosed space. Select the appropriate choice to view or edit the values in the
spreadsheet. Typically for medium voltage, switches and fuses at open air may be operated
from a greater distance.

Arc Flash Spreadsheet: Check this box to obtain spreadsheet report of arc flash hazard
calculations when faulting buses.

Show: Fault current displayed in arc flash hazard report.

 Branch currents: Displays fault current seen by upstream trip device.

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Options  612

 Bus Currents: Displays the total fault current at the bus faulted. This value
includes downstream contributions.

Arc Flash Threshold: Check this box to obtain a report of buses that exceed the arc flash
threshold incident energies specified in the options. You can specify any incident energy
as the threshold for various voltage levels by typing in the values in the spreadsheet in the
Arc Flash Hazard options. All equipment exceeding the hazard thresholds will be
displayed in red on the one-line.

Threshold Incident energy: For every voltage level you can specify the threshold
incident energy. Equipment with incident energies exceeding the threshold values will be
highlighted in red in the one-line output and they will be reported in the Arc Flash
Threshold Report. This provides instant notification of a danger condition. All equipment
with incident energies exceeding the threshold values will be displayed in red on the one-
line.

Default Working Distances: For every voltage level, you can specify up to five working
distances for which the incident energy will be provided in the Arc Flash Report. In the
one-line output, results will be shown only for the shortest working distance, which will
have the highest incident energy.

Advanced Arc Flash Options

Advanced arc flash options

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Options  613

Include 1584 CL Fuse Calcs: Use IEEE 1584 equations for current limiting fuses to
determine incident energy. This method calculates the let through arc flash incident energy
based on bolted fault currents and UL class of fuse. Equations are available for classes L
and RK1. This is applicable only for low voltage systems. The fuse equations are effective
only when the fault current is high compared to the minimum fault current required for
current-limiting. When the fault current is well below the current-limiting range of the fuse,
the standard arc flash equations are used. When the 1584 CL Fuse Calculations are used for
any bus, the Arc Flash Hazard Report will show the bolted fault current but not the arc
current and the trip times, since these values are not used to determine the incident energy.

Note: The IEEE 1584 CL fuse equations provide incident energy at 455mm. The default
low voltage working distance in the program is 18 inches (which is equivalent to 457.2
mm). Therefore the results for 18 inches will be slightly different from the results for
455mm.

Arc Flash Boundary Energy (cal/cm2): NFPA-70E specifies two types of arc flash
boundaries. When the arcing time is less than 0.1 second, the boundary is at a distance at
which the incident energy is less than or equal to 1.5 cal/cm2. When the arcing time is
greater than 0.1 second, the boundary is at a distance at which the incident energy is less
than or equal to 1.2 cal/cm2. These are the default values. You may change them if
necessary.

Remote Current Calc: EasyPower supports two different methods for determining the
current through protective devices during an arc fault:
 Equation: The arc current equation is used to calculate the remote currents. The
equation is as per the Standard selected in the options and uses the equivalent
bolted fault current through the device. This is the legacy method and is used for
one-line files created in EasyPower/EasySolv 8.0.2.200 series or earlier
versions.
 Ratio: The remote current is calculated by multiplying the bus arc current by the
ratio of remote bolted fault current to bus bolted fault current. This method is
the default method for new one-lines created.

Minimum Relay Trip time: This is the minimum trip time used for relays. The default
value is 0.016s. If the relay trip time in a TCC shows less than this specified value, this
minimum time will be used in arc flash. One-lines created in versions previous to 8.0.2.305
will show a minimum relay trip time of 0.01 seconds. Users can change this option.

Traverse Count: This is the maximum number of buses the program will traverse
upstream from the faulted bus to find the trip device. The default count is 12, to optimize
for speed. You can increase the Traverse Count value if necessary. Examples of where it
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Specifying Arc Flash Hazard Data for Equipment  614

may be necessary to increase the Traverse Count are: long distribution feeders with
multiple taps, busways (bus ducts) with multiple bus plugs, underground distribution
systems, wind farms, etc.

NFPA 70E 2009 Annex D.8 Hazards

NFPA 70E 2009 Annex D.8 describes estimating the incident energy for overhead open air
systems 1kV to 800kV. These calculations are based on open air phase-to-ground arcs.

Apply to Open Air Buses: Enables calculations for open air buses based on Annex D.8
method.

Minimum kV: When “Apply to >1kV” is selected, all open air buses with voltage greater
than 1 kV will use this method of calculation. When “Apply to >15kV” is selected, only
buses greater than 15kV will use this method.

Working Distances:
 Calculate based on NFPA 70E: Annex D.8 method specifies the working
distances for various voltages. These working distances are used. The working
distances specified in the Arc Flash Hazard Options or the Bus Data dialog or
the work permit library are not used.
 Use EasyPower AF Options values: The working distances as per Annex D.8
are not used. The working distances used are as per the Bus Data if specified
otherwise as per arc Flash Hazard Options.

Fault Types: These are multipliers used to estimate the incident energies for 3-phase fault
and line-to-line faults for arcs on open air buses.

Specifying Arc Flash Hazard Data for

Equipment
You can specify the arc flash hazard data for any equipment by storing the data in an
associated bus. The bus may represent the terminals or conductors. Equipment like MCC
and Panel also are modeled like buses and they store data for arc flash hazard. To access
the dialog for Bus Data, enter Database Edit focus by clicking on the button in the
ribbon and double click on the bus. For details on Bus Data, refer to Chapter 12 Bus Data.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Specifying Arc Flash Hazard Data for Equipment  615

Specifying Equipment Type

The Specifications tab of Bus Data dialog has a field called Type. This describes the type
of enclosure for arc flash calculations. The equation or parameters for evaluating the
incident energy and flash protection boundary may differ with the enclosure type. The
choices available are Switchgear, MCC, Panelboard, Switchboard, Open Air, Conductor,
NEMA E2 Contactor, Int Switches, VFD, ATS, UPS, Others, etc.

Specifying Equipment Type for arc flash hazard

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Specifying Arc Flash Hazard Data for Equipment  616

Specifying Arcing Time

Bus Data-Arc Flash Hazard dialog

Arc Flash For This Bus: You can choose to calculate arc flash hazards for this bus,
exclude this bus from analysis and reports, or force arc flash incident energies to a
specified value.

 Calculated: By default, when the bus is faulted, arc flash hazard analysis is
performed using the calculation method specified in the Short Circuit options.

 Excluded: No results are provided on the one-line or in the arc flash hazard report.
Typical applications for this option are nodes, tap-offs (junctions), where energized
work is not required.

 Forced to: With this option you can enter your own assumed values of incident
energies. This can be used for systems with very low voltages and fault levels, at
which using industry standard equations may not be practical. The arc flash
boundary for this option is set to 4 feet.

AF for this bus forced to

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Report  617

Trip time for this bus:

 Predefined Fixed Times: Obtains arc clearing time for the bus from the library
default values. This is not the trip time calculated from the TCC of the upstream
protective device on the one-line.

 User Defined Times: With this option you can specify the protective device
clearing time for each bus. The details of arcing time for the bus can be specified in
the fields – Device ID, Relay Function and Time (s). When this option is selected a
time must be specified.

 TCC Times (Automatically Calculated): This option uses the trip clearing time
from the TCC of the upstream protective device in the one-line to provide arc flash
hazard results. The trip clearing time of the equipment where the device is a relay
controlled breaker is the sum of the breaker mechanism opening time (e.g. 3,5, 8
cycle), the relay trip time, and any time entered into the Relay Data, System, Aux
Time data field.

Specifying Working Distances

Working Distances: You can select one of the following for Working Distances for any
bus equipment.

 Default from Options: The working distances specified in Sort Circuit

Options/Arc Flash Hazard dialog is used. Typically most buses would use this
global working distance.

 User Specified: For special cases, when the working distance for any
equipment is different from the global working distances in Short Circuit
Options dialog, User Specified distances can be entered.

Arc Flash Report

Arc flash hazard reports are generated in the form of a spreadsheet. The following figure
shows a report for faulting “BUS-4” in the sample one-line “Protection-1.dez”. This report
shows the arc flash results for only the protective device upstream to the bus. When “Bus
Hazards (Incl Main)” is selected in Short Circuit Options  Arc Flash Hazard only the
significant upstream protective devices are reported.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Report  618

Arc Flash Hazard Report spreadsheet for “Bus Hazards (Incl Main)” option

The arc flash hazard report is an interactive spreadsheet. You will notice cells with blue
text under the columns Arc Gap, Bolted Fault (kA) and Arc Time (sec). You can change
these numbers to see the effect on the incident energies and arc flash boundaries. The
results on the spreadsheet will change automatically. This feature allows you to test for
different possible scenarios so that the most conservative estimates can be obtained.

Incident energy is reported for every working distance specified in Short Circuit Options.
You can specify up to five different working distances. This is particularly suitable when
hot sticks are used to operate devices from some distance. When you first open the Arc
Flash Hazard Report window, only the first working distance appears in the spreadsheet.
To view results for other working distances simply click on the button to the left of the
“Working Distance” column in the spreadsheet.

Arc Flash Hazard Report spreadsheet for “Detailed” option

As specified in Short Circuit Options, when 100% of calculated arc current or the upper
value yields greater arc flash incident energy, then the text results are displayed in black in
the Arc Flash Report spreadsheet. When 85% or the lower value yields greater incident
energy, the text is displayed in pink. In the above figure, the results for relay R-6 is shown
in pink. This shows that when incident energy for 85% of calculated arc current is higher
than that for 100% of calculated arc current. In printout of arc flash hazard reports, the
results for those devices for which the lower limit (85%) of the arc current is used, are
marked with an asterisk (*).

At times, it may be required to view both the one-line results and the spreadsheet (see
example below). This helps to analyze more closely. To obtain this view, press the [F8] key
on the keyboard.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Report  619

Viewing report and one-line results.

Spreadsheet Column Headings

Arc Fault Bus Name: This is the ID Name of the buses faulted. You can have single or
multiple (including all buses) faulted for arc flash analysis. MCC and panel schedules also
are presented as buses; this represents the main bus within the MCC or panel.

Arc Fault Bus kV: The voltage of the bus being faulted.

Upstream Trip Device Name: When a bus is faulted, EasyPower checks every protective
device for the current contribution to the fault. If the current passing through the protective
device is significant, then the results corresponding to the trip time of that device is
provided in the spreadsheet.

Upstream Trip Device Function: If the trip device is a relay, then the device function
name is provided in this column. Examples of device functions are: 51/50, 51N, 50G, 49,
etc.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Report  620

Equipment Type: Describes the type of enclosure specified in the Bus Data. The available
types are Switchgear, MCC/Panel, Open Air and Conductor.

Gnd: The “X” mark in this column indicates if the IEEE equation used the coefficient for
solidly grounded systems.

The zero sequence impedance for cables and busways are typically higher than the positive
sequence impedances. Therefore the line to ground fault currents can be smaller than three
phase faults at the end of a long line. When the line to ground fault current is much smaller
than the three phase fault current then the system can be considered “not effectively
grounded”. To determine if the system is effectively grounded, the program first performs a
single line to ground fault on A phase. The average per-unit voltage at B and C phases is
compared with the threshold specified in the Arc Flash Gnd Vpu field in the Options /
System dialog. If the average per-unit voltage is less than the threshold, the system is
considered to be effectively grounded.

Arc Gap: Gap between the phase conductors. This data is stored in the standard library.
The gap can be specified according to enclosure type and voltage. The text in this column
is blue indicating you can change the values. The results will change automatically.

Bolted Fault (kA): This is current passing through the trip device for a 3-phase bolted fault
at the faulted bus. If there is only one branch then the fault current is equal to the current
through the protective device. Otherwise, the current through the protective device is a
smaller value. If the protective device is across the other side of a transformer, then the
current flowing is scaled by the transformation ratio. The text in this column is blue,
indicating you can change the values. The results in the spreadsheet will change
automatically.

Estimated Arc Fault (kA): This is the estimated current flowing through the trip device,
which contributes to the total arc current. This value is used by the program to estimate the
trip time. For calculating the incident energy, the total fault current at the faulted bus is
used.

Trip Time (sec): Trip time for the protective device at the estimated arc current.

Opening Time (sec): Opening time for HV breakers or opening device after the relay trips.
This column is applicable only for relays. After the relay trips, the HV breaker takes this
amount of time to clear the fault. If the trip device is a fuse or LV breaker instead of a
relay, the trip time already includes the opening time so this column will be blank. There
are some exceptions that apply to this. Some relays already include the breaker opening
time in their trip curves. These are referred to as “SST Relays”. Examples are: Cutler-
Hammer Digitrip 1150V, Digitrip MCV, etc.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Report  621

In the Relay Data dialog, you can specify which breaker, fuse or switch is opened when the
relay trips. The opening time from the dialog of the switching device will be used. If the ID
name of the switching device is not specified, the opening time of the breaker right next to
the relay will be used. If there are no immediate switching devices, the program will
traverse upstream to find the first switching device.

Arc Time (sec): Total duration of arc fault. This is the sum of Trip Time and Opening
Time. The text in this column is blue indicating you can change the values. The results will
change automatically. If an Aux Time is specified in the relay dialog, the Arc Time
includes aux time, trip time, and opening time.

Estimated Arc Flash Boundary: The flash protection boundary distance in specified
units. This value corresponds to the trip device.

Working Distance: Approximate working distance in specified units. You can specify up
to five different working distances in Short Circuit Options. For each working distance
the incident energy will be calculated.

Incident Energy (cal/cm2): This is the incident energy from arc flash corresponding to the
trip device. The trip time associated with the trip device is used in the calculation.
However, the arc current or fault current used is the total fault current on the faulted bus
and not the current seen by the trip device. The rating of personal protective equipment
(PPE) worn by workers should be based on this value.

Required Clothing Class: This is the hazard/risk category as per NFPA 70E. Appropriate
PPE is recommended according to this class.

Opening Arc Flash Hazard Report in Excel®

You can open the arc flash hazard report in Excel®. To do so, click on the Open With
Excel button in the ribbon for the report. You can also right click on spreadsheet and
choose Open in Excel.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  622

Arc Flash Hazard Labels

Getting Started Printing Arc Flash Labels
Printing arc flash labels begins with performing arc flash hazard analysis in EasyPower’s
Short Circuit focus, through which arc flash hazards are analyzed and reported on the Arc
Flash Hazard Report. The interactive interface of the Arc Flash Hazard Report is the
platform from which Arc Flash Labels can be printed in EasyPower.

Label printing involves many different variables as illustrated here.

 Arc Flash Hazard Report – analysis results flow from this report into the printed
labels.

 Label Template – the template controls how labels are printed. Several templates
are provided with EasyPower to address different scenarios.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  623

 Label Stock – blank or partially pre-printed labels come from label manufacturers
such as Avery, Brady and DuraLabel. Some label stock comes die-cut in rolls for a
thermal printer, while some comes in sheets intended for use in a label printer.
Several pre-measured page layouts are available when printing labels which match
common label stock.

EasyPower’s label designer also enables the customization of a label template to meet your
specific needs.

Why use EasyPower label printing and design?

EasyPower’s arc flash label printing functionality pulls data directly from arc flash analysis
ensuring users can be confident that information printed on labels comes from industry
standard calculations built into EasyPower. The label design tool allows users to customize
the printed labels including layout, fields, text, fonts, colors, and images. This gives you
full control on how labels appear, to ensure your labeling requirements are met.

How to Print Arc Flash Labels

From the Arc Flash Hazard report, you can preview and print the labels from two different
paths.

1) Using the toolbar button

 Clicking on the Label button will display the label preview window with all of the
devices in the arc flash hazard report.
 Clicking on the down arrow of the label button provides different options of what to
print, including printing only the selected labels.

2) Using the Arc Flash Hazard Report context menu

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  624

To display the context menu, right click on the hazard report. From the context menu, you
can choose to print labels for all devices or only for the selected device

After choosing to print labels, the Label Print Preview window is displayed. From this
window you may choose which label template you want to use when printing your labels,
and choose a page layout which matches your label stock. Each label template is slightly
different and includes fields from the Arc Flash Hazard Report.

Pressing the Print button will allow you select the printer and send your label run to the
printer.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  625

Label Print Preview Window

The label print preview window is designed to help you quickly and easily print labels
based on the devices in the arc flash hazard report.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  626

Label Print Preview window reference

Print button Prints the label(s).
Label Comments Comment to use on each label.
Selects template to use from the current label template folder. The folder can be
Label Template changed by pressing the Load Templates button on the toolbar, or by changing the
setting in File Locations.
Selects how to layout labels on printed page. Use this field to choose from several
predetermined page layouts from different label manufacturers, or choose custom to
Page Layout
match printer and label stock that is not included in the list. Some label print stock
comes on one label per page, while others come with multiple labels on the same page.
Page settings give you fine grained control over the layout of your label stock to ensure
that you can reliably print to your labels on your printer. See section “How to Print
Custom Label Stock” for more details on items below.

 Page Size: Allows you to change the width and height to match the actual
page or spool size you will use to print the labels.
 Label Size: The actual size of each label on the page. Label size will
differ from the page size if the label is inset from the edge of the page by
some margin, or if there are multiple labels on a single page.
 Page Layout: If you label stock includes more than one label per page, use
this field to specify the number of rows and columns of labels on each
page.
 Page Margins: The inset from the top left corner of the page to where the
first label is situated on the page.
 Label Margins: When there are multiple labels per page, use the label
margins to specify the margin between labels on the page.
 Scale to Fit: If the template you chose does not match the size of the label
indicated in page settings, this box can be checked to can scale the label
Page Settings
template to fit the actual label size. If not checked, original dimensions of
the label template will be used to print the label.
 Center Label: By default, print starts based on measurements from the top
left corner of the label. Check this box to center the printed output within
the label.
 Label Outline: Check this box to display guides of where the labels are on
the page based on the specifications above. The label outline will only
show on the preview of the label and will not be printed.
 Units: Units used for page layout measurements above.
 Labels to Print: When label stock includes multiple labels on the same
page, these checkboxes can be used to control how the first page prints.
This allows for reusing a sheet of label stock if only a part of the labels
were used in the last print run.
 Label Rotation: Use the label rotation option to have EasyPower rotate the
label template to better fit your print stock. Labels can be rotated 90
degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, or left in their original layout. As
an alternative, many label printers also provide options to rotate labels in
the printer properties.
Shows the list of devices that will be printed. Any devices with checkmarks will be
Selected Devices printed; otherwise, no print. You can use “All” or “None” or select individually. You
can also override the number of copies of labels to print for each device.
Indicates the page number of the labels that will be printed and allows you to select
which page you are previewing. Depending on the devices selected and how many of
Page
the devices templates can fit into a page or label, the number of pages can dynamically
shrink or expand accordingly.
When checked, the preview window will automatically rotate the label for easy reading,
Auto Rotate regardless of print orientation. Checking this box can make reviewing landscape
oriented labels much easier.
Zoom Controls Zoom in or out on your label preview using the + or – buttons.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  627

Print Labels Toolbar

When this window is active, the Print Labels toolbar is displayed.

Action buttons on the Print Labels toolbar

Action Function

Loads pre-existing templates from your hard drive or network drive. You can use this
Load Templates
button to load templates from pre-existing versions of 9.0 to 9.5.
Prints the label(s). Refer to section “Setting up printers for printing labels” for information
Print
on setting up your printer drivers.

True Size Changes print preview to represent the actual size that will be printed

Fit to View Changes drawing to best fit the real estate of the drawing panel.

If the current label template needs to be modified before printing, you can access the label
Design Labels
designer through this button. The print preview window will be closed.
Use this button to activate a different window within EasyPower, such as the Arc Flash
Window
Hazard report window.

Example of Printing Arc Flash Labels

1) Open the Protection-1.dez sample file provided with your EasyPower installation
2) Press on the Short Circuit button in the toolbar to access the Short Circuit analysis focus.
3) Press on the Fault Buses button to initiate short circuit and arc flash analysis.
4) Press F8 to display the Arc Flash Hazard report.
5) Click on the Arc Flash Hazard report window to give it the focus, then press the Label button and the Label
Preview window will be displayed.
6) Select desired template from Label Templates drop down list.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  628

7) Select page layout that matches your label stock from Page Layout drop down list.
8) Review the labels to be printed.
9) If needed, click on Page Settings and adjust the page layout.
10) Once you are satisfied with the settings, click on the “Print” icon to start printing. Window will automatically
close afterwards.

How to Print Landscape Oriented Labels

Many varieties of Arc Flash label stock come in a landscape orientation, meaning that they
are wider than they are tall. Most label printers, however, deal with label measurements in
a portrait orientation requiring that labels be rotated when printing in order to print
correctly on the label stock.

EasyPower ships with several page layouts for common label stock which enable you to
easily rotate labels before sending them to the printer. Alternatively, you can use you
printer driver’s ability to rotate the labels to enable you to print to the desired label stock.
In this example, we will use EasyPower’s label rotation page layouts to rotate labels before
sending them to the printer.

1) From the Label Print Preview window, select the “Standard 4x6 multi-color” Label
Template.

2) In the Page Layout drop down list, choose “4x6” and your label will show like the image
below.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  629

3) Change your Page Layout to “4x6 90 degrees Clockwise” and note how your label
is rotated.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  630

4) Change the Page Layout once again to “4x6 90 degrees Counterclockwise” and note how
the label is rotated to the opposite direction.

5) After rotating your labels to the desired orientation, check the “Auto Rotate” checkbox to
display the label preview for easy reading regardless of rotation.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  631

6) Select the orientation which best matches your label stock and print a label.

7) Adjust the label rotation in EasyPower or use your printer driver’s settings to do the
rotation as needed if you don’t achieve the desired result.

Many of the standard page layouts offered with EasyPower come with these rotation
options for ease in printing. If you plan to use your printer driver to rotate the label, you
will likely achieve your best results by choosing the un-rotated version of the label page
layout, in this case the “4x6” option.

How to Print to Custom Label Stock

EasyPower ships with several pre-configured page layouts which match common label
stock, but you may use a label stock which is not already built-in. In this case, you need to
specify a custom page layout to match your label stock and this tutorial guides you through
that process.

In this example, we will look to configure a page layout using an 8.5 x 11 inch page
containing six 4 x 3 inch labels. Below is a picture of the layout of labels on the label stock
that we will match with our page layout controls.

1) From the Label Print Preview window, select the “Custom” option from the Page Layout
drop down list.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  632

2) Click on the Page Settings button to expand the Page Settings pane.

3) Specify the size of each page of labels in the Page Size fields. In this case, we are
configuring a page with is 8.5 inches wide and 11 inches high.

4) Specify the size of the label itself. In this case, we will specify a 4 inches wide by 3 inches
high.

5) Specify the number of rows and columns of labels. In this case we have 2 columns and 3
rows.

6) The page margins, or margins from the outside edge of the page to the edge of the label are
.2 inches on the left and .75 inches from the top

7) The label margins, or spacing between labels is a width of .1 inches and a height of .3
inches
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  633

8) Set Center Label and Scale To Fit to determine how you want selected template to fit
within the printed label.

9) To check how the template will be printed within your label area, check the Label Outline
checkbox. This will add a green dashed line onto the preview illustrating where the labels
are on the page. This outline will not actually be printed. The preview should look similar
to the following:

EasyPower will remember your custom page layout, for use the next time you print.

Customizing Label Designs

EasyPower has provided a number of pre-built label templates designed to work with
different types and sizes of arc flash label stock. While the templates provided cover many
different scenarios, EasyPower’s label designer enables you to modify labels or create new
ones to address: specific labeling requirements handle different types of label stock or meet
specific printer needs.

You can access the Label Design feature by:

 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  634

 Pressing the Design Labels button on the Print Labels toolbar when printing or
previewing labels.
 Pressing the Label > Design Labels… button from the Arc Flash Hazard Report
toolbar.

How to Create a Custom Label Template

Customizing a label template begins by selecting an existing label template to use as a
starter, and modifying it to meet your needs.

1) Start the label designer from the Print Labels or the Arc Flash Hazard Report toolbars.
When the Label Designer is displayed, you are presented with a list of the available label
templates and a preview sample (using currently selected Device) of the currently selected
template is displayed on the screen.

2) In the Label Designer window, click on the different label templates in this list to see a
preview of each of the different label templates available. The list of devices from the Arc
Flash Hazard report is also displayed here so that you can see how each label changes for
different equipment.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  635

3) Once you have identified which template you want to modify, press the Start Edit button on
the Design Labels toolbar. This will allow you make modifications to the label.

4) Modify the label to meet your needs. Test out the changes to the label by choosing
different devices from the Devices list to ensure that the label draws correctly under
different conditions.

5) When you are done, press the Save Edits As … button on the Design Labels toolbar to save
your modified template as a new template. You will be required to provide a unique file
name for the new template. Be sure to save the new template to the same folder to make
that template available when printing labels.

6) Press the Print Labels button on the toolbar to preview and print labels with the new
template.

Label Variables
Much of the text that appears on an arc flash label originates from the Arc Flash Hazard
Report or the equipment dialogs in EasyPower. These values are referred to as variables in
the label designer, and they can be included in text items, or used to change the appearance
of the label under different conditions.

Variable Name Notes

Arc Flash Analysis Day Day number of the date arc flash hazard report was generated. Example: for the
Number date July 15, 2013, the number returned is 15.

Arc Flash Analysis Month Abbreviation of the name of the month for the date arc flash hazard report was
Name Abbreviation generated. Example: for the date July 15, 2013, the value returned is Jul.

Arc Flash Analysis Month Name of the month for the date arc flash hazard report was generated. Example:
Name Full for the date July 15, 2013, the value returned is July.

Arc Flash Analysis Month Month number of the date arc flash hazard report was generated. Example: for
Number the date July 15, 2013, the number returned is 7.

Arc Flash Analysis Year Month number of the date arc flash hazard report was generated. Example: for
Number the date July 15, 2013, the number returned is 2013.

Arc flash boundary in the unit specified in options. As per NFPA 70E, this is
Arc Flash Boundary
the distance at which the incident energy is calculated to be 1.2 Cal/cm2.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  636

Arc flash boundary in specified unit. You can specify the Unit (such as cm,
Arc Flash Boundary Value
meter, feet, inches, etc.) and the number of decimals to display for meters.

Arc Flash File Name File name of the one-line.

General comments from “Comments” tab of equipment dialog. This is the old
Bus Comments method. Preferred variable is the “Label Comment per Label” based in Arc
flash Hazard tab of equipment dialog.

Description of required clothing based on the hazard level calculated. The

Clothing Description
descriptions come from the library.

Company Name Company Name as registered with EasyPower Installation.

Device Code Device code as entered in the equipment dialog. This is a string.

Device Description Comes from Device Description field in the Panel or MCC dialog.

Device Name Name of equipment with fault

Electrical Calculation Method Standard of calculation method used.

Gloves Description Class of gloves required based on equipment voltage per OSHA.

Returns Yes if the arc flash faulted bus was determined to be effectively
Grounded
grounded for arc flash calculations. Otherwise No.

Hazard Units Units for Incident energy. Example Cal/cm2.

Incident Energy Incident energy at the working distance.

Is Base Case Returns Yes for Base Case and No for Scenario.

Kilo Volts Voltage of faulted bus in kV.

Optional comments entered by user when printing labels. Equipment specific

Label Comments comment entered in Arc Flash Hazard tab of equipment dialog. You can also
enter comments arc flash hazard report.

Day number of the date the label was printed. Example: for the date July 15,
Label Print Day Number
2013, the number returned is 15.

Label Print Index Index of label printed for device. Goes from 1 to Number of Labels to Print

Label Print Month Name Month label was printed on. Example for July 15, 2013 would be Jul.
Abbreviation

Label Print Month Full Name Month label was printed on. Example for July 15, 2013 would be July.

Label Print Month Number Month label was printed on. Example for July 15, 2013 would be 7

Label Print Year Number Month label was printed on. Example for July 15, 2013 would be 2013
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  637

Limited Distance Limited Approach Boundary as per NFPA 70E, based on equipment voltage.

Limited Distance Value Numeric value for limited approach boundary.

Location Description Location of the equipment from equipment dialog Location tab.

Location Floor Floor data from Location tab of equipment dialog.

X coordinate of the equipment as entered in Location tab of equipment dialog.

Location X
X can be feet, inches, meters, etc.

Y coordinate of the equipment as entered in Location tab of equipment dialog.

Location Y
Y can be feet, inches, meters, etc.

Returns On is the upstream trip device had Maintenance Mode on and Off
Maintenance
otherwise.

Momentary Bus Current in Momentary (1st cycle) short circuit current at the faulted bus. Value in Amps.
Amps

Momentary Bus Current in Momentary (1st cycle) short circuit current at the faulted bus. Value in kA.
Kilo Amps
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  638

Label Designer Window

The Label Designer allows for you to view label templates, test label templates against
different equipment, and change the design of a label. The designer has two different
modes of operation:

View mode: The designer when first displayed is in view mode. Use this mode to select
which template you want to work with or to see how each template behaves using different
devices from the arc flash hazard report. Label templates cannot be modified in this mode.

Edit mode: This mode begins when you press the Start Edit button on the Design Labels
toolbar. Once you are in this mode, you can modify the design of the label template you
selected. You can exit this mode by saving or discarding your label changes.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  639

Design Labels Toolbar

When the label designer window is active, EasyPower’s toolbar switches to the Design
Labels toolbar. This table describes the available actions.

Action Function
Opens a different folder of label templates and changes the location of
Load Templates
templates used by EasyPower.

Start Edit Start editing a template.

Saves edits you have made to the current template. This will overwrite the
Save Template
existing template file.

Saves the template to a new file instead of overwriting the existing one. Files
Save Edits As
will be saved with the .AFL extension.

Discard Edits Discards all the edits performed by the user during the edit session.

True Size Displays label preview in exact size it is being designed.

Maximizes the label to fit onto the size of the display window real estate.
Fit to View Since you can resize the label print window, this “fit to view” function will re-
render the drawing to best fit into the resized window.

Show rulers Shows the ruler dimensions of the design label.

Drop down menu that shows the list of opened windows -- some of which are
Window hidden behind another window. Selecting any window in this list will activate
and bring up that window to the front.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  640

Undo Undoes an edit per click -- can undo several edits by clicking multiple times.

Redo Redoes an edit -- can redo several edits by clicking multiple times.

Delete Deletes the selected graphical item.

Forwards Brings the selected item one layer forward.

Backwards Sends the selected item one layer backward.

To Front Brings the selected item all the way to the front.

To Back Sends the selected item to the most background layer.

Insert Line Inserts a Line graphical item

Insert Rect Inserts a Rectangle graphical item.

Insert Ellipse Inserts an Ellipse graphical item.

Inserts a Text graphical item (potentially containing variables from the Arc
Insert Text
Flash Hazard Report).
Insert Image Inserts an Image graphical item

Insert QRCode Inserts a QR Code graphical item.

Label Template List

This panel labeled Templates near the center of the screen shows all the label templates in
the Arc Flash Label templates folder. This panel is only available in the label designer’s
view mode.

The label preview uses the currently selected template and will update as the selected
template is changed. This provides a quick way to find the desired template.

To list the templates that are available in a different folder, press the Load Templates
button on the Design Labels toolbar.

Devices List
This panel labeled Devices at the left of the screen shows all the devices listed in the Arc
Flash Hazard Report when the label designer was started. This list of devices can be used
when editing a label to ensure that the label will print as you expect it to for a variety of
different labels. Select a different device to preview your label design under different
device scenarios.

The label preview uses the currently selected device, and the selected device can change at
any time in the label designer to view the edited label under different conditions.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  641

Template Properties Panel

The Template Properties panel is displayed when editing a label and provides fine-
grained control over all aspects of your label design. It contains three sub-panes as shown
here.

Item Properties: this pane shows the properties of the selected item. Click on one of the
graphical items on the template preview in order to see its properties.

Graphical Items list: This list shows all graphical items on the label template. The
currently selected graphical item should be highlighted in the list. This list can also be used
to select a specific item on the template if it cannot easily be clicked on.

Template Settings: This pane allows you to view and modify settings which apply to the
entire label template. The following settings are that you can set in the Template Settings
panel:
 Title: Title of the template.
 Size: Dimensions of label for which this template is designed.
 Author: Author of the template
 Organization: Organization/Company who designed template
 Language: Language settings of the entire template. French, Spanish and English
are supported. Currently this only effects what Month names are used.
 Font Name: Default font to use for template
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  642

 Font Color: Default color for text

 Font Point Size: Default point size for text
 Font – Bold/Italic/Underline: Default style for text (i.e. bold, italic, or underline).
 Modification Date: Date template was last saved
 Template File: File name of template

Text Properties
When a text item is selected, the Item Properties panel will display properties for the
selected Text Item. Text items can consist of static text, variables from the Arc Flash
Hazard Report, or some combination thereof. The text which is displayed can also vary
based on different conditions. The Text Item Properties provides you with fine-grained
control over all of these aspects of displayed text.

Text item properties include:

 Text: Contents of text item (Text and variables). Text content can also be
conditional based upon Arc Flash Variable.
 Position: Position (and optionally size) for text item. Horizontal and Vertical
alignment are also taken into account.
 H[orizontal] Alignment: Controls whether the text appears: left, centered or right
of specified text Position.
 Point Size: Point size of text (overrides template default)
 Font: Font to use for text (overrides template default)
 Color: Color to use for text (overrides template default). Color can also be
conditional based upon Arc Flash Variable..
 Bold: Whether text is bold (overrides template default).
 Italic: Whether text is italic (overrides template default).
 Underline: Whether text is underlined (overrides template default).
 Visibility: Control when this text is visible using a visibility condition based upon
Arc Flash Variable.
 V[ertical] Alignment: Controls whether text appears: top, bottom or baseline
relative to text Position.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  643

Line Properties
When a line item is selected, the Item Properties panel will display the properties for the
selected Line Item. Line item properties include:
 Line: Coordinates for the start and end of the line
 Color: Color of the line. Color can also be conditional based upon Arc Flash
Variable.
 Width: Thickness of the line.
 Visibility: Control when this text is visible using a visibility condition based upon
Arc Flash Variable.

Rectangle or Ellipse Properties

When a rectangle or ellipse is selected the Item Properties panel will display the properties
for the selected item. Properties include:
 Rect/Ellipse: Specify the position and size of the rectangle/ellipse.
 Fill: Color of the rectangle/ellipse. Color can also be conditional based upon Arc
Flash Variable.
 Outline: Color of the rectangle/ellipse outline. Color can also be conditional based
upon Arc Flash Variable.
 Outline Width: Width of rectangle/ellipse outline.
 Visibility: Control when this rectangle/ellipse is visible using a visibility condition
based upon Arc Flash Variable.

Image Properties
When an image is selected the Item Properties panel will display the properties for the
selected image. Properties include:
Image: What image to display. Choose from one of the built-in icons or browse for a
specific file.
Position: Size and location of image.
Visibility: Control when this image is visible using a visibility condition based upon Arc
Flash Variable.

QRCode Properties
When a QRCode is selected the Item Properties panel will display the properties for the
selected QRCode. QRCode is an international standard to encode text as black-and-white
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  644

images suitable for scanning with a digital camera. For more information see:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/QR_code.

Properties include:

Text: Text content to be encoded into QRCode (Text and variables). Text content can also
be conditional based upon Arc Flash Variable. The text itself will not be displayed on the
label, only the QRCode image will be displayed.

Position: Location and size of the QR Code. Note that the exact size of the QRCode image
will vary based upon Text, Mode and Version. If the QRCode image is smaller, it will be
centered inside of Position.

Mode: Specify the type of text being encoded. The default option of Alphanumeric
handles most conditions. Use Byte if you want to encode all ASCII characters. Use Kanji
if you want to encode Japanese text.
Error Correction: Specify level of error correction in QRCode image. Based on the size
of the code on the label, different levels of error correction can enhance the scanability of
the QRCode.

Visibility: Control when this QRCode is visible using a visibility condition based upon Arc
Flash Variable.

Device Details Panel

The panel labeled Device Details is by default collapsed at the bottom of the label designer
window and can be displayed by clicking on the Device Details panel heading. When
visible, this panel shows all the devices from the Arc Flash Hazard Report and the raw
values that are available from the report.

This panel allows you to perform the following actions:

 Selecting a device in the list changes which Device is selected for preview.
 Clicking on the caret “^” or “v” next to Device Details panel name allow you to
collapse or expand the row details.
 Clicking on the column headers (e.g. Device Name and Arc Fault Bus) allows you to
sort the row sequence in ascending or descending order.
 Clicking on the funnel-shaped icon next to each column allows you to specify filters to
sort.
 Scrolling through each row to obtain more device information.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  645

 Repositioning the column headers by holding the left-mouse button then dragging any
of the columns to any position desired.

Example of Changing Text on a Label Template

This example illustrates how to change static text which is printed on a label.

1) In the Label Designer, select the “Standard 4x6 multi-color” label and click on the Start
Edit button in the toolbar.

2) On the label template, find and click on the text which reads “Flash Hazard Boundary”.

3) On the right side of the screen, locate the Text Item Properties and change the Text to “Arc
Flash Boundary”.

4) Click on the Save Edits As … button on the toolbar to save your new template.

How to Insert a Variable from the Arc Flash Hazard Report

This example illustrates how to insert a variable from the Arc Flash Hazard Report into a label
template.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  646

1) In the Label Designer, select the “Standard 4x6 multi-color” label and click on the Start Edit
button in the toolbar.

2) Click on the Insert Text button in the toolbar. This will insert a text item with the text “Replace
Text” near the top left of the drawing panel. Drag this text item to the bottom right corner of the
label template as shown here.

3) On the right side of the screen, locate the Text Item Properties, delete the words “Replace Text”,
and press the Add Variable button. This will add a variable field to the displayed text, and will
default to the PPE variable.

4) Select green Variable and change variable by selecting Scenario Name from the drop down list.
Unless you are using scenarios, the main scenario name “Base Case” will be displayed.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  647

5) Click on the Save Edits As … button on the toolbar to save your new template.

How to Control when Text is Visible

This example illustrates how to control when a text field is visible on the label. While this
example uses a text field, all other graphical items – lines, rectangles, ellipses, images and
QR codes – also support the same ability to selectively hide or show based on a condition
from the Arc Flash Hazard Report data.

1) In the Label Designer, select the “Standard 4x6 multi-color” label and click on the Start
Edit button in the toolbar.

2) On the label template, find and click on the text which reads “PPE Level”.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  648

3) On the right side of the screen, locate the Text Item Properties, locate the visibility
property, and select a visibility condition based on Incident Energy.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  649

4) In this case we only want to display the text “PPE Level” if the incident energy is less than
40 cal/cm2, so we configure the visibility condition to accomplish that.

5) Test the new condition with different devices to ensure that the text only displays under the
desired circumstances.

6) Click on the Save Edits As … button on the toolbar to save your new template.

Example of Displaying Different Text based off a Condition

Many of the label variables help to ensure that a label appears correctly based on the
information in the Arc Flash Hazard Report, but there are times when the label needs to
behave differently under conditions that are not already addressed. This example illustrates
how to set up a text field where the text which is displayed depends on some condition of a
variable from the Arc Flash Hazard Report.

In this example we will display either “Danger” or “Warning” depending upon the value of
Incident Energy.

While this example changes the text based off of a condition, colors of text, lines,
rectangles and ellipses can also be varied on conditions in the same fashion.

1) In the Label Designer, select the “Standard 4x6 multi-color” label and click on the Start
Edit button in the toolbar.

2) Click on the Insert Text button in the toolbar. This will insert a text item with the text
“Replace Text” near the top left of the drawing panel. Drag this text item to the bottom
right corner of the label template as shown here.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  650

3) In the Conditional On list, choose the variable Incident Energy.

4) Specify the comparison for Incident Energy to be greater than or equal (>=)
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Arc Flash Hazard Labels  651

5) For the first condition, set the comparison to 40, and set the text to “DANGER” as shown
here.

6) Under this condition, this text item will display the text “DANGER” if the incident energy
is greater than or equal to 40 cal/cm2. In our case, we want it to say “WARNING” under
all other conditions, so we set the default text to “WARNING”.

7) Test the new condition on different devices to ensure that the correct text displays under the
desired circumstances.

8) Click on the Save Edits As … button on the toolbar to save your new template.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Scenario Comparison Report  652

Scenario Comparison Report

The fault levels and incident energies at any bus or equipment may change with the
connection configuration within a plant or network. For example you may have a scenario
with just the utility as source, or just a local generator as source, or a combination of two or
more sources. In these different scenarios you will get different fault levels at any bus in
the system. If you have several scenarios stored in a one-line file, you can compare the
results for arc flash hazard for each scenario and automatically create a report that shows
the worst-case incident energies for bus faults.

Creating Scenario Comparison Report

Creating Scenario Comparison Report

To create a scenario comparison report you need to be in the Database Edit focus. From
the ribbon click on the Scenario Mgr button and choose Create Scenario
Comparison Report…, as shown in the figure above. Note that you must have scenarios
stored in the working EasyPower file in order to use this feature. You will get a dialog as
shown below.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Scenario Comparison Report  653

Create Scenario Comparison Report dialog

If you choose the button Create Report, without configuring anything in this dialog, you
will get a report that compares all the scenarios and will report all the available calculated
values that you would see in an Arc Flash Hazard Report. See figure below for sample
report.

Sample Scenario Comparison Report

For further details on scenario comparison report, refer to Chapter 6: Scenario Manager.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Default Data in Library  654

Default Data in Library

The standard library stores some default data that are used in arc flash hazard calculations.
For information on how to use the library, see Chapter 7. This section provides an overview
of the arc flash hazard section in the library.

Arc Flash Hazard default data in library

Arc Flash Hazard

System kV (Line-Line): This is the line-to-line voltage of the system for which data is
stored in the library.

Equipment Type: There are four different enclosure types – Switchgear, MCC/Panel,
Open Air and Conductor.

NEMA Gap Unit: The unit in which the gap between phase conductors is specified. Units
can be mm or inches.

NEMA Gap: Gap between phase conductors according to NEMA specifications for the
voltage and equipment type.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Default Data in Library  655

Distance ‘X’ Factor: The incident energy at any distance is proportional to the power X of
the inverse of the distance. In the expression (1/D)x, D is the distance in the appropriate
unit and x is the distance factor.

IEC Gap Unit, IEC Gap and Distance ‘X’ Factor: Similar to NEMA equivalent.

The cells highlighted in yellow cannot be changed. You can edit the data in the white cells.

User Clearing Times

While performing arc flash hazard analysis, you can use the default clearing times in the
library. To do so, you need to select “Predefined Fixed Times” option in Bus Data.

User Clearing Times in library default

System kV (Line-Line): This is the line-to-line voltage of the system for which data is
stored in the library.

Dev-1: The name of device function which is likely to be the first function to trip.

Time: The trip time for the device function for the column to the left.

You can specify a total of 4 device functions for each bus. The cells highlighted in yellow
cannot be changed. You can edit the data in the white cells.

Note: EasyPower LLC strongly recommends that arc flash calculations be performed
using the actual protective device clearing times. This is automatic if you own
EasyPower’s coordination program PowerProtector and have entered protective device
data for each device.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Defining PPE Levels  656

Defining PPE Levels

You can also work with a limited number of PPE levels (clothing class). Although NFPA
has defined hazard risk categories 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 for energized work, some companies
have standardized on only two types of PPE levels (HRC# 2 and 4, for example). For
example, HRC #2 PPE is used for any work up to NFPA HRC # 2 (up to 8 cal/cm2) and
HRC #4 is used for incident energy between 8 and 40 cal/cm2.

PPE Levels

You can customize your PPE levels using the standard library. If you do not wish to
include a certain level of PPE class in your standard PPE levels, then you can delete that
row. For example, if you want to have only HRC #2 and 4, then you can delete HRC # 1
and 3. Any arc flash incident energy falling in the HRC 1 or 3 will be reported as being in
HRC 2 or 4 respectively. See figure below.

Modified PPE Levels

Column Headings:

HRC #: This is the hazard risk category number as per NFPA 70E.

MINIMUM Energy (cal/cm2): This is the minimum cal/cm2 corresponding to the selected
PPE Level Text on the right. To remove any PPE Level from your standardized PPE level,
delete this cell. For example, in the figure above, PPE Level 1 is deleted. Therefore, to
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits  657

incorporate the incident energy between 2 and 4 cal/cm2 to PPE Level #2, the MINIMUM
Energy value corresponding to PPE Level #2 must be modified to 2 cal/cm2.

PPE Level Text: PPE level (clothing class) to display in one-line, text reports, labels and
work permits. This corresponds to the standardized PPE levels.

Description: Description of clothing class. You add/modify the text. This text will be used
in the labels and work permits.

Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits

You can create work permits for working on energized equipment as per the NFPA 70E-
2009 (Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, 2009 Edition). Article 130.1(B) in
the standard, describes Energized Electrical Work Permits. In EasyPower, the work permit
is created as a word file as shown in the picture below. The work permit includes
information such the voltage, type of equipment, arc flash hazard calculation results on the
equipment, the work task and the PPE required for the work, as well as other useful
information.

Portion of Sample Work Permit

Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits  658

Creating Work Permits

To create work permit, you need to be in short circuit focus, and you need to have the
ArcFlash feature. You will also need to have Microsoft® Word software installed. Work
permits are created for buses, and many equipment types including MCC’s, panels,
switchgear, etc. Take the mouse cursor over desired bus/equipment and right click. A menu
will appear as shown below. Choose Arc Flash Working Permit.

Creating Work Permit for a bus

You will get a dialog with various work options. From the Work Task Dialog, select the
desired types of work by checking the boxes under column heading Create Permit. Work
tasks are equipment specific, and can be modified or added to by the user. See section on
Library Modifications. Press the OK button.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits  659

Work Task Dialog

Work Task Dialog

Create Permit: Check boxes in this column to create a work permit corresponding to each
work task.

Work Task: Type of work to be performed. These tasks are defined in the library. The
tasks listed as default tasks are as per NFPA 70E-2009, Table 130.7(C)(9) Hazard/Risk
Category Classifications. You can add to or modify the default data in the library.

Incoming Source: This field is marked with “X” if the equipment worked upon is
protected by an upstream device. For example, if work was to be performed on the main
breaker or the incoming cable, then any fault on the line side of the breaker would be
interrupted by the upstream protective device. Therefore, the trip time of the upstream
device would be used in calculating the arc flash hazard results.

Working Distance: The anticipated closest working distance from the employees’
chest/face to the closest energized exposed part.

Distance Unit: Units of the working distance. This is typically in inches. You can change it
to mm from the standard library.

Auto-Hyperlink work Permits to Bus: Work permits that are created are automatically
hyperlinked to the Bus Data. Since the hyperlink is created while you are in the Short
Circuit focus, you must save the temporary changes to the database when you enter the
Database Edit focus. Otherwise the hyperlink will be lost.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits  660

Bus Orientation: This is the orientation of the bus. The typical orientation is vertical.
IEEE 1584-2002, NFPA 70 –2009 and calculation methods preceding these assume that the
bus has vertical orientation. Horizontal orientation and vertical into barrier can have higher
incident energies. This choice affects the calculations factor (Cf) used in the arc flash
hazard equations. Although the Bus Data may have the orientation already specified, the
Work Task Dialog selection for orientation will override. This allows you to specify the
correct orientation of the bus in case the data was not entered while creating the one-line.

Work Permit Files

EasyPower will automatically create each work permit in a new Microsoft® Word
document. The work permit files will be created in the folder specified in Tools  Options
 File Locations  Work Permits. If no folder has been specified for this option, then
work permit files will be saved in folder the one-line file resides in. They will be named in
the format:

[OnelineFileName] [EquipmentName] [Date Created] [Time] - # [Order] .doc

For example, if you create a work permit for the bus MAIN SWG in the sample file
“Protection-1.dez”, the default file name may be something like shown below:

Protection-1 MAIN SWG 02-20-2004 11-56 AM - #1.doc

Where,
OnelineFileName = Protection-1
EquipmentName = MAIN SWG
DateCreated = 02-20-2004
Time = 11-56 AM
Order = 1. If you create several work permits at once, the order will be #1, #2, #3, etc.

You can rename or edit these work permits.

Editing Work Permits

You can edit a work permit using the Word program. To change the default format of work
permit, you can change the Word template file called “_WP_Template.doc”, which can be
found in the EasyPower program folder. You can reformat or change the text as per your
requirement.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits  661

Note: In the template, do NOT edit or delete the fields with characters <<:: .
EasyPower writes to these fields and therefore they should not be changed. The
tag name is followed by a series of continuous underscore characters to account
for the maximum length of the text that will be printed in the work permit. The
tag name and underscore must have the same text format.

The default work permit template does not come with scenario name. To add scenario
name to the work permit, add the text:

Scenario: <<::SCEN_________________

Linking Work Permits to EasyPower One-lines

All equipment data dialogs have a Hyperlink tab. See section Associating Equipment Data
with Hyperlinks in Chapter 2. Using the equipment data dialog in EasyPower, you can open
previously created work permits for the particular equipment. This helps in documentation
and quick access or records.

Library

The standard library has a section for work permit data. Data is listed by voltage level and
type of equipment as shown in the picture below.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Creating Energized Electrical Work Permits  662

Work Permit Library

To add a new work permit task to any equipment, select the voltage level first and the
equipment type. Add the Work Task description in the empty row at the bottom. You will
be able to enter other data in that row and a new row will automatically be created.

Work Task: Work to be performed

Incoming Options: Drop down menu to choose from the following:

 None: Work on the bus

 Incoming: Work on the Main or incomer

 Feeder: Work on the load side of feeder breakers/fuses.

Unit: Unit for Working Distance. Select inches or mm.

Work Distance: Anticipated closest working distance of a worker form energized exposed
parts while working on equipment. The values here override the Short Circuit Options
values or the Bus Data dialog values.

V-Rated Gloves: The data is entered as “Yes” or “No” based on whether or not V-Rated
gloves are required for the task. (V-Rated Gloves are gloves rated and tested for the
maximum line-to-line voltage upon which work will be done.)

V-Rated Tools: The data is entered as “Yes” or “No” based on whether or not V-Rated
tools are required for the task. (V-Rated Tools are tools rated and tested for the maximum
line-to-line voltage upon which work will be done.)

Detailed Job Description/Procedure: This is user defined and will vary from company to
company and for each specific type of equipment.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Troubleshooting with Arc Flash Hazard Results  663

Safe Work Practices: Specific safety instructions related to the job. You can enter the
details in the library if the procedures have already been developed. Otherwise, you can
enter them in the work permit using Word.

Troubleshooting with Arc Flash Hazard

Results
Some of the frequently asked questions are listed below.

1. Arc flash hazard is not calculated and report shows “No Valid Trip Device Found
Upstream or in Bus Dialog.”

All buses that are analyzed require either an upstream trip device with all the necessary
information entered, or arcing duration specified in the Bus Data dialog. The program can
determine arcing duration based on the time-current characteristics (TCC) of the trip
device. The TCC can be determined only if all the necessary information has been entered
in the trip device dialog. For more information on protective data, see Chapter 14 –
Coordination with PowerProtector.

Checklist for trip device data:

HV Fuses: Manufacturer  Type  Style  Model  Fuse Size.

LV Fuses: Manufacturer  Type  Style  Fuse Size.

Thermal Magnetic LV Breakers: Manufacturer  Type  Style  Frame  Trip

Amps  Instantaneous Setting (if applicable).

Solid State Trip LV Breakers: Manufacturer  Type  Style for breaker. AND for
solid state trip Manufacturer  Type  Style  Frame/Sensor  Tap/Plug  LTPU 
LT Delay  STPU  ST Delay  Inst Pickup for Phase Trip.

Relays: Manufacturer  Type  Device Function  Tap  Time Dial  Inst

Pickup  Inst. Delay (whatever is applicable) for phase.

Note that ground trips are ignored for arc flash when the 3-phase fault type is selected.

2.

1. The Arc Flash Hazard report shows upstream devices that do not exist on the one-line.
 Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Troubleshooting with Arc Flash Hazard Results  664

There are two ways this can happen:

 Bus Data has user defined trip times.

 Bus Data has Pre-defined fixed times. The trip times specified in the library are
used. Based on the voltage of the faulted bus, you could see the following in the
column “Upstream Trip Device Function”:

LV Bus MV Bus

INST 50

ST-MIN 51-MIN

ST-INT 51-INT

ST-MAX 51-MAX

2. Downstream buses are showing greater hazard than upstream buses.

This is very typical when upstream trip device has inverse time characteristics. The lower
fault currents at downstream buses cause longer trip times. Longer arc duration causes
higher hazard level.

3. Arc Flash Hazard report indicates a trip device that is upstream to the trip device I
expect will trip first.

Check to see if the protective devices are well coordinated. You can plot the TCC for both
devices. Any overlap indicates miscoordination, which is not uncommon.

EasyPower chooses the fastest tripping device for series path. For parallel paths, the
slowest tripping device is selected for conservative results.

4. Arc Flash Hazard results of almost identical buses are significantly different although
the fault currents and trip times are similar. (See figure below)
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Determination of System Grounding  665

Similar buses with different results

This can be due to differences in grounding. The Arc Flash Hazard report above shows that
BUS-4 is solidly grounded. Notice the “X” in the column Gnd. As per IEEE 1584-2002
equations, resistance grounded/ungrounded systems have higher incident energy than
similar but solidly grounded systems. For details, see the section Determination of System
Grounding.

Determination of System Grounding

As per IEEE 1584 Std-2002., the type of grounding used in any LV system can affect the
arc flash incident energy. EasyPower automatically determines which grounding type to
use based on a short circuit algorithm.

For the equipment being evaluated, single line to ground fault is performed on A-Phase.
The voltage per unit (Vpu) is computed on B and C phases of the equipment. The average
of the two Vpu’s is compared with a threshold value that is specified in Tools  Options
 System tab. This value is called Arc Flash Ground Vpu in the options dialog. This has a
default value of 1.45, but can be modified by users, if necessary.
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Maintenance Mode Trip  666

If the calculated Vpu is less than the specified threshold, the system is considered to be
effectively “solidly grounded”. Otherwise it is considered “ungrounded or resistance
grounded”.

Maintenance Mode Trip

Some circuit breakers have an additional instantaneous trip setting that can be turned on
during maintenance work. In the case of faults this results in fast tripping, limiting the arc
flash incident energy. During normal operation this trip is set to “Off” for selective
coordination. This additional trip may be known as Maintenance Mode or have commercial
names such as ARMS, Quick-Trip, RELT, etc.

While you are in Coordination focus or Short Circuit focus, you can turn the Maintenance
Mode setting “On” or “Off” through the right mouse click context menu as shown in the
picture below. This will affect the selected breakers. You can also the highlight the
breakers that have Maintenance Mode setting “On”.

Maintenance Mode
Chapter 15 AF Hazard Analysis Maintenance Mode Trip  667
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Setting Short Circuit Method  668

Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit

Reference
The IEC short circuit procedures follow the standard IEC 60909-0: Short-circuit currents in
three-phase ac systems. EasyPower user interface and the procedures are similar to ANSI
short circuit methods described in Chapter 4.

Setting Short Circuit Method

To select the short circuit calculation method, choose from the ribbon, Tools  Options 
System, and select the desired standard from the combo box for SC Calculation Method.
You can also select the units and symbols appropriate for the selected standard. To change
the short circuit calculation standard you need to be in Database Edit focus.

Setting Short Circuit Method

In the Options dialog, select the following:

Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Focus  669

Frequency.

SC Calculation Method: Set this to IEC.

Units: You can this to Metric (Optional).

Symbols: You can set this to IEC (Optional).

C factor: This is the voltage correction factor (commonly referred to as C Factor). The C
Factor is used for modifying equipment impedances and the driving point voltage. IEC
recommends calculations for minimum and maximum short circuit currents. Selecting C
Factor for Max or Min allows the desired type of calculation. You can perform
calculations for only one of the two at any time. The C Factors differ by voltage levels.
The default values in the Options dialog are those recommended by IEC-60909, and are
summarized below. You can change these values should you require.

Voltage C Factor table

Voltage Level Cmax Cmin

Low Voltage ( < 1 kV) 1.05 0.95

High Voltage ( > 1 kV) 1.1 1

After making your selection choose OK button to accept changes and close the Options
dialog.

Short Circuit Focus

To perform short circuit calculations, you need to be in the Short Circuit Focus. The program
can enter Short Circuit focus only if all the data necessary for the calculations have been
entered in the one-line model. To enter Short Circuit focus, select the button from the
Home ribbon.

You will get a Short Circuit ribbon as shown in the picture below.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Focus  670

IEC Short Circuit ribbon

Short Circuit Status Bar

IEC Short Circuit Status Bar

The Short Circuit Status Bar indicates the following settings:

 Grid Snap Status: Shows "SNAP" if grid snapping is on. See "The Snap Grid” on page
73 for more information

 Fault Type: The Fault Type as set from Short Circuit toolbar.

 Calc Method: Selected method of calculation – ANSI or IEC.

 Fault Unit: The Fault Unit choice from the One-line Output tab of the Short Circuit
Options C Values: The voltage C factors selected in Options-System
dialog.

Faulting a Bus

There are three ways to fault a bus. The easiest way is to double-click on the desired bus. A
fault will be placed on the bus using the options chosen on the ribbon and in the Short
Circuit Options dialog. To open the Short Circuit Options dialog choose SC Options
button in the ribbon.
 Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Focus  671

Faulting a Bus

The results are immediately displayed on the one-line. In this example, the faulted bus
current is 16.952 kA, which is shown diagonally on the right side of the bus. The
contribution from the upstream branch is 14.616 kA, and the motor contribution is 1.201 kA.

If text results are also desired, choose the appropriate result window in the Text Output tab
of the Short Circuit Options dialog box.

Another way to initiate a fault is to first select a bus (the bus will highlight) and then click on
the Fault Bus(es) button. You can select more than one bus to fault if desired.

To fault all the buses (batch fault) choose button without selecting any bus.

Changing the IEC Standard Time Interval

The following currents can be calculated in EasyPower:

1) Initial (Momentary) current: This is the first cycle current. To display results for this current
select the (Momentary) button in the Short Circuit ribbon.

2) Breaking currents for 0.02 seconds, 0.05 seconds, 0.1 seconds and >0.25 seconds: To display
these values select the corresponding buttons from the ribbon.

You can view up to 3 types of fault current values by time interval.

Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Focus  672

Short circuit results at various time intervals

You can also view fault currents in various forms, such as by phase current values (A, B, C)
or their symmetrical component values (Positive sequence, Negative sequence, zero sequence
or 3 times the zero sequence).

Displaying Fault Currents By Current Type

You can also display fault currents as symmetrical rms, asymmetrical rms or as peak. To
change display current type, choose SC Options button in the ribbon, then go to One-
line Output tab and select the desired type from the combo box Fault Current, as shown in
the figure below. The following choices are available:

Symmetrical: rms value of ac component.

Asymmetrical: rms value of ac and dc components combined (total).

Max Sym and (Max Asym): The maximum phase current amongst the three phases. Both ac
symmetrical rms and asymmetrical rms values are displayed, the asymmetrical values
appearing in parentheses.

Max Sym and (Max Momentary Peak): The maximum phase current amongst the three
phases. Both initial ac symmetrical rms (Ik”)and peak (Ip) values are displayed, the peak
values appearing in parentheses.

The first three choices are applicable for any time interval, whereas the last choice is only
applicable for the momentary (initial) currents.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference SmartDuty™  673

Short Circuit Options for IEC

SmartDuty™
SmartDuty is the world's first Expert System for the verification of breaker, switch, and fuse
duties. SmartDuty applies the appropriate short circuit calculation to each device, then
compares the calculated currents with the rated duties. Underrated devices and devices
within a user-defined threshold are highlighted on the one-line showing the percentage
overduty next to each device. Devices within tolerance are not highlighted.

SmartDuty calculates the maximum current through the line side and load side of each device
for comparison. This eliminates the costly and time consuming problem of standard bus
faults not properly accounting for branch contributions.

To use SmartDuty, choose Equipment Duty button in the ribbon. Fault any or all buses,
and the results will appear next to each underrated device.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference SmartDuty™  674

SmartDuty One-line Results

Note: The ability to automatically check equipment duties during

analysis is only available if you have purchased the SmartDuty™
option to EasyPower.

High voltage breakers show two results. The top result is the making (momentary) duty, and
the bottom is the breaking duty. A negative sign indicates that the fault current is less than
the device rating. A positive number indicates that the device is over-dutied. Notice in the
example that the top breaker is highlighted even though both duties are negative. This is
because the interrupting duty (-9%) is within the user-defined threshold tolerance of 10
percent. Although the breaker is actually 9 percent under duty, a warning is still issued
because the tolerance is set at 10 percent. The threshold tolerance provides a warning level
indication. The tolerance value can be set in the Control tab of the Short Circuit Options
dialog.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Control  675

Duty Evaluation for Various Equipment:

HV Breaker Peak Making Capacity with Breaking Capacity (ac

Peak Current symmetrical) with
Equivalent Breaking ac
current
LV Breakers Breaking Capacity (ac
symmetrical) with
Equivalent Initial ac current
Fuses Breaking Capacity (ac
symmetrical) with
Equivalent Initial ac current
Switches Making Capacity (ac
symmetrical) with
Equivalent Initial ac current

Short Circuit Control

Choose SC Options button in the ribbon, and pick the Control tab to specify various
parameters for controlling the behavior of a short circuit study.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit One-line Output  676

Control tab of Short Circuit Options Dialog Box

Fault Type: Four different types of faults are available during a short circuit analysis. The
default is 3 Phase which is generally used to determine the highest available currents for
equipment duty comparisons, and relaying. The other types, Line to Ground, Double Line to
Ground, and Line to Line are generally used for specialized relaying applications or system
trouble shooting. You can also select the type of fault using the short circuit toolbar buttons.

"Fault All" Filters: Allows you to specify a specific bus Area, Zone, and kV Range that
will be faulted and reported when you choose Fault Bus(es) button. When both Area
and Zone are set as zero, then all buses within the specified kV range are selected for fault
calculations.

Equipment Duty Threshold: Sets the lower limit for flagging breaker violations in
SmartDutyTM. If the threshold is set to -10 percent, SmartDuty will flag all equipment which
has short circuit duties within 10 percent of their maximum rating (greater than 90% of their
rating).

Note: you must choose Equipment Duty button for this field to have any effect on the
one-line result output. You must check the Equipment Duty box in the Text Output tab of
the Short Circuit Options dialog box for this field to have any effect for text result output.

Note: The ability to automatically check equipment duties during analysis is

only available if you have purchased the SmartDuty™ option to EasyPower.

Short Circuit One-line Output

In the Short Circuit Options dialog, pick the One-line Output tab to specify various
parameters for controlling what is output to the one-line during the short circuit study.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit One-line Output  677

One-line Output tab of Short Circuit Options Dialog Box

Display Options: Allows you to control what appears on the one-line while performing
short circuit calculations. You can enable or disable the following outputs.

Show Units: The short circuit results are displayed with their corresponding units, such as
kA, MVA, or pu for branch flows and kV(LL) or pu for voltages.

Show CT and Relay Symbols: The symbols for CT and relays can be made to appear or
disappear in the one-line.

Show Branch Flows: The display of branch flows during a short circuit can be enabled or
disabled. If they are disabled, only the bus fault current will appear on the one-line.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Text Output  678

Decimal Precision: This sets the number of digits past the decimal point for values
displayed on the one-line.

Fault Current: Allows you to choose the unit of fault current and the type of current. You
can display on the one-line the following types of currents:

Symmetrical: rms value of ac component.

Asymmetrical: rms value of ac and dc components combined (total).

Max Sym and (Max Asym): The maximum phase current amongst the three phases. Both ac
symmetrical rms and asymmetrical rms values are displayed, the asymmetrical values
appearing in parentheses.

Max Sym and (Max Momentary Peak): The maximum phase current amongst the three
phases. Both initial ac symmetrical rms (Ik”)and peak (Ip) values are displayed, the peak
values appearing in parentheses.

The following fault current units are available for display in the one-line:

 kA

 MVA

 Per-unit

Vector Coordinates: Allows display format as:

 Magnitude

 Magnitude and Angle

 Real and Imaginary

Short Circuit Text Output

In the Short Circuit Options dialog, pick the One-line Output tab to specify various
parameters for controlling the text reports during the study. Text results are displayed in
individual result windows which can be scrolled, reviewed, and printed at your discretion.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Text Output  679

Text Output tab of Short Circuit Options Dialog Box

Create Short Circuit Report: Checkbox to enable creation of IEC short circuit report after
faulting bus(es). Multiple result windows can be displayed and studied at the same time by
clicking Window button from the ribbon bar and choosing Tile Horizontal.

Create Equipment Duty Report: Creates a report with current flows through every breaker
and evaluates the fault currents (breaker duty) in percentage of breaker rating.
Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Text Output  680

Example Short Circuit Report

Chapter 16 IEC Short Circuit Reference Short Circuit Text Output  681
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Introduction  682

Chapter 17 Auto-Design
Introduction
SmartDesign™ is an EasyPower feature that allows you to Auto Design – automatically size
cables, circuit breakers, fuses and transformers based on the load the equipment is designed
to carry. You can create a list of types and sizes of equipment to be used, in Auto Design in
the library. For fuses and circuit breakers, you can create a list of desired manufacturer, type,
style and sizes. The standard library comes with a set of generic equipment list to be used in
Auto Design. This is adequate for typical designs. You can select items in the EasyPower
one-line and choose the Auto Design command to size these items. The calculations for
sizing of items are in accordance with NEC and typical design practice. Auto Design will
apply the new design on the one-line and create a report. Various options are available to
allow you flexibility in the design process. While sizing circuit breakers, you can also choose
breakers that will selectively coordinate with each other for high short circuit currents.

Items that can be sized

Bus Equipment: Low voltage distribution equipment such as switchgear, switchboard,

panelboard, MCC, panel, etc.

Cables: Low voltage cables

Protective devices: Low voltage fuses or circuit breakers.

Transformer: Medium-to-low voltage or low-to-low voltage transformers.

Types of Circuits

When sizing equipment, the program differentiates the type of circuit and sizes accordingly.
The following types of circuits are recognized.

Motor Circuit: This consists of a motor, a cable feeding the motor and a protective device at
the upstream end of the cable. See picture below for examples. Each motor circuit is outlined
with an oval. Circuits defined inside Panel or MCC data with a motor as the load type are
motor circuits.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Introduction  683

kV
48
BUS-1

0.
CU, 100', [Conduit]
1-1/C-350 kcmil
M-1

CU, 100', [Conduit]

10 HP

1-1/C-4 AWG
Induction

kV
48
16.7%

0.
kV
INT SWITCH

48

CU, 75', [Conduit]

0.

1-1/C-350 kcmil
M-2

kV
48
0.
M-2 M-3
50 HP
Induction
16.7%

M-3
200 HP
Induction
16.7%

Examples of motor circuits

Feeder Circuit: A feeder circuit is a path between a distribution point (or bus item) and a
load or between two distribution points (or bus items), and includes protective devices,
cables and downstream bus items. See picture below for examples. Each feeder circuit is
outlined with an oval. Circuits defined inside Panel or MCC data with the load type “Load”
(non-motor), are feeder circuits.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Introduction  684

kV
8
SWGR A

4
0.
CU, **', [Conduit]
1-1/C-350 kcmil
CU, **', [Conduit]
1-1/C-350 kcmil
CU, **', [Conduit]
1-1/C-350 kcmil

kV
48
0.
kV
MCC A-2
8
MCC
20

kV
0.

84
MCC A-1

0.
P NL PNL-1
112.5 HP
34 kVA 19 kVA

CU, **', [Conduit]

1-1/C-350 kcmil

kV
M-1 M-2

8
20
0.
10 HP 25 HP
Induction Induction P NL PNL-2
16.7% 16.7%
Includes feeder 38 kVA
circuit breaker
inside MCC A-2

Examples of feeder circuits

Transformer Circuit: A transformer circuit is similar to a feeder circuit, but inlcudes a

transformer. A transformer circuit begins at a primary protective device and ends a
distribution bus on the secondary side. See picture below for examples. Each transformer
circuit is outlined with an oval.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Performing Auto Design  685

kV
8
.
13
MV-PRI

TX-1
** MVA
13.8 - 0.48 kV
**%

kV
8
4
SWGR

0.
CU, **', [Conduit]

CU, **', [Conduit]

1-1/C-350 kcmil

1-1/C-350 kcmil
CU, **', [Conduit]

CU, **', [Conduit]

CU, **', [Conduit]

1-1/C-350 kcmil

1-1/C-350 kcmil
1-1/C-350 kcmil
kV

kV
48

48
0.

0.
kV

kV
kV

48

48
8
20

0.

0.
0.

PNL-3 MCC-2 MCC-2_A

P NL MCC MCC

TX-2 34 kVA 415.5 HP 112.5 HP

** MVA 30 kVA 19 kVA
0.48 - 0.208 kV TX-3
**% ** MVA
0.48 - 0.208 kV
**%

kV
08
kV

CU, **', [Conduit]

0.
08

1-1/C-350 kcmil
2
0.

P NL PNL-1

CU, **', [Conduit]

1-1/C-350 kcmil

kV
57 kVA

8
20
0.
kV
P NL PNL-2

8
20
0.
PNL-4 38 kVA
P NL

38 kVA

Examples of transformer circuits

Performing Auto Design

Pre-Requisites for Auto Design

Before you can perform auto design, you need to create a basic one line. The following items
are required or recommended:

1. The one-line must have a source (utility or generator) connected.

2. Define all the loads and motor HP. Upstream cables and protective devices can be sized
based on downstream loads or the downstream bus rating. Therefore, in the absence of
load data, you can also specify the Amp rating for the downstream bus items like panels.

3. For motors, make sure that the motor size (HP) and rated voltage is a standard/typical
size. All motors sizes described in NEC are included in the Generic design template. For
motors with different HP rating, you will need to include the motor data in the library.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Performing Auto Design  686

4. Define cable lengths. Lengths can affect project quantities and costs, and will also affect
voltage drop calculations at the downstream end. Cables with undefined length can be
given a pre-defined length specified in Auto Design Options.

5. Define bus type. For every bus equipment that needs to be sized, you need to define the
type as switchgear, switchboard, panelboard, MCC, panel, etc. Sizing of bus and the
protective devices on the bus is based on the type of equipment.

6. Check transformer kV. The primary and secondary kV and the size (kVA) of the
transformer must be defined in the design sheet in the library. Typical sizes and voltages
are listed in the Generic template. You can add new types of transformers.

Sizing Equipment on One-line

1. To size any equipment, select the equipment on the one-line using the mouse. The
selected equipment turns green.

2. From the ribbon, select Auto Design button.

3. View the Auto Design report by choosing Window  AutoDesign Report. Read
comments to check if the item was sized successfully. The report will inform you if there
were issues like insufficient data. The previous section “Pre-Requisites for Auto Design”
provides some guidelines.

You can also view the new size of the equipment through equipment data dialog.

Sizing Individual Circuits in MCC and Panel Data

1. In the Description tab of Panel Data dialog, set the drop down menu for View to
Detailed – Both Sides.

2. In the Description tab of MCC or Panel Data, right click on the row for which you wish
to size the cable and protective device.

3. Select from the context menu, Auto-size Prot Device and Cable. You will get a message
as shown below.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Performing Auto Design  687

Sizing MCC and Panel

On the one-line right click on the MCC or Panel you wish to size. Choose frrm the context
menu, Auto Design, and then the desired option. The options are:

Size Everything: Main fuse or circuit breaker, bus, and all types of outgoing feeders.

Bus, Main and Main Feeders: Main fuse or circuit breaker, bus, and only those feeders that
supply to other MCC or Panels.

Bus and Main: Main fuse or circuit breaker, and the bus are sized.

Bus Only: Only the bus is sized.

Main Only: Only the main fuse or circuit breaker is sized.

MCC and Panel Auto Design Options

Chapter 17 Auto-Design Auto-Design Options  688

Lock Auto-Sizing

For equipment that can be auto-sized, you can also disable auto-sizing by checking the
checkbox “Lock Auto-Sizing” in the equipment data dialog. This is recommended to avoid
accidental auto-sizing. You can manually change the equipment data even if the check box is
checked.

Auto-Design Options
Auto-Design Options allows you to select design templates, calculation methods and default
values for your design. To select the options choose Tools  Options  Auto Design.

There are 5 categories of options:

 General

 Lines

 Protective Device

 Voltage Drop

 Bus
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Auto-Design Options  689

General

Auto Design Options - General

Design Library Sheet: Select the design template you wish to use. The design templates are
stored as design sheets in the standard library (Stdlib.mdb). The library has a default design
sheet called “Generic”. You can create your own design templates in the library. For details
on creating or editing design sheets see the section “Design Library”.

Generate Report Only Without Changing Data: This allows you to view comments
regarding existing design (size/ratings) of equipment, without changing design (data). When
this is unchecked, the equipment sizes/ratings may be changed upon running Auto Design.

Create Bill of Materials Report: Creates a Bill of Materials report for the items that are
auto-designed.

Downstream load based on: Select the type of load current calculation to use to size
equipment. The following choices are available:

 Connected Amps: Amp value for the total kVA of all downstream loads.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Auto-Design Options  690

 Demand Amps: Amp value for the total (kVA * Demand Factor) of all
downstream loads.

 Code Factor Amps: Amp value calculated using appropriate code factors and
demand factors, following a Code (such as NEC).

 Design Amps: Amp value calculated using appropriate code factors and diversity
factor and Design multiplier.

 User-Specified Amps: You can specify the amp value for designing selected
equipment while you perform Auto Design. The figure below is an example of the
dialog you will get to enter the amp value when sizing a cable “C-2”.

Sizing MCCs/Panels on One-line: MCC and Panel schedules include different components
such as main (breaker/fuse), bus, feeder breakers/fuses, feeder cables, etc. You can select
what items to size by selecting the appropriate choice:

 Size Everything

 Size Bus, Main and Feeders

 Size Bus and Main Only

 Size Bus Only

 Size Main Only

Default Motor Starter: Selects which type of starter to use in the MCC feeder description
when sizing MCC.

SC Threshold (%): When the estimated short circuit current through an equipment is greater
than the specified threshold value of the equipment short circuit rating, a warning is provided
in the report. A threshold of 20% corresponds to 0.8 * Equipment Rating.

Lines

Tap Rule Length (ft): Length of the conductor from tapping point to downstream protective
device that does not need to be protected by a protective device.

When choosing cables, assume: Select one of the options below. Design for both systems
can be specified in the design library.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Auto-Design Options  691

3-Phase -- 3-Wire

3-Phase -- 4-Wire

Auto Design Options - Lines

Default Cable Length (ft): Auto Design feature automatically enters the default cable length
if the cable length is not already specified.

Sizing Lines Protected by SSTs:

 Size based on tap/plug rating: Cables are sized based on upstream breaker rating, which
is defined by the sensor tap or the rating plug of the solid state trip.

 Size based on adjusted LTPU: If the upstream solid state trip has an adjustable long time
pickup (LTPU) setting, then sizing cable based on the LTPU amps may allow you to
economize on cable size.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Auto-Design Options  692

Protective Device

Auto Design Options – Protective Device

When choosing breaker pickup setting, assume: Breakers with adjustable pickup settings
can be set as highest or lowest possible pickup that is equal to or greater than the design Amp
value.

 Maximum Available: Selects highest available settings

 Minimum Available: Selects the smallest available settings

Size Feeder Breakers: Select the criteria for sizing feeder breakers.

 Based on Bus Rating: Cables are sized based on Amp Rating of downstream bus
equipment (switchgear, panelboard, switchboard, MCC, Panel, etc.).

 Based on Load: Cables are sized based on downstream load.

Chapter 17 Auto-Design Auto-Design Options  693

Voltage Drops

Auto Design Options – Voltage Drop

Auto design allows you to select cables of higher rating if the voltage drop at the downstream
end of the cable is greater than a user-specified value. The voltage drop is defined as follows:

Voltage Drop = (Base kV – Calculated Voltage)/ Base kV * 100%

Assumed Locked Rotor Mult (LRM): This value, multiplied by the full load amps of
motors, provides the starting (inrush) current. This value is used for all motor circuits for
voltage drop calculation while sizing cables.

Assumed Source Vpu: The per-unit voltage at the source end of the cable.

Assumed Load: Type of amps calculation to use for voltage drop calculation. Choices are:

 Downstream Code Factors Load

 Downstream Connected Load

 Downstream Demand Load

Chapter 17 Auto-Design Auto-Design Options  694

 Downstream Design Load

Upsize Conductor if Volt Drop >: If the voltage drop due to load is greater than the
specified value, the program selects the next larger cable in order to keep the voltage drop
within specified limits. To avoid upsizing cables based on voltage drop, the edit field
must be blank.

Upsize Conductor if Motor Starting Voltage Drop >: If the voltage drop due to motor
starting is greater than the specified value, the program selects the next larger cable so that
the voltage drop is kept within specified limits. To avoid upsizing cables based on motor
starting voltage drop, the edit field must be blank.

Bus

Auto Design Options - Bus

Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  695

<Other> Bus Types: For buses defined as type “Other”, you can allow sizing, or avoid
sizing.

Design Library
The design library is a template for sizing various types of equipment. Equipment sizing is
based on the type of circuit and the amp calculation for the circuit. Library comes with a
design template called “Generic”, which consists of a list of protective devices, cables, bus
equipment and transformers to choose from. You can use the Generic design template for
typical applications. You can also create your own design template, or modify the Generic
template to suit your specific needs.

To open the library, while in Database Edit focus, click on EasyPower button and
choose Open Library. Choose the file “Stdlib.mdb” or your custom library.

The Generic design template can be found in the section Design  US  Generic.

Auto Design Library

Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  696

A design template is also called Design Sheet. Each design sheet is organized into various
tabs, which have spreadsheets describing equipment and sizes to choose from. The following
tabs are available. The details are provided later in the chapter.

Notes: To describe the design aspects, provide notes and comments.

Motors: For sizing protective devices and cables in motor circuits based on motor size.

Feeders: For sizing cables.

Protective Equipment: Contains lists of protective devices (circuit breakers, fuses) for
various type of bus equipment such as switchgear, panelboards, MCC, etc.

Bus Equipment: Contains lists of bus sizes for various type of bus equipment such as
switchgear, panelboards, MCC, etc.

Transformers: Contains a list of transformers of various sizes and kV.

Motors

The design template for motor circuits is entered in this part of the library. A motor circuit
consists of a motor, cable, and a protective device.

kV : Rated kV for the motors. The motor rated voltage must be defined in the library. Use the
Add New button to create new voltage levels. Each kV level has its own design template.
The motor voltage in the one-line must be exactly equal to the voltage defined in the library
for Auto-Design to work. A mismatch of voltage will yield no results. You can add any
number of voltage levels for motors. To view or edit data for any voltage level, use the
combo box to select the kV first. To delete a kV value, delete all the cells in the spreadsheet
for that kV.

Motor HP: Rated horsepower (HP) for the motor for which circuit is to be designed. The HP
for the motor in the one-line must match the Design library Motor HP. You must enter the
Motor HP before you can enter other details for that circuit. Deleting the Motor HP will
delete the details. The cables and protective devices in the motor circuits are designed as per
the motor HP.

NEC FLA: Full-load current for the motor based on National Electric Code (NEC 2005),
Table 430.250. The FLA is determined from motor voltage and size (HP).

FLAx1.25: This is NEC FLA multiplied by a factor of 1.25.

Protective Device (A): Continuous current rating for the device protecting the motor circuit.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  697

Device Type: Type of protective device such as fuse or circuit breaker. This field is currently
used for database purposes only and is not used in calculations.

Phase: Details of the phase conductors for motor circuits.

No/Ph: Number of conductors in each phase.

Type: Core construction such as 1/C, 3/C, etc.

Ins: NEC/UL insulation designation.

Size kCMIL: Size of conductor in AWG or kcmil.

Ins (C): Maximum operating temperature for the cable based on insulation type. This is
defined in the cable data library, and is automatically filled once you select the cable details.

Cond Matl: Conductor material – either copper (Cu) or aluminum (Al).

Ground: Details of ground conductors for motor circuits.

No/Ph: Number of ground conductors.

Size kCMIL: Size of conductor in AWG or kcmil.

Raceway: Details of conductor raceway.

Type: Type of enclosure for cables, such as conduit, tray, air, burial, etc.

Material: Material type for the enclosure, such as steel aluminum, PVC, etc.

Conduit No.: Number of conduits.

Conduit Size (in): Diameter of conduits in inches.

Ampacity: Current carrying capacity of the cables for continuous loads. The program
automatically obtains the ampacity values from the cable library.

Terminal Ampacity @ 75 deg C: Ampacity for cable terminations. The program

automatically computes the terminal ampacity from the cable ampacities.

Feeders

Design template for feeder circuits is entered in this spreadsheet. Feeder circuits are sized by
the upstream protective device amps. For meaning of individual column headings see section
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  698

on Motors. You can have feeder designs for 3 Phase – 3 Wire systems or 3 Phase – 4 Wire
systems. Select the appropriate system form the combo box before populating the
spreadsheets.

The first column in this spreadsheet is Protective Device (A). The feeder is designed as per
the protective device amp rating. Deleting this cell will delete the data in the entire row.

Protective Equipment

Protective devices to be used with various equipment types, circuit types and continuous
current rating are defined in this section.

Equipment: The various equipment types are switchgears, switchboards, panelboards, etc.
For each equipment type you can enter various protective device amps.

Rating (A): Continuous current rating of protective device.

Appl: The type of circuit for which the protective device selection is applicable. The circuit
type can be motor circuit, feeder/transformer circuit, or all types.

Add Breaker…: This button allows you to specify multiple possible solutions to breaker
selection. A dialog called “Add Breaker to Design Sheet” will open up, in which the fields
are as described below. The first row in this sheet will show in the Design Sheet view. While
performing Series Coordination of breakers, the specified breakers inside this dialog will be
evaluated, and the first breaker to be selectively coordinated with downstream breaker will be
selected.

Class: Protective device class – LVPCB, ICCB, MCCB or fuse.

100% Rated: Select “Yes” if the protective device is 100% rated. A typical MCCB is not
100% rated.

Protective Device (Mfr-Type-Style): The manufacturer name, type name and style name for
the protective device. You can select these fields from the available choices in the combo
boxes.

SST (checkbox): Check the checkbox if the circuit breaker uses a solid state trip (SST).

SST (Mfr-Type-Style): The manufacturer name, type name and style name for the solid
state trip of the protective device.

I2t: Check the checkbox to set the I^2T delay option to “On” for short time delay.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  699

ST: Check the checkbox if the trip unit has short time delay trip settings.

Inst: Check the checkbox if the trip unit has instantaneous trip settings.

GF: Check the checkbox if the trip unit has ground fault trip settings.

Motor O/L (Mfr-Type-Style): Details for motor overload relay.

Unit Cost (USD): Protective device unit cost used for Bill of Material.

Bus Equipment

This section is used for defining the bus ratings for various equipment types.

Equipment: Type of equipment such as switchgear, panelboard, etc.

Bus Amperes: Various ampere ratings to be used in design for each type of equipment.

Description: Enter description of the equipment. Possibly Manufacturer and Type.

Bus Bracing kA: Equipment Bus rating in kA.

Bus Material: Material type for equipment, Cooper or Aluminum.

Unit Cost: Equipment unit cost used for Bill of Material.

Transformers

The transformers to be used in design are defined in this section. You can enter transformer
sizes for various voltage levels.

KV: The primary and secondary kV of transformers are displayed in the combo box. To add
any new kV level not in the combo box, select the Add New button and enter the primary and
secondary voltages for the transformers. To delete any voltage level, delete all the
spreadsheet entries for the level.

Base kVA: Transformer self cooled rating in kVA.

Z%: Percent impedance of transformer.

Type: Insulation/cooling medium, such as oil, gas, dry, etc.

Class: Cooling class designation.

Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  700

Temp: ANSI temperature rating of the transformer. Various combinations can be chosen and
are dependent upon the type of transformer. Dual ratings such as 55/65 increase the overload
capability of the transformer by 12 percent.

Cooled Rating (kVA): Forced cooled rating /overload rating in kVA.

Pri FLA: Primary full load amps

Pri Brkr/Fuse Amps: Amp value used for selecting primary side protective device.

Sec FLA: Secondary full load amps.

Sec Brkr/Fuse Amps: Amp value used for selecting secondary side protective device.

Editing Design Library

You can edit the Generic Design library to suit your needs or create a new design sheet. The
Generic sheet has standard equipment sizes. If your design needs to have a limited number of
equipment sizes, you can delete sizes you don’t want to include or change sizes to desired
values. For example, if you will not be using all the possible sizes of cables, you can
customize the library such that only some preferred cable sizes are used. Similarly, if some of
your motors have sizes not listed in the Generic sheet, you can add new motor HP data.

Creating New Design Sheet: In the left window of the library right click on US and choose
Insert New Sheet Form the context menu. A new design sheet will be created. You can
rename this sheet.

Copy / Paste Design Sheet: Right click on the name of the design sheet you want to copy
and choose Copy Sheet from the context menu. This will copy the contents of the design
sheet to the clipboard. Right click on US and choose Paste New Sheet. You can rename the
new sheet.

Exporting / Importing Design Sheet: You can export a design sheet as a file so that it can
be imported to another computer or another library. Right click on the name of sheet you
wish to export and choose Export Sheet. It will be saved as an “.xlz” file. To import a design
sheet, right click on US and choose Import Sheet. Select the file you wish to import from
and select Open.

Inserting New Row: To insert a new row to a spreadsheet in the design sheet, right click on
the leftmost numbered header of row above which you want the new row and choose Insert
Row.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  701

Adding New kV: For motors and transformers you can add new voltages that are not already
listed. Click on the Add New button enter the new voltage. You will get a new spreadsheet.

Deleting Rows: To delete any row, delete the first cell in that row and press enter.

Undo Delete: Press [Ctrl] + [Z].

Adding/Editing Spreadsheet Data: The spreadsheet cells can be edit fields, combo boxes
(drop down menu), or calculated fields (gray). Type the desired values in edit fields (for
example Motor HP). The combo boxes are for items that need to be selected from equipment
already defined in the library, such as cable descriptions, or protective device descriptions.

Reports
The Auto Design report shows in report format the new equipment size and why that size
was chosen. The Auto Design report is automatically created each time Auto Design is run.
The report will automatically become the active window. An example of an Auto Design
report is included below.

The structure of the report is similar for all sized equipment. Each piece of equipment sized
during the Auto Design process is included in the Auto Design Report and has a header with
the equipment type and name. Followed by two tables, a settings table and comments list
table.
The settings table shows details as to how the specified equipment was sized. The right side
of each table shows the new equipment size. Also included in the report is the bus and circuit
type. The rest of the table contains information used to determine the sizing amps. Depending
on the type of circuit the sized equipment is a part of, the information
used to determine the sizing current amps may include load current calculation used, breaker
size or transformer kVA.

The comments table lists any information that was used to size the equipment. This may
include other dependent equipment, NEC codes and or many other reasons. Comments that
are Gold are Warnings and Red comments are violations.

Comments that are Warnings and Violations need to be reviewed and addressed. It is
advisable that you completely review each table in each Auto Design Report you create to
make sure all results are accurate and meet your design criteria.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  702

Auto Design Report

Once the Auto Design Report is created you can do a number of things with it. You can print
it directly from EasyPower, copy it directly to your report or save it as an HTML file.

To print the Auto Design Report, click on the Print button from the ribbon.

To save the Auto Design Report as an HTML file click on EasyPower button and
choose Save from the list.

To export the Auto Design Report to Excel, right mouse click on the report and select

Export to Microsoft Excel.

To export the Auto Design Report to Word, right mouse click on the report and select

Export to Microsoft Word.

You can also copy portions of Auto Design Report to Word or Excel. To copy, first

select the cells you would like to copy. Then right mouse click on the report and select

Copy. Open the appropriate program and paste the copied items.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  703

Bill of Materials

Bill of Materials will create an item by item list of costs for all selected low voltage
equipment and determines the total equipment cost. The equipment that can be included in
the Bill of Materials includes bus equipment such as Switchgear, MCCs and Panels,
protective devices, cables and motors.

Bill of Materials can be run for your entire low voltage system or just a select group of
equipment. To perform a Bill of Materials, select all the equipment you want to include in the
Bill of Materials. To select a group of items, either highlight the items by drawing a box
around them or holding the Shift key while selecting individual items. After selecting the
items you want to include in the Bill of Materials click on the drop down arrow below the
Auto Design button and choose Bill of Materials. A Bill of Materials report will
automatically appear. You can also show the Bill of Materials report during the Auto Design
process by checking the box to Create Bill of Materials Report in ToolsOptionsAuto
Design tab’s General section.

Bill of materials Reports

The Bill of Materials equipment costs are shown in the Bill of Materials report. The report is
automatically created when Bill of Materials is run.

The Bill of Material Report consists of a group of tables organized by equipment type. The
different equipment tables are Transformers, Protective devices grouped by bus equipment
type, Bus equipment type, and Cables. The Transformer and Cable Bill of Material tables
combine all similar equipment and give a total cost based on number of units or total cost for
all similar conductors. For Bus Equipment and Protective devices
each piece of equipment will be found as a line item, with Bus name or protective device
name specified along with the individual cost of the item.

The Cable Bill of Materials section includes Phase Conductor, Ground Conductor and
Conduit tables. Additional tables are created for different voltage levels for Phase and
Ground conductor tables.

The total equipment cost is shown at the bottom of the Bill of Materials Report.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Design Library  704

Bill of Materials Report

Once the Bill of Materials Report is created you can do a number of things with it. You can
print it directly from EasyPower, copy it directly to your report or save it as an HTML file.

To print the Bill of Materials Report, select Print button from the ribbon.

To save the Bill of Materials Report as an HTML file, click on EasyPower button and
choose Save from the list.

To export the Bill of Materials Report to Excel, right mouse click on the report and select
Export to Microsoft Excel.

To export the Bill of Materials Report to Word, right mouse click on the report and select
Export to Microsoft Word.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Series Coordination of Breakers  705

You can also copy portions of Bill of Materials Report to Word or Excel. To copy, first,
select the cells you would like to copy. Then right mouse click on the report and select Copy.
Open the appropriate program and paste the copied items.

Bill of Materials Library

The costs for all equipment are set in the Design library. To open the library, select from
Database Edit focus, click on EasyPower button and choose Open Library from the
list. Choose the file “Stdlib.mdb” or your custom library.

The Generic design template can be found in the section Design  US  Generic.

Under each of the following tabs Motors, Conductor Costing, Protective Equipment, Bus
Equipment, and Transformers are columns to enter unit costs or costs per foot. Typical
equipment costs have been entered for you in the Generic library. As you finish your design
and start looking into purchasing equipment, you will want to replace these estimated costs
with actual equipment costs. Conductor and Conduit costs are entered into the Library as cost
per foot. The program then calculates the total conductor or conduit cost by multiplying the
conductor length by the cost per foot.

For a more detailed look at the Design Library, refer to the Design Library section earlier in
this chapter.

Series Coordination of Breakers

SmartDesign™ feature in EasyPower has the ability to find and select LV breakers that will
selectively coordinate with each other in the instantaneous trip (high short circuit current)
region of the time current curves. Although the time current curves may indicate that the
breakers are not coordinated in the instantaneous trip region, various manufacturers have
published documents that show the extent to which a greater level of coordination is possible
in the instantaneous trip region. These documents are based on tests and calculations. Based
on the manufacturers’ datasheets, EasyPower selects the appropriate breakers in the Auto
Design process so that breakers in series coordinate with each other. For coordination in the
overload or short time trip regions of the breakers, it is necessary to check against the TCC
plots or use EasyPower’s SmartPDC™ (Auto Coordination) feature.

The Series Coordination (of breakers) feature is integrated with SmartDesign. If a breaker
being selectively coordinated does not have the trip amps specified in the one-line data, the
 Chapter 17 Auto-Design Series Coordination of Breakers  706

auto-sizing algorithms in SmartDesign are used to determine the size of breakers based on
downstream loads and various code factor calculations.

Pre-requisites for Series Coordination

Before using Series Coordination command, you will need to make sure that you have the
following pre-requisites.

1. The one-line is adequately modeled along with one source:

 Both upstream and downstream breakers must exist.

 If a transformer exists upstream to the breakers, the transformer size and impedance must
be specified – this is the basis for calculating available short circuit currents. If there are
no upstream transformers then the utility data must be realistic.

2. For the design sheet specified in the options, the design sheet in the library must have the
necessary data:

 Desired breakers for the various amp values must be listed. Use manufacturer names and
styles, and not “Generic”.

 The breaker styles listed in the design sheets must have series coordination data in the
breaker library.

Performing Series Coordination

On the one-line, select the LV breakers you want to choose.

Click on the drop down arrow below the Auto Design button and choose Series
Coordination.

Click on Window  “Auto design Report for…..dez”. An HTML report will be seen. The
first table in the report describes the breaker that was selected. The second table shows
comments on various criteria that were used and various observations made by the program.
If the program encounters problems such as lack of a solution, or exceptions, they will be
mentioned in the comments. If no solution can be found then only the comments table will
appear.

EasyPower will choose a breaker from the design sheet that will selectively coordinate with
the downstream breaker.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Series Coordination of Breakers  707

You can select a single breaker or multiple breakers. If you select multiple breakers in series,
the most downstream breaker pair will be coordinated first, followed by the next upstream
breaker. To select multiple breakers, hold the [Shift] key on the key board and click the
mouse while pointing to the breakers.

If you select only the most downstream breaker, there are no breakers to coordinate with. If
you select the most downstream breaker and the breaker upstream to it, both breakers will be
chosen such that they selectively coordinate.

If a breaker has been previously specified in the one-line and the Trip Amps is defined, then
that Trip Amps value will be the basis for searching for selectively coordinating breaker. If
the Trip Amps has not been previously defined, Auto Design algorithm will be used to
determine the Trip Amps for the breaker.

If there are multiple solutions to series coordination for any breaker, the first breaker listed in
the design sheet will be selected. The alternative solutions will be listed in the Auto-Design
report.

Bottom-up approach: Since breakers are selected to coordinate with downstream breakers, it
is necessary to solve for lower level breakers first and move your way upstream.

Adding Coordination Data to Breaker Library

Based on a manufacturer’s datasheet on breaker series coordination, you can add or modify
the breaker data in the library.

In the library, go to the breaker data (Class Manufacturer  Type). On the right window
click on the Style and view the tab Series Coordination. This is the list of downstream
breakers that will coordinate with the current breaker style. The various columns represent
the criteria for coordination, as described below.

Voltage: The information in this row is valid only for the shown voltage.

Upstream Amp Rating: The information in this row is valid only for the shown Amp Rating
of upstream breaker. If the Upstream Amp Rating is not a criterion, then “All” is selected for
Description.

Poles: The information in this row is valid only for the shown number of poles for
downstream breakers.

Min/Max Amp Rating: These two columns provide the range of Trip Amps of downstream
breaker for which the row is valid.
Chapter 17 Auto-Design Series Coordination of Breakers  708

SST Plug Amps: If a certain SST plug size needs to be used for coordination, this column is
used.

Max Coord (kA): This is the maximum short circuit current in kA to which coordination is
possible.

Customizing the Design Template for Series Coordination

The design templates are stored in the library. While choosing breakers in your design for
series coordination, you may need to list multiple breakers as possible choices. To add
breakers to the design sheets follow the steps below.

1. Open library: Click on EasyPower button and choose Open Library from the list.
Choose the library name and click on Open.

2. In the library, go to Design [desired design sheet]  Protective Equipment tab.

3. For bus equipment type (switchgear, panelboard, etc.) and the Amp Rating, click on the
Add Breaker… button.

4. The window “Add Breaker to Design Sheet” will open. This spreadsheet contains the
list of circuit breakers and the solid state trip units that could be used in a design for the
amp rating (and below) to be housed in a bus type. The program will evaluate each
breaker starting from the top row to check if the breaker will coordinate with the
downstream breakers. The first breaker that is found to selectively coordinate with the
downstream breakers will be selected in the one-line.

5. You can insert new rows or delete existing rows. Right click on the left-most gray
column with the 1, 2, 3,… numbers. Choose the desired command from the context
menu.

6. Since the evaluation takes place starting from the top row, you can sort the rows in the
order of preference. You can use the Move Up or Move Down commands to arrange the
rows or you can use Excel to sort a large number of breakers based on a specific criteria.
You can copy and paste data between Excel and this spreadsheet.

7. Clicking on the Close button will save the changes.

Chapter 17 Auto-Design Series Coordination of Breakers  709
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Introduction  710

Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination
Introduction
SmartPDC™ is an EasyPower feature that allows you to Auto Coordinate circuit breakers,
fuses, and relays based on downstream cables, motors, loads and protective devices. In the
Coordination focus of EasyPower, you can select a single protective device or a group of
protective devices and choose the Auto Coordinate command to coordinate the selected
items. Auto coordination will apply the new settings to the temporary database in
coordination focus and create an Auto Coordination Report. From the report, you can
observe the protective device settings changes along with comments from the Auto
Coordination process. Various coordination options are available to provide user flexibility in
the Auto Coordination process. Auto Coordination supports both phase and ground
coordination.

Phase Coordination vs. Ground Coordination

EasyPower SmartPDC allows for Phase or Ground coordination, or both Phase and Ground
coordination. This option can be selected in the Auto Coordination Options tab of
Coordination Options dialog. Phase coordination of selected device uses downstream phase
device settings to Auto Coordinate while Ground Auto Coordination coordinates with
downstream ground device settings.

Protective devices that can be Auto

Coordinated
Relays

The device function type selection in the System tab of the Relay dialog box is important
when determining the type of Auto Coordination being selected. For Phase Auto
Coordination, all “Dev Fctn Type” with “Phase OC” will be included as a dependency. The
same applies for Ground Coordination of relays as the Auto Coordination will use functions
that have “Ground OC” selected in “Dev Fctn Type” column. All relays with “Dev Fctn
Type” selected as “Other” or “Differential” will not be used by Auto Coordination. Also, any
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Protective devices that can be Auto Coordinated  711

function that does not have the check box in column “Plot TCC” checked will be omitted
from Auto Coordination. The different Dev Fctn Type selections and “Plot TCC” check
boxes are shown in figure below.

Relay - Device Function Type and Plot TCC for Auto Coordination

SSTs and Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Phase Auto Coordination of a SST or molded case circuit breaker uses the information
provided in the Phase tab of the breaker dialog box. For Ground Auto Coordination
appropriate data needs to be entered in the Ground tab of the breaker dialog box. If you do
not want phase or ground settings to be used in the Auto Coordination process for a particular
device, uncheck the check box next to “Plot TCC” under the appropriate section of the
breaker dialog box.

Fuses

When auto coordinating a fuse, the fuse size will not be modified in the database. However,
the auto coordination report will show comments regarding the coordination of the fuse with
downstream equipment. If you do not want the fuse curve to affect Auto Coordination of
upstream devices, uncheck the check box next to “Plot TCC” under the Specifications tab.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Process  712

Auto Coordination Process

When using auto coordination to coordinate your complete model, it is suggested to start at
the downstream devices. Then working upstream, so all dependant devices are coordinated
properly. Using this process, the user will not need to re-coordinate a device that has already
been coordinated. The figure below shows a typical method of steps for Auto Coordination.
It shows three groups of items to coordinate. Begin by auto coordinating the items in the
circle on the bottom left of the one-line. Read through the Auto Coordination Report and
verify all protective device settings are coordinated to meet your standards. Repeat this
process for the group of items on the lower right side of the one-line. At this point the lower
portion of the one-line is properly coordinated. It is now time to auto coordinate the relay in
the circle at the top of the one-line, since all dependent protective devices are properly
coordinated. Again read through the Auto Coordination Report to observe the comments.
UTIL-1
250 MVA
7 (X/R)
200 MVA
5 (X/R)
kV
8

MAIN SWG-A
.
13

BH-3_A
GE 15-PV-37
CT-7_A 1200A R-6_A
Auto 1200/5 MR MF
BE1-851
Coordinate 800/5 Set
CT-8_A
group of 50/5
items last.
CU, 300', [Conduit]
1-1/C-4/0 AWG

kV
8.
13

BUS-2
FS-6 1-1/C-350 kcmil
GE EJO-1/ 9F62 CU, 200', [Conduit]
FS-3_A
Unit Sub - 2000 kVA GE EJO-1/ 9F62

TX-2 Auto TX-2F

Auto 2 / 2.576 MVA 2 / 2.576 MVA
Coordinate 13.8 - 0.48 kV
Coordinate 13.8 - 0.48 kV
6% group of 6%
group of
items first.
items
second.
BL-2A
GE AKR-75 BL-2FA
3200/3520 GE AKRU-75
kV

kV

3200/3520
8

SWG-2A SWG-2F
4

4
0.

0.

BL-2B BL-2C BL-2D BL-2FB BL-2FC BL-2FD

GE AKR-30H GE AKR-30H GE AKR-50 GE AKRU-30 GE AKRU-30 GE AKRU-50
800/800 800/400 1600/1280 800/640 800/400 1600/1280

M-2A M-2F

250 HP
CU, 125', [Conduit]

CU, 250', [Conduit]

CU, 125', [Conduit]

CU, 250', [Conduit]

350 HP
Induction
2-1/C-350 kcmil

2-1/C-350 kcmil

2-1/C-350 kcmil

2-1/C-350 kcmil

Induction
16.7%
16.7%
kV

kV

kV

kV
48

48

48

48
0.

0.

0.

0.

MCC-2A MCC-2B MCC MCC-2AF MCC-2BF

MCC MCC MCC

395 HP 395 HP 395 HP 395 HP

0 kVA 0 kVA 0 kVA 0 kVA
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Process  713

Order of Auto Coordination

Tips on Auto Coordination:

When using Auto Coordination feature plot a TCC of the group of items you are
coordinating, and then run Auto Coordination from within the TCC plot. This allows visual
inspection of the Auto Coordination process.

To view the EasyPower one-line, TCC plot and Auto Coordination Report windows at one
time, click on Window button in the ribbon and choose Arrange For Auto Coordination or
press F8.

Pressing the undo button will undo your last protective device database settings change.

Remember to Auto Coordinate the most downstream equipment first before coordinating
upstream equipment.

Lock Auto Coordination

LV Breaker Data for each protective device has a checkbox for “Lock Auto Coordination” to
prevent data changes that are possible through Auto Coordination. For relays, Lock Auto
Coordination can be selected for each device function. Check the check box in the “Lock
AC” column in the system tab of the dialog box for the function you do not want Auto
Coordination feature to change the settings.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  714

Lock Auto Coordination

Auto Coordination Options

Auto Coordination Options allows you to specify how your system will be coordinated. To
select the Auto Coordination options from Coordination ribbon, click on the PDC
Options button and go to Auto Coordination tab. To access Auto Coordiantion Options
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  715

from the TCC ribbon, click on the drop down arrow below the SmartPDC button and
choose Smart PDC Options.

General

Coordination Options - General

How do you want to handle protective devices with no data? : Allows user to decide how
to proceed when a protective device to be coordinate does not contain trip data. Choices are:

Automatically Skip Device: Skips the device with incomplete data and procedes with
other devices. Protective device will not be used in coordination. The auto-
coordination process will report incomplete data for protective device without data.

Cancel Auto-Coordination Run: Stops the entire Auto-Coordination process.

Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  716

Prompt to Skip or Cancel: Allows you to decide one of the above two methods during
the Auto Coordination process by providing a message.

Default Insufficient Data Handling

The trip settings will be set as selected below, if the curve cannot be coordinated with other
equipment because of insufficient data.

Set LTPU to: Select the type of load current calculation to use to set LTPU: The following
choices are available:

Connected Amps: Amp value for the total kVA of all downstream loads.

Demand Amps: Amp value for the total (kVA * Demand Factor) of all downstream
loads.

Code Factor Amps: Amp value calculated using appropriate code factors and demand
factors, following a Code (such as NEC).

Design Amps: Amp value calculated using appropriate code factors and diversity
factor and Design multiplier.

If zero, then: If the selected load type amps are equal to zero, the LTPU will be set as
selected. The possible LTPU selections for this case are Min, Medium and Max.

Set STPU to: Select the setting for STPU if coordinating equipment does not have sufficient
data or coordinating equipment is not present. The possible STPU selections are Min,
Medium and Max.

Set INST to: Select the setting for INST if coordinating equipment do not have sufficient
data or no coordinating equipment is present. The possible STPU selections are Min,
Medium and Max.

Curve comparison precision: Select the amount of precision used while coordinating
between curves. Selecting a higher level of precision will enhance coordination. There are
three levels of precision are shown below. The default level of precision is Normal (fastest).

 Normal (fastest)

 High

 Aggressive (slowest)
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  717

The selected level of precision will affect the amount of time needed for EasyPower to auto
coordinate each selected protective device.

Auto-coordination analysis: Select the type phase or ground:

 Phase Only: Auto Coordination will only coordinate phase settings.

 Ground Only: Auto Coordination will only coordinate ground settings.

 Both Phase and Ground: Auto Coordination will coordinate phase settings
and ground settings at the same time.

Include 87% transformer shift during coordination: The program will take into
consideration the 87% factor while comparing primary currents with secondary in a wye-
delta transformer with line-to-line fault on the delta side.

Generate report only without changing database: This allows you to view comments
regarding auto coordination of equipment, without changing protective device settings in
temporary database. When the box is unchecked, the settings will be changed temporarily in
Coordination focus. These changes will then need to be stored to the database when returning
to Database focus.

Verify that Thermal Magnetic Trip and Fuse amps protect equipment: If this checkbox
is checked then the program will compare the trip amps of the breaker or fuse with the rated
amps of the protected cable or transformer, and will report possible overload protection
issues.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  718

Transformer

Auto Coordination Options - Transformer

NEC Requirements for Transformer Protection: The table is the NEC Table 450-3(A) for
transformer primary over 600V. The table shows the maximum rating or setting of over
current protection for transformers. The spreadsheet is user-definable.

Verify FLA NEC limits with: When setting SST for transformer FLA, the LTPU is set
based on the following selections:

 LTPU setting amps: LTPU setting is set based on LTPU amps.

 LTPU min tolerance amps: LTPU setting is set based on LTPU minimum
clearing curve amps.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  719

Allow one setting past transformer FLA NEC limit for LTPU selection: Checking box
will increase LTPU setting by one past selected transformer FLA NEC limit. If box is
unchecked, LTPU will be set as originally specified.

How should the LTPU selection of LV devices be prioritized? LTPU coordination is

selected by coordinating with other protective devices or with maximum transformer FLA.

 Use closer selectivity with downstream protective devices: LTPU setting will
be set based on coordination with downstream protective devices.

 Use Max transformer Amps: LTPU will be set based on maximum transformer
amps.

Minimum gap between inrush and relay: Sets the relay time delay at specified seconds
higher than the transformer inrush time.

Line

Auto Coordination Options- Line

Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  720

For LV devices, set line ampacity protection using: Select cable protection method.

 LTPU settings amps: Adjusts LTPU settings of solid state trip such that the
LTPU nominal amps are lower than the downstream cable.

 LTPU min tolerance amps: Adjusts LTPU settings of solid state trip such that
the LTPU minimum tolerance amps are lower than the downstream cable.

Allow one setting past line ampacity limit for LTPU selection: When box is checked,
LTPU setting will be set to next setting past cable ampacity. As per NEC, this is allowed
only when the amp rating is 800A or less.

How should the LTPU selection of LV devices be prioritized? Allows user to choose
method for coordinating solid state trip and cable.

Use closer selectivity with downstream protective devices: By choosing this selection, the
solid state trip device will coordinate with downstream protective devices.

Use line ampacity: The cable ampacity will be used to set the LTPU setting amps, without
comparing with downstream protective devices.

Tolerance allowed before showing underutilized warning: If the trip amps of the device is
lower than the cable ampacity by the specify tolerance, the report will indicate that the cable
will be underutilized.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  721

Load

Coordination Options - Load

How do you want to handle coordination for single loads?

Set LTPU to: Select the type of load current calculation to use to set LTPU. The following
choices are available:

 100% Connected Amps: Amp value for 100% of kVA load.

 Scaled Connected Amps: Amp value for the scaled kVA of load.

 Demand Amps: Amp value for the total (kVA * Demand Factor) of load.

 Code Factor Amps: Amp value calculated using appropriate code factors and
demand factors, following a Code (such as NEC).
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  722

 Design Amps: Amp value calculated using appropriate code factors and
diversity factor and Design multiplier.

Set STPU to: Select one of the following STPU settings when coordinating with a single
load: Min, Medium, Max.

Set INST to: Select one of the following INST settings when coordinating with a single load:
Min, Medium, Max.

Capacitor

Auto Coordination Options - Capacitor

Minimum gap between inrush and relay: Set the minimum time gap in seconds between a
capacitor’s inrush with a relay to ensure selective coordination. The range is from 0.01 to 10
seconds.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  723

Motor

Auto Coordination Options - Motor

Tolerances when comparing trip curves

FLA: Trip curve will be set outside tolerance boundary when comparing with Motor FLA.
The range is –50 % to 50 %.

LRA: Trip curve will be set outside tolerance boundary when comparing with Motor Locked
Rotor Amps (LRA). The range is –50 % to 50 %.

Asym: Trip curve settings will be set outside tolerance boundary when comparing with
Motor Asymmetrical inrush amps. The range is –50 % to 50 %.

Damage I2T: Sets the minimum gap between the protective device trip curve and the
thermal I^2T damage curve of the motor. The range is –50 % to 50 %.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  724

Note: When coordinating protective devices at low voltage we assume the maximum
downstream motor size to be 250 HP.

Fuse

Auto Coordination Options – Fuse

Average Melting tolerance: Used only if the fuse curves are average melting curves.
Tolerance allows program to set boundary for fuse curve coordination. The tolerance range is
from –50 to 50.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  725

Relay

Auto Coordination Options – Relay

HV Relay tap default: When a relay has only cables as downstream equipment, the Tap is
set to the specified value times the ampacity of cable.

HV Time Dial with no dependencies: when a relay does not have dependencies, its time
dial is set such that the relay trips close to the specified time at the maximum short circuit
current available at the CT for the relay. You can also have the time dial set at the specified
value instead of basing on the short circuit current.

HV Instantaneous with no dependencies: The instantaneous is set to the specified multiple

of maximum short circuit current.

Minimum Gap Tolerance: The desired minimum time difference between two relays is the
sum of Over Travel time, Safety Margin, Auxiliary relay time, and circuit breaker opening
 Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  726

time. The time dial settings available in a relay may not provide the exact desired minimum
time difference. This Minimum Gap Tolerance allows you to set the time delay of the relay
up to the specified percentage higher than the desired minimum time. For example, the
desired time difference between two relays is 0.283 seconds. If the Minimum Gap Tolerance
is 20%, the program will allow the upstream relay time dial to be set such that the time
difference is not greater than 0.33 seconds (0.283 + 20%).

Inst Safety Margin: This is the factor used in setting instantaneous pickup. A factor of 1.1
corresponds to a 10% tolerance. For example, if the downstream relay has instantaneous
pickup of 3000 Amps, then the upstream relay pickup needs to be higher than 3300 Amps
(3000*1.1).

Tap Precision: Select the number of taps/pickup settings program will process through to
determine the optimal relay curve settings. There are three (3) precision selections:

 High (Most Taps viewed)

 Medium

 Low (Least Taps viewed)

Instantaneous Selection Base on Transformer Short Circuit Let-Through Current

With DC Offset Filter: Solid state relays typically have dc offset filters so that trip
characteristics is based only on the ac component of currents. The relay library has data
marking whether or not the relay has dc offset filter. DC component may not be completely
filtered.

Use Calculated SC Asym Offset: Checking this box will use the asymmetrical currents
(with dc component) calculated by the program. If the check box is left unchecked, then the
offset specified in the field below will be used.

 Assume: Asym Mult: If the checkbox “Use Calculated SC Asym Offset” is unchecked, then
the specified value will be used.

Without DC Offset Filter : Relays that do not have dc offset filters, respond to the
asymmetrical current.

Relay Minimum Time Gaps

The time gap between two protective devices is to ensure selective coordination. It is
dependent on the combination of devices. The spreadsheet lists different combination of
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  727

protective devices consisting of induction disk (ID) and solid state (SS) relays, fuses and LV
breakers. The minimum time gap is sum of the Overtravel, Safety Margin, Auxiliary and
breaker opening time.

Auto Coordination Options – Relay Minimum Time Gap

Reports
The Auto Coordination Report allows you to observe the changes to protective device
settings along with comments from the Auto Coordination process. EasyPower will create
separate reports for Phase and Ground Auto Coordination.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  728

The report contains two tables for each protective device that is coordinated during the Auto
Coordination process. The “Coordinated With” table lists all the dependent equipment the
selected protective device was coordinate with. The Comments accompanying each specified
dependent equipment gives additional details that were used by EasyPower in the Auto
Coordination of the protective device.

The “Suggested Settings” table for the coordinated device shows the Old and New Settings
for each individual setting section. Each setting also has additional comments which include
explanations as to why the new setting was selected. Comments may include other dependent
equipment settings used to coordinate with, NEC codes or many other additional reasons.
Comments in both the “Coordinated With” and “Suggested
Settings” tables that are Gold are Warnings while Red comments are violations.

Comments that are Warnings and Violations need to be reviewed and addressed.

It is advisable that you completely review each table for each coordinated protective device
in the Auto Coordination Report to make sure all results are accurate and meet required
specifications.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  729

Auto Coordination Phase Report

Once the Auto Coordination Report is created you can do a number of things with it. You can
print it directly from EasyPower, copy it directly to your report or save it as an HTML file.
To print the Auto Coordination Report, select Print button from the Text Report
ribbon.

To save the Auto Coordination Report as HTML file click on EasyPower button and
choose Save As from the list.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination Auto Coordination Options  730

To export the Auto Coordination Report to Excel, right mouse click on the report and select
Export to Microsoft Excel.

To export the Auto Coordination Report to Word, right mouse click on the report and select
Export to Microsoft Word.
Chapter 18 Auto-Coordination 731
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 732

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability

Introduction
The Dynamic Stability feature in EasyPower allows you to simulate various power system
events in the time domain such as motor starting, power system faults, switching of
generators, loads and utility, and provides simulations results in plots and spreadsheets.
Protective device tripping and contactor dropout are automatically simulated based on time-
current curves and contactor data respectively.

This chapter is intended to provide a brief description of the various features and interface
available in the Dynamic Stability focus. Basic engineering theory is covered in the
documents “Dynamics 101”. It is recommended that you read this document if you are not
familiar with the terminology in this chapter or the dynamic modeling concepts.

If you are working with Dynamic Stability or Transient Motor Starting features of
EasyPower for the first time, the tutorials are good instructions to start with.

Dynamic Stability Focus

Dynamic stability simulations are performed in the Dynamic Stability focus. To enter this
focus, choose Dynamic Stability button from the ribbon. You need to have a
completed one-line in order to enter an analysis focus. When you enter the Dynamic Stability
focus, EasyPower window will change as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 733

Dynamic Stability Focus

Dynamic Stability Ribbon

Dynamic Stability ribbon

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 734

Steps to Running Dynamic Stability

Simulations
1) Data: Enter dynamic stability data for various equipments such as motors, generators,
contactors, ATS, transformers, etc. Data entry is performed in Database Edit focus
just like you would enter any other equipment data. These equipments have a tab
called Stability, in which you can enter the dynamic stability data. Chapter 12 –
Database Technical Reference, describes fields available in these tabs. You can
import generic data for these equipment from the library. However, equipment
specific data, obtained through manufacturers or through tests, is preferred over
generic data for accuracy.

2) Define Plots: Define which variables you need to plot or create spreadsheet for while
you run simulations. For example, if you need to see the currents in a cable or the
speed of the motor in rpm, you will have to specify this in the Define Plots dialog.

3) Create Scripts: You can create simulation scripts to record a series of commands or
events. When a simulation is run using a script, all the events defined in the script are
simulated. For example, if you want to run dynamic simulations for starting several
motors in a sequence, you can specify at which point in time to energize each motor.

4) System Configuration: Prior to running simulations, you need to determine the initial
conditions of the system to reflect it in the one-line. For example, if you want to
simulate a motor starting, the breaker or switch upstream to the motor will be open
before starting.

5) Review Dynamic Stability Options: You can control various aspects of simulations
and outputs.

6) Run Dynamic Stability Simulations: You can run a simulation using the “double-
click” method, or context menu commands, or by running a simulation script.
Double-clicking on an open motor breaker or switch will start the motor. Double-
clicking on a bus will fault the bus. If you have created a simulation script, you can
select the script and run simulations. Prior to running simulations run the script
<<Steady State>>. If the plot shows variables reaching a steady state and appears
constant, then you are ready to run simulations. Otherwise you will need to review
your data.

7) View DS message log and plot DS Plots: DS Message will provide information on the
status of initialization, executed commands and script events. The message will also
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 735

log automatic events such as protective device pickup or tripping, ATS transfer and
contactor dropout. Problems encountered during the simulations will also appear on
the message log.

Entering Dynamic Stability Data

The following equipments require dynamic stability data entered if their response is to be
simulated.

Motor: Stability tab of Motor Data dialog needs to be enabled and the motor model
spreadsheet needs to be populated. You can import typical data from the library. The running
load and starting load data are modeled in the same tab. Based on motor torque-speed
characteristics you can derive motor model parameters using the tool Define Induction Motor
Parameters. For details on induction motor parameter derivation, see Motor Data on Chapter
12 - Database Technical Reference.

Generator: You can enter dynamic stability data for a generator, its governor and its exciter
in the Stability 1 tab. Stability 2 is for power system stabilizer data.

Contactor: You can enter the dropout voltage and the dropout delay time for the contactor
for fused contactors or breaker-contactor combinations. The data is specified in Fuse Data or
LV Breaker Data dialogs.

ATS: You can specify the data required for ATS transfer action in Stability tab of ATS data.

Transformer: The transformer inrush current can be modeled in the Stability tab of
transformer data dialog.

Stability Data Parameters

This section describes the parameters for various equipment types and models as they are
presented in the Stability tab of equipment data. For dialog field meanings, refer to Chapter
12 - Database Technical Reference.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 736

Generator Models

Round Rotor Generator

The round rotor generator necessitates the following parameters:

Parameter Units Description
Rated MVA MVA
Rated Efficiency Percent
Rated Speed RPM
Rated Voltage Volts LL
Rated Current Amps
Rated PF
Ra pu Armature Resistance
Xd pu D-Axis Synchronous Reactance
Xq pu Q-Axis Synchronous Reactance
X’d pu D-Axis Transient Reactance
X’q pu Q-Axis Transient Reactance
X’’d = X’’q pu D & Q-Axis Sub-Transient Reactance
Xl pu Stator Leakage Reactance
T’do Seconds D-Axis Transient OC Time Constant
T’qo Seconds Q-Axis Transient OC Time Constant
T’’do Seconds D-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant
T’’qo Seconds Q-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant
E1 pu First Voltage to Define Saturation
E2 pu Second Voltage to Define Saturation
S( E1 ) pu Saturation at E1
S( E2 ) pu Saturation at E2
H kW-Sec / kVA Combined machine and prime mover inertia
D pu Machine damping, normally = 0

Note: OC - Open Circuit

These are standard machine quantities, and are based upon a sub-transient level detail flux
model. All machine data shown above is mandatory for modeling the round rotor generator
properly.

Salient Pole Generator

The salient pole generator necessitates the following parameters:

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 737

Parameter Units Description

Rated MVA MVA
Rated Eff Percent
Rated Speed RPM
Rated Voltage Volts LL
Rated Current Amps
Rated PF
Ra pu Armature Resistance
Xd pu D-Axis Synchronous Reactance
Xq pu Q-Axis Synchronous Reactance
X’d pu D-Axis Transient Reactance
X’’d pu D-Axis Sub-Transient Reactance
Xl pu Stator Leakage Reactance
T’do Seconds D-Axis Transient OC Time Constant
T’’do Seconds D-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant
T’’qo Seconds Q-Axis Sub-Transient OC Time Constant
E1 pu First Voltage to Define Saturation
E2 pu Second Voltage to Define Saturation
S( E1 ) pu Saturation at E1
S( E2 ) pu Saturation at E2
H kW-Sec / kVA Combined machine and prime mover inertia
D pu Machine damping, normally = 0

Note: OC - Open Circuit

Again, these are standard machine quantities, and are based upon a sub-transient level detail
flux model. All machine data shown above is mandatory for modeling the salient pole
generator properly.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 738

Excitation System Models

Simple Excitation System

VRef
EMax


 1+ sTA  K 
VT  E FD
1+ sTR  1+sTE 


EMin
VPSS

Simple Exciter model block diagram.

Parameter Units Description

TA Seconds AVR Lead Time Constant
TB Seconds AVR Lag Time Constant
TE Seconds Exciter Time Constant
K pu Exciter Gain
EMin pu Exciter Min Limit
EMax pu Exciter Max Limit
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 739

IEEE Type 1

SE


π
VRef
VR Max

 
1   KA  1
VT    E FD
1+sTR  1+sTA  K E + sTE
 

VPSS VR Min

sK F
1+sTF 

IEEE Type 1 model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

TR Seconds Transducer time constant
TA Seconds AVR time constant
TE Seconds Exciter time constant
TF Seconds Field voltage feedback time constant
KA pu AVR gain
KE pu Exciter KE
KF pu Field voltage feedback gain
VR Max pu AVR limit max
VR Min pu AVR limit min
E1 pu Saturation voltage point 1
E2 pu Saturation voltage point 2
S( E1 ) pu Saturation at E1
S( E2 ) pu Saturation at E2
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 740

IEEE Type 2

SE


π
VRef VR Max

 
1   KA  1
VT    E FD
1+sTR  1+sTA  K E + sTE
 

VPSS VR Min

sK F
1+sTF2 1+sTF1 

IEEE Type 2 model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

TR Seconds Transducer time constant
TA Seconds AVR time constant
TE Seconds Exciter time constant
TF1 Seconds Field voltage feedback time constant 1
TF2 Seconds Field voltage feedback time constant 2
KA pu AVR gain
KE pu Exciter KE
KF pu Field voltage feedback gain
VR Max pu AVR limit max
VR Min pu AVR limit min
E1 pu Saturation voltage point 1
E2 pu Saturation voltage point 2
S( E1 ) pu Saturation at E1
S( E2 ) pu Saturation at E2
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 741

Brushless Type AC1A

VRef
VA Max
VR Max

1  1+sTC  KA HV LV  1 VE
VT   π E FD
1+sTR  1+sTB  1+sTA  Gate Gate VR sTE
  
VR Min
VA Min 0
VPSS VUEL VOEL

VE SE  VE  FEX = f  I N 


sK F K C I FD
 KE IN =
1+sTF  VFE  VE
I N < 0.433 FEX = 1- 0.577I N 
2
0.433< I N < 0.750 FEX = 0.75- I N KD I FD
0.750< I N < 1.000 FEX = 1.732 1- I N 
I N > 0.750 FEX = 0

IEEE Type AC1A model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

TR Seconds Sensor time constant
TA Seconds Main AVR time constant
TB Seconds Second block AVR lag time constant
TC Seconds Second block AVR lead time constant
TE Seconds Exciter time constant
TF Seconds Feedback lag time constant
KA pu First block main AVR gain
KC pu Exciter KC – Field current feedback
KD pu Exciter KD – Field current feedback
KE pu Exciter KE
KF pu Feedback gain
VAMax pu AVR control max
VAMin pu AVR control min
VRMax pu Regulator max - Amplifier
VRMin pu Regulator min - Amplifier
E1 pu Saturation voltage point 1
E2 pu Saturation voltage point 2
S(E1) pu Saturation at E1
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 742

Parameter Units Description

S(E2) pu Saturation at E2
VUEL pu Fixed Under Excitation Limit
VOEL pu Fixed Over Excitation Limit

Brushless Type AC6A

VRef
VA Max
VT VR Max

1  1+sTK  1+sTC    1 VE
VT  KA   π E FD
1+sTR  1+sTA  1+sTB  sTE
  
VT VR Min
VPSS VA Min 0

I N < 0.433 FEX = 1- 0.577I N VE SE  VE  FEX =f  I N 

2
0.433< I N < 0.750 FEX = 0.75- I N VH Max
FEX = 1.732 1- I N  
0.750< I N < 1.000
1+sTJ   K C I FD
KH   KE IN =
I N > 0.750 FEX = 0 1+sTH  
 VE

0

VFE LIM KD I FD

IEEE Type AC6A model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

TR Seconds Sensor time constant
TK Seconds First block lead time constant
TA Seconds First block lag time constant
TB Seconds Second block lag time constant
TC Seconds Second block lead time constant
TE Seconds Exciter time constant
TJ Seconds Feedback lead time constant
TH Seconds Feedback lag time constant
KA pu First block gain
KC pu Exciter KC – Field current feedback
KD pu Exciter KD – Field current feedback
KE pu Exciter KE
KH pu Feedback gain
VFELim pu VFE limit value
VHMax pu Feedback max
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 743

Parameter Units Description

VAMax pu AVR control max
VAMin pu AVR control min
VRMax pu Regulator max - Amplifier
VRMin pu Regulator min - Amplifier
E1 pu Saturation voltage point 1
E2 pu Saturation voltage point 2
S(E1) pu Saturation at E1
S(E2) pu Saturation at E2

Brushless Type AC8B

VRef K PR
VE Max  K D I FD
VR Max K E  S E (VE )

 
1  1 KA  1 VE
 
VT
1  sTR 
K IR
s   1  sTA 

sTE
EFD
  

VR Min VE Min
VPSS
K DR
s
VFE FEX  f  I N 
1  sTDR  S E VE 

I N  0.433 FEX  1  0.577 I N 

K C I FD
  KE IN 
0.433  I N  0.750 FEX  0.75  I 2
VE

N

0.750  I N  1.000 FEX  1.732 1  I N 

I N  0.750 FEX  0
KD I FD

IEEE Type AC8B model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

TR Seconds Transducer time constant
TA Seconds Main AVR time constant
TE Seconds Exciter time constant
TDR Seconds Differential time constant for PID control
KPR pu Proportional gain for PID control
KIR pu Integral gain for PID control
KDR pu Differential gain for PID control
KA pu Main AVR time constant
KC pu Exciter KC – Field current feedback
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 744

Parameter Units Description

KD pu Exciter KD – Field current feedback
KE pu Exciter KE
VR Max pu Regulator max - Amplifier
VR Min pu Regulator min - Amplifier
VE Max pu Exciter max
VE Min pu Exciter min
E1 pu Saturation voltage point 1
E2 pu Saturation voltage point 2
S(E1) pu Saturation at E1
S(E2) pu Saturation at E2

Governor Models

Steam Turbine Governor

Load Limit

 
 1
 KT 
 1+ sT3 
Speed Ref
VMax

Per Unit Change In Speed 

1 Low 1 1 
   PMech
R  Value 1+ sT1  1+ sT2  

VMin

DT

Turbine Damping

Gas Turbine Governor model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

R pu Droop
T1 Seconds Governor control time constant
T2 Seconds Combustion chamber time constant
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 745

Parameter Units Description

T3 Seconds Exhaust temp measurement time constant
AT pu Ambient temperature load limit
KT pu Load limit gain
VMax pu Governor control max
VMin pu Governor control min
Dr pu Damping

Woodward Diesel Governor

Speed Ref Actuator Per Unit Speed

1+ 
Electronic Control Box TMax Engine
Per Unit Change In Speed 
 1+ sT3  K 1+ sT4 
   e-sTD 
1+ sT + s T T 
PMech
 s 1+ sT5 1+ sT6 
2
 1 1 2

TMin

R
Throttle Feedback

Woodward Diesel Governor model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

R pu Throttle feedback gain (affects droop)
T1 Seconds Control box time constant
T2 Seconds Control box time constant
T3 Seconds Control box time constant
T4 Seconds Actuator time constant
T5 Seconds Actuator time constant
T6 Seconds Actuator time constant
TD Seconds Engine firing delay time
K pu Actuator gain
TMax pu Max actuator torque
TMin pu Min actuator torque
Droop / Isoch Switch (droop mode or isochronous mode)
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 746

Woodward Steam PID1 Governor

Speed Ref
PMax

Per Unit Change In Speed   T 

K 1+ sTA  1+ E  1 1
   s  PMech
 1+ sTC  1+ sTD 
 1+ sTB 

Governor WW MicroNet PMin

Actuator Turbine Casing

Dr

Droop

Woodward Steam PID 1 Governor model block diagram

Parameter Units Description

TA Seconds Governor control time constant
TB Seconds Governor control time constant
TE Seconds Governor control time constant
TC Seconds Actuator time constant
TD Seconds Turbine time constant
K pu Governor control gain
PMax pu Max power output
PMin pu Min power output
Dr pu Droop

PSS Models

Power system stabilizer models entered in the Stability 2 tab of Generator Data dialog.

IEEE PSS2B

VMax
  1+ sT1  1+ sT3  1+ sT5 
N
sTW1 sTW2 1  1+ sT 
  7
  VPSS
f
1+ sTW1  1+ sTW2  1+ sT9   1+ sT  M



K1
1+ sT2  1+ sT4  1+ sT6 

8

VMin

K3

sTW3 sTW4 K2
P
1+ sTW3  1+ sTW4  1+ sT10 
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 747

IEEE Type PSS2B model block diagram

Parameter Units Description
T1 Seconds 1st lead time constant
T2 Seconds 1st lag time constant
T3 Seconds 2nd lead time constant
T4 Seconds 2nd lag time constant
T5 Seconds 3rd lead time constant
T6 Seconds 3rd lag time constant
T7 Seconds Filter lead time constant
T8 Seconds Filter lag time constant
T9 Seconds Freq branch time constant
T10 Seconds Power branch time constant
TW1 Seconds 1st freq branch washout time constant
TW2 Seconds 2nd freq branch washout time constant
TW3 Seconds 1st power branch washout time constant
TW4 Seconds 2nd power branch washout time constant
K1 Seconds Main PSS gain
K2 Seconds 1st power branch gain
K3 Seconds 2nd power branch gain
VMax Seconds PSS output max
VMin Seconds PSS output min
M Seconds M
N Seconds N
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 748

Motor Models

Double Cage Flux Induction Motor

EKR

''
To p 
 X ''  X 
l

X'  X  l

1 EI'
 
1  X '  X ''  
EI''
To s
' 

 ''
To s EKI X'  X  l


 X '  X '' 
X'  X  X'  X 
2
l l

 

X  X  '

IR
 

EI''
ER' 
E ''
Saturation

 E ''    E '' 
' 2 2
To p E ''  R I

ER''
EI' 
E ''

 


X  X ' 
II
 

 X '  X ''  X'  X  l

X'  X 
2
l

1 

 1 EKR  X '  X ''  
ER''
To s
'
ER'
 
''
To s X'  X  l


 X ''  X 
l

X'  X  l
''
To p 

EKI

Double Cage Induction Motor flux model

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 749

Parameter Units Description

Rated HP HP
Rated Eff Percent
Rated Speed RPM
Rated Voltage Volts LL
Rated Current Amps
Rated PF
Rated Slip pu Rated slip
Start Trq pu Starting torque
Start Crt pu Starting current
Start PF Starting power factor
Pull-Out Trq pu Rated pull-out torque
Ra pu Stator winding resistance (armature resistance)
Xl pu Stator leakage reactance
X pu Unsaturated synchronous reactance
X’ pu Unsaturated transient reactance
X’’ pu Unsaturated sub-transient reactance
T’o Seconds Transient OC time constant
T’’o Seconds Sub-transient OC time constant
E1 pu First voltage to define saturation
E2 pu Second voltage to define saturation
S( E1 ) pu Saturation at E1
S( E2 ) pu Saturation at E2
H kW-Sec / kVA Combined machine and load inertia
Ld Tran Str Seconds Time at which load transfers – starting to running
Ld Tran Rmp Seconds Time it takes to transfer load – starting to running
SoftSt V1 (%) Percent Initial terminal voltage upon starting motor
Intermediate voltage for motor start after T12
SoftSt V2 (%) Percent seconds. This defines the first slope of ramp.
Final voltage for motor start at end of ramp after
SoftSt V3 (%) Percent T23 seconds. This defines the final slope of ramp.
SoftSt T12 (sec) seconds Time elapsed between V1 and V2
SoftSt T23 (sec) seconds Time elapsed between V2 and V3

Notes: OC - Open Circuit

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 750

RA jXA

jX1 jX2
jXM

R1/S R2/S

Double cage induction motor impedance model – Type 1 form

Synchronous Motor

X ''
d  Xl 
X '
d  Xl 

Eq'
 
E fd  1  1 X '
d  X d'' 
 d''

'
Tdo s 

Tdo'' s  kd X '
d  Xl  
Saturation

X '
d  X d'' 

X  Xl  X  Xl 
' 2
'
d d

 
X ad I fd 
X d  X d' 

Id

X q  X q''  Iq


1
''
 q''
Tqo s


Synchronous motor model block diagram

Parameter Units Description
Rated HP HP
Rated Eff Percent
Rated Speed RPM
Rated Voltage Volts LL
Rated Current Amps
Rated PF
Ra pu Stator winding resistance (armature resistance)
Xl pu Stator leakage reactance
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 751

Parameter Units Description

Xd pu d-axis unsaturated synchronous reactance
Xq pu q-axis unsaturated synchronous reactance
X’d pu d-axis unsaturated transient reactance
X’’d = X’’q pu d & q-axis unsaturated sub-transient reactance
T’do Seconds d-axis transient OC time constant
T’’do Seconds d-axis sub-transient OC time constant
T’’qo Seconds q-axis sub-transient OC time constant
E1 pu First voltage to define saturation
E2 pu Second voltage to define saturation
S( E1 ) pu Saturation at E1
S( E2 ) pu Saturation at E2
H kW-Sec / kVA Combined machine and load inertia
Ld Tran Str Seconds Time at which load transfers – starting to running
Ld Tran Rmp Seconds Time it takes to transfer load – starting to running
EFD App Speed Percent Speed at which the field is applied during starting
EFD App Value Percent Value of field voltage to apply during starting
Rev Pwr Del Seconds Time it takes to trip the reverse power detection
SoftSt V1 (%) Percent Initial terminal voltage upon starting motor
Intermediate voltage for motor start after T12
SoftSt V2 (%) Percent seconds. This defines the first slope of ramp.
Final voltage for motor start at end of ramp after
SoftSt V3 (%) Percent T23 seconds. This defines the final slope of ramp.
SoftSt T12 (sec) seconds Time elapsed between V1 and V2
SoftSt T23 (sec) seconds Time elapsed between V2 and V3

ATS Model

The ATS model in the DS Engine simulates one-way automatic transfer from Normal (left)
to Emergency (right) on an ATS equipment item. The settings for this device are found under
the Stability tab in the ATS equipment dialog, and are:

Parameter Units Description

Trip Voltage Percent Normal bus voltage at which ATS picks up
Del on Start Seconds Time in under-voltage condition before transfer
Req Voltage Percent Voltage required on Emergency bus for transfer
Neutral Del Seconds Neutral delay time
Mech Del Seconds Mechanical delay time.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 752

In addition:

Once the voltage has dropped below the Trip Voltage for a time of Del on Start, and the
Emergency bus voltage is greater than Req Voltage, a transfer is commenced, and is delayed
for Neutral Del + Mech Del seconds. After the delay is satisfied, the ATS is transferred to the
Emergency bus.

If the voltage on the Emergency bus is not above the Req Voltage, then no transfer is made.
If the Emergency bus voltage rises above Req Voltage, and a transfer is in process, then the
ATS will transfer. Thus, the Req Voltage is the last check for a transfer. If all conditions are
satisfied for a transfer, the ATS will wait for the Emergency bus voltage to rise above Req
Voltage, and then instantaneously transfer.

If the Normal bus voltage rises above Trip Voltage before Del on Start is satisfied, the ATS
performs an instantaneous reset, and remains on the Normal bus.

When the ATS’ Switch Type is a “Primary Selector Switch”, then all ATS functionality is
disabled.

You must own EasyPower Power Protector to have the contactor model feature in the DS
Engine.

Contactor Model

The contactor model supplied with the DS Engine performs in a simplistic manner with only
two data items needed (under-voltage threshold and time to trip). The contactor simply
responds to an under-voltage condition, and if subjected to a level below the under-voltage
threshold for the time to trip, will cause the switching device it is associated with to switch
open in the simulation.

Contactors can be found within fused switch and low voltage breaker equipment dialogs,
under the Stability tab. They are both enabled and specified in that tab.

You must own EasyPower Power Protector to have the contactor model feature in the DS
Engine.

Here are a few more application notes regarding contactors:

If the switching device a contactor is associated with is already open, and the contactor says
to open, then no action is taken.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 753

Contactors will auto-trip off at the beginning of a simulation where the contactor is located in
an isolated (and thus disconnected) part of your system. The model is responding to its initial
voltage being zero, which is below its trip threshold. Since the initial power flow represents
steady-state, then by definition these contactors must be off.

Care must be taken to make sure that a protective upstream device is included in your
simulation when using a contactor that is exposed to a fault current condition. If such is not
done, then a contactor (sensing an under-voltage condition from a fault on its load side), will
interrupt the fault. In the simulation, this will happen cleanly, and without mishap. However
in real life, due to contactors not being rated to interrupt SC current, the contactor would
most likely explode into a mass of molten metal.

If the voltage at the contactor goes above the under-voltage threshold before the time to trip
is satisfied, the contactor will perform an instantaneous reset.

Menu and Commands

Simulations Commands

The following commands are available for running dynamic simulations. You will need to
select the appropriate equipment in the one-line to execute some of these commands. These
commands are also available with right mouse click context menu.

1) Reset: After running a simulation, you need to reset in order to change breaker/switch
configuration or to re-run the simulation.

2) Run: Run a simulation using script. The script needs to be created first. The script
selected on the Dynamics Stability toolbar will be run.

3) Step: Run a simulation using script, one step at a time. The simulation will advance by
the time step specified in the Dynamics Stability Options. You will need to choose the
Step command multiple times to step through the simulation.

1) Bus Fault Dynamic Simulation: Simulation will be run for a fault on a bus selected on
the one-line. The options specified in Dynamics Stability Options will be used for the
fault time and the duration. The same simulation can also be run by double-clicking on a
bus in the one-line window or via a right mouse click on the bus and selecting Bus Fault
Dynamic Simulation from the context menu.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 754

2) Toggle ATS Source Bus & Run Simulation: Changes ATS connection to alternate
source and runs simulation. The ATS needs to be selected in the one-line before choosing
the menu command. You can also double-click on the ATS in the one-line to run the
same command or via a right mouse click on the ATS and selecting Toggle Source Bus
and Run Simulation from the context menu.

3) Generator Excitation System Step Test: Runs a step response test on the excitation
system of the generator selected in the one-line window. A step response test on the
exciter of a generator allows you to see the effect of increasing the excitation by a
specified amount. The AutoPlot will plot the per-unit generator terminal voltage and the
per-unit field voltage. This test treats the generator as isolated from the network. The step
test can also be performed by double-clicking on the generator exciter symbol in the one-
line.

4) Generator Governor System Step Test: Runs a step response test on the governor
system of the generator selected in the one-line. A step test on the governor allows you to
see the effect of increasing the load by a specified amount. The generator speed changes.
The AutoPlot will plot the per-unit generator prime mover power and the per-unit speed.
The step test can also be performed by double-clicking on the generator governor symbol
in the one-line.

5) Open Switch and Run Simulation: Runs a simulation starting with the opening action
of the selected switch or fuse or breaker.

6) Close Switch and Run Simulation: Runs a simulation starting with the closing action of
the selected switch or fuse or breaker.

Plotting User Selected Values – Define Plot

When you perform a simulation by double clicking on the one-line, data is plotted in the
AutoPlot tab. Based on the type of simulation, EasyPower will choose what values to display
in the AutoPlot. For example, if you double-click on an open motor breaker or switch to start
a motor, the plot is provided with motor per-unit values for voltage, current, speed and
torque. To see values elsewhere in your system, you need to define plots. Nine plots are
available with up to a maximum of 5 curves per plot.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 755

Define Plot dialog

To define a plot, choose Define Plot button in the ribbon. In the Define Plot dialog,
select the values to plot by choosing the desired fields for Monitoring, With ID and Next
To.

Monitoring: Variable to be plotted. Example: voltage, current, power, torque, etc.

With ID: ID Name of the equipment for which the variable is to be plotted.

Next To: ID Name of the bus to which the equipment is connected.

Values can also be selected by first selecting on an open Monitoring cell, and then by right
mouse clicking on the desired equipment on the one-line, and selecting the desired value type
to be plotted with the Define Plots dialog box open. The entire row will be automatically
populated.

Define Plot using one-line selection

The following values are able to be plotted in a dynamic simulation, if the appropriate
equipment is being modeled and is in existence and enabled.

Equipment Value Units Comment

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 756

Equipment Value Units Comment

Bus Voltage pu
Bus Voltage kV
Bus Fault I pu
Bus Fault I Amps
Bus Angle Degrees
Bus Frequency pu
Bus Frequency Hz
Bus AF Energy Cal/cm/cm If AF Fault Enabled

Network Dev Current pu See Note 1

Network Dev Current Amps See Note 1
Network Dev kW kW See Note 1
Network Dev kVar kVar See Note 1

DS Motor Term Voltage pu

DS Motor Current pu
DS Motor Current Amps
DS Motor Speed pu
DS Motor Speed RPM
DS Motor Torque pu
DS Motor Load Torque pu
DS Motor Watts pu
DS Motor Vars pu
DS Motor kW kW
DS Motor kVar kVar
DS Motor Angle deg Sync Motor Only
DS Motor Field Voltage pu Sync Motor Only
DS Motor Power Angle deg Sync Motor Only
DS Motor D-Axis Current pu Sync Motor Only
DS Motor Q-Axis Current pu Sync Motor Only
DS Motor Psi''d pu Sync Motor Only
DS Motor Psi''q pu Sync Motor Only

DS Gen Current pu
DS Gen Current Amps
DS Gen Speed pu
DS Gen Speed RPM
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 757

Equipment Value Units Comment

DS Gen Torque pu
DS Gen P Mechanical pu
DS Gen Watts pu
DS Gen Vars pu
DS Gen kW kW
DS Gen kVar kVar
DS Gen Field Voltage pu
DS Gen Angle deg Machine Angle
DS Gen Term Voltage pu
DS Gen Power Angle deg
DS Gen D-Axis Current pu Id
DS Gen Q-Axis Current pu Iq
DS Gen Psi''d pu Flux ψ’’d
DS Gen Psi''q pu Flux ψ’’q
DS Gen VPSS pu PSS Output Voltage
DS Gen AVR Out pu

Note 1: Network Dev values are those that have no DS Model defined, and include:

 Capacitors
 Loads
 Shunts
 Filters
 Motors (Non DS Model)
 Generators (Non DS Model)
 Utilities
 UPS
 Breakers
 Switches
 Tie Breakers
 Tie Switches
 Cables
 Overhead Lines
 Two Winding Transformers
 Three Winding Transformers
 Busway
 Current Limiting Reactors
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 758

For Non DS motors and generators, we mean that no model is defined in the Stability Tab of
the motor or generator data dialog, and/or their Enable checkbox is not checked.

Creating a Simulation Script

You can write scripts to execute commands or simulate various events and run them
sequentially. To write a new script, choose Script Edit button in the ribbon. Click on
New to add a new script. Type the name of the new script. Add commands to the script in a
sequential order as shown in the figure below. Click the OK button in the Edit Script dialog
and the Close button in the Scripts dialog.

Command: The command to be executed (event to be simulated), such as closing a breaker a

faulting a bus.

Equipment ID: The ID Name of the equipment for which the command is applicable. For
example, the ID Name of the breaker to be closed.

Value1, Value2: Fault resistance and reactance respectively, specified in Ohms.

Time: The time in seconds up to which or for which duration the command is executed.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 759

Script example

The commands available in the Edit Script dialog are:

Fault Bus (R+jX Ohms): Faults the specified bus. Faults with impedance, such as arcing
faults, can have resistance and/or reactance positive values. Bolted faults have zero
impedance. When this command is executed, the fault will clear only when an upstream
protective device opens or the Remove Fault command is executed. Compare with fault Bus
command. Only one equipment can be faulted at a time during the simulation.

Fault Bus For (R+jX Ohms): The specified bus is faulted for the duration specified in the
Time column. Compare with Fault Bus For command. Only one equipment can be faulted at
a time during the simulation.

Remove Fault: Removes the existing fault.

Run to Time: Runs the simulation up to the specified time in seconds. This is the point in
time from the start of the simulation, and therefore is the absolute time. The next command
will be executed only after the specified point in time has elapsed. If you have several Run to
Time commands, make sure that the elapsed time before the start of the command is less than
the specified time. Make sure you have Run for Time or Run to Time commands in your
script so that events are simulated at the appropriate time.

Run for Time: Runs the simulation for the specified duration in seconds. The next command
will be executed only after the specified duration has elapsed.

Close LV Breaker: Closes the specified LV breaker.

Close HV Breaker: Closes the specified HV breaker.

Open LV Breaker: Opens the specified LV breaker.

Open HV Breaker: Opens the specified HV breaker.

Close Switch: Closes the specified switch.

Close Fused Switch: Closes the specified fused switch.

Open Switch: Opens the specified switch.

Open Fused Switch: Opens the specified fused switch.

Transfer ATS: Transfers the connection of the ATS from one source to the alternate.
 Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 760

Enable Contactors: This command enables simulation of contactors dropping out. You can
also enable contactor action globally through Dynamic Stability Options. While a simulation
is performed from the script, the script command is followed regardless of how the contactor
action option was specified in the Dynamic Stability Options. After the simulation is
complete, the script command is no longer effective – the Dynamic Stability Option prevails.

Disable Contactors: Disables simulation of contactors dropping out. This command is

effective only while the script is being run.

Enable Prot Devices: Enables simulation of protective devices pickup and tripping. This
command is effective only while the script is being run.

Disable Prot Devices: Disables simulation of protective devices pickup and tripping. This
command is effective only while the script is being run.

 Set Time Step: Specifies the time interval for each computation of simulation. This time step
is used to set the time step different than what is specified in the Dynamics Stability Options.
This time step is effective only while the script is being run and the time step is not changed
with another command in the script.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 761

Dynamic Stability Options

Control

DS Options - Control

Simulations Run Control

Simulation Time Step: The simulation calculations are performed after every time step (or
interval) in seconds. A smaller time step can result in improved accuracy, at the cost of
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 762

longer simulation completion time. Very large time step can lead to numerical instability. It
is recommended that the time step be smaller than half of the smallest time constant in
equipment data.

Step Run Delta Time: When a simulation is run one step at a time, this is the duration of
each run. Step Run is available only with simulation scripts.

Enable all protective devices: The tripping of protective devices such as relays, circuit
breakers, and fuses are enabled during dynamic stability simulations.

Enable contactor action: Checking this check box will allow contactors to drop out
automatically when the voltage drops.

Enable ATS action: Checking this check box will allow ATS to switch to the alternate
source automatically when the primary source is disconnected.

Include Stator Flux Transients: You can include the effect of transient dc offset in your
simulations. Dynamic simulations are normally run in symmetrical rms values. Including the
transient dc components in the calculations makes the simulation more realistic. You can
include stator flux transient models for the following machine models for induction motors
and synchronous motors.

Message Log Control

Log dynamic model messages at initialization: Enabling this option outputs messages in
the Message Log regarding the initialization status all equipment with dynamic stability data.

Log dynamic model messages during run: Enabling this option outputs messages in the
Message Log regarding the events that occur during the simulation.

Log protective device trip messages: When protective devices trip during a simulation, the
message log will include the event.

Initialization Control

Maximum Allowed DState: Prior to running a dynamic simulation, the steady state initial
condition is determined using this value as the criteria. The DState is the difference between
the values of a variable during consecutive steps of computation. When all the DStates settle
down to values below the Maximum Allowed DState, the initialization is considered
complete. In general, the smaller the value specified for the Maximum Allowed DState, the
more accurate is the initialization. However, reducing the value too low can cause failure of
initialization or take longer time to settle.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 763

Entering Stability Focus

Automatically arrange windows: When you enter the Dynamic Stability focus, the
windows are automatically arranged such that you can view the all of open windows. These
windows include the one-line window, and any of the plot window and message window if
they are enabled in the Dynamic Stability Options.

Show plot window: Displays the Dynamic Stability Plot window while entering Dynamic
Stability focus.

Show message window: Displays the Dynamic Stability Message Log window while
entering Dynamic Stability focus.

Double-Click Control

DS Options – Double-Click Control

 Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 764

Generator’s Exciter Symbol to Step

A step response test on the exciter of a generator allows you to see the effect of increasing
the excitation by a specified amount. The AutoPlot will plot the per-unit generator terminal
voltage and the per-unit field voltage. This test treats the generator as isolated from the
network. The step test is performed by double-clicking on the generator exciter symbol in the
one-line.

 Vref Step: This is the percent increase in the reference voltage.

Initial Terminal Voltage: The terminal voltage in percentage of rated voltage before the
step is applied.

Simulation End Time: Simulation is run up to this time.

Delay Time Length: The step is applied after this delay after the simulation begins. For
example, if you specify the delay time length as 1 second, then the step in Vref will occur 1
second after the simulation begins.

Generator’s Governor Symbol to Step

A step response test on the governor of a generator allows you to see the effect of increasing
the load by a specified amount. The generator speed changes. The AutoPlot will plot the per-
unit generator prime mover power and the per-unit speed. The step test is performed by
double-clicking on the generator governor symbol in the one-line.

Initial Load: Percent load on the generator at the beginning of the step response test.

Load Step: Percent increase in the generator load.

Simulation End Time: Simulation is run up to this time.

Delay Time Length: The step is applied after this delay after the simulation begins. For
example, if you specify the delay time length as 1 second, then the step in the load will occur
1 second after the simulation begins.

Breaker or Switch to Open

You can double-click on a breaker or a switch to open or close it.

Simulation End Time: Simulation is run up to this time.

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 765

Delay Time Length: The breaker or switch is opened after the specified delay after the
simulation begins. For example, if you specify the delay time length as 1 second, then the
breaker or switch will open 1 second after the simulation begins.

Breaker or Switch to Close: You can double-click on a breaker or a switch to open or close
it.

Simulation End Time: Simulation is run up to this time.

Delay Time Length: The breaker or switch is closed after the specified delay after the
simulation begins. For example, if you specify the delay time length as 1 second, then the
breaker or switch will close 1 second after the simulation begins.

ATS to Transfer

You can double-click on an ATS to transfer the connection to the alternate source.

Simulation End Time: Simulation is run up to this time.

Delay Time Length: The ATS connection will be transferred to alternate source after the
specified delay after the simulation begins. For example, if you specify the delay time length
as 1 second, then the ATS will transfer the connection 1 second after the simulation begins.

Bus to fault

You can double-click on a bus to simulate a bus fault (short circuit).

Fault Resistance: Resistance at the fault point in ohms. A bolted fault will have the fault
resistance of zero.

Fault Reactance: Resistance at the fault point in ohms. A bolted fault will have the fault
reactance of zero.

Simulation End Time: Simulation is run up to this time.

Delay Time Length: The fault will be performed on the bus after the specified delay after
the simulation begins. For example, if you specify the delay time length as 1 second, then the
fault will occur 1 second after the simulation begins.

Fault Time Length: The duration for which the fault will last. If the fault time length is
specified as 0.1 seconds, the fault will be removed automatically 0.1 seconds after the fault is
applied.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 766

Plot Output

Maximum plot size: This is the number of data points at various time intervals stored for
each variable during a simulation run.

Copy results to clipboard: When a simulation is run, the data is copied to the clipboard if
this checkbox is enabled. You can paste the data to a spreadsheet.

Overlay Plot Curves: With this checkbox enabled, the plot of various variables overlay each
other. If the checkbox is unchecked the plots are separated and the vertical axes are scaled
automatically.

Arc Flash

Dynamic Stability Options – Arc Flash

Arcing Current: You can specify scaling (percentage) for arc current. IEEE Std. 1584
recommends comparing incident energies for 100% arcing current and 85% arcing current.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 767

Working Distance: When the DS options define the working distance, any user defined trip
times entered in a Bus Data dialog are ignored. However, if the user enters “0” for the
Dynamic Stability Working Distance, then the Working Distance defined in the Short Circuit
Options are used, including the Bus values (when entered). Also, the Working Distance in
Short Circuit options will always be converted to inches for the dynamic stability Working
Distance output.

Maximum Time: Maximum limit of arc duration. If the trip time is very long, then
simulation is carried out up this maximum time.

Use Arc Flash Simulation for Faults: When this checkbox is checked bus faults will
calculate arc currents and arc flash hazard. All calculations performed are as per IEEE 1584
standard. When the checkbox is unchecked, bolted fault currents will be calculated.

Arc Flash Calculations in Dynamic

Stability
You can perform arc flash hazard calculations in Dynamic Stability. The calculations are as
per IEEE 1584 Standard. To enable arc flash hazard calculations, check the checkbox “Use
Arc Flash Simulations for Faults” in Dynamic Stability Options dialog. Double click on a
bus to fault it. The arc flash hazard results are put in DS Message log. Also, the auto-plot
shows Vpu at the faulted bus, arcing current at the faulted bus, and Incident Energy (IE) at
the faulted bus. Plots can also be defined to show various values for other equipment based
on the arcing fault.

Notes on arc flash hazard calculations:

 Only “Including Main” cases are calculated in dynamic stability arc flash. If the
faulted bus has a main breaker or fuse, the trip function of the Main will be used in
the simulation.

 Only the IEEE 1584 equations are supported for the stability arc flash. The extra CL
fuse equations are not supported.

 The Dynamic Stability Arc Flash Options Arcing Current % is used for any stability
arc flash calculation – including for >1kV buses. The default is 100%. So to calculate
for 85% acing current you will need to specify this in the DS Options.

 Arc flash boundary is calculated based on the boundary energy criteria specified in
the Short Circuit Options/Arc flash Hazard/Advanced dialog.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 768

Formatting Plots
When you select the DS Plot window, the ribbon changes to a Plot ribbon. You can format
the DS Plots with the commands in the ribbon.

DS Plot ribbon

To view the data in the plot at the cursor position, check the box for Data Cursor in the
ribbon. The top right corner for legend will show the coordinates of the cursor.

Data Cursor

To format the plot, right-click on the plot area and choose desired command from the context
menu. The following format options are available.

1) Format Title

2) Format Plot Area

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 769

3) Format X Axis

4) Format Y Axis

5) Format Legend

Default: The formatting changes can be stored as default so that new plots will be
automatically created using the default format.

Format Title

You can also double-click on the plot title to access the Format Title dialog.

Format Title dialog

Title Text: field is for changing the name of the plot title.

Font: The font format can be changed through the Font tab.

Format Plot Area

You can format the plot area border, background, fill color and the gridlines.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 770

Format Plot Area dialog

Format X or Y Axes

Multiple Axis: For multiple variables in a plot, enabling this checkbox will plot multiple Y
axes. Each Y axis can have its own scale.

Current Axis: You can select the desired Y axis though this combo box to format the axis.

Appearance: Format the axis title, color, weight and ticks.

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 771

Format Y Axis dialog

Scale: You can choose the minimum and maximum values for the axis, the tick marks and
the decimal precision for values on the axis.

Font: You can select the font type, style, color, size, and the background for the text on the
axes.

Format Legend

You can format the box and the text of the legend.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 772

Spreadsheet Results
Viewing

To view the spreadsheet data of the simulation results check the Data View checkbox in the
ribbon. You can also right click on the plot area and choose View Data from the context
menu. To view all the columns in the spreadsheet, take the cursor over the divider between
the plot are and the spreadsheet area, and drag the divider to the right.

Copy to Clipboard

If you have the Copy to Clipboard option checked in Dynamic Stability Options, the
spreadsheet data will be copied to clipboard. The data can be pasted to spreadsheet programs
like Excel. You can also select the desired cells from the spreadsheet and choose [Ctrl] + C.

Format Plot Data

You can format the spreadsheet data by right-clicking on the spreadsheet and selecting
Format Data… from the context menu. Select the desired column through the Column
combo box and set the spreadsheet column width. You can also change the decimal precision
of the values.

Format Plot Data dialog

Power Flow Results in One-line

The one-line window in the Dynamic Stability focus will show the power flow results before,
after and during simulation. If you perform a simulation step, you can see the power results
change on the one-line as you step through. The values to display can be chosen through the
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 773

Power Flow Options dialog and the toolbar buttons. To change the threshold for overload or
bus voltage, you need to go into Power Flow focus first and go to Power Flow Options 
Control.

Printing
You can print the following:

1) One-line: Select the one-line window first and click on Print button on the toolbar.

2) Plot: Select the DS Plots window first and click on Print button on the toolbar. In the
Print Plot window choose Plot(s) radio button for Print What? You can check the
boxes to the desired defined plots from the list.

3) Data for the plot: Select the DS Plots window first and click on Print button on the
toolbar. In the Print Plot window choose Data radio button for Print What? You
can check the boxes to the desired defined plots from the list.

4) Message log: Select the DS Messages window first and click on Print button on the
toolbar.

5) Equipment datasheets: You can print datasheets with dynamic models for those
equipment that have dynamic model data defined. Right click on the desired
equipment in the one-line window and choose … Data Sheet from the context menu.
After the equipment datasheet window opens, you can select the print command.

Messaging
The DS Engine Message Log is supplied to inform the user of particular model behavior.
There simply is not enough room on the one-line to present the number of messages that can
be generated by a large case, and so a message log provides a convenient chronology of the
simulation performed as well as particular model behavior in the simulation. In the author’s
view, the message log is essential to fully document a simulation. Due to the real-time nature
of the simulation, and the complexity of even a few dynamic models running together, there
is a need for a clear and concise chronology of events.

All messages in the Message Log are meant to supply the user with necessary feedback on
the condition of their models during a simulation. We encourage the user to always review
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 774

the Message Log after each simulation, as a condition may need attention so that your
simulation is performed correctly. For example, if the following warning is generated:

"Gas Turbine Gov1 on Max Limit."

You will need to determine why this generator’s governor is on a limit, then fix the issue and
re-run the simulation. The Message Log will need to be checked again to see if the warning
has been eliminated. Without a correction, in this example, the system will not be in steady-
state before running the simulation. As soon as the simulation is run, the system model will
be trying to satisfy system power balance, since this generator was unable to meet its
requirement.

Messages are broken down into four basic types:

 Script – Notes a Script command action was taken.

 Runtime – Notes a message from the DS Engine or a model at run time.

 Initialization – Notes a message from the DS Engine or a model at initialization time.

 Command – Notes a message from a user toolbar command.

 Messages also have a status. The five major status conditions reported are:

 Error – The DS Engine or a model has encountered an error. This must be resolved
before your simulation can be run. You will not be allowed to perform a simulation
until the error is resolved.

 Warning – The DS Engine or a model has encountered a condition that could

compromise the accuracy of your simulation. We suggest resolving all warnings,
even though the simulation will be allowed to proceed.

 Pass – At initialization time, if a model initializes properly, this message is displayed.

 OK – This status accompanies informational messages. For example, this could

accompany a message from a protective device noting that it has picked up on an
over-current condition.

 Pausing – This status appears when the user issues a toolbar command to pause the
simulation.

In the following sections, messages are grouped by type, and are supplied a description of
conditions that can lead to the message as well as methods to correct the condition cited (if
necessary).
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 775

Exciter Max Limit Messages

"Simple Exciter on Max Limit."

"IEEET1 AVR on Max Limit."
"IEEET2 AVR on Max Limit."
"IEEE AC6A on AVR Max Limit."
"IEEE AC6A on Regulator Max Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on AVR Max Limit."
"IEEE AC1A on Regulator Max Limit."
"IEEE AC8B on AVR Max Limit."
"IEEE AC8B on Exciter Output Max Limit."

Description - At Initialization, these exciter models trigger the messages noted when on a
maximum limit either in the AVR or the output of the exciter. This is typically caused by
over-exciting the generator past the model settings, or by having an unreasonable limit
specified in the exciter model.

Fix - Try reducing generator var export (in the power flow case, lower control voltage for a
PV or Swing generator, or reduce Q for a PQG) or changing the limit (make it larger).

Exciter Min Limit Messages

"Simple Exciter on Min Limit."

"IEEET1 AVR on Min Limit."
"IEEET2 AVR on Min Limit."
"IEEE_AC1A on Neg EFD Output Limit."
"IEEE_AC1A on AVR Min Limit."
"IEEE_AC1A on Regulator Min Limit."
"IEEE_AC6A on Neg EFD Output Limit."
"IEEE_AC6A on AVR Min Limit."
"IEEE_AC6A on Regulator Min Limit."
"IEEE_AC8B on AVR Min Limit."
"IEEE_AC8B on Exciter Output Min Limit."

Description - At Initialization, these exciter models trigger the messages noted when on a
minimum limit, either in the AVR section or the exciter section. This is typically caused by
under-exciting the generator past the model settings, or by having an unreasonable limit
specified in the exciter model.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 776

Fix - Try reducing generator var import (in the power flow case, raise control voltage for a
PV or Swing generator, or increase Q for a PQG) or changing the limit (make it smaller or
more negative).

Exciter Gate Limit Messages

"IEEE_AC1A on OEL Low Value Gate Limit."

"IEEE_AC1A on UEL High Value Gate Limit."

Description - At Initialization, these exciter models trigger the messages noted when on a
low or high gate limit in the Over and Under Excitation Limiter inputs (OEL, UEL). This is
typically caused by an out of range var expectation on the generator, or an incorrect value set
for the OEL and UEL.

Fix - Try modifying generator var import/export (in the power flow case, change control
voltage for a PV or Swing generator, or change Q for a PQG) or changing the limit.

Governor Max Limit Messages

"Diesel Gov1 on Max Limit."

"Gas Turbine Gov1 on Max Limit."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 on Max Limit."
"Woodward Steam PID1 on Max Limit."

Description – Governor models control the mechanical power delivered to the shaft of a
generator. If the generator is asking for more power than can be supplied by the prime mover,
this message will be generated at initialization. Note that whenever a governor reports this
condition, a steady-state run will not be steady-state. The power required by the system is not
being met, and the governor is on a limit. As soon as your simulation begins, other
generating units in the system will have to pick up the extra generation needed to balance out
the system.

Fix - Reduce the power output of the generator in the power flow or increase the max limit
setting in the governor model to remove this warning.

Governor Min Limit Messages

"Diesel Gov1 on Min Limit."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 on Min Limit."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 on Min Limit."
"Woodward Steam PID1 on Min Limit."
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 777

Description – Governor models control the mechanical power delivered to the shaft of a
generator. If the generator is asking for less power than can be supplied by the prime mover,
this message will be generated at initialization. Note that whenever a governor reports this
condition, that a steady-state run will not be steady-state. The power required by the system
is not being met, and the governor is on a limit. As soon as your simulation begins, other
generating units in the system will have to reduce generation to balance out the system.

Fix - Increase the power output of the generator in the power flow or decrease the min limit
setting in the governor model to remove this warning.

Note - Typically for a min limit message to appear, either erroneous data has been entered
for the governor model, or the generator in the power flow case is absorbing power. The min
limit for most governor / prime mover models is zero. This simply states that the prime
mover will not become a load. In actual practice, the min limit is often set to the level of
turbine power output that would trip the reverse power relay, or some other form of
minimum power protection. These messages thus alert the user to an improper initialization,
where the unit would have actually tripped offline.

Governor Runtime Load Limit Messages

"Gas Turbine Gov1 Now ON Ambient Temp Load Limit."

"Gas Turbine Gov1 Now OFF Ambient Temp Load Limit."

Description - As for Max Limit messages discussed above, this message is supplied
(typically during run-time) when a unit is being over-loaded. This can happen during a
contingency, where there is a major loss of generation and remaining units must then pick up
the load, forcing them into an overload condition. The load limit in this case performs
automatic control, causing the generator’s gas turbine not to continue in overload. The
messages supplied inform you when the turbine goes into and out of load limit control.

Fix – Though this is a message simply noting a control action, if you desire to keep this
message from appearing (meaning you desire to keep the turbine from moving into a
temperature load limit condition), then create a system contingency that does not have a large
imbalance of load requirement vs. available generation. Create a condition where load and
generation are balanced, and where generation has some headroom (generator capability
greater than load requirement). Alternatively, since the temperature load limit takes time to
be reached (time constant simulates how the turbine heats up over time when in an overload
condition), only allow overload conditions that have a duration and level that will not cause
the unit to reach the temperature load limit.
 Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 778

Governor Initialization Load Limit Messages

"Exceeding Ambient Temperature Load Limit at Initialization."

Description - As for Max Limit messages discussed above, this message is supplied (during
initialization) when a unit is over-loaded. Since the governor is limited, upon running a
simulation, the generator will be forced to a lower power level, creating a non steady-state
response if run steady-state.

Fix - Reduce the power output of the generator in the power flow or increase the max limit
setting in the governor model to remove this warning.

Slew Run Messages

"Round Rotor Gen Slew Run Diverged (IMag)."

"Round Rotor Gen Slew Run Exceeded Max Iters."
"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Diverged (IMag)."
"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Diverged (Slip)."
"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Exceeded Max Iters for PF Conditions."
"Ind2 Motor Slew Run Exceeded Max Iters at Full Load."

Description - These are initialization errors. The machine model noted incorporates
saturation and other non-linear methods, and thus initialization of the model cannot be
performed directly. An iterative error driven minimization technique is used (slew run). If the
generator terminal conditions are extreme, this iterative technique may diverge. Several
message types are seen when these conditions occur, and these are:

Diverged (IMag) - This notes that the terminal current magnitude triggered the divergence
sensor.

 Exceeded Max Iters - This notes that the slew run did not converge by the time it reached
the maximum number of allowed iterations.

 Diverged (Slip) – This notes that induction motor slip triggered the divergence sensor.

Fix - Review the machine’s terminal conditions (P and Q) and determine if the equipment is
indeed being asked to perform far beyond its rated capability. Modify the machine in the
power flow case to bring it within an acceptable loading. Alternatively, the model data may
be corrupt, and may not be representing a reasonable machine characteristic. If you are using
your own data, try replacing it with EasyPower-provided model data from the model library.
Compare constants to see where your data may be in error.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 779

Odd Root Cause – In the process of running simulations with induction motors, we have
found an instance where this message is generated, but the causes above are not at the root of
the issue. In one instance we discovered that the base frequency had been set to a high value
of 400 Hz, due to a system being created after running a 400 Hz simulation of an airport
runway grid. The high base frequency caused a motor with data specified for 50 or 60 Hz to
diverge during the slew run.

Slip Estimate Messages

"Ind2 Motor Cannot Meet Power Required (Slip Estimate)."

"Ind2 Motor Slip Run Diverged (IMag - Slip Estimate)."
"Ind2 Motor Slip Run Diverged (Slip - Slip Estimate)."

Description – At initialization, in addition to a slew run (see section just above), induction
motor models also need to develop an estimate of slip to enter the slew run. Since the torque-
slip curve is non-linear, determining this initial estimate again necessitates an iterative
technique. These messages appear when the slip estimate cannot be found. Several message
types are seen, and these are:

Cannot Meet Power Required – This message is generated when the full torque-slip curve
has been traversed, and no value of torque can supply the power required of the motor.

Diverged (IMag) – This notes that the iterative estimate method diverged, and that terminal
current magnitude triggered the divergence sensor.

Diverged (Slip) – This notes that the iterative estimate method diverged, and that slip
triggered the divergence sensor.

Fix – Review the machine’s terminal conditions (P and Q) and determine if the equipment is
indeed being asked to supply power far beyond the unit’s capability. Modify the machine in
the power flow case to bring it within an acceptable loading. Alternatively, the model data
may be corrupt, and not be representing a reasonable machine characteristic. If you are using
your own data, try replacing it with EasyPower-provided model data from the model library.
Compare constants to see where your data may be in error.

Odd Root Cause – In the process of running simulations with induction motors, we have
found an instance where this message is generated, but the causes above are not at the root of
the issue. In one instance we discovered that the base frequency had been set to a high value
of 400 Hz, due to a system being created after running a 400 Hz simulation of an airport
runway power grid. The high base frequency caused a motor with data specified for 50 or 60
Hz to diverge during the slip estimate.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 780

Data Error Messages

"Steam Turbine Gov1 T1 is <= zero."

"Steam Turbine Gov1 T3 is <= zero."
"Steam Turbine Gov1 R is <= zero."

"Diesel Gov1 T1 is <= zero."

"Diesel Gov1 T2 is <= zero."
"Diesel Gov1 T5 is <= zero."
"Diesel Gov1 T6 is <= zero."

"Gas Turbine Gov1 R is <= zero."

"Gas Turbine Gov1 T1 is <= zero."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 T2 is <= zero."
"Gas Turbine Gov1 T3 is <= zero."

"Woodward Steam PID1 TB is <= zero."

"Woodward Steam PID1 TC is <= zero."
"Woodward Steam PID1 TD is <= zero."

"Simple Exciter K is <= zero."

"Simple Exciter TE is <= zero."
"Simple Exciter TB is <= zero."
"Simple Exciter EMax is <= EMin."

"IEEET1 Exciter KA is <= zero."

"IEEET1 Exciter TF is <= zero."
"IEEET1 Exciter TR is <= zero."
"IEEET1 Exciter TA is <= zero."
"IEEET1 Exciter TE is <= zero."
"IEEET1 Exciter E2 is < E1."
"IEEET1 Exciter S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
"IEEET1 Exciter VRMax is <= VRMin."

"IEEE AC6A KA is <= zero."

"IEEE AC6A TA is <= zero."
"IEEE AC6A TB is <= zero."
"IEEE AC6A TH is <= zero."
"IEEE AC6A TR is <= zero."
"IEEE AC6A TE is <= zero."
"IEEE AC6A E2 is <= E1."
"IEEE AC6A S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 781

"IEEE AC6A VRMax is <= VRMin."

"IEEE AC6A VAMax is <= VAMin."

"IEEE AC8B TR is <= zero."

"IEEE AC8B TDR is <= zero."
"IEEE AC8B TA is <= zero."
"IEEE AC8B TE is <= zero."
"IEEE AC8B E2 is <= E1."
"IEEE AC8B S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
"IEEE AC8B VRMax is <= VRMin."
"IEEE AC8B VEMax is <= VEMin."

"Round Rotor Gen E2 is <= zero."

"Round Rotor Gen S(E2) is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen has improper saturation constants - 1."
"Round Rotor Gen has improper saturation constants - 2."
"Round Rotor Gen E2 is <= E1."
"Round Rotor Gen S(E2) is <= S(E1)"
"Round Rotor Gen X''d is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen X''q is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen X'd is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen X'q is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen Xd is <= X'd."
"Round Rotor Gen Xq is <= X'q."
"Round Rotor Gen T'do is <= T''do."
"Round Rotor Gen T'qo is <= T''qo."
"Round Rotor Gen Xd is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen Xq is <= Xl."
"Round Rotor Gen T'do is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen T''do is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen T'qo is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen T''qo is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen H is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen Rated kV is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen Bus kV is <= zero."
"Round Rotor Gen MVA is <= zero."

"Salient Pole Gen E2 is <= zero."

"Salient Pole Gen S(E2) is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen has improper saturation constants - 1."
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 782

"Salient Pole Gen has improper saturation constants - 2."

"Salient Pole Gen E2 is <= E1."
"Salient Pole Gen S(E2) is <= S(E1)."
"Salient Pole Gen X''d is <= Xl."
"Salient Pole Gen X'd is <= Xl."
"Salient Pole Gen Xd is <= X'd."
"Salient Pole Gen X'd is <= X''d."
"Salient Pole Gen Xq is <= X''q."
"Salient Pole Gen T'do is <= T''do."
"Salient Pole Gen T'do is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen T''do is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen T''qo is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen H is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen Rated kV is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen Bus kV is <= zero."
"Salient Pole Gen MVA is <= zero."

Description - In a few models, input data is checked for correct model operation at
initialization. This is especially true when particular models will create a zero-divide or
positive feedback condition if constants fall within a specific range.

Fix – If these errors appear, they must be fixed to perform a simulation. Change the values so
that they do not trigger the error, and thus represent values that supply correct model
response.

Delay Table Message

"Diesel Gov1 Delay Table Size Exceeded."

Description - The Diesel Governor and prime mover model incorporates pure delay in the
fuel activation path. To simulate this action, a delay table is incorporated within the model.
This means that, given a particular simulation time step, the delay time allowed in the delay
table can change, since the table length is fixed in the model. This is an initialization error,
and must be resolved before your simulation can continue.

Fix – To remedy this condition, reduce the delay time, or increase the time step of the
simulation. Note that decreasing the delay time affects only the single model where the
change is made, but that increasing the time step affects all models in the simulation.
Increasing the time step too much can also lead to numerical instability. We suggest reducing
the delay time first.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 783

Initialized Message

"Round Rotor Gen Initialized."

"Salient Pole Gen Initialized."
"Ind2 Motor Initialized at Full Load."
"Ind2 Motor Initialized for PF Conditions."
"Synchronous Motor Initialized at Full Load."
"Synchronous Motor Initialized for PF Conditions."

Description - These messages indicate that the models noted are initialized properly, and are
ready to run in the simulation.

Load Transition Messages

"Ind2 Motor Load Transition - Starting to Running."

"Sync Motor Load Transition - Starting to Running."

Description - These messages indicate that the motor model’s load is starting its transition
from starting load to running load.

Sync Motor Field Tripped Message

"Sync Motor Field Tripped."

Description - This message indicates that the field of the synchronous motor indicated has
tripped in response to a breaker’s or contactor’s status.

Sync Motor Field Tripped on Reverse Power Message

"Sync Motor Reverse Power Sensor Tripped."

Description - This message indicates that the synchronous motor’s field has tripped due to a
reverse power condition on the motor.

Sync Motor Field Applied Message

"Applied Field to Sync Motor at XX% Speed."

Description - This message indicates that the field of the synchronous motor indicated has
been applied under a starting condition, at the noted speed.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 784

Solution Messages

"No Network Solution After Fault Applied."

"No Network Solution After Fault Removed."
"No Network Solution After Transferring ATS."
"No Network Solution After Opening Contactor."
"No Network Solution During Run Simulation."
"No Prelim Solution At End of Initialization."
"No Solution After Opening Device."
"No Solution After Closing Device."
"No Fault Clearing Power Flow Solution on DS Reset."
"No Initial Power Flow Solution on DS Reset."
"No Initial VCN Solution on DS Reset."
"No Power Flow Solution on DS Entry."
"No VCN Solution on DS Entry."

Description – All of these messages involve solution and conversion of the network model.
To enter the DS Focus, there must be a properly solved and converted power flow case. The
case must first solve using the same technique used in the PF Focus, and then it is converted
to a VCN (voltage controlled network) and solved again. The standard PF Focus solution
technique models generators as swing and voltage controlling sources, and motors as static
loads. Conversion to a VCN is accomplished by changing all sources (generators, utilities
and motors) to Thevenin equivalent voltage sources, and having all other loads modeled as
constant impedance static loads (constant current and MVA loads are converted to constant
impedance). During initialization or runtime, if the network cannot be solved, an error is
generated and the simulation terminated.

Note – In the first release of the DS Engine (Version 8.1), we have forced all non-source
network loads (non-motor loads) to be modeled as constant impedance. At a future date,
constant current and MVA load models may be allowed. This modeling method (constant
impedance) means that the network should always solve, as constant impedance load models
allow for a non-iterative direct solution of the network. Thus there should never be a
condition where the network does not solve. If any of these errors appear, please contact
EasyPower Technical Support, and be ready to supply your case for diagnosis.

Refactor Messages

"Unable to Refactor on Reset."

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 785

Description – This message involves the internal refactorization of the Y-Bus upon reset of a
simulation. If this message appears, there are internal coding inconsistencies involving open
and closed breaker status. This message should never occur during normal operation. If it
does, contact EasyPower Technical Support, and please be willing to supply your database to
us for diagnosis.

Isolated Sub-System Message

"Error - Cannot energize isolated subsystem with PV Gen."

Description – The starting up and synchronization of a generator takes a significant amount

of automatic controls. Such controls have not been programmed into the present release of
the DS Engine. This means that if a portion of a system is isolated before entering the DS
Focus, and it has a PV gen, the gen is not allowed to start. This auto-start feature may be
added in a later release.

Induction Motor Power Flow Messages

"Power Flow Vars Not Settled for Induction Motors."

"Power Flow Solves Exceeded 10 Iterations for Induction Motors."
"Power Flow Settled in XX Solves for Induction Motors."

Description – These messages describe conditions when the power flow solution is
iteratively used to get an initial condition power flow solution that matches the var
requirements of induction motors. As noted in the Operations Manual, var requirements of
the actual machine model may differ from those assumed in a power flow case. Thus the
power flow is iteratively corrected, so that initial conditions exactly match the machine
equation requirements. If conditions line up, then the “Settled” message is issued. If the
power flow cannot converge, or converge quickly enough, one of the other two messages
may precipitate.

Fix – If either the “Exceeded 10 Iterations” or “Vars Not Settled” message appears, the
condition of your system is such that var requirements of induction motors cannot be met.
This can be caused by a system that is near voltage collapse where the motors are connected,
or when induction motor machine data has specified a motor that cannot meet the power
requirements desired of it from the power flow (possibly moving the motor into a stall point
for an initial condition). In either case, induction motor data should be reviewed and the
power flow case should be inspected for unstable voltage conditions (a location where small
changes in var loading cause large changes in voltage).
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 786

Protective Device Pickup Messages

"Fuse Picked Up On Over Current."

"LV Breaker Picked Up On Over Current."
"Relay Picked Up On Over Current."
"ATS Picked Up On Under-Voltage."
"Contactor Picked Up."
“Relay Picked Up On Under-Frequency – XX Hz”

Description – Protective devices (PD) modeled by the user can be globally enabled during
the simulation. These devices are then monitoring current, and if their device curve is
satisfied (current meets or exceeds the fuse max-clear curve, LV Breaker max-clear curve or
relay pickup current), then it will trigger a pickup message. This is an informational message
only, and in most cases does not signify an error or warning condition.

Note – If protective devices are picking up which should not be doing so, we suggest a
thorough review of the protective device settings via their TCC plots.

Protective Device Reset Messages

"Fuse Reset at I Squared T = XX%"

"LV Breaker Reset."
"Relay Reset at XX% Travel. Now Traveling Back."
"ATS Reset."
"Contactor Reset."
“Relay Reset. Timer Reset.”

Description – If a protective device has already picked up (see just above), but then the
current drops below the trip point (below the fuse max-clear curve, LV Breaker max-clear
curve or relay pickup current), then the protective device will reset. This is an informational
message only, and in most cases does not signify an error or warning condition.

Note – If protective devices are re-setting that should not be, we suggest a thorough review
of the protective device settings via their TCC plots. Also note that for a fuse reset (which
really is not a physical reset, but an energy condition where the fuse element did not melt),
the fuses exposed I Squared T in percent of fuse capability is displayed in the Message Log.
This then gives an indication of fuse fatigue. Note that the fuse model never resets the
accumulated energy in a single simulation. This then means that fuse pre-heating can be
simulated for several contingency events (where the fuse may blow faster on the second
event due to energy already accumulated). This modeling method was implemented based on
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 787

the assumption that most dynamic simulations run to about 20 or 50 seconds, and that this
would not be enough time to significantly dissipate heat accumulated in the fuse.

Protective Device Trip Messages

"Fuse Tripped On Over Current."

"LV Breaker Tripped On Over Current."

"Relay Tripped On Over Current."

"ATS Tripped On Under-Voltage - Waiting for Transfer."

"Device Tripped on Relay action."

“Relay Tripped on Under-Frequency – XX% Hz”

“Device Tripped by Under-Frequency Relay.”

Description – If a protective device has picked up (see just above), and it then satisfies the
device’s trip point (the fuse max-clear curve, LV Breaker max-clear curve or relay TCC
curve), a message is generated to note that the device has tripped. For a Fuse and LV
Breaker, an additional signal is then sent to the switch or breaker modeled in the network to
force the device to open. For a relay, we now start a one-way timer (which cannot reset) that
will, at a later time, issue a breaker trip signal. This is an informational message only, and in
most cases does not signify an error or warning condition.

Note – If protective devices are tripping that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of
the protective device settings via their TCC plots.

Relay Time Delay Satisfied Message

"Relay Aux Time and Device Clearing Time Satisfied."

Description – If a relay has tripped (see just above), then after the relay delay time is
satisfied, this message is generated. This notes that a trip signal has been issued to the
breaker associated with the relay. This is an informational message only, and in most cases
does not signify an error or warning condition.

Note – If relays are tripping that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of the
protective device settings via their TCC plots.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 788

Relay Travel Back Message

"Relay Travel Back Complete."

Description – If a relay has tripped and reset (see just above), then it begins traveling back.
When the travel back is complete, this message will be generated.

Relay Unable to Trip Breaker Message

"Relay Unable to Trip Breaker - Not Defined."

Description – If a relay has tripped and has satisfied all delay times, but cannot find a
breaker to trip, then this message will be displayed.

Fix – Make sure that a breaker has been assigned to this relay. In EasyPower, the software is
able to look for an associated breaker; however, in some cases this “auto-locate” feature is
unable to find the breaker associated with the relay. This is why, as of Version 8.0, a field
was added in the Relay Dialog System Tab for assigning a breaker to a relay.

Relay Instantaneous Reset Message

"Relay Resetting from Instantaneous Pickup at xx% of Travel."

Description – If a relay has tripped and reset (see just above) when in a definite time
(horizontal line trip characteristic) section, then this message is displayed to show the action
and to indicate how close the device came to tripping.

ATS Transferred Messages

"ATS Transferred to Emergency Source."

"ATS Transferred to Normal Source."

Description – If an ATS has detected a loss of source and tripped (see just above), then after
the delay time is satisfied, this message is generated. This notes that a transfer signal has
been issued to the ATS, and it has performed its function. This is an informational message
only, and in most cases does not signify an error or warning condition.

Note – If an ATS is transferring that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of the
protective device settings for the ATS.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 789

Contactor Dropped Out Message

"Contactor Dropped Out."

Description – If a contactor has sensed an under-voltage condition that exceeds its under-
voltage setting and delay time, this message is generated. This notes that a signal has been
issued to the contactor’s switching device, and it has performed its function (opened). This is
an informational message only, and in most cases does not signify an error or warning
condition.

Note – If a contactor is dropping out that should not be, we suggest a thorough review of the
protective device settings for the contactor.

Exceeded Result Storage Message

"Exceeded Result Storage Array Size."

Description - This message should never occur during normal operation. If it does, contact
EasyPower Technical Support, and please be willing to supply your database to us for
diagnosis.

No PF Source Messages

"No PF Source for Ind2 Motor."

"No PF Source for Sync Motor."
"No PF Source for RR Gen."
"No PF Source for SP Gen."

Description - These messages should never occur during normal operation. If they do,
contact EasyPower Technical Support, and please be willing to supply your database to us
for diagnosis.

DStates Not Settled Messages

"DStates Not Settled, See Other Model Error Messages."

Description – During initialization, a check is made to see if the full model is settled. This is
done by running one time step, and reviewing all DStates across all models. Given the DState
is “the” value used to drive the integration calculation, and represents “changes” in a model’s
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 790

condition, if the value of all DStates falls below a set threshold, then we can assume that the
full model is settled.

Fix – We suggest reviewing all messages in the Message Log for a limit violation or other
such warning. This is the most obvious reason for some DStates not being settled. However,
if no other messages appear, but still the DStates are not settled, consider an additional step.
Unsettled DStates occur in large system models where the DStates are very near being
settled, but do not fall below the “Maximum Allowed DState” threshold. This is a user
controlled setting in the DS Options dialog, and can be increased if necessary to get a
simulation to continue. If this threshold level is increased, we suggest doing so slightly until
the “DState Not Settled” message goes away. Then after this, run the simulation in steady-
state for 5 seconds (plotting several results) to verify that the system is indeed settled (all
plotted results should produce a nearly flat line).

DStates Settled Messages

"DStates Settled for All Models."

Description – These messages note that all DStates are settled and that performing a
simulation can proceed. “D” or differential states are indicators of change. If they are near
zero and not growing, then the simulation is in steady state, i.e. not moving. When they are
above a minimum level and growing, then changes are happening in the system, and the
system is thus not settled, and thus not in steady state.

Faulted Message

"Faulted."

Description – This message alerts the user to a fault being applied on the noted bus.

Fault Removed Message

"Fault Removed."

Description – This message alerts the user that a fault which was applied (see just above) is
now being removed from the noted bus.

ATS Transferred Message

"ATS Transferred."
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 791

Description – This message alerts the user to an automatic transfer switch that has been
switched (toggled) to its alternate condition.

Contactor Dropped Out Message

"Contactor Dropped Out."

"Contactor Dropped Out in Isolated Sub-System."

Description – All contactors modeled with dynamic drop-out settings will automatically
drop out under voltage depression conditions of an impacting duration. This message alerts
the user to the drop-out action taken on the noted contactor. If a contactor is located on an
isolated sub-system after solving an initial power flow condition, it will automatically drop
out, since the bus voltage on all buses in an isolated sub-system without a swing generator is
zero. This message often appears just after initialization for a system where a contactor is
modeled within an isolated sub-system.

Results Saved Message

"Results Saved to Windows Clipboard."

Description – The user can select to have all results copied to the Window’s Clipboard.
When this action is performed, the user is alerted to the action. The data is tab delimited and
ready for import into Excel.

Note – Copying results to the Window’s Clipboard is time consuming, especially if the data
set is large (lots of points and lots of curves). If this automatic action is slowing down display
of simulation results, disable it in the DS Options dialog.

Device Opened Message

"Device Opened."

Description – This message is generated when a device (LV Breaker, HV Breaker, Switch,
Fused Switch) is either opened by a script action, or opened automatically as a result of
protective device action.

Device Closed Message

"Device Closed."
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 792

Description – This message is generated when a device (LV Breaker, HV Breaker, Switch,
Fused Switch) is closed by a script action.

Simulation Run To Message

"Simulation Run To XX Seconds."

Description – This message is generated when a script command is processed which

performs a Run To action. The time (XX) specified in the script command is also supplied.

Simulation Run For Message

"Simulation Run For XX Seconds."

Description – This message is generated when a script command is processed which

performs a Run For action. The time (XX) specified in the script command is also supplied.

Simulation Reset Message

"Simulation Re-Initialized."

Description – This message notes that the user reset the simulation. The next time the
simulation is run, it will start from the beginning.

Run Script Message

"Run Script XXX."

Description – This message notes that script XXX is being run as a response to a user
command.

Run Script Warning Message

"Can't run script. End time for simulation is zero."

"Can't run simulation. End time for simulation is zero."

Description – This message notes that the script being run, cannot do so, since the
commands have not specified a run time.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 793

Fix – Edit the script and add or modify appropriate commands to get the simulation to run for
a reasonable number of seconds.

Control Setting Changed Messages

"Control Setting Changed - Contactors Enabled."

"Control Setting Changed - Contactors Disabled."
"Control Setting Changed - Protective Devices Enabled."
"Control Setting Changed - Protective Devices Disabled."
"Control Setting Changed - Time Step Changed to %.4f."

Description – Repeatability of dynamic simulations is critical, especially at a later date, after

a major simulation effort. The DS Script definition tools and methods imposed on the DS
Focus make this critical aspect automatic. However, users still have the ability to make
changes to run-time settings in the DS Options dialog. If the user desires to make the changes
part of a script so that a simulation is completely repeatable, then those changes should be
included in the script. These messages alert the user to control values being changed as the
script is run.

Motor Load Messages

"Torque vs. Speed Table Exceeds Internal Memory Limits"

Description – Under normal use, this message should never appear. It is an indication that
the size of the Torque vs. Speed motor load curve in the library (and selected for the given
motor) is exceeding the size of the physical memory limit in the DS Engine. There is most
likely a programming error if this message occurs. Please contact EasyPower Technical
Support, and be willing to supply your database to us for diagnosis.

Simulation Auto-Stop Message

"Simulation Auto-Stopped on Settled System"

Description – If the option in the DS Options dialog is set for auto-termination of a

simulation upon a settled system, then after the last script command is issued, and you are
within a Run To or Run For command, if the DStates of all models fall below the set
threshold, the simulation will automatically terminate on a clear one second boundary time.
This message is issued to note that the simulation auto-stopped.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 794

Complex Operations Error Messages

"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - COMPLEX/COMPLEX"

"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - COMPLEX/DOUBLE"
"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - DOUBLE/COMPLEX"
"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - /=COMPLEX"
"Divide by Zero in Class COMPLEX - /=DOUBLE"

Description – Under normal use, these messages should never appear. The programming
effort has included significant time to cover for all forms of model data entry where such
conditions could arise. There is most likely a programming error if this message occurs.
Please contact EasyPower Technical Support, and be willing to supply your database to us
for diagnosis.

Fix - If this message appears after making a modification to model data, go back and review
that model data for correctness. There could be a condition where an inappropriate data
arrangement slipped past data integrity checks in the equipment dialog.

Numerical Instability Message

"Numerical instability encountered."

Description – This message will appear when there is an issue with numerical instability in
your simulation. As noted earlier in the Operations Manual, such conditions are typically
associated with selecting too large a time step in comparison to specified model time
constants.

Fix 1 – Reduce the time step of your simulation until the error goes away. If the error cannot
be remedied with this fix, you will need to do more effort as detailed in Fix 2.

Fix 2 – For this problem to occur even after significantly reducing your time step, most likely
there is a data integrity issue. We suggest reviewing model data for excessively small time
constants, and then correcting them. If this problem occurred after a data modification,
review that data modification for correctness.

Stepping Message

"Stepping."
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 795

Description – This message will appear when the user is performing a step-run simulation.
For every click on the Step Simulation toolbar button, this message will appear in the
message log.

Simulation Complete Message

"Simulation Complete."

Description – This message will appear when a simulation has been completed.

DS Focus Entry Error Messages

"Stability Focus Entry Failed on Power Flow Instantiation."

"Stability Focus Entry Failed on Data Transfer to DS Engine."
"Stability Focus Entry Failed on Power Flow Start."

Description – These messages will appear when a failure occurs when entering into the DS
Focus. Under normal use, these messages should never appear. Please contact EasyPower
Technical Support, and be willing to supply your database to us for diagnosis if you
encounter these error messages.

DS Focus Entry Model Error Message

"Stability Focus Entry Encountered Model Init Errors.”

Description – This message will appear if there are errors that are occurring in DS Models
upon entry into DS Focus. This message also states: “Review Message Log for Details”, and
so we recommend reviewing the Message Log to track down why this message appeared.
More details will be supplied there for specific model initialization error conditions.

Attempting Close / Open Message

"Attempting Close - Device Already Closed."

"Attempting Open - Device Already Opened."

Description – If a switching device is asked to open or close, and it is already open or closed
respectively, this message is logged to inform you that the switching operation attempted had
no effect on the simulation.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 796

Exciter / Governor Stepping Messages

"Exciter Stepped by XX%."

"Governor Stepped by XX%."

Description – When an excitation or governor system is stepped in a simulation, this

message is generated to inform you of a successful step applied to the Reference Voltage or
Reference Speed, respectively.

Completing Script Message

"Completing Script: XX."

Description – When a script is completed, this message is logged.

Reset Encountered Errors Message

"Reset Encountered Model Init Errors."

Description – During a reset action (after pressing the Simulation Reset toolbar button), this
message is logged if model initialization errors are encountered. This message also states:
“Review Message Log for Details”, so we recommend reviewing the Message Log to track
down why this message appeared. More details will be supplied there for specific model
initialization error conditions.

Completing Script Message

"Run Script (Stepping): XX."

Description – If a script is run while in a run-step mode, this message is logged.

Power Flow Scaling Message

"Grouped Motor XX has a Power Flow Scaling Factor of Zero."

Description – Grouped motors simulate their Power Flow Scaling Factor by scaling the total
HP or kVA rating. If this value is set to zero, then we basically have a “zero” HP motor. This
cannot be accommodated, as the HP or kVA of the motor group is used to scale many
parameters in the model, and will generate a zero divide situation in the DS Engine.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 797

Fix – Either increase this scaling factor to a more reasonable number, or remove the motor
(gray out) in the Database Focus.

Time Step Change Message

"Script Command to Change Time Step To %.7f Exceeds Allowable Range."

Description – The simulation time step cannot be set any higher than one cycle. If a script
command is used to set the time step higher than that, then this message is logged.

Fix – Lower the time step change so it does not exceed one cycle.

Bus / Device / ATS Not Defined Message

"Bus To Fault Is Not Defined In Script."

"Device to Switch Not Defined In Script."
"ATS to Switch Not Defined In Script."

Description – If a device (Command ID) in a script command does not exist in the case, then
one of these messages will be displayed. Most likely, this message will indicate that you are
using an old script where a device action included a device ID that has been changed or
deleted in the case. Or, the script could be trying to switch a device that has been deactivated
in the case. In any event, the script command ID does not matches any presently defined and
activated device ID.

Fix – Edit the script and change the device ID to match a device that is currently in your case
and activated.

Generator AVR Undefined Messages

"Generator to Force AVR to Manual for Is Not Defined."

"Generator to Force AVR to Auto for Is Not Defined."
"Generator to Step AVR for Is Not Defined."

Description – If a generator asked to perform an AVR action is not defined, this message is
logged.

Fix – Edit the script and change the device ID to match a generator that is currently in your
case and activated.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 798

Generator AVR Action Messages

"Generator AVR Set to Manual."

"Generator AVR Set to Auto."
"Generator AVR Stepped %6.2f %%."

Description – If a generator AVR command in a script is successful, then one of these

messages will be logged.

Dynamic Stability Library

The standard library contains stability data for various items such as generators, exciters,
governors, stabilizers, motors, etc.. The library comes with “Generic” and “Typical” data.
You can add new data for Typical.

To open the library, click on the EasyPower button on the top left corner and choose
from the list, Open Library.

In the library, expand Stability  Generation System  Exciters  Typical. Observe the
various types of exciters listed. You can add your own types. To add a new type, right click
on Typical and choose Insert New Type from the context menu. Enter the name for the new
type. On the right side you can choose the Model from the combo box. Enter the values for
the various parameters in the spreadsheet.
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 799

Stability Library

Plugins
New dynamic stability models can be added to EasyPower via plug-ins. The plug-ins are
provided as an update. The update file is a *.dll file that needs to be saved in the “Plugins”
folder in the EasyPower Program folder. While starting EasyPower, new plugins will be
imported into the default library.

While entering dynamic stability data for equipment, you will be able to choose the
“(Plugin)” data to import from the library to the equipment data. In the library, the (Plugin)
data is protected, and therefore cannot be modified like (Generic) or Typical.

DC Modeling in Dynamic Stability

No specialty effort has been done to handle DC components in this version of the Dynamic
Stability feature. We would note the following:
Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 800

 Inverter output is fixed voltage source with AC symmetrical short circuit equal to that
specified.

 Rectifier output is fixed voltage source with DC short circuit equal to that specified.

 DC Motors are loads.

 DC Generators are fixed voltage source with DC short circuit equal to that specified.

 DC Utilities are fixed voltage source with DC short circuit equal to that specified.

 DC Batteries are fixed voltage source with DC short circuit equal to that specified.

 DC Photovoltaics are fixed voltage source with DC short circuit equal to that
specified.

Note however that specialty Wind Turbine and Photovoltaic models (both which only
connect to the AC system) are offered under the EasyPower AC Generator component. Add
an AC generator to your system to simulate the Wind Turbine or Photovoltaic, and then
select either:

Generator Model: Gen Inv PV1

Exciter Model: Exc Inv QCntrl

for the Photovoltaic model, or:

Generator Model: Gen Inv WT4

Exciter Model: Exc Inv QCntrl

for the Wind Turbine model.

Inverter and Photovoltaic Iteration Methods

Additional power flow solution logic and adjustments have been included for both Inverters
and Photo-Voltaics, as they will play off of each other if built into a model together. On each
iteration, that logic is shown in the following chart. Note that only pertinent power flow
solution steps are included.

1. Set DoingInvAdjust = false

2. Do Power Flow Iteration Code

Chapter 19 Dynamic Stability 801

3. Update Inverter and Rectifier

Inverter:

Check input load voltage

if ( VDC < V Low Limit )
{Reduce specified output kW
Set bDoingInvAdjust = true
}
Transfer AC source load on output to input load considering efficiency

Rectifier:
Use DC Equations to calc input kW and kVar
Transfer DC source load on output to input load
Use DC Equations to calc output DC Voltage from loading and AC input voltage
Update DC Output voltage

4. Update Photovoltaics
if ( VTerm > VOC)
{Force I Output to zero
}
if ( VTerm < VOC AND VTerm > VMP )
{Set output according current to VI slope
}
if ( VTerm < VMP AND NOT bDoingInvAdjust )
{Force I Output to ISC
if ( VTerm < V Min Soln Limit )
{Terminate the PF solution
}
}
5. Either GoTo (2) or Exit if Solved

Comment 1: The method shown above thus allows some amount of interaction between
Inverters and Photovoltaics, but it allows the Inverter, if there is one, to perform its action
first. This is done on purpose, as the Photovoltaic action on an overload condition is to drop
voltage. This action has a stronger (even overriding) control action than the load reduction of
the inverter. And so, we really want the inverter to first attempt to do all of its load dropping
(i.e. dropping load until it meets it low voltage limit) before we even attempt any voltage
reduction of the Photovoltaic.

Comment 2: Voltage reduction on the Photovoltaic is applied in hopes that the load that it is
feeding is a constant impedance load. In this case, there will eventually be a valid power flow
solution, even as the voltage plummets to what would be considered unacceptable levels, as
the Photovoltaic attempts to hold its current output to ISC. If however a constant power or
constant current load is specified in the DC system with the Photovoltaic, it is the sole source
of power, and if the load is specified such that the Photovoltaic’s bus voltage drops below
 802

VMP, then the system will collapse into a severe low voltage, and will terminate the solution
once we have dropped below V Min Soln Limit.

Comment 3: An inverter specified with a Photo-Voltaic system cannot accomplish a load

reduction if it is specified in a SWING or Stand-Alone mode. In this mode, the Inverter will
accumulate all load that it is serving, and apply it to its DC input. If that load causes the
Photo-Voltaic to have a voltage below VMP, then the same voltage collapse discussed in
Comment 2 will occur.
Glossary of Terms i

Glossary of Terms
1/C: One conductor per cable. Three separate cables are used for a circuit, one each for A
phase, B phase and C phase. Also known as single-core.

3/C: Three conductors per cable. This is the same as three separate conductors, except that
the conductors are encased with an insulated overall outer jacket effectively forming one
cable. The cable may or may not have an interstitial ground wire.

activate/deactivate: Deactivating an equipment from a one-line diagram is equivalent to

turning the equipment out of service. The data remains in the database but is omitted from
analysis. Sometimes, it is more convenient to deactivate and activate equipment than delete it
from the diagram and re-enter it later. Deactivating turns the status off in the equipment
database.

ANSI: American National Standards Institute. EasyPower follows many ANSI standards for
calculation procedures. See IEEE.

area: Numeric designations in bus database records that are interpreted according to your
company conventions. You can assign different buses to different areas and generate reports
specific to the areas. Zones are subsets of areas.

ASCII file: Text file in ASCII format. (ASCII = American Standard Code for Information
Interchange).

base case: The basic configuration of any power system one-line. Other scenarios (one-line
configurations) are variations of the base case.

branch: electrical circuit elements such as feeders (conductors, cables, busways),

transformers and series reactors, which are terminated by two or more buses. Branches
convey power.

bus: a node, connection point or a bus bar, with rated voltage specified. All equipment are
connected to buses.

button: A command inside a dialog or on the program toolbar which can be selected by
pressing with the mouse button, the box with the command name or icon inside it. The button
appears to protrude from the dialog box.

CAD: Computer aided drafting

Glossary of Terms ii

check box: A choice that can be selected (or an option that can be enabled) by clicking on
the hollow square. A check sign (ü) appears in the box.

clipping: Action of making the right side of a curve not appear beyond the given amp value.

close and latch: The maximum asymmetrical current capability of a medium or high voltage
circuit breaker or switch to close and immediately thereafter latch closed for normal-
frequency making current.

combo box: A drop down menu with choices, out of which one can be selected by
highlighting the desired item.

context menu: command options available to any particular context, operation, or window.
Usually a right mouse click displays the context menu.

continuous: Having infinite number of choices in a range. Opposite – discrete.

database edit (focus): in this focus you can add or delete equipment on the one-line, and edit
the data of the equipment.

defaults: Values or settings used by the program in the absence of user defined values or
settings.

delimiter: A separator character. For example, in a list of numbers the comma is frequently
used as the "delimiter" between numbers. In EasyPower a delimiter is used for automatically
generated ID names during Group Copy.

derating: Reduction in the current carrying capacity of cables, conductors or transformers

because of the extra losses caused by harmonic currents and voltages.

device function: A relay function that is meant to trip during a certain system condition.
Examples: ground time-overcurrent trip (51G), phase time-overcurrent trip (51), phase
instantaneous trip (50), thermal overload trip (49), etc., are device functions.

dialog (box): A window for user interface. You can select commands, enter data, select
options and settings using a dialog box.

discrete: Having fixed number choices at fixed values in a range. Opposite – continuous.

drag: the action of pressing the mouse button and moving the mouse. Items on the one-line
can be dragged to re-position them.

driving point kV: System fault point voltage, usually in per unit (PU).
Glossary of Terms iii

duty: The maximum RMS short circuit current a circuit breaker, fuse or switch carries.

DXF: Drawing interchange file format. A file format used by the program AutoCAD to save
drawings.

ECF: Eddy current factor

edit field: A box in a dialog where user can enter data such as a value or ID Name.

Eff (motor): Motor efficiency.

Entity-only: A type of DXF file that does not have a header. By itself, the file is incomplete
since it does not have a block library definition

EPR: Ethylene propylene rubber. (HV cable insulation)

EPR-133%: Ethylene propylene rubber with 133% insulation. (HV cable insulation)

EPR-NJ: Non-jacketed ethylene propylene rubber. (HV cable insulation)

EPR-NJ-133%: Non-jacketed ethylene propylene rubber. (HV cable insulation)

EPRS: Shielded ethylene propylene rubber. (HV cable insulation)

EPRS-133%: Shielded ethylene propylene rubber with 133% insulation. (HV cable
insulation)

equipment palette: toolbar with buttons to insert various equipment on the one-line. This is
available only in the database edit focus.

equipment tables: The groupings of all items in the database that have the same item type.
For example, all buses are in the Bus table, all cables are in the Cable table, etc.

expert system: A type of software where the behavior simulates the benefit of having a
recognized "expert" in the field advising you. The training and experience of that human
expert is built into the program.

fault: Short circuit.

faulting: The action of creating a short circuit in the program.

feeder breaker: A breaker, switch, or fuse that goes between a bus and some attached
equipment. See also tie breaker.
Glossary of Terms iv

File Properties: Setting File – Properties from the menu generally applies to the current file
only.

FLA: Full load amps. (The rated continuous current.)

focus: The type of analysis EasyPower is doing, or the mode the program is in. The different
focuses are Database Edit, Short Circuit, Power Flow, Coordination, and Harmonics.

frame: Frame size (in amps) of circuit breakers (low voltage).

frequency scan: A plot showing how a system responds to an injected current for a range of
frequencies. This is also an impedance plot, where the impedance is a function of frequency.

fused switch: Primarily a fuse used for interrupting faults, but can be switched on or off for
load currents.

global: That affects the entire one-line database, or any operation.

grid: graphical array on the one-line, represented by dots (points), to assist in aligning items
while creating drawing.

grouped motor: A motor modeled in EasyPower to represent a group of motors.

HG w/o A: Hydro generator without amortisseur winding (same as SP).

I THD: Total harmonic distortion in current.

IAA: Interlocked armor aluminum. (pertains to cables)

IAS: Interlocked armor steel. (pertains to cables)

ICCB: Insulated case circuit breaker.

ID Name: Unique identifier name for any equipment type in EasyPower database (one-line).

IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. Many IEEE standards are also
ANSI standards. See ANSI.

IND: Induction generator type.

interrupting cycle: Typical circuit breakers interrupt the fault current about 5 cycles after
initiation of fault. Therefore, interrupting cycle is calculated as 5 cycles after a fault has
occurred. The asymmetrical interrupting current is less than the momentary current and
higher than the 30-cycle current as a result of decay in transients.
Glossary of Terms v

IRSS: Root sum of squares of harmonics in current.

isolated subsystems: Power systems in the one-line database not connected with each other.

IT Product: Inductive influence of harmonic currents on a telephone system expressed in

terms of the product of a current’s root mean square magnitude (I), in amperes, times its
telephone influence weighting factor (TIF).

K-factor (breakers): Ratio of maximum rated voltage to the lower limit of the range of
operating voltage in which the required symmetrical and asymmetrical interrupting
capabilities vary in inverse proportion to the operating voltage.

K-factor (transformers): A component of the ANSI Standard C57.110-1986 transformer

derating equation, and more commonly used to classify the harmonic carrying capability of a
transformer.

library: A data file in Microsoft Access, and part of EasyPower software, that contains
information on protective device ratings and trip characteristics, cable insulation, conductor
derating, arc flash hazard data and panel and MCC schedules.

line end fault: Short circuit condition at the end of a branch such that the branch is no longer
connected to the bus at the faulted end.

LTC: Load tap changer (of a transformer).

LVPCB: Low voltage power circuit breaker.

MAC: Messenger aerial cable.

MCC: Motor control center. MCC’s typically are enclosures that include circuit protection
unit (fuse/circuit breaker), motor starters, contactors, bus bars and instrumentation and
feeders to motors.

MCCB: molded case circuit breaker.

menu bar (menu): group of various commands listed as text buttons, usually at the top of
the program window.

Mfr: Manufacturer (of equipment). Equipment data in the library is stored in the hierarchy
Mfr  Type  Style.

momentary current rating: This is the rated momentary current of a switch in RMS total
current which the switch can carry for at least one cycle. This current includes the dc
component.
Glossary of Terms vi

momentary: A momentary fault current is the current during the first half cycle.

NACD ratio: No ac decrement ratio.

Non Solid State Trip: Trip unit that is not made of electronic (solid state) devices. Typically
magnetic trip devices with time delay produced by hydraulic or pneumatic friction.

one-line: Single line diagram in which all three phases are inclusive. Sometimes the database
of any system in EasyPower is also called one-line.

overload threshold: The proportion of the loading capability of any equipment, exceeding
which warning will be provided by the program indicating equipment overload or proximity
to overload.

pan: Move (slide) the contents of the window.

PCC: Point of common coupling.

PF: Power factor.

PILC: Paper insulated lead sheath (HV cable insulation)

PILC-133%: Paper insulated lead sheath with 133% insulation (HV cable insulation)

plot: In coordination focus, a plot is a time-current plot showing TCC curves. In harmonics
focus, a plot could be a frequency scan or summation bar chart. In harmonics focus, plots
need to be defined before plotting.

plug (rating plug): The rating (amps) of the device which is plugged in the trip unit of the
circuit breaker to limit the maximum Long Time Trip amps.

PQG: Constant power constant VAR generator. The voltage is varied to keep these values
constant. See PV and swing.

print files: Files destined for a particular printer, where all the necessary information to print
is built into the file. A separate program can then spool them to the printer without any
interaction with the application that created it.

PV: Constant power constant voltage model of generator. The reactive power (VARs) is
altered to keep the power and voltage constant. See PQG and swing.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride (LV cable insulation)

R0: Zero sequence reactance.

Glossary of Terms vii

R1: Positive sequence resistance.

radio button: A choice that can be selected by clicking on the hollow circle.

Reference kV: The voltage level through which the current is to be viewed in a time-current
plot, using the concept of transformation ratio of transformers. Example: A 100 amp current
at 13.8kV is shown as 2875 amps (100*13.8/0.48 = 2875 amps) at a reference kV of 0.48kV.
Each TCC plot has a reference kV which the user can define.

remote bus: any bus other than the faulted bus in short circuit analysis.

R-EXP: exponent of harmonic number for resistance factor.

RH: Rubber insulated, heat resistant, 75oC.

RHH: Heat resistant rubber. (LV cable insulation)

RHW: Moisture and heat resistant rubber. (LV cable insulation)

RPM: Revolutions per minute.

SCADA: Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition. SCADA data is derived from real time,
or metered data, and converted to an ASCII format which can be read into EasyPower.

scaling factor: The factor which scales down the connected load.

scenario: A scenario is a variation of the one-line from the base case or alternative system
configuration.

scroll bar: Slider bar to move (horizontally or vertically) the display area in any window.

sensor: CT rating (amps) for trip unit of circuit breakers (low voltage).

shift multiplier: Time delay setting in addition to the time dial (time multiplier) in some
electronic relays. The shift multiplier shifts the time delay of the relay.

short circuit: Abnormal and undesired condition of current (usually with high magnitude)
passing through conductors touching each other or through failed insulation.

snap: Position objects to certain points on the drawing. When Snap feature is enabled
inserted objects will position themselves at the grid points and not between the grid points. If
the Snap feature is disabled, then you can position the objects anywhere between the grid
points.
Glossary of Terms viii

solution mismatch: Power flow is solved using iterative approach. After each iteration, the
power flow through a bus is compared. If there is higher mismatch in power flow than the
specified threshold, then the program will execute the next iteration. If the mismatch is less
than the specified threshold for every bus, then the power flow is solved.

spin wheel: The wheel on a standard Microsoft mouse. Spinning this wheel you can scroll
(up-down) or zoom (in-out).

spool: The process of reading print files or plot files and sending the information character
by character to the output device.

spreadsheet: Array of data cells in programs.

SST: Solid state trip (associated with low voltage circuit breakers such as LVPCB, MCCB
and ICCB).

status bar: area where information is displayed at the bottom of window describing
coordinates, values, settings, etc.

status: Tells the program whether the equipment is in service (status On) or out of service
(status Off). This status determines whether the equipment is activated or deactivated.

style: Equipment name by design, rating or application.

summation: Calculation of the effect of harmonic currents for all frequencies from all
harmonics sources.

swing source: A swing source is a utility supply or generator in which the real power flow is
not fixed and the bus voltage is fixed. In any power flow solution, the net real and reactive
powers cannot be fixed in advance at every bus because the losses in the system are not
known until the solution is complete. The swing or "slack" sources supply the difference
between the given real and reactive power into the system at the other buses and total system
output plus the losses in the system.

symbols: Pictorial representations used on the one-line diagram.

symmetrical amps/asymmetrical amps: Symmetrical amps is the current that has purely ac
component. Asymmetrical amps have both ac and dc components. The dc component
transient and decays with time.

symmetrical components: 3-phase quantities (currents, voltages, etc.) expressed in terms of

positive, negative and zero sequence components. These are mathematical transforms of the
phase quantities.
Glossary of Terms ix

SYN-COND: Synchronous condenser (generator type).

SYN-DP: Distributed pole synchronous (generator type).

SYN-SP: Salient pole without amortisseur winding (generator type).

SYN-SPA: Salient pole with amortisseur winding (generator type).

tap: Typically time-overcurrent pickup of relay. Tap could also pertain to tap settings in
transformer for setting voltage ratio, or tap setting in a current transformer (sensor) to scale
down the current.

TCC: Time-current curve.

temp directory: A directory that is temporarily used to store information while a program is
running. When the program is done with that information, it is automatically deleted. This
directory should be located on a drive that has plenty of free disk space.

temporary data: Data changed temporarily during analysis. Data can be changed through
Temporary Data dialogs. This is not stored permanently in the database. For example, you
can change the scaling factor or the motor start parameters in power flow analysis.

THHN: Heat resistant thermoplastic. (LV cable insulation)

THW: Moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic. (LV cable insulation)

THWN: Moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic. (LV cable insulation)

tick mark: Arrow placed in time-current plots to indicate a certain amp value at a given time
(or cycles). Tick marks are used to represent short circuit values.

tie-breaker: A circuit breaker, switch, or fuse that connects two buses. See also feeder
breaker.

time dial: Delay setting in conventional electro-mechanical relays for time-overcurrent trip
functions. Modern relays have the “time multiplier” setting for the same purpose.

time-current points: Coordinates (current-time pairs) that define the TCC of any device.

title block: The bottom block of a TCC plot in which the plot descriptions are provided.

toolbar: group of various command buttons in the form of icons or symbols.

Tools Options: Setting Tools-Options to change configurations generally apply to all files.
Glossary of Terms x

Total/Symmetrical basis (rating): ANSI standard for testing protective devices where
equipment is rated in total amps (asymmetrical) or in symmetrical amps.

type: The type of equipment, brand or a group of styles.

violation: A short circuit or power flow value that falls outside a range you specify.

voltage sensitivity: The dip in bus voltage due to short circuit on another bus. When voltage
sensitivity feature is enabled in EasyPower, the buses with voltages lower than a specified
threshold is highlighted red in the one-line diagram.

VRSS: Root sum of squares of voltages of all harmonics including fundamental.

VSUM: Linear sum of RMS voltages to generate an estimate of peak voltage.

VTHD: Total harmonic distortion (in percent of fundamental) in voltage, calculated as root
sum of squares of harmonics other than fundamental.

VTIF: Influence of harmonic voltages on a telephone system expressed in terms of the

product of a voltage’s root mean square magnitude, times its telephone influence weighting
factor (TIF), expressed in per unit of VRSS.

wildcard: Method of finding ID Names with any character when performing a query. A
wildcard character can represent any character.

WYSIWYG: An acronym for "What You See Is What You Get." This term is applied to
modern text and graphic editors that show things on the screen the same what they will be
printed.

X/R ratio: The ratio of rated frequency reactance and effective resistance to be used for short
circuit calculations.

X’dv: Transient reactance on generators MVA base.

X”dv: Subtransient reactance on generators MVA base.

X0: Zero sequence inductive reactance.

X0v: Zero sequence reactance on generators MVA base.

X1: Positive sequence inductive reactance.

Xc: Positive sequence capacitive reactance.

Xc0: Zero sequence capacitive reactance.

Glossary of Terms xi

XHHW: Moisture and heat resistant cross-linked synthetic polymer. This is the 480 volt
equivalent of XLPE. (LV cable insulation)

XLPE: Cross-linked polyethylene. (HV cable insulation)

XLPE-133%: Cross-linked polyethylene with 133% insulation. (HV cable insulation)

XLPE-NJ: Non-jacketed cross-linked polyethylene. (HV cable insulation)

XLPE-NJ-133%: Non-jacketed cross-linked polyethylene with 133% insulation. (HV cable

insulation)

XLPES: Shielded cross-linked polyethylene. (HV cable insulation)

XLPES-133%: Shielded cross-linked polyethylene with 133% insulation. (HV cable

insulation)

Xlr: Locked rotor impedance for induction machines.

zone: Zones are subset of areas. See area.

zoom: Enlarging or reducing the appearance of any drawing or plot on the monitor. Zooming
in is enlarging the appearance whereas zooming out is reducing.
Index xii

Index
Activate command, 91 black text, 618
active window, 166 blue text, 618
adding equipment, 43 border, note
admittance, nodal, 188, 221 color, 96
analysis style, 96
controlling, 164 branch
excluding items from, 164 line end, 177
preparing for, 160 breaker
results adding
clearing, 167 bus tie, 48, 81
printing, 282 feeder, 47, 80
text, 165 changing connection type, 48, 82
Scenarios, 231 connection type, 48, 82
starting, 164 contact parting time, 178, 561
viewing database data, 163 data, high voltage, 398
Analysis Focus, 37 data, low voltage, 414
angle duty verification, 175, 673
harmonic currents, 374, 411 moving, 48
angle, control, 209, 210, 389, 524 opening & closing, 161, 219, 220
ANSI Momentary Duty, 176, 674 tie, 48, 81, 164, 219
ANSI Standard calculations, 178, 561 Browser, Database Report, 106
ANSI Standards, proper application of, 189 bus
ANSI symbols, 305 adding, 76
ANSI time interval, 175 area, 77, 164, 179, 203, 342, 346, 348, 452, 467,
appending text reports, 291 676
arc blast, 608 changing
arc flash area and zone, 77
Integrated, 608, 611 kV, 76
arc flash boundary, 606 size, 41
Arc Flash Boundary Energy, 613 data, 341, 344, 345
arc flash button, 608 description, 40
arc flash hazard, 606 faulting, 172, 670
bus description, 350 kV, 41, 76, 164
arc flash hazard data, 614 tie, 48, 81, 164, 219
Arc Flash Hazard Options, 608 zone, 77, 164, 179, 203, 342, 346, 348, 452, 467,
arc flash hazard reports, 617 676
Arc Flash Spreadsheet, 611 Bus Data, 614
arc flash spreadsheet column headings, 619 Bus, From, 53
Arc Flash Threshold, 612 Bus, To, 53
arcing time busway
User Specified, 617 adding, 79
area, 77, 164, 179, 203, 342, 346, 348, 452, 467, 676 data, 354
changing, 77 cable
arrow adding, 44, 79
on note, 93 data, 357
on scrollbar, 72 cable data
asymmetrical currents, 189, 400 entering, 52
authcode, 27 CAD system, sending one-lines to, 324
AutoCAD Calculate button, 51
using to read DXF file, 325 calculation, type, 178, 561
auto-insert bus, 83 capacitor
auto-scroll, 73 adding, 77
backup relaying, 173 data, 367
Basler Formula, 254 temporary data, 217
Index xiii

caption, 166 coordination, 554

Change Bus Area/Zone command, 77 coordination focus, 554
Change ID Name command, 102, 104 coordination options, 556
changes coordination report, 594
temporary, 162 coordination status bar, 555
changes, temporary, 196 coordination, protective device, 173
saving, 207, 224 Copy command, 88, 102, 108, 263
Characteristic Current Method, 179, 561 Copy Device Function Contents command, 264
chattering, disk, 28 Copy Frame Contents command, 264
CI method, 197, 221 Copy kV Contents command, 264
clearing results, 167 Copy Sensor Contents command, 263
clipboard, 295 Copy Style Contents command, 263
Clipboard, 102 copying
close & latch, 176, 400, 500 database information, 77, 88
closing breakers & switches, 161, 219, 220 groups of items, 101
clothing class, 656 item data, 88
code factors item data using tables, 91
for MCCs and Panels, 306 subsystems, 102
code, authorization, 27 correction factor
color, 85, 93, 96, 97, 299, 302 resistance, 375, 413, 525
note background, 96 CT function, 372
note border, 96 CT ratio, 372
note text, 96 current
screen, 298 and voltage, 182, 678
column constant, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, 474
insert, 265 maximum, 175, 673
column, selecting, 262 current flow
comment text, 283, 304 for Harmonics, 540
complex network reduction, 178, 561 current injection, 197, 221
compressing database files, 286 current limiting reactor
computer adding, 78
memory, 25, 26 data, 369
monitor, 25, 28 current transformer, 371
optimizing, 27 connected item, 372
requirements, 25, 26 multi-ratio, 372
Conductor, 615 positive sequence, 372
conflict, name, 106 ratio, 372
connecting set ratio, 372
MCCs and panels to each other, 82 single ratio, 372
connecting items using tables, 91 zero sequence, 372
constant current transformer data, 371
current, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, 474 currents
impedance, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, asymmetrical, 189, 400
474 harmonic, 374, 411
kVA, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, 474 symmetrical, 61, 170, 186, 400
kW + j current, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, viewing remote SC, 173
474 cursor, move, 101
contact parting time, 178, 561 customize
context menu, 35 subsystem, 317
contingency studies, 196 customizing
Continuous Current, High Voltage Fuses, 259 device library, 261
Continuous data range, 255 text visibility, 297
control Cut command, 263
angle, 209, 210, 389, 524 data
harmonics, 545 breaker, high voltage, 398
power flow, 201 breaker, low voltage, 414
short circuit, 178, 183 bus, 341, 344, 345
voltage, 209, 210, 211, 218, 389, 524 busway, 354
Index xiv

cable, 357 Default Working Distances, 612

capacitor, 367 define plot, 537
capacitor, temporary, 217 define plots, 754
copying an item's, 88 delay band, 422, 424, 496
current limiting reactor, 369 Delete command
filter, 373 notes, 93
fused switch, 377, 384 Deletecommand
generator, 386 Scenario, 229
generator, temporary, 208 deleting
load, 401, 409 prompting before, 291
load, temporary, 217 delimiter, 296
meter, 431 derating factor
motor, 433 transformer damage curve, 507
motor control center, 451 Detailed, 610
temporary, 212 device coordination, 173
motor, temporary, 215 device function, 256, 490
panel scedule, 475 copy contents, 264
panel scedule, temporary, 214 paste contents, 264
relay, 334, 482, 489 device library
shunt, 497 customizing, 261
shunt, temporary, 218 default, 69
switch, 498 making your own, 249
transformer setting the default, 307
three-winding, 501 specifying, 69
three-winding, temporary, 211 device underrating, 175, 673
two-winding, 511 Difference Calculator, 580
two-winding, temporary, 211 directory, temporary, 287
zigzag, 528 disconnect, prompt before, 292
transmission line, 509 discrete data range, 255
utility, 518, 521 disk
utility, temporary, 209 chattering, 28
Database Access Rights, 70 hard, 28
database dialog box printing to, 271
confirm save message when incomplete, 292 space, 25, 286
getting an item's, 88 writing results to, 167
toolbar, 89 display coordinates, 555
Database Edit Display Working Distance in, 611
status bar, 68 distance factor, 655
Database Edit Focus, 37 divergence, power flow, 220
database files, 286, 287 double line to ground faults, 178, 560, 676
exporting, 324 dragging
Database Report command, 106 buses, 41
database table notes, 92, 93
activating & deactivating using, 91 with grid, 302
adding new item, 90 drawing title block template, 137
connecting items using, 91 drawings, 129
copying item data, 91 create new, 130
deleting an item using, 90 defaults, 131
duplicating current item, 90 properties, 132
moving around in, 89 driving point, 172, 179, 535, 561
database text duty
viewing, 297 equipment, 175, 673
Deactivate command, 91 interrupting, 176, 674
de-coupled, fast, 221 momentary, 176, 674
Default command, 594 verification, 175, 673
default library, 249 DXF file
Default Phase Short Circuit, 583 layer names in, 325
default SC values, 492 setting a path, 307
Index xv

using AutoCAD to read, 325 line to line, 178, 560, 676

writing, 324 three phase, 178, 560, 676
dynamic stability, 732 type, 178, 560, 676
bus fault, 753 faulting a bus, 172, 670
create scripts, 734 feeder breaker, adding, 47, 80
create simulation scripts, 758 file
define plots, 754 compressing database, 286
define plots, 734 database, 286, 287
entering data, 735 locations, 69
Excitation System Step Test, 754 print, 271
focus, 732 printing to, 271
format plots, 768 read-only, 66
Governor System Step Test, 754 setting properties, 68
message log, 734 temporary database, 287
plots, 734 working with, 286
Power Flow results, 772 zipping, 286
Reset command, 753 file compression, 286
Run command, 753 filter
simulation commands, 753 capacitor, 374
spreadsheet results, 772 harmonics
Step command, 753 fundamental amps, 376
toggle ATS, 754 query, 86
Dynamic Stability Options, 761 reactance, 374
EasyControl, 129 resistance, 374
EasyPower selection, 86, 94
installing, 26 type, 374
running, 26 filter data, 373
eddy-current loss, 517 Find command, 85
Enable Override, 422, 496 focus, 36
Energized Electrical Work Permit, 657 Database Editing, 36
equipment data Harmonics, 37
copying, 51 Power Flow Analysis, 37
pasting, 51 Protective Device Coordination, 37
equipment data, entering, 50 Short Circuit Analysis, 36
equipment duty, 175, 673 focus buttons, 37
equipment palette, 36, 80 focus, choosing, 37
equipment parameters, changing PF, 196 font
equipment type, 654 note, 99
error message, 56 text, 303
error report, 56 format plot area, 589
Excel, 621 formatting
Excitation System Step Test command, 754 appearance of TCC, 586
Exclude this bus from Arc Flash Report, 616 Formulas, 254
exporting frame
databasetextfiles, 324 copy contents, 264
DXF, 324 paste contents, 264
one-lines, 321 frame description
SCADA, 326 low voltage breaker
factor MCCB, 420
power, 186, 194, 213, 216, 222, 328, 387, 434 Frame Description, Non-SST, 258
resistance correction, 375, 413, 525 Frame Size, MCCB, 257
scaling, 113, 198, 213, 214, 216, 217, 221, 327, Frame Size, Non-SST, 258
410, 442, 462, 474 free-format reports, 283
fast de-coupled, 221 frequency
fault scans, 535
double line to ground, 178, 560, 676 frequency, setting, 304
line end, 177, 301 full load amps, 257
line to ground, 178, 560, 676 motor, 261
Index xvi

function ID, 491 sources, 374, 411

fundamental amps, harmonics, 376 status bar, 533
fused breaker, 427 summation, 541
fused switch high voltage breaker, 398
adding, 80, 81 maximum kV, 400
data, 377, 384 rated interrupting kA, 400
duty verification, 175, 673 specifications, 399
harmonics high voltage fuses, 259
IEEE 519 point of common coupling, 385 High Voltage Fuses
interrupting rating, 380 Continuous Current, 259
motor overload relay Model, 259
full load amps (FLA), 384 Plot, 259
service factor, 384 Sizes, 259
opening & closing, 161, 219, 220 horsepower, 52, 213, 216, 434, 436, 438
plot motor overload relay TCC, 383 hyperlink, 661
TCC, 379 I^x.t function, 422, 425, 496
TCC defaults, 380 ID Name
test X/R ratio, 380 selecting by, 85
Gauss-Seidel, 221 variables, 295
general, options, 290 IEC Formula, TCC, 254
generator IEC symbols, 305
adding, 77 IEEE 1584, 606, 610
data, 386 impact motor starting, 194, 195, 197, 203, 213, 216, 222
monitor, 186 impedance
relaying, 173 driving point, 535
slack/swing, 200 Impedance fields, 52
switching, 219 impedance, constant, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473,
temporary data, 208 474
X/R ratio, 387 importing
Generator Impedance, 391 SCADA, 326
generator parameters, relay, 490 incident arc energy, 606
Generator Relay, 257 injection, current, 197, 221
global insert
motor and load editing, 111, 113 subsystem, 314
Governor System Step Test, 754 Insert Column command, 265
graphics, local bus, 28 Insert New Manufacturer command, 246
grid Insert New Style command, 247
activating, 75 Insert New Type command, 247
color, 302 insert picture, 101
displaying, 38, 54, 302 installing EasyPower, 26
point, 73, 74, 302 instantaneous over-current, 490
smart, 74 instantaneous pickup
grid snap status, 555 non-solid state trip, 424
ground fault pickup. See low voltage breaker, solid state relay, 494
trip solid state trip, 422, 496
ground trip, solid state trip, 424 insulation breakdown, 608, 611
group move and copy, 101 Integrated, 608, 611
grouped motor, X/R, 306 interactive spreadsheet, 606
grouping items, 103 interrupting duty, 176, 674
hard disk, 28 interrupting rating
chattering, 28 low voltage breaker, 418
hardware requirements, 25, 26 interval, changing time, 175
Harmonic Load, 533 isolated subsystem, 202
harmonic spreadsheet, 412 iterations, power flow solution, 202
harmonics, 532 kV, bus, 41, 76, 164
current flow, 540 kV, High Voltage Fuses, 259
fused switch, 384 kVA, constant, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, 474
options, 545
Index xvii

kW + j current, constant, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, specifications, 415
473, 474 Low Voltage Fuses, 260
labels, 284 LTC, transformer, 220, 505, 515
latch, and close, 176, 400, 500 LTPU Mult, 421, 495
layer names in DXF file, 325 Manager, Scenario, 224
leader manufacturer, insert new, 246
adding note with, 93 margin
angle, 97 note, 96
terminator, 97 page, 269
library maximize, 26, 32, 166
default, 249 maximum clearing curve, 251
Library Default, 655 maximum time, 611
line end fault, 177, 301 MCC
line to ground faults, 178, 560, 676 code factors, 306
line to line faults, 178, 560, 676 connecting two MCCs, 82
load data, 451
adding, 77 printing, 283
class, 409, 411 temporary data, 212
data, 401, 409 MCC/Panel, 615
model, 410 MCCB
temporary data, 217 Frame Description, 257
Load Tap Changer (LTC), 220, 505, 515 Frame Size, 257
load type Style, 257
non-linear, 412 TCC, 251
load type, motor, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, 474 Trip Amps, 257
local bus graphics, 28 memory, 25, 26
Long time delay menu, right mouse context, 35
solid state trip, 422, 496 menubar, 33, 34
long time pickup meter
non-solid state trip, 423 data, 431
long time pickup, solid state trip, 421, 495 minimum clearing curve, 251
low voltage breaker, 414 mismatch, solution, 202
fused breaker, 427 Model, High Voltage Fuses, 259
harmonics, 429 model, TCC formula, 254
insulated case circuit breaker, 415 molded case circuit breakers, 257
interrupting rating, 418 momentary
MCCB duty, 176, 674
frame description, 420 withstand, 176
Trip Setting, 420 monitor
molded case circuit breaker, 415 computer, 25, 28
motor overload relay, 428 generator, 186
non-solid state trip, 417, 423 motor
frame, 423 starting curve, 439
instantaneous pickup, 424 adding, 45, 77
Plot Phase TCC, 423 data, 433
short time pickup, 424 kVA calculations, 435
Phase Trip, 419 load type, 212, 214, 215, 442, 445, 462, 473, 474
power circuit breaker, 415 starting, 194, 195, 197, 203, 213, 216, 222
SC Tick Marks, 381, 419 temporary data, 215
short circuit, 418 X/R for grouped, 306
solid state trip, 416 motor control center
enable override, 422, 496 code factors, 306
ground trip, 424 connecting panels to, 82
instantaneous pickup, 422, 496 data, 451
long time pickup, 421, 495 printing, 283
Plot Phase TCC, 420 temporary data, 212
sensor, 416 motor data
short time pickup, 422, 496 entering, 51
Index xviii

motor overload relay databases, 324

low voltage breaker, 428 word processor, 321
Motor Overload Relay, 261 starting a new, 66
Motor Overload Relays One-line, 304
Pickup Calculation, 261 one-line output, 165
Motor Relay, 257 harmonics, 546
move power flow, 204
around the one-line, 72 short circuit, 180
cursor, 101 Open
Move Group command, 101 command, 66
move columns, 265 Scenario, 227
move rows, 265 Open Air, 615
moving breaker, 48 opening breakers & switches, 161, 219, 220
multi-function relay, 256, 490 optimizing
Multilin ANSI Formula, TCC, 254 computer, 27
NACD ratio, 179, 182, 185, 187, 561 power system, 196
name options
conflict, 106 clipboard, 295
project, 69 equipment, 306
variables, 295 file locations, 307
named views, 148 fonts, 303
NEMA Gap Unit, 654 general, 290
New command, 66, 249 grid, 302
New Scenario, 226 harmonic, 545
Newton-Rhapson, 221 screen, 298
NFPA, 606 system, 304
NFPA 70E, 657 text visibility, 297
nodal admittance, 188, 221 orientation, breaker symbol, 48, 82
non-solid state trip, 417 output, one-line
Non-Solid State Trips, 258 power flow, 204
Frame Description, 258 short circuit, 180
Frame Size, 258 output, text
Style, 258 power flow, 206
Trip Amps, 258 short circuit, 678
note overcurrent
adding, 91, 93 instantaneous, 256
border, 96 time, 256
color, 96 overduty, 175, 673
deleting, 93 page margins, 269
dragging, 92, 93 Page Setup command, 269
editing contents, 92 palette, equipment, 36, 80
effect of TrueType on size, 94 panel scedule
font, 99 code factors, 306
leader properties, 97 data, 475
limitations, 91, 93 temporary data, 214
margin, 96 panel schedule
Note Properties command, 93, 96 connecting to an MCC, 82
resizing, 92, 93 printing, 283
selecting by text, 94 Paste command, 89, 102, 263, 322
selecting multiple, 94 Paste Device Function Contents command, 264
visibility, 96 Paste Frame Contents command, 264
with leader, 93 Paste kV Contents command, 264
off, turning items, 164 Paste Sensor Contents command, 263
one-line Paste Style Contents command, 263
moving around on, 72 percent ECF, 375, 413, 525
printing, 272 personal protective equipment, 606
sending to per-unit data, recalculating, 160
CAD system, 324 phase-shifting integrity verification, 292
Index xix

pickup calculation changing for notes, 93

MCCB, 251 note, 96
Pickup Calculation, Motor Overload Relays, 261 print, 268
pickup current, 250 setting file, 68
picture text, 291
insert, 101 Properties command, 68
pink text, 618 protective device coordination, 173
pkzip, using with database files, 286 Query command, 86, 94
plot reactor, current limiting
file, 271 adding, 78
frequency scan, 537 data, 369
printing, 539 reactor, shunt
viewing, 537 adding, 77
plot thermal limit curve, motor, 440 data, 497
Plot, High Voltage Fuses, 259 Reading an ASCII File, 331
Plot, Motor Overload Relay TCC, 261 read-only files, 66, 70
plotting TCC, 565 recalculating per-unit data, 160
Plug, SST, 258 redo, 266
point Reference kV, TCC, 592
driving, 172, 179, 561 relay
grid, 73, 74, 302 data, 334, 482, 489
power factor, 186, 194, 213, 216, 222, 328, 387, 434 multi-function, 256
power flow pickup, 493
changing equipment parameters, 196 settings, 492, 493
control, 201 single function, 256
divergence, 220 TCC, 250
generator data, 389 Relay Class, 257
iterations, 202 relay setting studies, 173
one-line output, 204 relay, generator, 257
procedures, 194 relay, motor, 257
solving, 196 relaying
solving base case, 57 backup, 173
status bar, 195 generator, 173
text output, 206 relays
toolbar, 195 device function, 256
troubleshooting failures, 220 Remote Bus V&I, 61
Power Flow Analysis remote voltages and currents, viewing, 173
running, 56 reports
PPE levels, 656 database data, 106
print free-format, 283
a one-line, 272 printing, 282
analysis results, 282 requirements
file, 271 computer, 25, 26
labels, 284 memory, 25, 26
MCCs and panel schedules, 283 reserved space, 275
plots, 539 resetting a database table, 90
Preview command, 270 resistance correction factor, 375, 413, 525
properties, 268 results
text reports, 282 printing, 282
to a file, 271 validation, 170, 194
procedures viewing one-line, 165
power flow, 194 writing to disk, 167
short circuit, 170 R-EXP, 375, 413, 525
project naming, 69 right mouse
prompt changing bus size with, 41
before deleting, 291 context menu, 35
before disconnecting, 292 rotate symbol, 48, 82
properties row
Index xx

insert, 265 Selecting, 262

move down command, 265 selection, 85
Move Up command, 265 additive, 86
Save As command, 66 by ID name, 85, 87
Save command, 66 by item type, 87
saving filter, 86, 94
temporary data, 584 items in a region, 85, 87
saving a Scenario, 229, 230 multiple notes, 94
saving an ASCII file, 330 query, 86
saving your work, 50, 66 using mouse, 85
SC Tick Marks sending one-lines to
low voltage breaker, 381, 419 CAD system, 324
SCADA, 326, 410, 442, 462, 474 word processor, 321
exporting, 326 sensitivity, voltage, 177, 183
file structure, 326 sensor
importing, 326 copy contents, 263
last file imported, 69 paste contents, 263
sample file, 330 Sensor Description, SST, 258
scaling factor, 113, 198, 213, 214, 216, 217, 221, 327, Sensor, solid state trip, 416
410, 442, 462, 474 service factor
global changing, 111, 113 fused switch
scans, frequency, 535 motor overload relay, 384
Scenario session window, 32
analysis, 231 shift multiplier, 493
colors, 231 short circuit
Delete, 229 30 Cycle results, 175
Manager, 224 control, 178, 183
new, 226 interrupting results, 175
Open, 227 momentary results, 175
Save vs Store, 230 one-line output, 180
Store, 229, 230 procedures, 170
scenario comparison report, 232, 652 status bar, 172, 670
Scenario Comparison Report text output, 678
adding results group, 240 short time pickup
adding scenario group, 243 non-solid state trip, 424
creating, 233, 652 solid state trip, 422, 496
Error Report, 239 shunt
export to Excel®, 237 adding, 77
print labels, 239 data, 497
printing, 238 temporary data, 218
Scenario Reports, 234 Siemens Formula, 254
schedules, 114 single function relay, 256, 490
merge with Excel, 115 size
print, 116 effect on text of TrueType, 94
Schweitzer Formula, TCC, 254 text, 303
screen colors, 231, 298 Sizes, High Voltage Fuses, 259
scroll skin effect, 375, 413, 525
arrows, 72 slack source, 200
auto, 73 SmartBreaker, 161, 219, 220
bar, 72 SmartDuty, 175, 673
Seidel, Gauss, 221 SmartGrid, 74
Select All command, 85, 263 solid state trip, 416
Selected Item command, 88 Solid State Trips
selecting, 52 Plug, 258
cell, 262 sensor description, 258
column, 262 solution mismatch, 202
entire sheet, 262 solving a power flow, 196
range of cells, 262 sources
row, 262 harmonics, 374, 411
Index xxi

space, disk, 25, 286 formatting, 586

sparse vector, 22, 161, 188, 221 global changes, 601
spreadsheet, selecting, 262 grid, 591
Spreadsheets, insert new styles, 248 insert notes, 588
stall time, 440 insert one-line, 587
Standard Complex calculations, 178, 561 MCCB, 251
starting, motor, 194, 195, 197, 203, 213, 216, 222 pan, 588
status bar, 35, 68, 165, 172, 195, 670 plotting, 565
Database Edit, 68 print, 597
Harmonics, 533 relay, 250
Power Flow, 195 scale, 591
Short Circuit, 172, 670 transformer damage curve, 506
step, 255 zoom, 588
store TCC clipping, 583
TCC, 585 TCC defaults, 558
temporary data, 585 TCC formulas, 254
Store Scenario, 229, 230 TCC Short Circuit (SC) Currents, 558
style, 247 template
copy contents, 263 subsystem, 313
note border, 96 temporary
paste contents, 263 capacitor data, 217
text, 303 changes, 162, 196
style, insert new, 247 saving, 207, 224
Style, MCCB, 257 database files, 287
Style, Non-SST, 258 dialog boxes, 207
subsystem, 313 directory, 287
subsystems generator data, 208
copying, 102 load data, 217
isolated, 202 MCC data, 212
summation motor data, 215
for Harmonics, 541 panel scedule data, 214
swing source, 200 shunt data, 218
switch transformer data
adding, 80, 81 three-winding, 211
data, 498 two-winding, 211
duty verification, 175, 673 utility data, 209
opening & closing, 161, 219, 220 temporary data
Switchgear, 615 store, 585
switching, generator, 219 temporary data dialog box, 574, 581
symbols temporary data, saving, 584
choosing ANSI or IEC, 305 text
symmetrical currents, 61, 170, 186, 400 comment, 283, 304
system info, setting, 304 fonts/styles/size, 303
table, equipment output
activating & deactivating items using, 91 power flow, 206
adding new item using, 90 short circuit, 678
connecting items using, 91 properties, 291
copying item data, 91 reports, printing, 282
deleting an item using, 90 visibility, 297
duplicating current item, 90 text reports, appending, 291
moving around in, 89 thermal limit curve
tap range, 493 motor, 440
tap settings, 493 thermal limit curve:, 440
TCC thermal magnetic, 420
dependent changes, 601 Thevenin equivalent fault point, 178, 561
dragging curves, 572 three phase faults, 178, 560, 676
error report, 565 Threshold Incident energy, 612
font, 591 thumb, 73
Index xxii

tick marks, 562 entering, 54

tie breaker, 81, 164, 219 validation, results, 170, 194
adding, 48, 81 vector, sparse, 22, 161, 188, 221
vertical, 49 verification
time dial, 250, 493 phase-shifting integrity, 292
time interval, changing, 175 verification, breaker/switch/fuse duty, 175, 673
time-current characteristics, 554 viewing
time-current characteristics (TCC), 250 data during analysis, 163
time-current points, 250 database reports, 106
multisegment TCC, 253 database text, 297
relays, 250 equipment data, 297
time-overcurrent, 490 plots, 537
title block, 273 prints, 270
reserved space, 275 remote voltages and currents, 173
template, 273 toolbars, 308
template format, 276 violation, 59, 180, 194, 203, 301, 325, 676
tolerance, overduty, 175, 673 visibility
tool tip, 318 note, 96
toolbar, 34 text, 297
Database Dialog, 89 voltage
Power Flow, 195 and current, 182, 678
viewing, 308 control, 209, 210, 211, 218, 389, 524
transformer sensitive devices, 173
adding, 43, 78 sensitivity, 177, 183
data viewing remote SC, 173
three-winding, 501 V-Rated Gloves, 662
three-winding, temporary, 211 V-Rated Tools, 662
two-winding, 511 weight
two-winding, temporary, 211 note border, 96
zigzag, 528 wildcard characters, 105
LTC, 220, 505, 515 window
transformer damage curve, 506 active, 166
transformer data clearing results from, 167
entering, 53 manipulation, 166
transmission line session, 32
adding, 79 withstand, momentary, 176
data, 509 word processor, sending one-lines to, 321
trip amps work permit, 657
MCCB, 251 work permit library, 661
Trip Amps, MCCB, 257 Work Task Dialog, 658
Trip Amps, Non-SST, 258 working distance, 606, 611
troubleshooting power flows that fail, 220 Working Distances, 611
TrueType Working Folder, 315
effect on text size, 94 working with files, 286
tutorial, 38 worst cas, 610
type, 247 writing results to disk, 167
calculation, 178, 561 WYSIWYG, 304
fault, 178, 560, 676 X/R field, 51, 53
type, insert new, 247 X/R ratio
undo, 266 generator, 387
units XML, 276
system, 304 zigzag transformer, 528
utility zipping database files, 286
adding, 46, 77 zone, 77, 164, 179, 203, 342, 346, 348, 452, 467, 676
data, 518, 521 changing, 77
slack/swing, 200 zoom, 70
temporary data, 209 area, 72
utility data entire one-line, 71
Index xxiii

getting back to previous, 72 using mouse spin wheel, 70

out 1.5x, 72 Zoom Out Full command, 55